WordPress.com

ANCIENT GREEK ALIVE

WORKBOOK

VOLUME II

Catherine Freis

Table of Contents

|UNIT ONE: LESSONS 25-28 |1 |

|Lesson 25 |2 |

|Lesson 26 |13 |

| Practice Quiz 1, Lessons 25 and 26 |22 |

| Answers, Practice Quiz 1, Lessons 25 and 26 |25 |

|Lesson 27 |28 |

|Lesson 28 |41 |

| Practice Quiz 2, Lessons 27 and 28 |47 |

| Answers, Practice Quiz 2, Lessons 27 and 28 |51 |

| Checklist of New Materials, Lessons 25 – 28 |55 |

| Cumulative Vocabulary, Lessons 25 – 28 |56 |

| Practice Test, Unit One, Lessons 25– 28 |61 |

| Answers, PracticeTest, Unit One, Lessons 25 – 28 |65 |

| | |

|UNIT TWO: LESSONS 29-34 |70 |

|Lesson 29 |71 |

| Appendix to Lesson 29: Principal Parts of Verbs |78 |

|Lesson 30 |83 |

| Practice Quiz 3 |89 |

| Answers, Practice Quiz 3, Lessons 29 – 30 |91 |

|Lesson 31 |93 |

|Lesson 32 |99 |

| Practice Quiz 4, Lessons 31-32 |103 |

| Answers, Practice Quiz 4, Lessons 31-32 |105 |

|Lesson 33 |107 |

|Lesson 34 |113 |

| Practice Quiz 5, Lessons 33-34 |119 |

| Answers, Practice Quiz 5, Lessons 33-34 |121 |

| Unit Two Review |123 |

| | |

|UNIT THREE: LESSONS 35-42 |133 |

|Lesson 35 |134 |

|Lesson 36 |141 |

| Practice Quiz 6, Lessons 35-36 |148 |

| Answers, Practice Quiz 6, Lessons 35-36 |151 |

|Lesson 37 |154 |

|Lesson 38 |165 |

|Practice Quiz 7, Lessons 37-38 |170 |

|Answers, Practice Quiz 7, Lessons 37-38 |173 |

|Lesson 39 |175 |

|Lesson 40 |183 |

|Practice Quiz 8: Lessons 39-40 |188 |

|Answers: Practice Quiz 8: Lessons 39-40 |190 |

|Lesson 41 |192 |

|Lesson 42 |200 |

| Practice Quiz 9: Lessons 41-42 |213 |

| Answers, Practice Quiz 9: Lessons 41-42 |215 |

| Review: Lessons 29-42 |217 |

| Unit Three Cumulative Vocabulary, Lessons 29-42 |218 |

| Checklist of New Material |226 |

| Review of Active Verb |228 |

| Unit Three PracticeTest: Lessons 29-42 |229 |

| Answers Unit Three PracticeTest: Lessons 29-42 |234 |

| | |

|UNIT FOUR: LESSONS 43-50 |238 |

|Lesson 43 |239 |

|Lesson 44 |250 |

| Practice Quiz 10, Lessons 43-44 |256 |

| Answers, Practice Quiz 10, Lessons 43-44 |258 |

|Lesson 45 |260 |

|Lesson 46 |265 |

| Practice Quiz 11: Lessons 45-46 |273 |

| Answers, Practice Quiz 11: Lessons 45-46 |275 |

|Lesson 47 |276 |

|Lesson 48 |284 |

|Lesson 49 |295 |

| Practice Quiz 12: Lessons 47-49 |299 |

| Answers, Practice Quiz 12: Lessons 47-49 |301 |

|Lesson 50 |302 |

| Review of Verb Forms |307 |

| Unit Four Practice Exam |312 |

| Answers: Unit Four Practice Exam |312 |

| | |

|UNIT FIVE: LESSONS 51-54 | |

|Lesson 51 |315 |

|Lesson 52 |322 |

|Lesson 53 |328 |

|Lesson 54 |339 |

| | |

|FINAL WORDS |347 |

| | |

|APPENDIX |349 |

|Relative Pronoun |350 |

|Third Group Case Endings |351 |

|Case Constructions |352 |

|Forms of “Be,””Go,” and Look-alikes |353 |

|Verb Constructions |354 |

|Comparison of Subjunctive and Optative Uses |355 |

|Verb Charts: Active |356 |

|Verb Charts: Middle |360 |

|Verb Charts: Passive |363 |

|Full Verb Chart | |

| | |

UNIT ONE: LESSONS 25-28

Continuous and Aorist Stems; Genitive Absolute; Ingressive Aorist

LESSON 25. THE CONTINUOUS STEM

In the rest of this course, you will be mastering one of the great constructs of the human mind: the Greek verb system. It is both intricate and beautiful. We begin in this lesson by systematizing and reviewing what we have already learned about –ω verbs. One new concept is also introduced: the formation and use of the imperfect indicative. Read the Textbook, page 109 -110 for an overview of the forms and syntax of the continuous stem. So far in the course, we have used forms of the verbs which derive from two stems: the continuous or the aorist. In this lesson, we will focus on the remaining verb forms derived from the continuous stem. This stem is found by removing the –ω from the “I do” form of the verb: παύω ( παυ-. The “I do” form of the verb is called the First Principal Part, since its stem is used for so many different verb formations. This workbook chapter has a large number of drills to help ensure your full grasp of the old and new forms. Since subsequent chapters will be adding additional forms of the verb, it is important to make sure that you master every form of the verb as it is introduced.

1. Aspect

The term “aspect” refers to how the action is conceived (hence the term “aspect” which means in Latin, “to look at”). For the Greek continuous aspect, the writer or speaker envisions the action as if it were a motion picture, showing the process of the action stretching over time, either as ongoing or as repeated or habitual action, or action begun or attempted. All of the following statements indicate continuous aspect in Greek:

a. Mary often shops at Wal-Mart. The verb in this sentence is continuous because it indicates habitual or repeated action. Greek would not necessarily need to express “often”, since the continuous aspect itself can indicate repeated action.

b. Mary is shopping right now as we speak. The verb is continuous because it shows action that is in progress.

c. Mary keeps on shopping, even though she doesn’t need anything. The verb is continuous because it shows action stretching over time.

d. Mary was shopping when you called. The verb is continuous because it shows action in progress. As long as the action is ongoing or habitual, the aspect is continuous whether the action is reported in the present or the past.

e. Mary used to shop at Wal-Mart all the time. The verb shows habitual action in the past and is therefore continuous.

f. Mary was trying to finish the shopping before dinner. The verb shows attempted action which stretches over time and is therefore continuous.

Aspect is absolutely crucial for understanding the Greek verb, although most English speakers find “aspect” a new way of thinking about verbs, since it is not an important category in English syntax. (To learn more about aspect read page 108 of the Textbook.)

(Exercise 1

Change the following statements (which do not necessarily express continuous aspect in English) into ones which do. Try at least three different ways of indicating continuous action.

1. She runs.[1] _________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

2. You studied.[2] ___________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

2. Tense

Tense indicates the time in which an action takes place: present (I study, I am studying), past (I studied, I was studying) or future (I will study). Only indicative forms of the verb, those forms of the verb which relate factual information, indicate tense. There are two indicative forms built on the continuous stem: the present and the imperfect. The present indicative (in the Greek) indicates both tense (the present time) and continuous aspect. The standard translations for the present (using παύω as an example) include “I stop” or “I do stop” (with the understanding that the writer or speaker is thinking of the action as stretching over time), or “I am stopping” or “I habitually stop” or “I try to stop” or “I begin to stop.” The imperfect indicative indicates both tense (the past time) and continuous aspect. The standard translations of the imperfect (using the imperfect of παύω as an example) include “I was stopping, I used to stop”, “I tried to stop” “I began to stop”. The imperfect should not be regularly translated as “I stopped,” the preferred translation for the aorist aspect.

3. The Present Indicative

Throughout the course, we have used all the forms of the present indicative, but have been charting only part of the paradigm. The full paradigm follows. Notice that the accent is recessive.

παύ-ω I stop, I do stop, I am stopping, , I repeatedly stop, etc.

παύ-εις You stop, you do stop, you are stopping, etc.

παύ-ει He, she, it (or a singular noun) stops, does stop, is stopping, etc.

παύ-ομεν We stop, we do stop, we are stopping, etc.

παύ-ετε* You (all) stop, you do stop, you are stopping, etc.

παύ-ουσι(ν) They (or a plural noun) stop, they do stop, they are stopping, etc.

* This is the same form as the plural imperative.

You will note that every ending for the indicative (as well as all the other forms derived from the first principal part) contains an epsilon or an omicron sound. These vowels are called “thematic” or “variable” vowels because they are used to connect the stem to its endings. In the verb forms we will learn in the next few lessons, it is best just to memorize the thematic vowels as part of the endings, since it is difficult to separate the endings from the thematic vowel in the continuous system. But they are important clues to recognizing verb forms and we will learn more about thematic vowels later in the course.

(Exercise 3

a. In the charts below form the present indicative for the verbs μένω (remain) and κελεύω (order). Be sure to put the endings onto the right stem and to accent recessively. Translate the third personal plural ending with at least three possible renderings. Check your answers with the chart above.

|Person |“Remain” |“Order” |

|First | | |

|Second | | |

|Third | | |

| | | |

|First | | |

|Second | | |

|Third | | |

|TRANSLATION | | |

| | | |

b. Translate the following:[3]

1. We are dying. ________________________

2. You (pl) always steal. ________________________

3. Does he know? ________________________

4. She finds. ________________________

5. They are falling. ________________________

6. I keep guarding. ________________________

4. Imperfect Indicative

The imperfect is formed by prefixing an epsilon to the continuous stem. This prefix is called a Time Marker or Augment and indicates that the form is a past indicative, much like the English suffix “–ed” added to past verbs. The imperfect also uses a new set of endings. These endings are only used on past indicatives:

|Person |Singular | |Plural | |

|First |ἔ-παυ-ον* |I was stopping, Ι used to stop,|ἐ-παύ-ομεν |We were stopping |

| | |I began to stop, etc. | | |

|Second |ἔ- παυ-ες |You were stopping |ἐ-παύ-ετε |You (pl) were stopping |

|Third |ἔ- παυ-ε(ν)# |He, she it was stopping |ἔ- παυ-ον* |They were stopping |

*Notice the the 1st person singular and the 3rd plural forms are identical.

#Notice the nu movable. Also notice that only a vowel before the nu movable distinguishes the 3rd person singular and the 3rd person plural/ 1st person singular.

( Exercise 4

a. In the charts below form the imperfect indicative for the verbs μένω (remain) and κελεύω (order). Translate the third personal plural ending with at least three possible renderings. Check your answers with the chart above.

|Person |“Remain” |“Order” |

|First | | |

|Second | | |

|Third | | |

| | | |

|First | | |

|Second | | |

|Third | | |

|TRANSLATION | | |

b. Translate the following:[4]

1. We were writing. __________________

2. You (pl) used to steal. __________________

3. You (sg) were sending. __________________

4. They used to fall. [5] __________________

5. I was guarding. __________________

6. She began to send. ___________________

c. Change the following verb forms into the corresponding forms of the imperfect as in the first example and then translate the imperfect verb with any variety of the imperfect translations:[6]

1. κρίνεις ἔκρινες you were judging

2. φέρουσι _______________ _________________

3. μέλλω _______________ _________________

4. θνῄσκω _______________ __________________

5. τέμνει _______________ __________________

6. λαμβάνομεν _______________ __________________

7. κλέπτετε _______________ __________________

d. Fill in the chart below with the Present and Imperfect forms requested as in the first example:[7]

|Word |Person and Number |Present Indicative |Imperfect Indicative |

|know |1st Person Plural | | |

|send |3rd Person, Sing. | | |

|drink |2nd Person, Sing | | |

|cry |3rd Person, Plural | | |

|think |1st Person, Sing. | | |

|rejoice |2nd Person Plural | | |

|throw |1st Person Plural | | |

5. The Continuous Infinitive and Participle

Infinitives and participles do not indicate tense but merely aspect. The continuous infinitive is used in Greek whenever the action is ongoing or habitual. παύειν may be translated as “to stop”(with the understanding that the writer or speaker is thinking of the action as stretching over time) or “to be stopping”. The continuous participle also is used whenever the action is ongoing or habitual. παύων, παύουσα, παῦον may be translated as “stopping”.

( Exercise 5

a. After studying the paradigm on page 109, fill in the charts below for the verbs γράφω and λέγω. Give translations as in the box, page 109, for the 3rd Plural Indicatives, Infinitive and Participle. Remember that the accent is recessive. Check answers with the paradigm on page 109 of the Textbook.

| Continuous Indicative | |

|Singular Plural |Translation(s) |

|γράφω ___________________ | |

|_______________ ___________________ | |

|_______________ ___________________ |________________________ |

|Imperfect Continuous Indicative | |

|Singular Plural |Translation(s) |

|_______________ ___________________ | |

|_______________ ___________________ | |

|_______________ ___________________ |________________________ |

|Continuous Infinitive | |

|Form |Translation |

|_______________________ |________________________ |

|Continuous Participle | |

|Form |Translation |

|_______________________ |_______________________ |

|Continuous Indicative | |

|Singular Plural |Translation(s) |

|λέγω ___________________ | |

|_______________ ___________________ | |

|_______________ ___________________ |________________________ |

|Imperfect Continuous Indicative | |

|Singular Plural |Translation(s) |

|_______________ ___________________ | |

|_______________ ___________________ | |

|_______________ ___________________ |________________________ |

|Continuous Infinitive | |

|Form |Translation |

|_______________________ |________________________ |

|Continuous Participle | |

|Form |Translation |

|_______________________ |_______________________ |

b. Translate the following forms. Some of the forms may be interpreted in 2 ways:[8]

1. λείπουσα _______________

2. ἐλείπομεν _______________

3. λείπομεν _______________

4. λείπειν ________________

5. λείπει ________________

6. λεῖπον ________________

7. ἔλειπον ________________ 2. ________________

8. ἔλειπες ________________

9. λείπουσι 1. _______________ 2._________________

10. λείπετε 1.________________ 2._________________

6. The Time-Marker (Augment) For Verbs Beginning with a Vowel

If a verb begins with a vowel, the initial vowel is lengthened to form the time-marker. Alpha and epsilon are lengthened to an eta (α ( η; ε ( η), and omicron is lengthened to an omega (ο ( ω). One exception to this pattern (there are others) is the verb ἔχω which forms its imperfect by lengthening the epsilon to an iota diphthong: ἔχω ( εἶχον. Other initial vowels do not involve a change of spelling: short iotas and upsilons become long, and long initial vowels remain the same.

( Exercise 6

Form the imperfect for the following verbs. [9]

1. ἀγγέλλουσι _____________________________

2. ἀκούει _____________________________

3. ἐθέλομεν _____________________________

4. ἐσθίετε _____________________________

5. ἔχω _____________________________

7. The Τime Marker (Augment) for Verbs Beginning with a Diphthong

If a verb begins with an iota diphthong, the first vowel of the diphthong is lengthened and the iota becomes an iota subscript: οἰκέω( ᾤκουν (notice that the -ε+ον contracts to -ουν when an έω verb adds the first person imperfect ending). An upsilon diphthong merely lengthens the initial vowel: εὑρίσκω ( ηὕρισκον.

( Εxercise 7

Form the imperfects for the following words:[10]

1. οἰκτίρει __________________________________

2. οἰμώζεις (wail) __________________________________

3. εὕδω (sleep) __________________________________

8. The Time Marker (Augment) and Accent for Verbs Beginning with a Prepositional Prefix

As the textbook indicates on page 110, the time marker always is placed immediately before the verb stem. A number of Greek verbs, however, have prepositional prefixes. To form the imperfect for such verbs you must add the time marker after the prefix and before the stem: ἐν-τυγχάνω ( ἐν-ετύγχανον. Note the following:

▪ If the preposition has a final vowel, that vowel drops out in order to avoid hiatus: ἀπο-τυγχάνω ( ἀπ-ετύγχανον. Some prefixes which change in this way are: ἀνα ( ἀν-; ἐπι ( ἐπ-; κατα ( κατ-; παρα ( παρ-.

▪ Sometimes the preposition changes its spelling, usually for euphony: συμ ( συν-; ἐκ ( ἐξ-.

▪ The accent can never go further back than the time marker: ἀπ-έχω ( ἀπ-εἶχον.

( Εxercise 8

Form the imperfects for the following words: [11]

1. ἀνα-γιγνώσκω ______________________________________

2. ἐκ-μανθάνω ______________________________________

3. κατα-γιγνώσκω ______________________________________

4. ἀνα-βαίνω ______________________________________

5. ἀπο-τέμνω ______________________________________

6. συμ-βάλλω ______________________________________

9. Recognition of Imperfects

Because dictionaries only list the “I do” form of the continuous stem, the First Principal Part, it is sometimes a challenge to look up unfamiliar words that are imperfects. To get back to the “I do” form, the First Principal Part, you will need to factor out the time markers, restore iota diphthongs, and to change prefixes to their original forms. Remember that imperfects beginning with an eta may come from words which begin with an alpha or an epsilon. Sometimes it is necessary to try both. Also remember irregular imperfects, of which you know two: ἔχω ( εἶχον; ἐστι ( ἦν.

( Exercise 9

For the following forms, (1) figure out the “I do” form of the verb, (2) then translate, looking up words as necessary in the dictionary at the back of the textbook. Learning how to find difficult forms in the dictionary is an important skill that must be practiced many times.

|“I do” Form |Imperfect Form |Translation |

| |1. ηὕδες[12] | |

| |2. ἐξέβαλλον | |

| |3. ἀνεῖχεν | |

| |4. ἦρχες | |

| |5. ἀπέθνῃσκον | |

| |6. προσεῖχες | |

| |7. ἀπῆν | |

| |8. εἰσῆγεν | |

| |9. ᾤκτιρεs | |

10. Imperfect Recognition

After reading the story on page 111, find the twelve imperfects in the story, counting ἦν twice:[13]

|Line Number |Form |

| | |

| | |

| | |

| | |

| | |

| | |

| | |

| | |

| | |

| | |

| | |

| | |

11. Explication Exercise

After reading the story on page 111, explicate the following words:[14]

|Line # |Greek |Part of Speech|Case |Number |Gender |Construction |

|10. |γυναῖκα | | | | | |

|11. |αὐτοῖς | | | | | |

|17. |ἅ | | | | | |

|18. |φέροντι | | | | | |

|Line |Greek |Person |Number |Tense |Mood |Construction |

|3. |σπείρειν [15] |Χ |Χ | | | |

|4. |γεωργεῖν |Χ |Χ | | | |

|16. |ἐνόμιζεν | | | | | |

|16. |πονεῖν |X |X | | | |

12. Vocabulary from “The Lazy Man (Part 1)

Nouns

|ὁ ἄνεμος |Wind |

|ὁ καρπός |fruit, harvest |

|ὁ πόνος |labor, work |

|τὸ σπέρμα |seed -> sperm |

|ὁ χρυσός |gold -> chrysanthemum, chrysalis |

|ἡ ὥρα |season -> hour |

Αdjectives

|κάλλιστος, η, ον |most lovely, most beautiful, noblest |

Verbs

|ἀν-έχω |hold up |

|ἀπ-έρχομαι |go away |

|ἀπ-ῆλθον (aorist) |I went away |

|εἰμι |I am |

|ἦν |he, she it was, there was |

|ἐκ-βαίνω |go out, step out |

|λαμβάνω |take |

|ἔλαβον (aorist) |I took |

|λυπέω |vex, distress |

|πίπτω | fall |

|ἔπεσον (aorist) |I fell |

|νοσέω |I am sick |

|οἰκτίρω (οἰκτείρω) | have pity on + acc. |

|πονέω | toil, work |

Endings

|-εται |he, she, it is x-ing (3rd Person, Singular, Present Indicative) |

|-ονται |they are x-ing (3rd Person, Plural, Present Indicative) |

|-ετο |he, she it was x-ing (3rd Person, Singular, |

| |Imperfect Indicative) |

|-οντο |they were x-ing (3rd Person, Plural, Imperfect Indicative) |

The answers to all Textbook exercises and readings are found on this website:

LESSON 26. THE ε/ο (SECOND OR STRONG) AORIST

This lesson introduces the ε/ο Aorist (also called the Second or Strong) Aorist. Verbs with an ε/ο Aorist undergo significant changes in the stem from the continuous to the aorist, changes which cannot be predicted but must be memorized. This stem is derived from the “I did” form of the verb, the Third Principal Part (we will learn the Second Principal Part in a later lesson). The term, “ε/ο Aorist”, points to the thematic vowel which precedes the personal ending. This vowel is always either an epsilon or an omicron, as in the continuous system.

1. The Continuous and ε/ο Aorist Forms

Read carefully page 112 of the Textbook and examine the continuous and aorist paradigms. Notice the following:

▪ To find the stem of an ε/ο Aorist, remove the time-marker and the personal ending –ον from “I did” form of the verb, the Third Principal Part: ἔλιπον ( λιπ-.

▪ The stem is the major distinguishing feature of the two systems: λειπ- (continuous) vs. λιπ- (aorist).

▪ The continuous imperfect and aorist forms of the verb λείπω have exactly the same set of endings: -ον, -ες, -ε(ν), -ομεν, -ετε, -ον, although the stem is different: ἔ-λειπ-ον (imperfect) vs. ἔ-λιπ-ον (aorist).

▪ Since the infinitive and the participle have no time signification but only aspect, these forms do not have a time-marker.

▪ The continuous infinitive and the aorist infinitive have the same ending, although the stem is different. However, the aorist infinitive is accented with a circumflex on the last syllable (λιπεῖν), rather than recessively.

▪ The continuous participle and the aorist participle have the same endings, although the stem is different. However, the aorist participle is not accented recessively, but accented on the participle endings with the same accents (but no breathing mark) that are found on ὤν, οὖσα, ὄν, the participle of the verb “be”: λιπών, λιποῦσα, λιπόν.

( Exercise 1

Fill in the chart below with the aorist forms of βάλλω (ἔβαλον). Check your answers with the paradigm on page 112 of the Textbook.

|Aorist Indicative Singular Plural |

|ἔβαλον ________________ |

|________________ ________________ |

|________________ ________________ |

|Aorist Infinitive ________________ |

|Aorist Participle ________________________________ |

2. The Aorist Aspect and Its Translation

Read the box entitled “Translationese” on page 112 of the Textbook. Notice the following:

▪ The Aorist Aspect refers to actions that are instantaneous and complete, and resemble a snaphot rather than a motion picture. The action of the verb is conceived as a single event, rather than one which stretches through time.

▪ To translate the aorist indicative, always use “X-ed” or “did X”.

▪ To translate the aorist infinitive, always use “to X (once)”.

▪ to translate the aorist participle, use “having X-ed”, “after X-ing”, “upon X-ing”. The participle represents actions that are instantaneous and complete and that occur before the action of the main verb.

( Exercise 2

Fill in the chart below for the aorist forms of the verb πίπτω (ἔπεσον). Include translations for the 3rd person, plural, indicative, the Infinitive and the Participle. Check your answers with the paradigm on page 112 of the Textbook.

|Aorist Indicative |

|Singular Plural |

|ἔπεσον ____________ |

|_____________ ____________ |

|_____________ ____________ |

|Translation ___________________ |

| Aorist Infinitive |

|Form ____________ Translation_____________ |

|Aorist Participle |

|Form__________________________ |

|Translation ____________________ |

3. Distinguishing between the Continuous and Aorist Verb Forms

Reread the first box on Page 112, which charts, side-by-side, the Continuous and Aorist Forms. Notice the following:

▪ The stem of an imperfect will always match the stem of the “I do” form of a verb, the First Principal Part : λειπ-. The aorist will match the aorist stem, the Third Principal Part: λιπ- . Sometimes these stems differ by only a single letter (λειπ- vs. λιπ-), so you will need to be very observant. Others will differ more drastically. If you meet an unfamiliar form and are not sure whether it is an aorist or an imperfect, check the stem carefully.

▪ The accents of the aorist infinitive and participle are different from the accents of the continuous infinitive and participle. Continuous infinitives and participles are accented recessively: λείπειν (infinitive); λείπων, λείπουσα, λεῖπον (participle). Aorist infinitives and participles are not accented on the stem, but on the endings: λιπεῖν (infinitive); λιπών, λιποῦσα, λιπόν (participle). If you meet an unfamiliar form and are not sure whether it is an aorist or an imperfect, check the accentuation as well as the stem carefully.

Charting all the known forms of the verb side-by-side is an effective way of keeping all the verb forms active and alive in your memory. It will be an exercise we will repeat throughout the rest of the course.

( Exercise 3

a. Chart the forms of the verb μανθάνω (ἔμαθον) below: Check your answers with the paradigm on page 112 of the Textbook:

| Present Continuous Indicative |Aorist Indicative |

|Singular Plural |Singular Plural |

|μανθάνω ___________________ |_____________ ____________ |

|_______________ ___________________ |_____________ ____________ |

|_______________ ___________________ |_____________ ____________ |

|Translation ___________________ |Translation ____________ |

|Imperfect Continuous Indicative | |

|Singular Plural |X |

|_______________ ___________________ | |

|_______________ ___________________ | |

|_______________ ___________________ | |

|Τranslation ___________________________ | |

|Continuous Infinitive |Aorist Infinitive |

|Form Translation |Form Translation |

|_______________ _______________ |___________ _______________ |

|Continuous Participle |Aorist Participle |

|Form Translation |Form Translation |

|_______________ _______________ |____________ _______________ |

b. Translate these pairs, making sure to use the distinguishing features (and translations) between continuous and aorist:[16]

1. ἔλιπεν, ἔλειπεν __________________________________________

2. λείπειν, λιπεῖν __________________________________________

3. ἐλείπετε, ἐλίπετε, λείπετε __________________________________________

4. λιποῦσα, λείπουσα __________________________________________

5. λεῖπον, λιπόν __________________________________________

4. Aorist Stems Resembling the Continuous Stem

Memorize the following important ε/ο verbs whose aorist stem resembles the first principal part. Usually, the aorist stem is shorter than the continuous stem: μανθάν- (continuous) vs. μαθ- (aorist). Remember that the aorist stem is found by removing the –ον ending as well as the time marker from the Third Principal Part. Knowing the stems of Greek verbs and the Principal Parts from which they derive is essential to your progress in learning to read Greek with pleasure. Any time spent in memorizing them will be profitable.

|Meaning |Continuous Principal Part|Continuous Stem |Aorist Principal Part |Aorist Stem |

|throw |βάλλω |(βαλλ-) |ἔβαλον |(βαλ-) |

|find |εὑρίσκω |(εὑρισκ-) |ηὗρον |(ευρ-) |

|die |θνῄσκω |(θνησκ-) |ἔθανον |(θαν-) |

|be weary* |κάμνω |(καμν-) |ἔκαμον |(καμ-) |

|take |λαμβάνω |(λαμβαν-) |ἔλαβον |(λαβ-) |

|leave |λείπω |(λειπ-) |ἔλιπον |(λιπ-) |

|learn |μανθάνω |(μανθαν-) |ἔμαθον |(μαθ-) |

|drink |πίνω |(πιν-) |ἔπιον |(πι-) |

|fall |πίπτω |(πιπτ-) |ἔπεσον |(πεσ-) |

|happen |τυγχάνω |(τυγχαν-) |ἔτυχον |(τυχ-) |

* Translate the aorist of this verb as “was weary”.

( Εxercise 4

a. Give the aorist principal part for each of the following verbs and form the aorist stem as in the first example. Do this exercise only after you have studied the chart above:[17]

|Continuous |Aorist |Aorist Stem |

|κάμνω |1.ἔκαμον |καμ- |

|θνῄσκω |2. | |

|εὑρίσκω |3. | |

|πίνω |4. | |

|τυγχάνω |5. | |

|λείπω |6. | |

|πίπτω |7. | |

|λαμβάνω |8. | |

|βάλλω |9. | |

|μανθάνω |10. | |

b) Translate the following forms, then give the analogous imperfect as in the first example:[18]

|Translation of Aorist |Aorist Form |Imperfect Form |

|They fell |1.ἔπεσον (plural) |ἔπιπτον |

| |2.ἔμαθες | |

| |3. ἔτυχε | |

| |4. ηὕρομεν | |

| |5. ἔθανεν | |

| |6. ἔλαβες [19] | |

| |7.ἔπιον (singular) | |

| |8. ἐκάμομεν | |

| |9.ἔβαλε | |

| |10.ἐτύχετε | |

c. Give the continuous and aorist infinitives for the following verbs as in the first example:[20]

|Verb |Continuous Infinitive |Aorist Infinitive |

|Happen |1.τυγχάνειν |τυχεῖν |

|Throw |2. | |

|Drink |3. | |

|Take |4. | |

|Learn |5. | |

|Leave |6. | |

|Die |7. | |

|Find |8. | |

|Fall |9. | |

|Be weary |10. | |

5. Aorist Stems Which Do Not Resemble the Continuous

Memorize the following very important ε/ο verbs whose aorists do not resemble the continuous. Knowing these stems and the Principal Parts from which they derive is absolutely essential.

|Meaning |Continuous Principal Part|Continuous Stem |Aorist Principal Part |Aorist Stem |

|Eat |ἐσθίω |(ἐσθι-) |ἔφαγον |(φαγ-) |

|Come, Go |ἔρχομαι* |(ἐρχ-) |ἦλθον |(ἐλθ-) |

|Say |λέγω |(λεγ-) |εἶπον |(εἰπ-) |

|See |ὁράω |(ὁρα-) |εἶδον |(ἰδ-) |

|Carry |φέρω |(φερ-) |ἤνεγκον |(ἐνεγκ-) |

* Although this verb is an –ομαι verb in the Continuous, the endings in the Aorist are the same as all the ε/ο Aorist we have learned: -ον, -ες, -ε(ν), -ομεν, -ετε, -ον .

(Exercise 5[21]

a. Match each continuous form to the correct aorist form:

1. ἐσθίω a. εἶδον

2. λέγω b. ἦλθον

3. ἔρχομαι c. ἤνεγκον

4. ὁράω d. εἶπον

5. φέρω e. ἔφαγον

b. Translate each infinitive, and then give the analogous continuous infinitives for each form: [22]

|Translation |Form |Continuous Equivalent |

| |1.φαγεῖν | |

| |2.ἐλθεῖν | |

| |3.ἐνεγκεῖν | |

| |4.ἰδεῖν | |

| |5.εἰπεῖν | |

c. Translate each English verb.[23]

|English |Greek (Present) |English |Greek (Aorist) |

|They say. |1. |They said. |1. |

|We carry. |2. |We carried. |2. |

|I see. |3. |I saw. |3. |

|You (sg) eat. |4. |You (sg) ate. |4. |

|They go. |5. |They went. |5. |

6. Comparison of the Continuous and Aorist Participle

Study the paradigms of the continuous and aorist participles on page 113 of the Textbook. Notice once again that the aorist participle differs in stem and accent from the continuous participle although the endings are the same. Remember that the participle is merely the aorist stem + the forms and accents of the present participle of ὤν, οὖσα, ὄν, without any breathing marks: μαθών, μαθοῦσα, μαθόν.

( Exercise 6

a. Chart the aorist participle for the verb βάλλω (ἔβαλον). Check your answers with the paradigm on Page 113 of the Textbook.

|Case |Masculine |Feminine |Neuter |

|N | | | |

|A | | | |

|G | | | |

|D | | | |

| | | | |

|N | | | |

|A | | | |

|G | | | |

|D | | | |

b. Give the aorist participle that corresponds (in case, number, gender) to the following:[24]

|κάμνουσα |1. |

|εὑρίσκων |2. |

|λαμβάνοντας |3. |

|φέρουσι |4. |

|ἐσθίοντι |5. |

|λέγον |6. |

|τυγχανούσης |7. |

8. Imperfects and Aorists

( Exercise 8

After translating the story on page 114 of the Textbook, find and list below seven ε/ο aorists and five imperfects (do not include glossed words).[25]

|Line # |Imperfect Verbs |Line # |Aorist Verbs |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

|X |X | | |

|X |X | | |

9. Vocabulary from “The Lazy Man” (Part 2).

Nouns

|ὁ βροτός |mortal -> ambrosia |

|τὸ ἔτος (ἔτους) |year -> Etesian |

|ὁ ὕπνος |sleep -> hypnosis |

Adjectives

|θάττων, θᾶττον |Faster |

|καθαρός, ά, όν |clean, pure -> cartharsis |

|κρείττων, κρεῖττον |Better |

Verbs

|εἰσ-βαίνω |Enter |

|ζάω |live, be alive -> zoology |

|(ζῶ, ζῇς, ζῇ | |

|Infinitive ζῆν) | |

|θάπτω |Bury |

|καθαίρω |cleanse, purify -> catharsis |

|κρύπτω |hide -> cryptic |

|πεινάω |be hungry |

|πεινῶ, πεινῇς, πεινῇ | |

|infinitive πεινῆν | |

Verbs with ε/ο Aorists with Similar Stems

|βάλλω, ἔβαλον |throw -> ballistic |

|εὐρίσκω, ηὗρον |find -> heuristic |

|θνῄσκω, ἔθανον |die -> thanatology |

|κάμνω, ἔκαμον |be weary |

|λαμβάνω, ἔλαβον |Take |

|λείπω, ἔλιπον |Leave |

|μανθάνω, ἔμαθον |learn -> polymath |

|πίνω, ἔπιον |Drink |

|πίπτω, ἔπεσον |Fall |

|τυγχάνω, ἔτυχον |Happen |

Verbs with ε/ο Aorists with Different Stems

|ἐσθίω, ἔφαγον (φαγ-) |eat -> esophagus |

|ἔρχομαι, ἦλθον (ἐλθ-) |come, go |

|λέγω, εἶπον (εἰπ-) |say -> legend, epic |

|ὁράω, εἶδον (ἰδ-) |see -> idea |

|φέρω, ἤνεγκον (ἐνεγκ-) |carry -> phosphorus |

PRACTICE QUIZ 1: LESSONS 25 AND 26

1. Chart the continuous and aorist forms for βάλλω, ἔβαλον

|Present Continuous Indicative |Aorist Indicative |

|Singular Plural |Singular Plural |

|βάλλω __________________ |ἔβαλον ___________ |

|_______________ ___________________ |_____________ ____________ |

|_______________ ___________________ |_____________ ____________ |

|Translation ___________________ |Translation ____________ |

|Imperfect Continuous Indicative | |

|Singular Plural |X |

|_______________ ___________________ | |

|_______________ ___________________ | |

|_______________ ___________________ | |

|Τranslation ___________________________ | |

|Continuous Infinitive |Aorist Infinitive |

|Form Translation |Form Translation |

|_______________ _______________ |___________ _______________ |

|Continuous Participle |Aorist Participle |

|Forms _______________________________ |Forms _________________________ |

|Translation ___________________________ |Translation ____________________ |

2. Decline the Aorist Participle for βάλλω, ἔβαλον

|Case |Masculine |Feminine |Neuter |

|N | | | |

|A | | | |

|G | | | |

|D | | | |

| | | | |

|N | | | |

|A | | | |

|G | | | |

|D | | | |

3. Translate the following pairs, being sure to distinguish between the different tenses and systems:

a. εὑρίσκων, εὑρών _______________________________

b. εὑρόν, ηὗρον _______________________________

c. ηὑρίσκε, εὑρίσκει _______________________________

d. εὑρεῖν, εὑρίσκειν _______________________________

4. Fill in the chart below for ε/ο Verbs:

|Verb |Continuous |Aorist |

|Happen | | |

|Throw | | |

|Drink | | |

|Take | | |

|Learn | | |

|Leave | | |

|Die | | |

|Find | | |

|Fall | | |

|Be weary | | |

|Eat | | |

|Come | | |

|Carry | | |

|Say | | |

|See | | |

5. Give the present indicative singular forms and present infinitive for πεινάω.

First Person __________________

Second Person ___________________

Third Person ___________________

Infinitive ___________________

6. Translate the following, being sure to translate imperfects as “were X-ing, used to X, kept on X-ing” and the aorists as “X-ed”:

(1) ἔθανεν ἡ καλλίστη Φρασικλεία, οὖσα νέα καὶ καθαρά. (2) ἐβούλετο γαμεῖν καὶ ζῆν πόλλα ἔτη, ἀλλὰ κατῆλθε τὴν ὁδὸν εἰς Ἁίδαν (Hades) ἀντὶ τοῦ γαμεῖν. (3) ἤνεγκε μεγάλην λύπην (distress) τῇ μητρί, ἥ, ὅτε τὴν παῖδα τεθνέωτα ἐν τοῖς ἀγροῖς ηὗρε, ἔπεσε πρὸς τῆν γῆν καὶ ἀνεῖχον τοῖς οὐρανοῖς τὰς χεῖρας. (4) τέλος εἶπε ‘ὦ Φρασκιλεία, οὐκ ἔμελλον θάπτειν σε. (5) αὕτη οὐκ ἦν ἡ ὥρα τοῦ σε θανεῖν.’ (6) ἔπειτα, εἰσῆλθε εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν καὶ ἔλαβε τὸν χρυσὸν ὅν ἔκρυπτε καὶ τίθησιν αὐτὸν παρὰ τῷ σώματι τῆς Φρασικλείας, λέγων, ‘ ἴθι καὶ φέρε τούτον τὸν χρύσον εἰς Ἁίδαν (Hades). (7) σὺ εἶ νῦν ἡ νύμφη (bride) τοῦ θέου τοῦ θανάτου. (8) ὡς σε καὶ πάντας βρότους οἰκτίρω!’

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

7. Give the equivalents for the following:

|1.toil, work |2. go out, step out |

|3. wind |4. fruit, harvest |

|5. seed |6. sleep |

|7. cleanse, purify |8. faster |

|9. better |10. enter |

ANSWERS:PRACTICE QUIZ 1: LESSONS 25 AND 26

1. Chart the continuous and aorist forms for βάλλω, ἔβαλον

|Present Continuous Indicative |Aorist Indicative |

|Singular Plural |Singular Plural |

|βάλλω βάλλομεν |ἔβαλον ἐβάλομεν |

|βάλλεις βάλλετε |ἔβαλες ἐβάλετε |

|βάλλει βάλλουσι(ν) |ἔβαλε(ν) ἔβαλον |

|Translation: they throw, are throwing |Translation: they threw |

|Imperfect Continuous Indicative | |

|Singular Plural |Χ |

|ἔβαλλον ἐβάλλομεν | |

|ἔβαλλες ἐβάλλετε | |

| | |

|ἔβαλλε(ν) ἔβαλλον | |

|Τranslation: they were throwing | |

|Continuous Infinitive |Aorist Infinitive |

|Form Translation |Form Translation |

|βάλλειν to be throwing |βαλεῖν to throw (once) |

|Continuous Participle |Aorist Participle |

|Forms βάλλων, ουσα, ον |Forms βαλῶν, οῦσα, όν |

|Translation: throwing |Translation: upon, after throwing, having thrown |

2. Decline the Aorist Participle for βάλλω, ἔβαλον

|Case |Masculine |Feminine |Neuter |

|N |βαλών |βαλοῦσα |βαλόν |

|A |βαλόντα |βαλοῦσαν |βαλόν |

|G |βαλόντος |βαλούσης |βαλόντος |

|D |βαλόντι |βαλούσῃ |βαλόντι |

| | | | |

|N |βαλόντες |βαλοῦσαι |βαλόντα |

|A |βαλόντας |βαλούσας |βαλόντα |

|G |βαλόντων |βαλουσῶν |βαλόντων |

|D |βαλοῦσι(ν) |βαλούσαις |βαλοῦσι(ν) |

3. Translate the following pairs, being sure to distinguish between the different tenses and systems:

a. εὑρίσκων, εὑρών he, finding; he, having found, after, upon finding

b. εὑρόν, ηὗρον it having found, after, upon finding; I/they found

c. ηὑρίσκε, εὑρίσκει he, she, it was finding; he, she, it finds

d. εὑρεῖν, εὑρίσκειν to find (once); to be finding

4. Fill in the chart below for ε/ο Verbs:

|Verb |Continuous |Aorist |

|Happen |τυγχάνω |ἔτυχον |

|Drink |πίνω |ἔπιον |

|Take |λαμβάνω |ἔλαβον |

|Learn |μανθάνω |ἔμαθον |

|Leave |λείπω |ἔλιπον |

|Die |θνῄσκω |ἔθανον |

|Find |εὑρίσκω |ηὗρον |

|Fall |πίπτω |ἔπεσον |

|Be weary |κάμνω |ἔκαμον |

|Eat |ἐσθίω |ἔφαγον |

|Come |ἔρχομαι |ἦλθον |

|Carry |φέρω |ἤνεγκον |

|Say |λέγω |εἶπον |

|See |ὁράω |εἶδον |

5. Give the present indicative singular forms and infinitive for πεινάω.

First Person πεινῶ

Second Person πεινῇς

Third Person πεινῇ

Infinitive πεινῆν

6. 6. Translate the following, being sure to translate imperfects as “were X-ing, used to X, kept on X-ing” and the aorists as “X-ed”:

(1) ἔθανεν ἡ καλλίστη Φρασικλεία, οὖσα νέα καὶ καθαρά. (2) ἐβούλετο γαμεῖν καὶ ζῆν πόλλα ἔτη, ἀλλὰ κατῆλθε τὴν ὁδὸν εἰς Ἁίδαν (Hades) ἀντὶ τοῦ γαμεῖν. (3) ἤνεγκε μεγάλην λύπην (distress) τῇ μητρί, ἥ, ὅτε τὴν παῖδα τεθνέωτα ἐν τοῖς ἀγροῖς ηὗρε, ἔπεσε πρὸς τῆν γῆν καὶ ἀνεῖχον τοῖς οὐρανοῖς τὰς χεῖρας. (4) τέλος εἶπε ‘ὦ Φρασκιλεία, οὐκ ἔμελλον θάπτειν σε. (5) αὕτη οὐκ ἦν ἡ ὥρα τοῦ σε θανεῖν.’ (6) ἔπειτα, εἰσῆλθε εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν καὶ ἔλαβε τὸν χρυσὸν ὅν ἔκρυπτε καὶ τίθησιν αὐτὸν παρὰ τῷ σώματι τῆς Φρασικλείας, λέγων, ‘ ἴθι καὶ φέρε τούτον τὸν χρύσον εἰς Ἁίδαν (Hades). (7) σὺ εἶ νῦν ἡ νύμφη (bride) τοῦ θέου τοῦ θανάτου. (8) ὡς σε καὶ πάντας βρότους οἰκτίρω!’

(1) The exceedingly lovely Phrasikleia died, when she was young and pure. (2) She was yearning to marry and to live for many years, but she went down the road to Hades instead of marrying. (3) She brought great distress to her mother, who, when she found her child dead in the fields, fell to the earth and kept on holding her hands to the heavens. (4) Finally, she said, “O, Phrasikleia, I was not intending to bury you. (5) This was not the time for you to die.” (6) Then, she went into the house and took the gold which she was hiding and places it by the body of Phrasikleia, saying, “Go and bring this gold to Hades. (7) Now you are the bride of the god of death. (8) How I pity you and all mortals.”

7. Give the equivalents for the following:

|1.toil, work |ὁ πόνος (noun) |2. go out, step out |ἐκβαίνω |

| |πονέω (verb) | | |

|3. wind |ὁ ἄνεμος |4. fruit, harvest |ὁ καρπός |

|5. seed |τὸ σπέρμα |6. sleep |ὁ ὕπνος |

|7. cleanse, purify |καθαίρω |8. faster |θάττων, θᾶττον |

|9. better |κρείττων, κρεῖττον |10. enter |εἰσβαίνω |

LESSON 27. THE α-AORIST (σα OR λα); THE INGRESSIVE AORIST

Just as English forms past verbs in two ways, either by adding an –ed suffix to the verb (“walk, walked”) or by changing the stem (“sing, sang”; “go, went”), so does Greek. The ε/ο Aorist is formed by a stem change just like the English verbs “sing, sang” or “go, went”: λείπ-ω, ἔ-λιπ-ον; ἐσθι-ω, ἔ-φαγ-ον. This lesson introduces another way that Greek forms aorist verbs, the alpha aorist, which typically adds a suffix, as do English verbs like “walk, walked”: παύω, ἔ-παυ-σα.

1. The σα- Aorist

Read carefully the description and the paradigms for the –σα Aorist on page 117. Notice the following:

▪ In the –σα aorist (also called First Aorist or Weak Aorist), the aorist stem is formed by adding a sigma to the continuous stem of the Third Principal Part: παυ-( παυσ-.

▪ If the stem ends in a consonant, there will be sigma combinations for the sake of euphony. You are already familiar with most of these combinations:

|Labial (lips) π, β, φ + σ = ψ πέμπω πεμπ- ( πεμψ- |

| πτ πτ + σ = ψ θάπτω θαπτ- ( θαψ- |

|Palatal (palate) κ, γ, χ + σ = ξ διώκω διωκ-( δίωξ- |

| ττ ττ + σ = ξ πράττω πραττ-( πραξ- |

|Dental (teeth) τ, δ, θ + σ = ς σπεύδω σπευδ -( σπευσ- |

|(the dental drops out) |

▪ In the indicative aorist, a time-marker is added to the stem, and an alpha thematic vowel, rather than an epsilon or omicron sound, is found in all the aorist endings (except in the third person singular): ἔ-παυ-σε(ν).

▪ The indicative aorist endings are –σα, -σας, -σε(ν), -σαμεν, -σατε, -σαν. Note the epsilon vowel in the 3rd person singular, the only non-alpha vowel in the aorist system. The accent is recessive.

▪ The aorist infinitive ending is –σαι. The -σα aorist infinitive is always accented on the next-to-last syllable. Ιf the accent occurs over a long vowel, it will be a circumflex since the –σαι is short: παῦσαι. Otherwise, it will be an acute: πέμψαι.

▪ The nominative aorist participle endings are –σᾱς, -σᾱσα, -σαν. The accent is persistent on the final syllable of the aorist stem: παύ-σᾱς, παύ-σᾱσα, παῦ-σαν; κελεύ-σᾱς, κελεύ-σᾱσα, κελεῦ-σαν. The full declension will be discussed in section 2.

(Exercise 1

Fill in the charts below for the verbs πέμπω, ἔπεμψα and κελεύω, ἐκέλευσα. Give translations as in the box, page 112, for the 3rd Plural Indicatives, Infinitive and Participle. Check you answers with the paradigm on page 117 of the Textbook.

|Aorist Indicative |Aorist Indicative |

|Singular Plural |Singular Plural |

|ἔπεμψα ____________ |ἐκέλευσα ____________ |

|_____________ ____________ |_____________ ____________ |

|_____________ ____________ |_____________ ____________ |

|Translation ____________ |Translation ____________ |

|Aorist Infinitive |Aorist Infinitive |

|Form Translation |Form Translation |

|___________ _______________ |___________ _______________ |

|Aorist Participle |Aorist Participle |

|Forms |Forms |

|______________________________ |_____________________________ Translation |

|Translation _______________ |_______________ |

2. Declension of the α-Aorist Participle

After examining the paradigm for the aorist participle on page 117 of the Textbook, notice the following:

▪ The nominative endings for the α-Αorist participle are –σᾱς, -σᾱσα, -σαν. The masculine and feminine participle endings are long, but not the neuter. These syllable lengths will affect accentuation.

▪ The ending of the masculine, singular, nominative of the participle παύσᾱς resembles the 2nd person singular of the indicative, ἔπαυσας. The time marker distinguishes, as always, the indicative form.

▪ The α-Αorist participle is a mixed 3-A-3 adjective in the pattern of the adjective πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν. Τhe accent in the nominative is on the final vowel of the stem (not the participle ending): παύ-σᾱς, παύ-σᾱσα, παῦ-σαν. The accent is persistent, trying to remain on that syllable when it can, except the genitive plural of the feminine which, as is typical for A-Group words, receives a circumflex on the last syllable.

▪ The stem for the participle is derived by adding a tau to the neuter nominative: παυσαν + τ = παυσαντ-. The remainder of the declension follows regular mixed 3-A-3 rules, with the expected contraction in the dative plural masculine and neuter: παύσαντσι(ν) ( παύσασι(ν).

(Exercise 2

a. Write out the declension of the aorist participle for the verb λύω, ἔλυσα “release”. Note the upsilon in the stem is long. Check your answers and accentuation on page 117 in the textbook:

|Case |Masculine |Feminine |Neuter |

|N | | | |

|A | | | |

|G | | | |

|D | | | |

| | | | |

|N | | | |

|A | | | |

|G | | | |

|D | | | |

b. Τranslate the following forms for the verb πέμπω, ἔπεμψα. Remember that time markers indicate an indicative form and that participles and infinitives do not have time-markers. From now on answers for aorist participles will only use “having sent” even though “upon sending/ after sending” are correct also.[26]

1. ἔπεμψαν _______________________

2. πέμψαν _______________________

3. πέμψαι _______________________

4. πέμψασαι _______________________

5. πέμψας _______________________

6. ἔπεμψας _______________________

7. ἔπεμψα _______________________

8. πεμψασῶν _______________________

9. ἔπεμψε _______________________

10. πεμψάντων _______________________

3. Formation of the Regular σα-Aorist Principal Part

Unlike the ε/ο Aorists, whose Third Principal Part is unpredictable, the Third Principal part for –σα verbs is easily generated, particularly if you know the consonant combinations with sigma. The aorist Principal part for regular verbs consists of a time-marker + the continuous stem + a sigma alpha or sigma combination plus alpha. Memorize the following aorist principal parts for verbs you already know.

Regular Aorist Principal Part = Time Marker + Continuous Stem + σα/ψα/ξα

|Meaning |Continuous Principal Part |Aorist Principal Part |Αorist Stem |

|Continuous Stems Ending in a vowel |

|Hear |ἀκούω |ἤ-κου-σα |ἀκουσ- |

|Cry |δακρύω |ἐ-δάκρυ-σα |δακρυσ- |

|Order |κελεύω |ἐ-κέλευ-σα |κελευσ- |

|Stop |παύω |ἔ-παυ-σα |παυσ- |

|Continuous Stems Ending in a labial (π, β, φ) or –πτ |

|Write |γράφω |ἔ-γραψ-α |γραψ- |

|Bury |θάπτω |ἔ-θαψ-α |θαψ- |

|Steal |κλέπτω |ἔ-κλεψ-α |κλεψ- |

|Hide |κρύπτω |ἔ-κρυψ-α |κρυψ- |

|Send |πέμπω |ἔ-πεμψ-α |πεμψ- |

|Continuous Stems Ending in a palatal (κ, γ, χ) or –ττ |

|Strike |πλήττω |ἔ-πληξ-α |πληξ- |

|Guard |φυλάττω |ἔ-φυλαξ-α |φυλαξ- |

|Continuous Stems Ending in a dental (τ, δ, θ) |

|Think, Consider |νομίζω |ἐ-νόμι-σα |νομι- |

(Exercise 3

a. After memorizing the patterns above, form the aorist Principal parts for the following regular –σα verbs which follow the patterns above:[27]

|Meaning |Continuous Principal Part |Aorist Principal Part |

|1.See |βλέπω | |

|2. Rule |βασιλεύω | |

|3. Strike |πλήττω | |

|4.Save |σῴζω | |

|5.Harm |βλάπτω | |

|6.Weave |πλέκω | |

b. Translate the following forms:[28]

1. γράψας _____________________________________

2. νομίσασι _____________________________________

3. κρύψασαι _____________________________________

4. ἔθαψαν _____________________________________

5. δακρυσασῶν _____________________________________

6. ἔφυλαξε _____________________________________

7. κελεῦσαι _____________________________________

8. ἐπέμψαμεν _____________________________________

9. παύσασαν _____________________________________

10. ἠκούσατε _____________________________________

4. Τhe Aorist Principal Part for Contract Verbs

The aorist Principal part for contract verbs consists of a time-marker + the continuous stem with the final vowel lengthened to an eta + a sigma alpha or sigma combination plus alpha. Memorize the following aorist principal parts for verbs you already know.

Aorist Principal Part of Contract Verbs = Time Marker + Continuous Stem with Final Vowel Lengthened to –η + σα.

|Meaning |Continuous Principal Part ( Lengthened Stem|Aorist Principal Part |Αorist Stem |

|-εω Contract Verbs |

|Ask |αἰτέω (αἰτη- |ᾔ-τη-σα |αἰτησ- |

|Seek |ζητέω ( ζητη- |ἐ-ζήτη-σα |ζητησ- |

|Share |κοινωνέω ( κοινωνη- |ἐ-κοινώνη-σα |κοινωνησ- |

|Distress |λυπέω ( λυπη- |ἐ-λύπη-σα |λυπησ- |

|Hate |μισέω ( μιση- |ἑ-μίση-σα |μισησ- |

|Be sick |νοσέω ( νοση- |ἐ-νόση-σα |νοσησ- |

|Dwell, inhabit |οἰκεω ( οἰκη- |ᾤ-κη-σα |οἰκησ- |

|Agree |ὁμολογέω( ὁμολογη- |ὡ-μολόγη-σα |ὁμολογησ- |

|Do, make |ποίεω ( ποιη- |ἐ-ποίη-σα |ποιησ- |

|Love, like |φιλέω ( φιλη- |ἐ-φίλη-σα |φιλησ- |

|Wear |φορέω ( φορη- |ἐ-φόρη-σα |φορησ- |

|-αω Contract Verbs |

|Ask |ἐρωτάω ( ἐρωτη- |ἠ-ρώτησα |ἐρωτησ- |

|Live |ζάω ( ζη- |ἔ-ζη-σα |ζησ- |

|Be hungry |πεινάω ( πεινη- |ἐπείνησα |πεινησ- |

|Be silent |σιγάω ( σιγη- |ἐσίγησα |σιγησ- |

(Exercise 4

a. After memorizing the patterns above, form the aorist Principal parts for the following regular contract verbs:[29]

|Meaning |Continuous Principal Part |Aorist Principal Part |

|Conquer |1.νικάω | |

|Dare |2.τολμάω | |

b. Translate the following forms:[30]

1. ὠμολόγησας _____________________________________

2. φορήσας _____________________________________

3. πεινῆσαι _____________________________________

4. ᾤκησε _____________________________________

5. ζήσασαι _____________________________________

6. ἠρώτησαν _____________________________________

7. ζητῆσαν _____________________________________

8. ᾕτησα _____________________________________

9. μισήσασι _____________________________________

10. νοσῆσαι _____________________________________

11. κοιωνήσαντες _____________________________________

12. ἐποίησαν _____________________________________

13. φιλησασῶν _____________________________________

5. Aorist Principal Parts with Slight Irregularities

Although most of the –σα Αorists form predictable Aorist Principal Parts, there are a few verbs which do not. You will need to memorize these verbs carefully:

|Meaning |Continuous Principal Part |Aorist Principal Part |

|Wish |ἐθέλω |ἠθέλησα |

|Intend |μέλλω |ἐμέλλησα |

|Seem, seem best |δοκέω |ἔδοξα |

( Exercise 5

Translate each form and give its aorist infinitive:[31]

|Translation |Form |Aorist Infinitive |

| |ἠρωτησάμεν | |

| |ᾤκησεν | |

| |ἔδοξα | |

| |ἠκούσατε | |

| |ᾔτησαν | |

| |ἐμελλήσατε | |

| |ἠθέλησε | |

6. Formation of the –λα (or Liquid) Aorist

Read about the –λα Αorists, words whose continuous stems end with the letters λ,μ, ν, ρ, in the Textbook on page 118. The sigma sounds of the aorist drop out in combination with these letters, although the aorist endings remain the same. A mnemonic device for stems which end in λ,μ, ν, ρ is that the letters sounded out resemble the word “lemonrow”. The term “- λα Αorists” is shorthand for any of the “lemonrow” aorists:-λα, -μα, -να, -ρα.

( Exercise 6

After studying the paradigm on page 118, fill in the following charts for the verb

μένω, ἔμεινα. Check your answers with the paradigm on page 118 of the Textbook.

|Aorist Indicative |

|Singular Plural |

|_____________ ____________ |

|_____________ ____________ |

|_____________ ____________ |

|Translation __________________________ |

|Aorist Infinitive |

|Form Translation |

|_______________ ___________________ |

|Aorist Participle |

|Forms ________________________________ |

|Translation ________________________________ |

Aorist Participle

|Case |Masculine |Feminine |Neuter |

|N | | | |

|A | | | |

|G | | | |

|D | | | |

| | | | |

|N | | | |

|A | | | |

|G | | | |

|D | | | |

7. Principal Parts for –λα Aorists

The loss of the sigma often causes a stem change from the continuous to the aorist in verbs with –λα Aorists. Therefore, the Third Principal Part for such verbs must be carefully memorized. The following list contains all the verbs you have learned so far.

|Meaning |Continuous Principal Part |Aorist Principal Part |

|Announce |ἀγγέλλω |ἤγγειλα |

|Cleanse |καθαίρω |ἐκάθηρα |

|Judge |κρίνω |ἔκρῑνα |

|Slay, kill |κτείνω |ἔκτεινα |

|Wait, stay, remain |μένω |ἔμεινα |

|Pity, have pity on |οἰκτίρω |ᾤκτιρα |

|Marry |γαμέω |ἔγημα * |

*Note that this word is irregular and does not form its aorist as a regular contract verb.

Exercise 7

a. Translate the following:[32]

1. ἔγημας ______________________

2. κρίνας ______________________

3. ᾤκτιραν ______________________

4. ἀγγεῖλαι [33] ______________________

5. κρίνασιν ______________________

6. ἔκαθηρεν ______________________

7. ἔκτειναν ______________________

8. οἰκτίρασαι ______________________

9. μεῖναν ______________________

b. Translate the following, reasoning back and using the dictionary. Since verbs are listed under the first principal part, you will need to remove time-markers, to restore lost vowels in compound verbs and contract verbs, and to change sigma combination letters back to the original sounds. Don’t forget that –λα Aorists often have a slight stem change from the continuous to the aorist.[34]

|First Principal Part |Form |Translation |

| |1. ἀνεβλέψατε | |

| |2. πλήξας | |

| |3. πεῖσαι | |

| |4. ἔπραξεν | |

| |5. βοῆσασα | |

| |6. ὠφελῆσαν* | |

* Remember that words which begin with a long vowel do not add a time-marker to past indicatives.

8. The Ingressive Aorist

Read about the “ingressive aorist” on page 118 of the Textbook. This is a usage of the aorist that indicates a state has been entered: σιγῶ, “I am silent”, ἐσίγησα “I became silent”. Most verbs of this type are –σα Aorists, but note the ingressive aorist for the verb ἔχω “I have”: ἔσχον (Αorist) “I took possession of”, “acquired, “got”.

Translate·[35]

1. ἐνόσησα τῇ δευτέρᾳ ἡμέρᾳ.____________________________________________ 2. ἡ μήτηρ ἐδάκρυσε ὄτε εἶδε τὴν παῖδα.__________________________________

9. Continuous and Aorist Forms

It is important, whenever learning a new verb form to incorporate it into the schema of forms already learned. The chart below brings together all the forms you know for –ω verbs with a –σα Aorist.

(Exercise 10

Chart the forms of the verb πέμπω, ἔπεμψα below: Check Continuous forms on page 109 of the Textbook and Aorist forms on page 117.

| Present Continuous Indicative |Aorist Indicative |

|Singular Plural |Singular Plural |

|πέμπω ___________________ |ἔπεμψα ____________ |

|_______________ ___________________ |_____________ ____________ |

|_______________ ___________________ |_____________ ____________ |

|Translation ___________________ |Translation ____________ |

|Imperfect Continuous Indicative | |

|Singular Plural |X |

|_______________ ___________________ | |

|_______________ ___________________ | |

|_______________ ___________________ | |

|Τranslation ___________________________ | |

|Continuous Infinitive |Aorist Infinitive |

|Form Translation |Form Translation |

|_______________ _______________ |___________ _______________ |

|Continuous Participle |Aorist Participle |

|Forms _________________________________ |Forms ________________________ |

|Translation _____________________________ |Translation ____________________ |

10. Aorist Forms of –ομαι Verbs

In all the stories from now on you will see –σα aorist forms of –ομαι verbs, although we will not learn these verbs formally until later in the course. Here are some hints on recognition of these forms:

Aorist Participle: Aorist Stem + -αμενος, η, ον

Aorist 3rd Person Singular: Time-Marker + Aorist Stem + -ατο

Aorist 3rd Person Plural: Time-Marker + Aorist Stem + -αντο

( Εxercise 10

Translate the following aorist –ομαι forms found in the story on page 119:[36]

|Line |First Principal Part |Meaning |Form |Translation |

|6 |ἅπτομαι |take hold of + G |6.ἥψαντο | |

|9 |ἄρχομαι |begin to + Inf. |9.ἥρξαντο | |

|17 |ἅπτομαι |take hold of + G |17.ἁψάμενος | |

|24 |ἀποκρίνομαι |answer |24. ἀπεκρίνατο | |

(Exercise 11. Explication

After reading the story on page 119 of the Textbook, explicate the following verb forms. From now on, participles will be included with verb forms in explication exercises. Like infinitives, participles do not have person and number.[37]

|Line |Greek |Person |Number |Tense/Aspect |Mood |Construction |

|1. |ἐγέλασεν | | | | | |

|1. |ἐβούλετο | | | | | |

|2. |ἔδοξε | | | | | |

| 4. |ἦλθεν | | | | | |

|12. |ἁπτόμενος |Χ |Χ | | | |

|14. |ἐβόησεν | | | | | |

|19. |ὠργίζοντο | | | | | |

|20. |ἀκούσας | | | | | |

|22. |ἠρώτησαν | | | | | |

12. Vocabulary from “The Blind Men and the Elephant”

Nouns

|ὁ ἐλέφας (ἐλέφαντος) |elephant -> elephant |

|τὸ σκέλος (σκέλους) |leg -> skeleton |

|τὸ σῶμα (σώματος) |body -> somatic |

|τὸ τεῖχος (τείχους) |Wall |

Adjectives

|βασιλικός, ή, όν |royal -> basilica |

|γελοῖος, α, ον |Funny |

|ὅλος, η, ον |whole -> holistic |

|τέταρτος, η, ον |fourth -> tetralogy |

|τρίτος, η, ον |third -> tritium, trilogy |

|τυφλός, ή, όν |Blind |

|οὐδέτερος, α, ον |Neither |

Verbs

|ἄγω, ἤγαγον |Lead |

|ἀμφισβητέω |dispute, argue |

|ἅπτομαι + gen |take hold of |

|ἄρχομαι + inf |begin to |

|βοάω, ἐβόησα |Shout |

|γελάω, ἐγέλασα* |Laugh |

|διαλέγομαι + dat |converse with -> dialogue |

|δοκέω, ἔδοξα* |seem, seem best to + Dat. -> paradox |

|ἔχω (εἶχον imperfect), ἔσχον (aorist)* |have; Ιngressive aorist: gοt possession of, acquired, got |

* Note Irregular Aorist

Verbs with Regular –σα Aorists

|ἀκούω, ἤκουσα |Hear |

|δακρύω, ἐδάκρυσα |Cry |

|κελεύω, ἐκέλευσα |bid, urge, order |

|γράφω, ἔγράψα |Write |

|θάπτω, ἔθαψα |Bury |

|κλέπτω, ἔκλεψα |Steal |

|κρύπτω, ἔκρυψα |Hide |

|πέμπω, ἔπεμψα |Send |

|πλήττω, ἔπληξα |Strike |

|φυλάττω, ἐφύλαξα |Guard |

|νομίζω, ἐνόμισα |think, consider |

Contract Verbs with Regular –σα Aorists

|αἰτέω, ᾔτησα |Ask |

|ζητέω, ἐζήτησα |Seek |

|κοινωνέω, ἐκοινώνησα |Share |

|λυπέω, ἐλύπησα |cause distress of mind or body, vex, distress |

|μισέω, ἐμίσησα |Hate |

|οἰκέω, ᾤκησα |dwell, inhabit |

|ὁμολογέω, ὡμολόγησα |Agree |

|ποιέω, ἐποίησα |do, make |

|φιλέω, ἐφίλησα |love, like |

|φορέω, ἐφόρησα |Wear |

|ἐρωτάω, ἠρώτησα |Ask |

|ζάω, ἔζησα |Live |

|πεινάω, ἐπείνησα |be hungry |

|σιγάω, ἐσίγησα |be silent |

Verbs with Irregular –σα Aorists

|ἐθέλω, ἠθέλησα |Wish |

|μέλλω, ἐμέλλησα |Intend |

|δοκέω, ἔδοξα |seem, seem best to |

Verbs with –λα Aorists

|ἀγγέλλω, ἤγγειλα |Announce |

|καθαίρω, ἐκάθηρα |cleanse, purify |

|κρίνω, ἔκρῑνα |Judge |

|κτείνω, ἔκτεινα |kill, slay |

|μένω, ἔμεινα |wait, stay, remain |

|οἰκτίρω, ᾤκτιρα |Pity |

|γαμέω, ἔγημα |Marry |

LESSON 28. THE GENITIVE ABSOLUTE; SPECIAL AORISTS

1. The Genitive Absolute

Read about this important construction on page 120 of the textbook and notice the following:

▪ The genitive absolute is a circumstantial participle modifying a noun in the genitive case which acts as its subject. The participle thus forms a clause which is grammatically freed (hence the name “absolute”) from the rest of the sentence. Although English sometimes uses such clauses, most genitive absolutes are expressed in English by subordinate clauses beginning with such words as “when”, “since”, “although”, “if”, and so on.

▪ Since the genitive absolute is not introduced by a clause marker, you will need to be alert whenever you see a noun (or pronoun) plus a participle in the genitive case, particularly if set off by commas.

▪ Translating and recognizing genitive absolutes can be tricky. The following step-by-step procedure may help you to get the correct literal translation whenever you see a participle modifying a noun/pronoun in the genitive case: Example: λείποντος (λιπόντος) τοῦ σοφοῦ ἀνθρώπου τὴν πόλιν, ἡ γυνή ἐδάκρυσεν.

1. Insert the word “with” (a possible genitive translation) before translating any words expressed in the phrase. “With….”

2. Translate the genitive noun or pronoun immediately after inserting the word “with”, even if the noun or pronoun is not the first word in the phrase. Doing so is the key to the correct translation of genitive absolutes: “With the wise man….”

3. Then translate the participle as “X-ing” if it is present, and “having X-ed” is if it aorist. “With the wise man leaving (having left)…”

4. Then translate the rest of the clause and the sentence. Genitive Absolutes function like any other clause; they may have modifiers and the participle may take a direct object. “With the wise man leaving (having left) the city, his wife burst into tears”.

For smoother English, once you are comfortable with genitive absolutes, you may translate the genitive absolute as a subordinate clause. “When the wise man left the city…/ After the wise man left the city…/Since the wise man left the city...”, etc.

(Exercise 1

a. Translate these genitive absolute phrases, using the four step procedure.[38]

1. θανόντος τοῦ ποιητοῦ ____________________________________

2. δακρυούσης τῆς μητρός ____________________________________

3. τῶν ἀδελφῶν πεμψασῶν τὰ δῶρα

________________________________________________________________________

4. τὴν νίκην ἀγγείλαντος τοῦ στρατιώτου ________________________________________________________________________

5. τῶν ἀνδρῶν ὄντων κακῶν ____________________________________

6. κελεύοντος τοῦ βασιλέως τοὺς ἀνθρώπους ἔρχεσθαι

________________________________________________________________________

7. κλεψάσης τῆς σοφωτάτης χελώνης πάντα τὸν σῖτον, ὁ γεωργὸς ὠργίζετο.

________________________________________________________________________

b. Translate the following story:[39]

(1) ἀποβαλόντος (ἀποβάλλω, lose) τοῦ Σοφοῦ τὸν νέον υἱόν, οἰ φίλοι ἐβούλοντο ποιῆσαι καλόν τι. (2) οἱ μέν δῶρα ἔπεμψαν, οἱ δὲ σῖτον καὶ καρπόν, οἱ δ’ ἤνεγκον χρυσόν. (3) τῶν φίλων ἰδόντων τὸν Σοφὸν ἔτι δακρύοντα μετὰ πολλὰς ἡμέρας, ἀνήρ τις ὠργίζετο. (4)εἰπόντος τούτου ὅτι ὁ δακρύων Σοφὸς οὐκ ἦν ἀληθῶς σοφός, ἀπεκρίνατο ὁ Σοφὸς, ‘ἐγὼ σοφώτατος πάντων, διότι γιγνώσκω ὄτι τὸ οἰμώζειν ἀγαθὸν τοῖς ἀνθρώποις’.

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

2. Special Aorists (Third or Athematic Aorists)

Read the section on special aorists, the final variety of aorist verb forms, and notice the following:

▪ These aorists do not have a thematic vowel, although the stems end in a vowel.

▪ The aorist stem is found by removing the time-marker and the –ν ending of the aorist principal part: βαίνω, ἔβην, stem βη-.

▪ The aorist indicative endings are -ν, -ς,- ,-μεν, -τε,- σαν . They are placed directly on the aorist stem.

▪ The participle is formed by changing the vowel of the aorist stem: η ( ᾱ or ᾰ; ω ( ο or ου. The participle is then declined just like the –σα Aorist participle: βάς, βᾶσα, βάν. The alpha in the nominative masculine and feminine is long, whereas the alpha in the neuter is short.

▪ The infinitive is formed by adding – ναι to the Aorist stem. The accent is on the next-to-last syllable: βῆναι

▪ The imperative in the singular is formed by adding –θι to the Aorist stem. The accent is on the next-to-last syllable: βῆθι.

The following chart summarizes the features of this aorist.

|Continuous Principal Part |Aorist Principle Part |Aorist Participle |Infinitive |Imperative |

|βαίνω, go |ἔβην (stem = |βάς, βᾶσα, βάν |βῆναι |βῆθι |

| |βη-) | | | |

|ἵσταμαι, stand |ἔστην (stem = στη- |στάς, στᾶσα, στάν |στῆναι |στῆθι |

|γιγνώσκω, know |ἔγνων (stem = γνω- |γνούς, γνοῦσα, γνόν |γνῶναι |γνῶθι |

(Exercise 2

a. Fill in the chart below for the verb γιγνώσκω, ἔγνων. Check your answers with the paradigm on page 120 of the Textbook. (Imperatives are given above).

|Aorist Indicative |

|Singular Plural |

|_____________ ____________ |

|_____________ ____________ |

|_____________ ____________ |

|Translation __________________________ |

|Aorist Infinitive |

|Form Translation |

|_______________ ___________________ |

|Aorist Participle |

|Forms ________________________________ |

|Translation ________________________________ |

|Aorist Imperative |

|Form_____________ Translation____________ |

b. Decline the participle for the verb βαίνω, ἔβην (check your answers with the paradigm on page 120 of the Textbook for the nominative and genitive).

|Case |Masculine |Feminine |Neuter |

|N | | | |

|A | | | |

|G | | | |

|D | | | |

| | | | |

|N | | | |

|A | | | |

|G | | | |

|D | | | |

c. Translate the following forms:[40]

1. ἔγνων _______________________________

2. ἔβησαν _______________________________

3. γνόν _______________________________

4. στῆναι _______________________________

5. γνῶθι _______________________________

6. στᾶσιν _______________________________

7. ἔστης _______________________________

8. ἔγνω _______________________________

9. γνοῦσαι _______________________________

10. βάν _______________________________

3. Vocabulary for “Climbing the Stairs”

Nouns

|ὁ νοῦς | mind, sense ( paranoia |

Αdjectives

|μηδείς, μηδεμία, μηδέν |no one, nothing |

Verbs

|αἰτέω |ask, request; beg |

|βαίνω, ἔβην |go |

|ἀνα-βαίνω, ἀν-έβην |go up |

|κατα-βαίνω, κατ-έβην |go down |

|βλέπω, ἔβλεψα |look |

|ἀνα-βλέπω, ἀν-έβλεψα |look up |

|κατα-βλέπω, κατ- ἔβλεψα |look down |

|γιγνώσκω, ἔγνων |Know |

|ἵσταμαι, ἔστην |stand |

|ἀν-ίσταμαι, ἀν-έστην |stand up |

|καθ-εύδω, (Imperfect: καθηῦδον,|sleep, lie down to sleep |

|or καθεῦδον, or ἐκάθευδον) | |

|σημαίνω, ἐσήμηνα |show by a sign, signify, give a sign to do something, bid one to do something ( |

| |semantics |

|χρῆ (Imperfect ἐχρῆν) |it is necessary |

Adverbs

|ἄνω |Upward |

Conjunctions

|εἴπερ |if in fact |

Phrases

|ἔχω ἐν νῷ |have in mind |

4. Vocabulary for “Collecting the Fine”

Nouns

|τὸ ἀργύριον |small coin, piece of money, money |

|τὸ οὖς (ὠτός) |ear ( otology |

Pronouns

|ὅσπερ, ἥπερ, ὅπερ |the very one who |

Adjectives

|τάχιστος, η, ον |very swift |

Verbs

|ἀδικέω |be unjust, commit an injustice |

|δι-έρχομαι, δι-ῆλθον |go through |

|ἐξ-έρχομαι, ἐξῆλθον |come or go out |

|ἔφη |he, she, it said (aorist of φήμι, say) |

|λαβέ, εἰπέ, ἐλθέ, εὑρέ, ἰδέ |take! say! go! or come!, find!, see! (aorist imperatives) |

|πέιθω, ἔπεισα |persuade, prevail upon |

Prepositions

|μετά + Genitive |with, in company with after |

|μετά + Accusative | |

Phrases

|δός μοι |permit me |

PRACTICE QUIZ 2, LESSONS 27 AND 28.

1. Chart the forms of the verb βλέπω, ἔβλεψα below:

| Present Continuous Indicative |Aorist Indicative |

|Singular Plural |Singular Plural |

|βλέπω ___________________ |ἔβλεψα ____________ |

|_______________ ___________________ |_____________ ____________ |

|_______________ ___________________ |_____________ ____________ |

|Translation ___________________ |Translation ____________ |

|Imperfect Continuous Indicative | |

|Singular Plural |X |

|_______________ ___________________ | |

|_______________ ___________________ | |

|_______________ ___________________ | |

|Τranslation ___________________________ | |

|Continuous Infinitive |Aorist Participle |

|Form Translation |Form Translation |

|_______________ _______________ |___________ _______________ |

|Continuous Participle |Aorist Participle |

|Forms _________________________________ |Forms ________________________ |

|Translation _____________________________ |Translation ____________________ |

2. Decline the aorist participle for βλέπω:

|Case |Masculine |Feminine |Neuter |

|N | | | |

|A | | | |

|G | | | |

|D | | | |

| | | | |

|N | | | |

|A | | | |

|G | | | |

|D | | | |

3. Write out the aorist forms for the -λα, and Special Aorist verbs given on the charts below:

|Aorist Indicative |Aorist Indicative |

|Singular Plural |Singular Plural |

|ἔκρινα ____________ |ἔβην ____________ |

|_____________ ____________ |_____________ ____________ |

|_____________ ____________ |_____________ ____________ |

|Translation __________________________ |Translation __________________________ |

|Aorist Infinitive |Aorist Infinitive |

|Form ________________ |Form ________________ |

|Translation _______________ |Translation _____________ |

|Aorist Participle |Aorist Participle |

|Forms ____________________________ |Forms _______________________ |

|Translation ____________________________ |Translation ____________________________ |

4. Give the principal parts for the following verbs. All of the various ways of forming –σα, -λα, and Special Aorists are included*:

|Meaning |Continuous |Aorist |

| |1.φυλάττω | |

| |2. ἀκούω | |

| |3. νομίζω | |

| |4. βοάω | |

| |5. αἰτέω | |

| |6. μέλλω | |

| |7. ἀγγέλλω | |

| |8. οἰκτίρω | |

| |9. γιγνώσκω | |

| |10. ἵσταμαι | |

* Be sure to practice with all the verbs whose Principal parts are given in the Lesson 27 vocabulary.

5. Translate the following:

1. γήμας ______________________________________

2. ἔμεινας ______________________________________

3. ἠθέλησαν ______________________________________

4. νοσῆσαι ______________________________________

5. ἔγνω ______________________________________

6. ἔσχον ἵππον ______________________________________

7. ἔκρυψαν ______________________________________

6. Translate the following:

(1) ἀνήρ τις ἀναβλέψας εἶδε τὸν Σοφὸν καθιζόμενον ἐν τῷ ἄνω τείχει τῆς οἰκίας. (2) ἐκάλεσε, ‘καταβῆθι’. (3) καὶ καταβαίνοντος τοῦ Σοφοῦ, ὁ ἀνὴρ ἔστη ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ. (4) ὅτε ὁ Σοφὸς ἐξῆλθε, ὁ ἀνὴρ ἔπληξε αὐτὸν τὰ ὦτα καὶ τὰ σκέλη. (5) ἁπτόμενος τοῦ ἀνδρός, ὁ Σοφὸς ἠρώτησεν, ‘διὰ τί ἔπληξας με;’ (6) ὁ δ’ ἔφη, ‘μισῶ σε διότι ἑγέλασας, ἐμοῦ ἀγόντος ἐλεφάντα πρὸς τὴν βασιλικὴν οἰκίαν. (7) ἐμοὶ οὐκ ἔδοξε γελοῖον.’ (8) εἰπόντος τοῦ Σοφοῦ, ‘ ἀδικέω. δός μοι δίδοναί σοι ἀργύριον ὡς ζημίαν (fine)’, ὁ δ’ἀνὴρ ἀπεκρίνατο, ‘ἔπεισας με. οὐκέτι ἀμφισβητοῦμεν.’

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

7. Εxplicate the words printed in bold:

|Line |Greek |Person |Number |Tense/Aspect |Mood |Construction |

|1. |καθιζόμενον | | | | | |

|3. |καταβαίνοντος | | | | | |

|6. |ἐγέλασας | | | | | |

|8. |εἰπόντος | | | | | |

|8. |ἀπεκρίνατο | | | | | |

8. Give the equivalents for the following:

|1. blind | |2. third | |

|3. begin | |4. converse with | |

|5. lie down to sleep | |6. show by a sign | |

|7. mind, sense | |8. step forth | |

|9. in company with | |10. the very one who | |

|11. body | |12. whole | |

|13. fourth | |14. neither | |

|15. beg, request | |16. it was necessary | |

ΑNSWERS, PRACTICE QUIZ 2, LESSONS 27 AND 28.

1. Chart the forms of the verb βλέπω, ἔβλεψα.

|Present Continuous Indicative |Aorist Indicative |

|Singular Plural |Singular Plural |

|βλέπω βλέπομεν |ἔβλεψα ἐβλέψαμεν |

|βλέπεις βλέπετε |ἔβλεψας ἐβλέψατε |

|βλέπει βλέπουσι(ν) |ἔβλεψε(ν) ἔβλεψαν |

|Translation: they look, are looking |Translation: they looked |

|Imperfect Continuous Indicative | |

|Singular Plural |X |

|ἔβλεπον ἐβλέπομεν | |

|ἔβλεπες ἐβλέπετε | |

|ἔβλεπε(ν) ἔβλεπον | |

|Τranslation: they were looking | |

|Continuous Infinitive |Aorist Infinitive |

|Form Translation |Form Translation |

|βλέπειν to be looking |βλέψαι to look |

|Continuous Participle |Aorist Participle |

|Forms βλέπων, ουσα, ον Translation: looking |Forms βλέψας, ασα, αν Translation: |

| |having looked |

2. Decline the aorist participle for βλέπω, ἔβλεψα.

|Case |Masculine |Feminine |Neuter |

|N |βλέψας |βλέψασα |βλέψαν |

|A |βλέψαντα |βλέψασαν |βλέψαν |

|G |βλέψαντος |βλεψάσης |βλέψαντος |

|D |βλέψαντι |βλεψάσῃ |βλέψαντι |

| | | | |

|N |βλέψαντες |βλέψασαι |βλέψαντα |

|A |βλέψαντας |βλεψάσας |βλέψαντα |

|G |βλεψάντων |βλεψασῶν |βλεψάντων |

|D |βλέψασι(ν) |βλεψάσαις |βλέψασι(ν) |

3. Write out the aorist forms for -λα, and Special Aorist verbs:

|Aorist Indicative |Aorist Indicative |

|Singular Plural |Singular Plural |

|ἔκρινα ἐκρίναμεν |ἔβην ἔβημεν |

|ἔκρινας ἐκρίνατε |ἔβης ἔβητε |

|ἔκρινε(ν) ἔκριναν |ἔβη ἔβησαν |

|Translation: they judged |Translation: they went |

|Aorist Infinitive |Aorist Infinitive |

|Form κρῖναι |Form βῆναι |

|Translation: to judge |Translation: to go |

|Aorist Participle |Aorist Participle |

|Forms κρίνας, ασα, αν |Forms βάς, βᾶσα, βάν |

|Translation: having judged |Translation: having gone |

2. Give the principal parts for the following verbs:

|Continuous |Aorist |Meaning |

|1.φυλάττω |ἐφύλαξα |Guard |

|2. ἀκούω |ἤκουσα |Hear |

|3. νομίζω |ἐνόμισα |think, consider |

|4. βοάω |ἐβόησα |Shout |

|5. αἰτέω |ᾔτησα |ask, request; beg |

|6. μέλλω |ἐμέλλησα |intend, be about to |

|7. ἀγγέλλω |ἤγγειλα |Announce |

|8. οἰκτίρω |ᾤκτιρα |Pity |

|9. γιγνώσκω |ἔγνων |Know |

|10. ἵσταμαι |ἔστην |Stand |

5. Translate the following:

1. γήμας he, having married

2. ἔμεινας you remained

3. ἠθέλησαν they wanted

4. νοσῆσαι to be sick (once); to get sick (ingressive)

5. ἔγνω he, she, it knew

6. ἔσχον ἵππον Ι/they got a horse (ingressive)

6. Translate the following:

(1) ἀνήρ τις ἀναβλέψας εἶδε τὸν Σοφὸν καθιζόμενον ἐν τῷ ἄνω τείχει τῆς οἰκίας. (2) ἐκάλεσε, ‘καταβῆθι’. (3) καὶ καταβαίντος τοῦ Σοφοῦ, ὁ ἀνὴρ ἔστη ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ. (4) ὅτε ὁ Σοφὸς ἐξῆλθε, ὁ ἀνὴρ ἔπληξε αὐτὸν τὰ ὦτα καὶ τὰ σκέλη. (5) ἁπτόμενος τοῦ ἀνδρός, ὁ Σοφὸς ἠρώτησεν, ‘διὰ τί ἔπληξας με;’ (6) ὁ δ’ ἔφη, ‘μισῶ σε διότι ἑγέλασας, ἐμοῦ ἀγόντος ἐλεφάντα πρὸς τὴν βασιλικὴν οἰκίαν. (7) ἐμοὶ οὐκ ἔδοξε γελοῖον.’ (8) εἰπόντος τοῦ Σοφοῦ, ‘ἀδικέω. δός μοι δίδοναί σοι ἀργύριον ὡς ζημίαν (fine)’, ὁ ἀνὴρ ἀπεκρίνατο, ‘ἔπεισας με. οὐκέτι ἀμφισβητοῦμεν.’

(1) A certain man, having looked up, saw the Wise One sitting on the upper wall of his house. (2) He called out, “Come down”. (3) And with the Wise One coming down (while the Wise One was coming down), the man stood in the street. (4) When the Wise One came out, the man struck him on his ears and legs. (5) Laying hold of the man, the Wise one asked, “Why did you strike me.” (6) And he said, “I hate you because you burst into laughter, with me leading (when I was leading) an elephant to the royal house. It did not seem funny to me.” And with the Wise One having said (after the Wise One said), “I am unjust. Permit me to give you a coin as a fine”, the man answered, “You persuaded me. No longer are we disputing.”

7. Εxplicate the words printed in bold:

|Line |Greek |Person |Number |Tense/Aspect |Mood |Construction |

|1. |καθιζόμενον |X |X |Continuous |Participle |Αcc., M, Sg, modifying |

| | | | | | |the direct object, τὸν |

| | | | | | |Σοφόν |

|3. |καταβαίνοντος |Χ |Χ |Continuous |Participle |Genitive Absolute |

|6. |ἐγέλασας |2nd |Sg |Aorist |Indicative |Main Verb, can be |

| | | | | | |Ingressive Aorist |

|8. |εἰπόντος |X |X |Aorist |Participle |Genitive Absolute |

|8. |ἀπεκρίνατο |3rd |Sg |Aorist |Indicative |Main Verb |

8. Give the equivalents for the following:

|1. blind |τυφλός, ή, όν |2. third |τρίτος, η, ον |

|3. begin |ἄρχομαι + inf |4. converse with |διαλέγομαι + dat |

|5. sleep |καθεύδω |6. show by a sign |σημαίνω |

|7. mind, sense |ὁ νοῦς |8. step forth |προβαίνω |

|9. in company with |μετά + Genitive |10. the very one who |ὅσπερ, ἥπερ, ὅπερ |

|11. body |τὸ σῶμα (σώματος) |12. whole |ὅλος, η, ον |

|13. fourth |τέταρτος, η, ον |14. neither |οὐδέτερος, α, ον |

|15. beg, request |αἰτέω |16. it was necessary |ἐχρῆν |

CHECKLIST OF NEW MATERIALS, LESSONS 25-28

1. Accents

Accenting Aorist Infinitives and Participles

2. Verbs

a. The Continuous Stem, including Imperfect Indicative

b. The Aorist Stem: ε/ο Aorists, -σα, -λα Aorists, Special Aorists

c. Principal Parts for the Continuous and Aorist Stems

d. Three Kinds of Aorist Conjugation

5. Declension of Participles

a. The ε/ο Aorist Participle: λιπών, λιποῦσα, λιπόν: Accent on Endings

b. The –σα, -λα Αorist Participle: παύσᾱς, παύσᾱσα, παῦσᾰν: Accent on last syllable of stem. The masculine and feminine, but not the neuter, stems are long.

c. The Special Aorist Participle: βάς, βᾶσα, βάν: Accent on stem. The masculine and feminine, but not the neuter, stems are long.

6. Syntax

a. Aspect: Continuous and Aorist

b. Tense: Present, Imperfect and Aorist

c. Ingressive Aorist: ἐδάκρυσεν, He burst into tears.

d. Genitive Absolute: αὐτῶν ὄντων φίλων, With them being friends; since they are friends

CUMULATIVE VOCABULARY: LESSONS 25 - 28

Nouns

|ὁ ἄνεμος |wind -> anemometer |

|τὸ ἀργύριον |small coin, piece of money, money |

|ὁ βροτός |mortal -> ambrosia |

|ὁ ἐλέφας (ἐλέφαντος) |elephant -> elephant |

|τὸ ἔτος (ἔτους) |year -> Etesian |

|ὁ καρπός |fruit, harvest |

|ὁ νοῦς | mind, sense -> paranoia |

|τὸ οὖς (ὠτός) |ear -> otology |

|ὁ πόνος |labor, work |

|τὸ σκέλος (σκέλους) |leg -> skeleton |

|τὸ σπέρμα (σπέρματος) |seed -> sperm |

|τὸ σῶμα (σώματος) |body -> somatic |

|τὸ τεῖχος (τείχους) |Wall |

|ὁ ὕπνος |sleep -> hypnosis |

|ὁ χρυσός |gold -> chrysanthemum |

|ἡ ὥρα |season -> hour |

Pronouns

|ὅσπερ, ἥπερ, ὅπερ |the very one who |

Adjectives

|βασιλικός, ή, όν |royal -> basilica |

|γελοῖος, α, ον |Funny |

|καθαρός, ά, όν |clean, pure -> cartharsis |

|κάλλιστος, η, ον |most beautiful, most lovely, noblest |

|κρείττων, κρεῖττον |better (more powerful) |

|μηδείς, μηδεμία, μηδέν |not one, no + expressed noun |

| |no one, nothing (with implied nouns) |

|ὅλος, η, ον |whole -> holistic |

|οὐδέτερος, α, ον |neither of two |

|τάχιστος, η, ον |fastest, quickest |

|τέταρτος, η, ον |fourth -> tetralogy |

|τρίτος, η, ον |third -> tritium, trilogy |

|τυφλός, ή, όν |Blind |

Verbs

|ἀδικέω |be unjust, commit an injustice |

|ἀμφισβητέω |dispute, argue |

|ἅπτομαι + gen |take hold of |

|ἄρχομαι + inf |begin to |

|ἔφη |he, she, it said (aorist of φήμι, say) |

|ζάω |live, be alive -> zoology |

|(ζῶ, ζῇς, ζῇ | |

|Infinitive ζῆν) | |

|καθ-εύδω, ( imperfect: |sleep, lie down to sleep |

|καθηῦδον, or καθεῦδον, or ἐκάθευδον) | |

|λαβέ, εἰπέ, ἐλθέ, εὑρέ, ἰδέ |take! say! go! or come!, find!, see! (aorist imperatives) |

|πεινάω |be hungry |

|πεινῶ, πεινῇς, πεινῇ | |

|infinitive πεινῆν | |

|χρῆ (Imperfect ἐχρῆν) |it is necessary |

Verbs with ε/ο Aorists with Similar Stems

|βάλλω, ἔβαλον |throw -> ballistic |

|εὑρίσκω, ηὗρον |find -> heuristic |

|θνῄσκω, ἔθανον |die -> thanatology |

|ἀποθνῄσκω, ἀπέθανεν | |

|κάμνω, ἔκαμον |be weary |

|λαμβάνω,ἔλαβον |take |

|ἀναλαμβάνω |take up, pick up take |

|ἀπολαμβάνω |back, take away |

|λείπω, ἔλιπον |Leave |

|μανθάνω, ἔμαθον |learn -> polymath |

|πίνω, ἔπιον |Drink |

|πίπτω, ἔπεσον |Fall |

|τυγχάνω, ἔτυχον |happen, succeed |

|ἐντυγχάνω, ἐνέτυχον |meet up with, chance upon + Dative |

Verbs with ε/ο Aorists with Different Stems

|ἄγω, ἤγαγον (ἀγαγ-) |Lead |

|ἐσθίω, ἔφαγον (φαγ-) |eat -> esophagus |

|ἔχω, ἔσχον (imperfect, εἶχον) |have, hold, possess, (ingressive aorist, acquired, got), be able to + infinitive |

|ἀνέχω |hold up |

|ἔρχομαι, ἦλθον (ἐλθ-) |come, go go |

|ἀπ-έρχομαι |away go |

|δι-έρχομαι |through come or|

|ἐξ-έρχομαι |go out |

|λέγω, εἶπον (εἰπ-) |say -> legend, epic |

|ὁράω, εἶδον (ἰδ-) |see -> idea |

|φέρω, ἤνεγκον (ἐνεγκ-) |carry -> phosphorus |

Verbs with Regular –σα Aorists

|ἀκούω, ἤκουσα |Hear |

|βλέπω, ἔβλεψα |look |

|ἀνα-βλέπω, ἀν-έβλεψα |look up |

|κατα-βλέπω, κατ- έβλεψα |look down |

|δακρύω, ἐδάκρυσα |Cry |

|κελεύω, ἐκέλευσα |bid, urge, order |

|γράφω, ἔγραψα |Write |

|θάπτω, ἔθαψα |Bury |

|κλέπτω, ἔκλεψα |Steal |

|κρύπτω, ἔκρυψα |Hide |

|πείθω, ἔπεισα |Persuade |

|πέμπω, ἔπεμψα |Send |

|πλήττω, ἔπληξα |Strike |

|φυλάττω, ἐφύλαξα |Guard |

|νομίζω, ἐνόμισα |think, consider |

Contract Verbs with Regular –σα Aorists

|αἰτέω, ᾔτησα |Ask |

|βοάω, ἐβόησα |Shout |

|ζητέω, ἐζήτησα |Seek |

|κοινωνέω, ἐκοινώνησα |Share |

|λυπέω, ἐλύπησα |vex, distress |

|μισέω, ἐμίσησα |Hate |

|οἰκέω, ᾤκησα |dwell, inhabit |

|ὁμολογέω, ὡμολόγησα |Agree |

|ποιέω, ἐποίησα |do, make |

|πονέω, ἐπόνησα |labor, toil |

|φιλέω, ἐφίλησα |love, like |

|φορέω, ἐφόφησα |wear, carry around |

|ἐρωτάω, ἠρώτησα |Ask |

|ζάω, ἔζησα |Live |

|πεινάω, ἐπείνησα |be hungry |

|σιγάω, ἐσίγησα |be silent |

Verbs with Irregular –σα Aorists

|ἐθέλω, ἠθέλησα |Wish |

|μέλλω, ἐμέλλησα |Intend |

|δοκέω, ἔδοξα |seem, seem best to, think |

Verbs with –λα Aorists

|ἀγγέλλω, ἤγγειλα |Announce |

|γαμέω, ἔγημα |Marry |

|καθαίρω, ἐκάθηρα |cleanse, purify |

|κρίνω, ἔκρῑνα |Judge |

|κτείνω, ἔκτεινα |kill, slay |

|ἀποκτέινω, ἀπέκτεινα | |

|μένω, ἔμεινα |wait, stay, remain |

|οἰκτίρω, ᾤκτιρα |Pity |

|σημαίνω, ἐσήμηνα |show by a sign, signify, give a sign to do something, bid one to do something |

Verbs with Special Aorists

|βαίνω, ἔβην |go |

|ἀνα-βαίνω, ἀν-έβην |go up |

|εἰσ-βαίνω, εἰσ-ἐβην |enter |

|ἐκ-βαίνω, ἐξ-έβην |go out, step out go |

|κατα-βαίνω, κατ-έβην |down |

|γιγνώσκω, ἔγνων |Know |

|ἵσταμαι, ἔστην |stand |

|ἀνίσταμαι, ἀνέστην |stand up |

Verb Endings

|-εται |he, she, it is X-ing (3rd Person, Singular, Present Indicative) |

|-ονται |they are X-ing (3rd Person, Plural, Present Indicative) |

|-ετο |he, she, it was X-ing (3rd Person, Singular, |

| |Imperfect Indicative) |

|-οντο |they were X-ing (3rd Person, Plural, Imperfect Indicative) |

|-ατο |he, she, it X-ed (3rd Person, Singular, Aorist) |

|-αντο |they X-ed (3rd Person, Plural, Aorist) |

Adverbs

|ἄνω |Upward |

Conjunctions

|εἴπερ |if in fact |

Prepositions

|μετά + Genitive |with, in company with |

Phrases

|δός μοι |permit me |

|ἔχω ἐν νῷ |have in mind |

|ἦν ποτε καὶ οὐκ ἦν |once there was and there was not |

PRACTICE TEST: UNIT ONE, LESSONS 25 - 28

1. Chart the continuous and aorist forms for βάλλω, ἔβαλον

|Present Continuous Indicative |Aorist Indicative |

|Singular Plural |Singular Plural |

|βάλλω __________________ |ἔβαλον ___________ |

|_______________ ___________________ |_____________ ____________ |

|_______________ ___________________ |_____________ ____________ |

|Translation ___________________ |Translation ____________ |

|Imperfect Continuous Indicative | |

|Singular Plural |X |

|_______________ ___________________ | |

|_______________ ___________________ | |

|_______________ ___________________ | |

|Τranslation ___________________________ | |

|Continuous Infinitive |Aorist Infinitive |

|Form Translation |Form Translation |

|_______________ _______________ |___________ _______________ |

|Continuous Participle |Aorist Participle |

|Forms _______________________________ |Forms _________________________ |

|Translation ___________________________ |Translation ____________________ |

2. Translate the following pairs, being careful to distinguishing the different systems and forms:

a. πιεῖν, πίνειν ________________________________________________

b. ἔλειπεν, ἔλιπεν ________________________________________________

c πιοῦσι, πίνουσι ________________________________________________

d. ηὗρον, εὑρόν ________________________________________________

3. Chart the aorist system for πέμπω, ἔπεμψα and γιγνώσκω, ἔγνων

|Aorist Indicative |Aorist Indicative |

|Singular Plural |Singular Plural |

|ἔπεμψα ____________ |ἔγνων ____________ |

|_____________ ____________ |_____________ ____________ |

|_____________ ____________ |_____________ ____________ |

|Translation ____________ |Translation ____________ |

|Aorist Infinitive |Aorist Infinitive |

|Form Translation |Form Translation |

|___________ _______________ |___________ _______________ |

|Aorist Participle |Aorist Participle |

|Forms |Forms |

|______________________________ |_____________________________ Translation |

|Translation _______________ |_______________ |

4. Decline the Aorist Participle for μένω, ἔμεινα

|Case |Masculine |Feminine |Neuter |

|N | | | |

|A | | | |

|G | | | |

|D | | | |

| | | | |

|N | | | |

|A | | | |

|G | | | |

|D | | | |

5. Translate the following pairs, being careful to distinguishing the different systems and forms:

a. ἔπεμπε, ἔπεμψε _______________________________________________

b. γνοῦσι, γιγνώσκουσι ________________________________________________

c πέμψας, ἔπεμψας ________________________________________________

d. πέμψασαι, πέμψασι ________________________________________________

6. Give the principal parts for the following verbs. All of the various ways of forming –σα, -λα, and Special Aorists are included:

|Continuous |Aorist |Meaning |

|1.πείθω | | |

|2. ἀποθνῄσκω | | |

|3. αἰτέω | | |

|4. κελεύω | | |

|5. δοκέω | | |

|6. ἐθέλω | | |

|7. ζάω | | |

|8. βλέπω | | |

|9. ἀποβαίνω | | |

|10. φέρω | | |

|11. ἄγω | | |

|12. γαμέω | | |

7. Τranslate the following, being sure to differentiate between imperfects and aorists. Then answer the questions about the words which are in bold print.

(1) βασιλεῖ τινί ποτε ἦν τέτταρες σύμβουλοι (counselors) οὓς ὁ βασιλεὺς ἐφίλησεν, καίπερ ἀεὶ ἔλεγον αὐτῷ ψευδῆ. (2) καὶ ἡμέρᾳ τινι, τῶν τεττάρων καθιζομένων παρὰ τῷ ἄνω μέρει τῆς οἰκίας τῆς βασιλικῆς, ἀνήρ τις ἦλθεν ἄγων μέγιστον ἐλέφαντα ὃν ἤθελε διδόναι τῷ βασιλεῖ. (3) οὐδεὶς ἐν τῷ τόπῷ τοῦτῴ ποτε εἶδε ἐλέφαντα, καὶ οὐκ ἔγνωσαν τί ἔστι. (4) ὁ πρῶτος σύμβουλος τὸν δεύτερον ἔπεμψε ὥστε ἀγγεῖλαι τοῦτο τὸ ἄτοπον δῶρον τῷ βασιλεῖ. (5) αὐτοῦ οὐ πείθοντος τὸν βασιλέα ἐξέλθεῖν ἐκ τῆς οἰκίας ὥστε ἰδεῖν τὸ ζῷον, ὁ τρίτος σύμβουλος εἰσῆλθε εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν. (6) ἠρώτησε τὸν βασιλέα, ‘τί ἔτυχε; τί οὐκ ἐξέβης.’ (7) καὶ ὁ δ’ἀπεκρίνατο, ‘διότι ὑμεῖς σύμβουλοι οὔποτε λέγετε τὸ ἀληθές· πολλῷ κρεῖττον οὐκ πειθέσθαι (trust + Dative) ὑμῖν’. (8) καὶ ὁ βασιλεὺς ἀναστὰς ἔλιπε ἐκ τῆς οἰκίας. (9) εἶχεν γὰρ ἐν νῷ πλῆξαι τοὺς σύμβουλας τὰ ὦτα καὶ τὰ σκέλη ὡς ζημίαν (fine), διότι οὐκ εἷπον τὸ ἀληθές. (10) ἀλλὰ ἀντὶ τοῦ πλῆξαι αὐτοὺς, ἐγέλασεν ὅτε εἷδε τὸν ἐλέφαντα, νομίζων αὐτὸν μάλιστα γελοῖον. (11) ἐγέλασεν πολλά. (12) ‘τῷ ὄντι, τὸ γελάσαι τὸ ἄριστον δῶρον’ ἔφη ὁ βασιλεύς αὑτῷ, ‘οὐκ ὁ ἐλέφας’.

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

8. Explicate the words in bold in the passage above:

|Sent. # |Greek |Person |Number |Tense/Aspect |Mood |Construction |

|2. |καθιζομένων | | | | | |

|2. |ἤθελε | | | | | |

|3. |ἀγγεῖλαι | | | | | |

|6. |ἔτυχε | | | | | |

|8. |ἀναστάς | | | | | |

|9. |εἷχον | | | | | |

|10. |ἐγέλασεν | | | | | |

|12. |γελάσαι | | | | | |

9. Vocabulary.

|1. ὁ ἄνεμος | |2. ὁ βροτός | |

|3. . τὸ ἔτος | |4. ἀμφισβητέω | |

|5. ἄρχομαι | |6. ὅλος, η, ον | |

|7. τὸ σκέλος | |8. ἡ ὥρα | |

|9. ἅπτομαι | |10. εἴπερ | |

|11. ἔφη | |12. μετά + Genitive | |

|13. δός μοι | |14. τάχιστος, η, ον | |

|15. blind | |16. not one, no | |

|17. sleep | |18. gold | |

|19. be unjust | |20. cleanse | |

ANSWERS, PRACTICE TEST: UNIT ONE, LESSONS 25 - 28

1. Chart the continuous and aorist forms for βάλλω, ἔβαλον

|Present Continuous Indicative |Aorist Indicative |

|Singular Plural |Singular Plural |

|βάλλω βάλλομεν |ἔβαλον ἐβάλομεν |

|βάλλεις βάλλετε |ἔβαλες ἐβάλετε |

|βάλλει βάλλουσι(ν) |ἔβαλε(ν) ἔβαλον |

|Translation: they throw, are throwing |Translation: they threw |

|Imperfect Continuous Indicative | |

|Singular Plural |Χ |

|ἔβαλλον ἐβάλλομεν | |

|ἔβαλλες ἐβάλλετε | |

| | |

|ἔβαλλε(ν) ἔβαλλον | |

|Τranslation: they were throwing | |

|Continuous Infinitive |Aorist Infinitive |

|Form Translation |Form Translation |

|βάλλειν to be throwing |βαλεῖν to throw (once) |

|Continuous Participle |Aorist Participle |

|Forms βάλλων, ουσα, ον |Forms βαλών, οῦσα, όν |

|Translation: throwing |Translation: having thrown |

2. Translate the following pairs, being careful to distinguishing the different systems and forms:

a. πιεῖν, πίνειν to drink (once), to be drinking

b. ἔλειπεν, ἔλιπεν he was leaving, he left

c πιοῦσι, πίνουσι to them, having drunk; to them, drinking/ they drink

d. ηὗρον, εὑρόν I/they found, it having found

3. Chart the aorist system for πέμπω, ἔπεμψα and γιγνώσκω, ἔγνων

|Aorist Indicative |Aorist Indicative |

|Singular Plural |Singular Plural |

|ἔπεμψα ἐπέμψαμεν |ἔγνων ἔγνωμεν |

|ἔπεμψας ἐπέμψατε |ἔγνως ἔγνωτε |

|ἔπεμψε(ν) ἔπεμψαν |ἔγνω ἔγνωσαν |

|They send |They knew |

|Aorist Infinitive |Aorist Infinitive |

|Form πέμψαι |Form γνῶναι |

|Translation: to send (once) |Translation: to know (once) |

|Aorist Participle |Aorist Participle |

|Forms πέμψας, ασα, αν |γνούς, γνοῦσα, γνόν |

|Translation: having sent |Translation: having known |

4. Decline the Aorist Participle for μένω, ἔμεινα

This is the same paradigm as on page 117, but without a sigma sound. Long marks have been included below to clarify accentuation.

|Case |Masculine |Feminine |Neuter |

|N |μείνᾱς |μείνᾱσα |μεῖνᾰς |

|A |μείναντα |μείνασαν |μεῖνᾰς |

|G |μείναντος |μεινάσης |μείναντος |

|D |μείναντι |μεινάσῃ |μείναντι |

| | | | |

|N |μείναντες |μείνασαι |μείναντα |

|A |μείναντας |μεινάσᾱς |μείναντα |

|G |μεινάντων |μεινασῶν |μεινάντων |

|D |μείνασι(ν) |μεινάσαις |μείνασι(ν) |

5. Translate the following pairs, being careful to distinguishing the different systems and forms:

a. ἔπεμπε, ἔπεμψε he was sending, he sent

b. γνοῦσι, γιγνώσκουσι to them having known; to them knowing/ they know

c πέμψας, ἔπεμψας he, having sent, you sent

d. πέμψασαι, πέμψασι they (F) having sent, to them having sent

6. Give the principal parts for the following verbs. All of the various ways of forming –σα, -λα, and Special Aorists are included*:

|Continuous |Aorist |Meaning |

|1.πείθω |ἔπεισα |Persuade |

|2. ἀποθνῄσκω |ἀπέθανον |Die |

|3. αἰτέω |ᾔτησα |request, ask; beg |

|4. κελεύω |ἐκέλευσα |Order |

|5. δοκέω |ἔδοξα |seem, seem best to, think |

|6. ἐθέλω |ἠθέλησα |Wish |

|7. ζάω |ἔζησα |Live |

|8. βλέπω |ἔβλεψα |See |

|9. καταβαίνω |κατέβην |step down |

|10. φέρω |ἤνεγκον |Carry |

|11. ἄγω |ἤγαγον |Lead |

|12. γαμέω |ἔγημα |Marry |

7. Τranslate the following, being sure to differentiate between imperfects and aorists:

(1) βασιλεῖ τινί ποτε ἦν τέτταρες σύμβουλοι (counselors) οὓς ὁ βασιλεὺς ἐφίλησεν, καίπερ ἀεὶ ἔλεγον αὐτῷ ψευδῆ. (2) καὶ ἡμέρᾳ τινι, τῶν τεττάρων καθιζομένων παρὰ τῷ ἄνω μέρει τῆς οἰκίας τῆς βασιλικῆς, ἀνήρ τις ἦλθεν ἄγων μέγιστον ἐλέφαντα ὃν ἤθελε διδόναι τῷ βασιλεῖ. (3) οὐδεὶς ἐν τῷ τόπῷ τοῦτῴ ποτε εἶδε ἐλέφαντα, καὶ οὐκ ἔγνωσαν τί ἐστιν. (4) ὁ πρῶτος σύμβουλος τὸν δεύτερον ἔπεμψε ὥστε ἀγγεῖλαι τοῦτο τὸ ἄτοπον δῶρον τῷ βασιλεῖ. (5) αὐτοῦ οὐ πείθοντος τὸν βασιλέα ἐξέλθεῖν ἐκ τῆς οἰκίας ὥστε ἰδεῖν τὸ ζῷον, ὁ τρίτος σύμβουλος εἰσῆλθε εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν. (6) ἠρώτησε τὸν βασιλέα, ‘τί ἔτυχε; τί οὐκ ἐξέβης.’ (7) καὶ ὁ δ’ἀπεκρίνατο, ‘διότι ὑμεῖς σύμβουλοι οὔποτε λέγετε τὸ ἀληθές· πολλῷ κρεῖττον οὐκ πειθέσθαι (trust + Dative) ὑμῖν’. (8) καὶ ὁ βασιλεὺς ἀναστὰς ἔλιπε ἐκ τῆς οἰκίας. (9) εἶχεν γὰρ ἐν νῷ πλῆξαι τοὺς σύμβουλας τὰ ὦτα καὶ τὰ σκέλη ὡς ζημίαν (fine), διότι οὐκ εἷπον τὸ ἀληθές. (10) ἀλλὰ ἀντὶ τοῦ πλῆξαι αὐτοὺς, ἐγέλασεν ὅτε εἷδε τὸν ἐλέφαντα, νομίζων αὐτὸν μάλιστα γελοῖον. (11) ἐγέλασεν πολλά. (12) ‘τῷ ὄντι, τὸ γελάσαι τὸ ἄριστον δῶρον’ ἔφη ὁ βασιλεύς αὑτῷ, ‘οὐκ ὁ ἐλέφας’.

(1)A certain king once had four counselors, whom the king loved even though they always kept telling him lies (false things). (2) And one day, with the four counselors sitting (when the four counselors were sitting) by the upper wall of the royal house, a certain man came leading a very large elephant, whom he was wishing to give to the king. (3) No one in this place ever saw an elephant, and they did not know what it (is) was. (4) The first counselor sent the second so as to announce this strange gift to the king. (5) With him not persuading (when he did not persuade) the king to come out of the house so as to see the creature, the third counselor entered the house. (6) He asked the king, “What happened? Why didn’t you come out?” (7) And he answered, “Because you counselors never tell the truth. It is much (dative of degree of difference) better not to trust you”. (8) And the king, having stood up, left the house. (9) For he had in mind (imperfect) to strike the counselors on their ears and legs as a fine because they did not tell the truth. (10) But instead of striking them, he burst into laughter when he saw the elephant, thinking it to be especially funny. (11) He laughed a lot (cognate accusative). (12) “In reality, laughing is the best gift,” said the king to himself, “not the elephant.”

b. Explicate the words in bold in the passage above:

|Sent. # |Greek |Person |Number |Tense/Aspect |Mood |Construction |

|2. |καθιζομένων |X |X |Continuous |Participle |Genitive Absolute |

|2. |ἤθελε |3rd |S |Imperfect |Indicative |M.V. |

|3. |ἀγγεῖλαι |X |X |Aorist |Infinitive |Probable Result |

|6. |ἔτυχε |3rd |S |Aorist |Indicative |M.V. |

|8. |ἀναστάς |X |X |Aorist |Participle |Modifies the subject contained|

| | | | | | |in the verb ἔλιπε |

|9. |εἷχεν |3rd |S |Imperfect |Indicative |M.V. |

|10. |ἐγέλασεν |3rd |S |Aorist |Indicative |Ingressive Aorist |

|12. |γελάσαι |X |X |Aorist |Infinitive |Nominative Articular |

| | | | | | |Infinitive |

8. Vocabulary.

|1. ὁ ἄνεμος |wind |2. ὁ βροτός |mortal |

|3.τὸ ἔτος |year |4. ἀμφισβητέω |dispute |

|5. ἄρχομαι |begin |6. ὅλος, η, ον |whole |

|7. τὸ σκέλος |leg |8.ἡ ὥρα |season |

|9. ἅπτομαι |take hold of |10. εἴπερ |if in fact |

|11. δός μοι |permit me |12. τάχιστος, η, ον |very swift |

|13. ἔφη |he said |14. μετά + Gen |with |

|15. blind |τυφλός, ή, όν |16. not one, no |μηδείς, μηδεμία, μηδέν |

|17. sleep |ὁ ὕπνος |18. gold |ὁ χρυσοός |

|19. be unjust |ἀδικέω |20. cleanse |καθαίρω, ἐκάθηρα |

UNIT TWO: LESSONS 29-34

Three Principal Parts, Conditionals, Indirect Discourse and Gnomic Aorist.

LESSON 29: THE FUTURE

This lesson introduces the future tense (“I will go”) and the second principal part. After this lesson, you will know the three major tenses and systems of the verb, and the first three principal parts. With this information, you will have completed an important part of mastering Greek verbs. The next five lessons will not introduce any new forms or systems, so that you will have a chance to absorb what you have learned so far.

1. The Future System

Read through the discussion of the future system outlined on page 123 of the Textbook. Notice the following about the future system:

▪ The endings for the present/continuous and the future are the exactly the same, but they are placed on a different stem.

▪ The future stem for regular verbs is formed by adding a sigma sound to the present/continuous stem: παυ- ( παυσ-; λείπ-( λειψ-; πληττ- ( πληξ-.

▪ The sigma sounds (σ, ψ, ξ) plus personal endings beginning with ε/ο vowels are the distinguishing marks for recognizing future forms. The ε/ο vowels and the endings differentiate the future from the –σα aorist.

▪ The translations for the future indicative are “will” or “shall”: παύσω, Ι will stop; Ι shall stop. Since the aspect for the future system includes both continuous and aorist, you may also translate the future indicative in the following way: παύσω, Ι will be stopping; Ι shall be stopping.

▪ To translate the future infinitive, (a form not common in English), you will need to use a phrase like the following: παύσειν: to be about to stop; to be about to be stopping. (Other translations and uses of the future infinitive will be learned later.)

▪ Similarly, to translate the future participle, you will need to use a phrase like the following: παύσων: being about to stop. (Other translations and uses of the future participle will be learned later.)

( Exercise 1

a. Form the future system for παύω and πλήττω. Check your answers with the paradigm on page 123 of the Textbook:

|Future Indicative |Future Indicative |

|Singular Plural |Singular Plural |

|παύσω ____________ |πλήξω ____________ |

|_____________ ____________ |_____________ ____________ |

|_____________ ____________ |_____________ ____________ |

|Translation ____________ |Translation ____________ |

|Future Infinitive |Future Infinitive |

|Form Translation |Form Translation |

|___________ _______________ |___________ _______________ |

|Future Participle |Future Participle |

|Forms |Forms |

|______________________________ |_____________________________ Translation |

|Translation _______________ |_______________ |

b. Translate the following, being sure to differentiate between the aorist cues of σα (except in the third person, singular, aorist indicative, which ends in σε and which has a time-marker) and the future cues of σ + ε/ο.[41]

1. λείψεις _______________________________

2. ἔπαυσε _______________________________

3. πλήξειν _______________________________

4. παύσομεν _______________________________

5. λείψαντες _______________________________

6. παύσων _______________________________

7. λείψουσιν _______________________________

8. παῦσαι _______________________________

9. πλήξουσα _______________________________

10. παύσασιν _______________________________

2. Formation of the Future Stem

Read through the various patterns for forming the future stem on page 123 of the Textbook. Note the following:

1. Sigma combinations are the same combinations learned in Lesson 27: σ, ψ, ξ: ἄγω ( ἄξω; γράφω ( γράψω.

2. Forming the future stem for contract verbs also follows the pattern learned in Lesson 27: Lengthen the final vowel of the present stem and add a sigma: ποιε- ( ποιησ-. Exception: δοκέω, δόξω.

3. Some verbs, particularly “lemonrow verbs” λ,μ,ν, ρ stems, have contract futures because the sigma sound is absorbed: βάλλω, βαλῶ; μένω, μενῶ. The resulting future contracts exactly like the present of an -έω verb: indicative, “I will throw”: βαλῶ, βαλεῖς, βαλεῖ, βαλοῦμεν, βαλεῖτε, βαλοῦσι(ν); infinitive, ”to be about to throw” βαλεῖν; participle, “being about to throw”, βαλῶν, βαλοῦσα, βαλοῦν. The accentuation, and often the spelling of the stem, differentiates the present and future tenses of contract futures: μένω (Ι remain) vs μενῶ (Ι will remain); βάλλω (I throw) vs βαλῶ (I will throw).

4. Two “lemonrow” verbs form their principal parts by inserting an eta before the sigma in the future and aorist systems: ἐθέλω, ἐθελήσω, ἠθέλησα; μέλλω, μελλήσω, ἐμέλλησα.

5. Some verbs have an entirely new stem in the future which just must be memorized: φέρω, οἴσω; λέγω, ἐρῶ. Notice that the future for the verb “say” (λέγω, ἐρῶ) is a contract future.

6. Some verbs have futures which end in –ομαι: ἀκούω, ἀκούομαι; λαμβάνω, λήψομαι. Such verbs will form their futures with any sigma combination (ὁράω, ὄψομαι) or may form contract futures (θνῄσκω, θανοῦμαι).

( Exercise 2

Form the future principal part for the following, giving the number in the paragraph above which describes how the future is formed:[42]

1. γράφω _________________________________________

2. ποιέω _________________________________________

3. βάλλω _________________________________________

4. ἀκούω _________________________________________

5. λέγω _________________________________________

6. φέρω _________________________________________

7. λαμβάνω _________________________________________

8. θνῄσκω _________________________________________

9. ὁράω _________________________________________

10. μένω [43] _________________________________________

11. ἐθέλω _________________________________________

3. Principal Parts

You now know how to form the first three principal parts of the Greek Verb: the Present Continuous, the Future, the Aorist. With these principal parts, you will be able to understand and read much of Greek with pleasure and understanding. Any tedium encountered in memorizing the principal parts of the verbs you have learned will be worth the effort. The best way to learn the principal parts is to say them over and over again until you can do so without hesitation. The appendix to this lesson lists the principal parts of most of the verbs you have already encountered and has drills to help you master them. My Wordpress site has a recording of the principal parts also. See the Textbook page 124 for a discussion and list of some principal parts. A full list is given on pages 249-250 of the Textbook.

4. The Future Infinitive as Complement after Verbs of Hoping, Intending, Expecting or Promising

Read through the examples on page 124 to see how the future infinitive is used as a complement after words like promise, hope, expect or intend. In such situations, the future infinitive gives a double emphasis to the futurity of the action. Since English does not have this idiom, you may translate such future infinitives as regular infinitives without the usual phrase “to be about to…”: ὑπισχνέομαι παύσειν, Ι promise to stop. Just be aware, when translating from English, the Greek usually expects a future infinitive as a complement to verbs which anticipate future time.

(Exercise 4

Translate the following into Greek:[44]

1. He intends to lead. __________________________________________

2. They hope to find. __________________________________________

3. I promise to write. __________________________________________

5. The Future Participle of Purpose with Verbs of Going

Read page 124 for an explanation of the Future Participle of Purpose. Note that in English, we may express purpose with an infinitive: I go to see the king. “To see the king” gives the purpose for the action. Greek does not use an infinitive for such phrases. Instead, when the main verb is a verb of “going”, Greek will often use a participle of purpose: ἔρχομαι ὀψόμενος τὸν βασιλέα. Notice that the participle modifies the subject of the verb of “going”.

( Exercise 5

Translate the following:[45]

1. She goes to persuade the child. ____________________________________

1. He comes to stop the brother. ____________________________________

2. She goes to lead the soldiers. ____________________________________

6. Forming the Continuous, Future and Aorist Systems

The following exercise asks you to bring together your knowledge of all the verb systems you have learned so far. This is an important exercise and one which you should repeat almost every day to retain your knowledge of these forms.

a. Form the present, future and aorist systems for the verb ἄγω, ἄξω, ἤγαγον in the chart below. Check your answers with the paradigm on page 123 of the Textbook.

|Indicative: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Present |Imperfect |Future |Aorist |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

| | | | |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

| | | | |

|Translation: |Translation: |Translation: |Translation: |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Infinitive: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Form ___________________ |_______________ |_______________ |

|Translation ___________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Participles: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Forms _______________________ |_______________ |_______________ |

|Translation ________________________ |________________ |________________ |

b. Form the present, future and aorist systems for the verb παύω, παύσω, ἔπαυσα in the chart below. Check your answers with the paradigm on page 123 of the Textbook for the Continuous and Future and page 117 for the Aorist.

|Indicative: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Present |Imperfect |Future |Aorist |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

| | | | |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

| | | | |

|Translation: |Translation: |Translation: |Translation: |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Infinitive: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Form ___________________ |_______________ |_______________ |

|Translation ___________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Participles: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Forms _______________________ |_______________ |_______________ |

|Translation ________________________ |________________ |________________ |

(Exercise 7. Explication

After reading the story on page 125 of the Textbook, explicate the following verb forms. Remember the new constructions of Future Participle of Purpose and Future Complementary Infinitive after Certain Verbs. [46]

|Line |Greek |Person |Number |Tense/Aspect |Mood |Construction |

|2. |ἔκαλεσεν | | | | | |

|3. |ὠφελήσει | | | | | |

|4. |ἀποθανοῦμαι | | | | | |

|5. |ἔβαινον | | | | | |

|7. |παρερχόμενος |X |X | | | |

|7. |ζητήσων |X |X | | | |

|Line |Greek |Person |Number |Tense/Aspect |Mood |Construction |

|9. |λείψειν[47] |X |X | | | |

|10. |σώσειν |X |X | | | |

|15. |ἔτυχες | | | | | |

|17. |εἰπόντος |X |X | | | |

9. Vocabulary for “The Helping Hand” and ε/ο Aorist Verbs

Verbs

|ἀνα-βοάω |shout up, shout out |

|δίδωμι, δώσω, ἔδωκα |Give |

|ἐλπίζω |hope + future infinitive |

|λείπω, λείψω, ἔλιπον |Leave |

|μέλλω, μελλήσω, ἐμέλλησα |intend, be about to + infinitive (usually |

| |future) |

|παρ-έρχομαι, παρ-ελεύσομαι, παρ-ῆλθον |go by |

|πράττω, πράξω, ἔπραξα |do, fare, act |

|σῴζω, σώσω, ἔσωσα |Save |

|τυγχάνω, τεύξομαι, ἔτυχον |happen to be (+ complimentary participle |

| |(literally “happens being”); meet up with |

| |+ dative; happen, succeed |

|ὑπ-ισχνέομαι |promise + future infinitive |

|ὠφελέω |benefit, be of service to + accusative |

Particles

|ἆρα |Indicates a question |

|τοι |“you know” |

Appendix to Lesson 29: Principal Parts of Verbs

A firm grasp on the principal parts of the Greek verb will enable you to read Greek with pleasure and understanding. Any tedium encountered in memorizing the principal parts of the verbs you have learned will be worth the effort. This appendix is structured to help you master a number of the principal parts of verbs you have already encountered. The verbs are divided into categories: break up your memorizing time into short sessions to learn the verbs in a single category, saying them aloud over and over again, until you master this appendix. The following website has audio files so that you may practice the principal parts aloud:

1. Principal Parts with Verbs with –σα –λα Aorists.

a. Verbs with Regular –σα Aorists

These verbs are generally predictable in their formation (except for the three futures printed in bold) and are therefore easy to learn.

|ἀκούω, ἀκούσομαι, ἤκουσα |Hear |

|βλέπω, βλέψομαι, ἔβλεψα |look |

|ἀνα-βλέπω, ἀνα- βλέψομαι, ἀν-έβλεψα |look up |

|κατα-βλέπω, κατα- βλέψομαι, κατ-έβλεψα |look down |

|δακρύω, δακρύσω, ἐδάκρυσα |Cry |

|κελεύω, κελεύσω, ἐκέλευσα |bid, urge, order |

|γράφω, γράψω, ἔγραψα |Write |

|θάπτω, θάψω, ἔθαψα |Bury |

|κλέπτω, κλέψω, ἔκλεψα |Steal |

|κρύπτω, κρύψω, ἔκρυψα |Hide |

|πείθω, πείσω, ἔπεισα |Persuade |

|πέμπω, πέμψω, ἔπεμψα |Send |

|φυλάττω, φυλάξω, ἐφύλαξα |Guard |

|νομίζω, νομιῶ, ἐνόμισα |think, consider |

b. Verbs with Irregular –σα Aorists

These “lemonrow” verbs form their principal parts by inserting an eta before the sigma in both the future and aorist systems:

|ἐθέλω, ἐθελήσω, ἠθέλησα |be willing |

|μέλλω, μελλήσω, ἐμέλλησα |Intend |

c. Verbs with –λα Aorists

These verbs undergo changes in their future and aorists because of the stems in λ, μ, ν, ρ. Be sure to practice these verbs diligently, by saying them aloud with pitched accents.

|ἀγγέλλω, ἀγγελῶ, ἤγγειλα |Announce |

|καθαίρω, καθαρῶ, ἐκάθηρα |cleanse, purify |

|κρίνω, κρινῶ, ἔκρῑνα |Judge |

|κτείνω, κτενῶ, ἔκτεινα |kill, slay |

|ἀπο-κτέινω, απο-κτενῶ, ἀπ-έκτεινα | |

|μένω, μενῶ, ἔμεινα |wait, stay, remain |

|οἰκτίρω, οἰκτιρῶ, ᾤκτιρα |Pity |

|σημαίνω, σημανῶ, ἐσήμηνα |show by a sign, signify, give a sign or |

| |bid one to do something |

( Exercise 1

a. Fill in the principal parts for the following verb. Do this exercise after you have practiced the principal parts for the verbs given above, particularly the verbs with –λα aorists.[48]

|1. judge | |

|2. be willing | |

|3. hear | |

|4. think, consider | |

|5. bury | |

|6. pity | |

|7. announce | |

|8. write | |

|9. kill | |

|10. wait, remain | |

b. Translate the following:[49]

1. he will kill ___________________________________

2. to be about to send ___________________________________

3. I will think [50] ___________________________________

4. they (M), being about to cry ___________________________________

5. you (Sg) will remain ___________________________________

6. they will persuade ___________________________________

7. he will cleanse ___________________________________

8. I will hear ___________________________________

9. they (M) being about to bury ___________________________________

10. she, being about to guard ___________________________________

2. Principal Parts for Verbs with ε/ο and Special Aorists

Be sure to spend enough time practicing these verbs, whose principal parts are difficult to predict.

a. Verbs with ε/ο Aorists with Similar Stems

|βάλλω, βαλῶ, ἔβαλον |throw |

|εὑρίσκω, εὑρήσω, ηὗρον |find |

|θνῄσκω, θανοῦμαι, ἔθανον |die |

|ἀπο-θνῄσκω, ἀπο-θανοῦμαι, ἀπ-έθανον | |

|κάμνω, καμοῦμαι, ἔκαμον |be weary |

|λαμβάνω, λήψομαι, ἔλαβον |take |

|ἀνα-λαμβάνω, ἀνα-λήψομαι, ἀν-έλαβον |take up, pick up |

|ἀπο-λαμβάνω, ἀπο-λήψομαι, ἀπ-έλαβον |take back, take away |

|λείπω, λείψω, ἔλιπον |Leave |

|μανθάνω, μαθήσομαι, ἔμαθον |Learn |

|πίνω, πίομαι, ἔπιον |Drink |

|πίπτω, πεσοῦμαι, ἔπεσον |Fall |

|τυγχάνω, τεύξομαι, ἔτυχον |happen |

|ἐν-τυγχάνω, ἐν-τεύξομαι, ἐν-έτυχον |meet up with, chance upon + Dative |

b. Verbs with ε/ο Aorists with Different Stems

|ἄγω, ἄξω, ἤγαγον |Lead |

|ἐσθίω, ἔδομαι, ἔφαγον |eat |

|ἔχω, ἕξω or σχήσω, ἔσχον (imperfect, εἶχον) |have, hold, possess, (ingressive aorist, |

| |acquired, got), be able to + infinitive |

| |hold up |

| | |

|ἀν-έχω, ἀν-έξω or ἀνα-σχήσω, ἀν-έσχον (imperfect, ἀν-εῖχον) | |

|ἔρχομαι, ἐλεύσομαι, ἦλθον * (learn this very common verb well) |come, go |

|ἀπ-έρχομαι, ἀπ-ελεύσομαι, απ-ῆλθον |go away |

|δι-έρχομαι, δι-ελεύσομαι, δι-ῆλθον |go through |

|ἐξ-έρχομαι, ἐξ-ελεύσομαι, ἐξ-ῆλθον |come or go out |

|λέγω, ἐρῶ, εἶπον |Say |

|ὁράω, ὄψομαι, εἶδον |See |

|φέρω, οἴσω, ἤνεγκον |Carry |

c. Verbs with Special Aorists

|βαίνω, βήσομαι, ἔβην |go |

|ἀνα-βαίνω, ἀνα-βήσομαι, ἀν-έβην |go up |

|εἰσ-βαίνω, εἰσ-βήσομαι, εἰσ-έβην |enter |

|ἐκ-βαίνω, ἐκ-βήσομαι, ἐξ-έβην |go out, step out |

|κατα-βαίνω, κατα-βήσομαι, κατ-έβην |go down |

|γιγνώσκω, γνώσομαι, ἔγνων |Know |

|ἵσταμαι, στήσομαι, ἔστην |stand |

|ἀν-ίσταμαι, ἀνα-στήσομαι, ἀν-έστην |stand up |

( Exercise 2

a. Fill in the principal parts for the following verbs:[51]

|1. go, step | |

|2. go, come | |

|3. lead | |

|4. know | |

|5. say | |

|6. eat | |

|7. learn | |

|8. drink | |

|9. fall | |

|10. stand | |

b. Translate the following:[52]

1. ἐρῶ ___________________________________

2. ὄψεται ___________________________________

3. ἐλεύσεσθαι ___________________________________

4. γνώσεται ___________________________________

5. τεύξονται ___________________________________

6. ἀναστήσεται ___________________________________

7. ἕξω ___________________________________

8. οἴσουσι(ν) ___________________________________

9. ἄξειν ___________________________________

10. λείψουσαι ___________________________________

LESSΟΝ 30. –έω VERBS

This lesson introduces no new material, but will allow you to become more comfortable with the various forms of these contract verbs. Read through pages 126-7 in the Textbook for an overview of the lesson.

1. The Rules of Contraction and Accentuation of Contracted Forms

Review the rules of contraction as outlined on page 126 in the second box.

( Exercise 1

Fill in the chart below:[53]

|Contracted Letters |Contraction Result |

|1.ε + ε ( | |

|2.ε + ο ( | |

|3.ε + any long vowel or diphthong ( | |

|4.a contraction with accented epsilon (έ) ( | |

|5.a contraction with unaccented epsilon (ε) ( | |

2. Changing Un-contracted Forms to Their Contractions

Students often find it easier to recognize and memorize contracted verb forms if first they have traced out how the contractions have occurred. (It will also be useful later, should you read authors that do not write Attic Greek.) Pay particular attention to the imperfect indicative. Because the contracted endings resemble present indicatives rather than imperfect endings, it is often difficult to recognize the imperfect.

( Exercise 2

a. Write out the un-contracted forms for ποιέω, being careful to accent each one recessively. Then complete the rest of the chart, illustrating the rule which controls the contraction and accentuation, and then giving the contracted form, as shown in the examples. Check your answers with the paradigm and explanations on page 126 of the Textbook.

|Continuous Uncontracted Forms |Rule Which Controls the Contraction |Continuous Contracted Form |

|Present Un-contracted |Contraction Rules |Contracted Present |

|ποιέω |έ + ω = ῶ |ποιῶ |

|ποιέεις |έ +ει = εῖς |ποιεῖς |

|__________ |__________ |__________ |

|__________ |__________ |__________ |

|__________ |__________ |__________ |

|__________ |__________ |__________ |

|Imperfect Un-contracted |Contraction Rules |Contracted Imperfect |

|ἐποίεον |ε + ο = ου |ἐποίουν |

|__________ |__________ |__________ |

|__________ |__________ |__________ |

|__________ |__________ |__________ |

|__________ |__________ |__________ |

|__________ |__________ |__________ |

|Infinitive Un-contracted |Contraction Rules |Contracted Infinitive |

|___________ |___________ |___________ |

|Participle Un-contracted |Contraction Rules |Contracted Participle |

|______________________ |______________________ |______________________ |

b. Translate the following:[54]

1. he was inviting ______________________________________

2. we invite ______________________________________

3. I used to invite ______________________________________

4. he invites ______________________________________

5. to be inviting ______________________________________

6. they were inviting ______________________________________

7. you (Pl) used to invite ______________________________________

8. it, inviting ______________________________________

9. you (Sg) used to invite ______________________________________

10. you (Pl) invite ______________________________________

3. The –εω Continuous Participle

Review the paradigm for the –εω contract participle in the Textbook on page 126. Notice that the accent is a circumflex or an acute over every contracted vowel (according to the long-short rule), except, as expected for O-A-O words, a circumflex on the last syllable in the feminine, genitive, plural. Check your answers with the paradigm on page 126 of the Textbook.

(Exercise 3

a. Write out the complete participle for the verb “do, make”:

|Case |Masculine |Feminine |Neuter |

|N | | | |

|A | | | |

|G | | | |

|D | | | |

|Case |Masculine |Feminine |Neuter |

|N | | | |

|A | | | |

|G | | | |

|D | | | |

b. Translate the following: [55]

1. of the men, loving _________________________________

2. of the women, loving _________________________________

3. the men, loving _________________________________

4. for the men, loving _________________________________

5. for the women, loving _________________________________

6. it, loving _________________________________

4. Principal Parts of έω Verbs

The principal parts of almost all έω verbs are regularly formed by lengthening the un-contracted vowel of the present stem to an eta and then adding a sigma for the future and aorist stem. Since the future and aorist stems formed in this way do not end in a vowel, the future and aorist systems do not contract. Examine carefully the principal parts of all the έω verbs you have learned on page 127 of the textbook. Notice that there are only three έω verbs which do not form their principal parts regularly: καλέω, γαμέω, δοκέω. Further, notice that the έω verbs which begin with a vowel, form their aorist by lengthening the initial vowel. The following website has audio tapes for practicing these principal parts aloud:

( Exercise 4

After studying the verbs on page 127 of the Textbook, fill in the chart of the έω verbs you have already learned Only three of the verbs are irregular, and they have been starred to remind you. For all the rest, you can reason out the principal parts from the continuous stem. Remember that έω verbs which begin with a vowel form their aorist by lengthening the initial vowel and verbs which begin with an iota diphthong lengthen the initial vowel and make the iota a subscript. Check your answers with the chart on page 127 of the Textbook.

|Meaning |Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|do, make |ποίεω | | |

|sicken, be sick |νοσέω | | |

|agree |ὁμολογέω | | |

|do an injustice |ἀδικέω | | |

|dwell |οἰκέω | | |

|farm |γεωργέω | | |

|hate |μισέω | | |

|invite, call* |καλέω # | | |

|love, like |φιλέω | | |

|marry* |γαμέω # | | |

|seek |ζητέω | | |

|seem, seem best to, think* |δοκέω | | |

|share |κοινωνέω | | |

|request |αἰτεω | | |

|toil |πονέω | | |

|vex, distress |λυπέω | | |

|wear, carry around |φορέω | | |

# The Textbook gives the uncontracted future (καλέω, γαμέω), but we will use the contracted future (καλῶ, γαμῶ).

5. Charting the έω Verb Complete

( Εxercise 4

Fill in the chart below for the verb seek. Remember that only the continuous forms contract, because only the continuous stem has an extra vowel. Check your answers with the paradigm on page 126 of the Textbook.

|Indicative: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Present |Imperfect |Future |Aorist |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

| | | | |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

| | | | |

|Translation: |Translation: |Translation: |Translation: |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Infinitive: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Form ___________________ |_______________ |_______________ |

|Translation ___________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Participles: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Forms _______________________ |_______________ |_______________ |

|Translation ________________________ |________________ |________________ |

(5. Explication

After reading the story on page 128 of the Textbook, explicate the following verb forms. [56]

|Line |Greek |Person |Number |Tense/Aspect |Mood |Construction |

|2. |καθεύδοντος |X |X | | | |

|3. |ἠμφεσβήτουν | | | | | |

|5. |κατάβηθι | | | | | |

|8. |ᾔτουν | | | | | |

|11. |ἀπώλεσα | | | | | |

|12. |ἔβαλες | | | | | |

|23. |λέγειν |X |X | | | |

6. Vocabulary for “You’re Right” and έω Verbs

Νouns

|ἡ ἀλήθεια |Truth |

|ἡ δίκη |Justice |

|ἡ κλοπή |Theft |

Adjectives

|δίκαιος, α, ον |Just |

|ἐναντίος, α, ον |Opposite |

Verbs

|ἐννοέομαι |reflect on, consider |

|ὄλλυμι, -ωλῶ, -ώλεσα |destroy, ruin, lose destroy |

|ἀπόλλυμι, ἀπ-ωλῶ, ἀπ-ώλεσα |utterly, lose |

έω Verbs

|ἀδικέω, ἀδικήσω, ἠδίκησα |be unjust |

|αἰτέω, αἰτήσω, ᾔτησα |request, ask |

|γαμέω, γαμῶ, ἔγημα |Marry |

|γεωργέω, γεωργήσω, ἐγεώργησα |Farm |

|δοκέω, δόξω, ἔδοξα |seem, seem best, think |

|ζητέω, ζητήσω, ἐζήτησα |Search |

|καλέω, καλῶ, ἐκάλεσα |invite, call |

|κοινωνέω, κοινωνήσω, ἐκοινώνησα |Share |

|μισέω, μισήσω, ἐμίσησα |Hate |

|νοσέω, νοσήσω, ἐνόσησα |be sick |

|οἰκέω, οἰκήσω, ᾤκησα |dwell, inhabit |

|ποίεω, ποιήσω, ἐποίησα |do, make |

|πονέω, πονήσω, ἐπόνησα |Labor |

|φιλέω, φιλήσω, ἐφίλησα |love, like |

|φορέω, φορήσω, ἐφόφησα |Wear |

PRACTICE QUIZ 3: LESSONS 29 AND 30

1. Fill in the verb chart for δοκέω, δόξω, ἔδοξα:

|Indicative: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Present |Imperfect |Future |Aorist |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

| | | | |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

| | | | |

|Translation: |Translation: |Translation: |Translation: |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Infinitive: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Form ___________________ |_______________ |_______________ |

|Translation ___________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Participles: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Forms _______________________ |_______________ |_______________ |

|Translation ________________________ |________________ |________________ |

2. Give the principal parts for the following verbs:

|Meaning |Present/Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|steal | | | |

|judge | | | |

|fall | | | |

|die | | | |

|hear | | | |

|know | | | |

|be willing | | | |

|hate | | | |

|marry | | | |

3. Translate the following:

(1) ἡμέρᾳ τινί, δύο ἄνδρες ἐκάλουν, ‘ἆρα οὐδεὶς ὠφελήσει; κακῶς πράττομεν. ζητοῦμεν τὴν δίκην’. (2) δικαστής τις ἔτυχε παρερχόμενος ζητήσων τὴν παῖδα. (3) ἔμελλεν γὰρ οἴσειν τὴν παῖδα εἰς μέγα δεῖπνον. (4) καὶ ᾔτησε τοὺς ἄνδρας, ‘τί ἐκαλεῖτε; ὑπισχνέομαι ὑμᾶς σώσειν. δικαστής εἰμι. ἇρα ἀπωλέσατέ τι;’ (5) οἰ δ’ ἐννοούμενοι εἶπον τάδε, ‘οὐκ ἐροῦμεν σοι. (6) οἱ γὰρ διακασταὶ ὑπισχνοῦνται εὑρήσειν τὴν ἀλήθειαν, ἀλλά τοι ἀεὶ ποιοῦσι τὰ ἐναντία’.

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

4. Explicate the following:

|Sent # |Greek |Person |Number |Tense/Aspect |Mood |Construction |

|1. |ἐκάλουν | | | | | |

|2. |παρερχόμενος | | | | | |

|2. |ζητήσων | | | | | |

|3. |οἴσειν | | | | | |

|4. |σώσειν | | | | | |

|5. |ἐροῦμεν | | | | | |

ANSWERS, PRACTICE QUIZ 3: LESSONS 29 AND 30

1. Fill in the verb chart for δοκέω, δόξω, ἔδοξα:

|Indicative: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Present |Imperfect | | |

|δοκῶ |ἐδόκουν |δόξω |ἔδοξα |

|δοκεῖς |ἐδόκεις |δόξεις |ἔδοξας |

|δοκεῖ |ἐδόκει |δόξει |ἔδοξε(ν) |

| | | | |

|δοκοῦμεν |ἐδοκοῦμεν |δόξομεν |ἐδόξαμεν |

|δοκεῖτε |ἐδοκεῖτε |δόξετε |ἐδόξατε |

|δοκοῦσι(ν) |ἐδόκουν |δόξουσι(ν) |ἔδοξαν |

|they seem |they were seeming |they will seem |they seemed |

|Infinitive: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

| δοκεῖν: to be seeming |δόξειν to be about to seem |δόξαι to seem (once) |

|Participles: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|δοκῶν, οῦσα, οῦν: seeming |δόξων, ουσα, ον: being about to |δόξας, ασα, αν: having seemed |

| |seem | |

2. Give the principal parts for the following verbs:

|Meaning |Present/Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|steal |κλέπω |κλέψω |ἔκλεψα |

|judge |κρίνω |κρινῶ |ἔκρινα |

|fall |πίπτω |πεσοῦμαι |ἔπεσον |

|die |απο-θνῄσκω |ἀπο-θανοῦμαι |ἀπ-έθανον |

|hear |ἀκούω |ἀκούσομαι |ἤκουσα |

|know |γιγνώσκω |γνώσομαι |ἔγνων |

|be willing |ἐθέλω |ἐθελήσω |ἠθέλησα |

|hate |μισέω |μισήσω |ἐμίσησα |

|marry |γαμέω |γαμῶ |ἔγημα |

3. Translate the following:

(1) ἡμέρᾳ τινί, δύο ἄνδρες ἐκάλουν, ‘ἆρα οὐδεὶς ὠφελήσει; κακῶς πράττομεν. ζητοῦμεν τὴν δίκην’. (2) δικαστής τις ἔτυχε παρερχόμενος ζητήσων τὴν παῖδα. (3) ἔμελλεν γὰρ οἴσειν τὴν παῖδα εἰς μέγα δεῖπνον. (4) καὶ ᾔτησε τοὺς ἄνδρας, ‘τί ἐκαλεῖτε; ὑπισχνέομαι ὑμᾶς σώσειν. δικαστής εἰμι. ἇρα ἀπωλέσατέ τι;’ (5) οἰ δ’ ἐννοούμενοι εἶπον τάδε, ‘οὐκ ἐροῦμεν σοι. (6) οἱ γὰρ διακασταὶ ὑπισχνοῦνται εὑρήσειν τὴν ἀλήθειαν, ἀλλά τοι ἀεὶ ποιοῦσι τὰ ἐναντία’.

(1) Οne day, two men kept on calling out, ‘Will no one help? We are faring badly. We seek justice.” (2) A certain judge happened to be passing by searching (a-searching) for his child. (3) For he was intending to bring the child to a big dinner. (4) And he asked the men, ‘Why were you calling out? I promise to save you. I am a judge. Did you lose something?” (5) And they, reflecting, said the following, ‘We will not speak to you. (6) For judges promise to find the truth, but, you know, they always do the opposite.”

4. Explicate the following:

|Sent # |Greek |Person |Number |Tense/Aspect |Mood |Construction |

|1. |ἐκάλουν |3rd |Pl |Imperfect |Indicative |Main Verb |

|2. |παρερχόμενος |X |X |Continuous |Participle |Complement to ἔτυχε, |

| | | | | | |modifies subject |

|2. |ζητήσων |X |X |Future |Participle |Future Part. of Purpose |

|3. |οἴσειν |X |X |Future |Infinitive |Fut. Inf. Complement after |

| | | | | | |“promise” |

|4. |σώσειν |X |X |Future |Infinitive |Fut. Inf. Complement after |

| | | | | | |“intend” |

|5. |ἐροῦμεν |1st |Pl |Future |Indicative |Main Verb |

LESSON 31. -άω VERBS; USE OF πρίν

This lesson reviews άω contract verbs. The rules are simple, but the forms are difficult to recognize so you should do the exercises in this chapter carefully.

1. The Rules of Contraction and Accentuation of Contracted Forms

Review the rules of contraction as outlined on page 129 in the second box.

( Exercise 1

Fill in the chart below:

|Contracted Letters |Contraction Results |

|α + ε/η ( |α |

|α + ει ( |ᾳ |

|α + ειν (infinitive) |αν* |

|α + ο/ου/ω |ω |

|a contraction with accented alpha (ά) ( |circumflex over contraction |

|a contraction with unaccented alpha (α) ( |accent stays the same |

*The infinitive for these verbs has an irregular contraction. See Textbook, page 23.

2. Changing Un-contracted Forms to Their Contractions

Write out the un-contracted forms for ὁράω, being careful to accent each one recessively. Then complete the rest of the chart, illustrating the rule which controls the contraction and accentuation, and then giving the contracted form, as shown in the examples. Check your answers with the paradigm on page 129 of the Textbook.

|Continuous Uncontracted Forms |Rule Which Controls the Contraction |Continuous Contracted Form |

|Present |Present |Present |

|ὁράω |ά+ ω = ῶ |ὁρῶ |

|ὁράεις |ά+ει = ᾷς |ὁρᾷς |

|__________ |__________ |__________ |

|__________ |__________ |__________ |

|__________ |__________ |__________ |

|__________ |___________ |__________ |

|Imperfect |Imperfect |Imperfect |

|ὥραον |α + ο = ω |ὥρων |

|_________ |__________ |__________ |

|__________ |__________ |__________ |

|__________ |__________ |__________ |

|__________ |__________ |__________ |

|__________ |__________ |__________ |

| | | |

|Un-contracted Form | | |

|Infinitive |Infinitive |Infinitive |

|___________ |___________ |___________ |

|Participle |Participle |Participle |

|______________________ |______________________ |______________________ |

b. Translate the following:[57]

1. he was being silent ______________________________________

2. we are silent ______________________________________

3. I used to be silent ______________________________________

4. he is silent ______________________________________

5. to be silent ______________________________________

6. they were being silent ______________________________________

7. you (Pl) used to be silent ______________________________________

8. it, being silent ______________________________________

9. you (Sg) used to be silent ______________________________________

10. you (Pl) are silent ______________________________________

3. The –άω Continuous Participle

Review the paradigm for the –άω contract participle in the Textbook on page 129. Notice that there is only a single vowel contraction to -ω and that the accent is a circumflex or an acute over every omega (according to the long-short rule), except, as expected, a circumflex on the ultima in the feminine, genitive, plural.

(Exercise 3

a. Write out the complete continuous participle for the verb “laugh”. Check your answers with the paradigm on page 129 of the Textbook:

|Case |Masculine |Feminine |Neuter |

|N | | | |

|A | | | |

|G | | | |

|D | | | |

|Case |Masculine |Feminine |Neuter |

|N | | | |

|A | | | |

|G | | | |

|D | | | |

4. Principal Parts of άω Verbs

The principal parts of a number of άω verbs are regularly formed by lengthening the un-contracted vowel of the present stem to an eta and then adding a sigma for the future and aorist stem. However, many άω verbs form their principal parts irregularly. Examine carefully the principal parts of all the άω verbs you have learned on page 129 of the textbook. The following website has audio tapes to practice these verbs aloud:

( Exercise 4

a. After studying the verbs on page 129 of the Textbook, fill in the chart below: [58]

|Meaning |Continuous |Future |Aorist |

| |1. βοάω | | |

| |2.τιμάω | | |

| |3.γελάω | | |

| |4. σιγάω | | |

| |5. ἐρωτάω | | |

| |6.πεινάω * | | |

| |7.ὁράω | | |

| |ζάω* | | |

* These verbs irregularly have an eta in their continuous forms instead of an alpha.

c. Translate the following:[59]

1. ἠρώτων (2 ways) _____________

2. πεινῇ* ______________

3. ὥρα ______________

4. βοᾶν ______________

5. βοῶν (3 ways) ______________

6. σιγῶσιν (2 ways) ______________

7. ἐγελῶμεν ______________

8. ἠρώτας ______________

9. ὁρῶσαι ______________

10. ἐβόα ______________

5. Use of πρίν

Read the discussion on the two meanings of πρίν on page 130 of the Textbook.[60]

( Exercise 5

Translate the following:

1. You used to honor him before learning (once) the truth.

_____________________________________________________________________

2. You didn’t honor him until he came.

_____________________________________________________________________

3. You honored him before our leaving (once).

_____________________________________________________________________

6. Charting the άω Verb Complete

( Εxercise 6

Fill in the chart below for the verb ask. Remember that only the continuous forms contract, because only the continuous stem ends in a vowel. Check your answers for the continuous with the paradigm on page 129, for the future and aorist on page 126 of the Textbook.

|Indicative: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Present |Imperfect |Future |Aorist |

|ἐρωτῶ |ἠρώτων |ἐρωτήσω |ἠρώτησα |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

| | | | |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

| | | | |

|Translation: |Translation: |Translation: |Translation: |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Infinitive: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Form ___________________ |_______________ |_______________ |

|Translation ___________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Participles: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Forms _______________________ |_______________ |_______________ |

|Translation ________________________ |________________ |________________ |

(7. Explication Exercise

After reading the story on page 131, explicate the following verbs:[61]

|Line |Greek |Person |Number |Tense/Aspect |Mood |Construction |

|5. |ἐτίμων | | | | | |

|7. |ἐφίλει | | | | | |

|17. |καθηῦδον | | | | | |

|18. |πεσεῖν |X |X | | | |

|23. |ἀνεβόα | | | | | |

|29. |ἐτίμα | | | | | |

|30. |ἔσται | | | | | |

8. Vocabulary for “Never Enough” and άω Verbs

Nouns

|ὁ δεσποτής |Master |

|ὁ στόνος |Groan |

|ἡ τιμή |Honor |

Adjectives

|γεραιός, ά, όν |Old |

|κακίων, κάκιον |Worse |

Verbs

|ἀν-έχομαι |Endure |

|ἐγείρω, ἐγερῶ, ἤγειρα |Wake |

|ἔφη (φήμι, φήσω, ἔφην) |he said |

|πορεύομαι |Journey |

|οἰμώζω, οἰμώξομαι, ᾤμωξα |wail aloud, lament |

|στένω (no future or aorist) |Groan |

-άω Verbs

|βοάω, βοήσομαι, ἐβόησα |Shout |

|γελάω, γελάσομαι, ἐγέλασα |Laugh |

|ἐρωτάω, ἐρωτήσω, ἠρώτησα |Ask |

|ζάω, ζήσω, ἔζησα |Live |

|ὁράω, ὄψομαι, εἶδον |See |

|πεινάω, πεινήσω, ἐπείνησα |be hungry |

|σιγάω, σιγήσω, ἐσίγησα |be silent |

|τιμάω, τιμήσω, ἐτίμησα |Honor |

|νικάω, νικήσω, ἐνίκησα |be victorious |

Adverbs

|ἐκεῖ |There |

Conjunctions

|ὅπου |Wherever |

|πρίν + infinitive |Before |

|πρίν + indicative |Until |

LESSON 32. CONTRARY-TO-FACT CONDITIONALS

Conditional sentences are an important part of learning how to read Greek. In conditional sentences, an “if” clause (or its equivalent) sets out a “condition”, which has a result which is set out in the “then” clause: If it rains today, then we will not be able to barbeque outside. There are a number of different kinds of conditional clauses. This chapter introduces the Contrary-to-Fact Conditional.

1. Contrary-to-Fact Conditional

Read carefully page 133 in the Textbook for an overview of contrary-to-fact conditionals. Since there are a number of different kinds of conditional sentences, it is necessary to memorize the “formula” for each one as you learn it. The second box on page 133 must therefore be memorized. Notice particularly that the “then” clause of contrary-to-fact conditionals must contain the particle ἄν. Without the particle, the sentence is a straightforward telling of facts: εἰ ἤκουες, ἐμάνθανες (If you were listening, you were learning) vs. εἰ ἤκουες, ἐμάνθανες ἄν (If you were listening, you would be learning); and εἰ ἤκουσας, ἔμαθες (If you listened, you learned) vs. εἰ ἤκουσας, ἔμαθες ἄν (If you had listened, you would have learned). Since the presence of the ἄν causes such changes in the idea of the sentence, and since English idioms differ from Greek, it is also important to memorize the English translations for the present and past contrary-to-fact conditionals.

( Exercise 1

Fill in the following chart for the formation and translation of Greek Contrary-to Fact Conditionals. [62]

|Conditional |If Clause (Protasis) |Then Clause (Apodosis) |

|Present C-F |Greek Formula | | |

| |English | | |

| |Negative | | |

|Past C-F |Greek Formula | | |

| |English | | |

| |Negative | | |

(Exercise 2

a) Translate the following sentences. Be sure to label which conditional each sentence is and repeat to yourself the correct formula before translating:[63]

1. If they were seeking, they would be finding.

_____________________________________________________________________

2. If they had sought, they would not have found.

_____________________________________________________________________

3. If we had not honored him, we would have been silent.

____________________________________________________________________

4. If we were honoring him, we would be silent.

_____________________________________________________________________

5. εἰ ἔμενες, οὐκ ἔλειπον ἄν.

_____________________________________________________________________

6. εἰ ᾤμωξε, ἠκούσαμεν ἄν.

_____________________________________________________________________

b. Translate the following: [64]

(1) ἐν τῷ δράματι ‘Fiddler on the Roof’, ὁ πατήρ λέγει, ‘εἰ ἦν πλούσιος, οὐκ ἂν ἐπόνουν. (2) καὶ εἰ ἦν πλούσιος, ἀνεγίγνωσκον ἂν τὰ ἱερὰ βιβλία καὶ ἡ γυνή μου ἦν εὐδαίμων ἄν.’ (3) οὗτος ὁ πατὴρ ἐτίμησε τὸν θεὸν, ἀλλὰ πολλὰ κακά ἔπαθε (suffered). (4) πολλοὶ εἶπον, ‘εἰ ὁ θεὸς ἀληθῶς ἐφίλησεν αὐτόν, οἱ Ῥυσσικοὶ (Russians) τὴν αὐτοῦ πόλιν οὐκ ἂν ἀπώλεσαν.’

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

3. Mixed Conditionals

Read carefully page 134 in the Textbook to learn about mixed conditionals. When translating mixed conditionals, be especially careful to translate each part of the sentence appropriately according to the tense of the verb and whether the verb is in the “if” or “then” clause. For instance, in the sentence, εἰ μὴ ἔκρυπτε, οὐκ ἄν αὐτὸν ηὗρον, the verb in the “if” clause is imperfect and therefore the clause must be translated ‘If he were not hiding’. However, the verb in the “then” clause is aorist, and so the clause must be translated, “they would not have found him.”

( Exercise 3

Translate the following, being careful to choose the correct translations for each clause in the sentence:[65]

1.εἰ ἔπεισας αυτοὺς, ἐλυποῦμεν ἄν.

___________________________________________________________________

2. εἰ ἔλειπε, ἔμειναν ἄν.

___________________________________________________________________

4. Omitted “if” Clause

Read page 134 about the omitted “if” clause and the importance of the particle ἄν.

( Εxercise 4

a. Translate the following:[66]

1. ἐσώσαμεν αὐτόν vs. ἐσώσαμεν ἂν αὐτόν:

_____________________________________________________________________

2. ἐλείπετε ἄν vs.ἐλείπετε:

_____________________________________________________________________

b. Translate: [67]

(1) Ξενοφάνης, ὁ φιλόσοφος (philosopher), ἔγραψε ποιήματα ἐν οἷς ἔλεγεν, ‘εἰ ἵπποι εἶχον γφάψαι (write or paint), ἔποίησαν ἄν τὰ τῶν θεῶν σώματα ὅμοια τοῖς ἑαυτῶν σώμασιν, ὥσπερ οἱ ἄνθρωποι ποιοῦσι τοὺς

__________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

θεοὺς ὁμοίους ἑαυτοῖς. (2) ὁ Ὅμηρος οὐκ ἂν ταῦτα ἔγραψεν. (3) ἀλλ’ εἰ ὁ Ξενοφάνης μὴ ἐτίμα τοὺς θεοὺς, οὐκ ἂν ἔγραψε ταῦτα τὰ ποιήματα. [68]

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

(Exercise 5. Explication

After reading the story on page 135, explicate the following verb forms:[69]

|Line |Greek |Person |Number |Tense/Aspect |Mood |Construction |

|7. |ἐβόα | | | | | |

|7. |ᾤμωζεν | | | | | |

|12. |χαίρειν |Χ |Χ | | | |

|16. |ἐδόκουν | | | | | |

|18. |ἐρωτήσαντι |Χ |Χ | | | |

|21. |εἶναι |Χ |Χ | | | |

|29. |εἷλε | | | | | |

6. Vocabulary for “Never Enough (Part 2)”

Nouns

|ὁ δοῦλος |slave |

|ἡ λύπη |pain, grief |

|ὁ ξένος |foreigner, guest/host |

Adjectives

|ἱκανός, ή, όν |sufficient, enough |

|καινός, ή, όν |new |

Verbs

|ἀ-θυμέω, ἀ-θυμήσω |be disheartened |

|αἱρέω, αἱρήσω, εἷλον |take, seize -> Harpy |

|εἰσ-άγω, εἰσ-άξω, εἰσ-ήγαγον |lead in |

|ἐκ-βάλλω, ἐκ-βαλῶ, ἐκ-έβαλον |throw out |

Adverbs

|ἔτι |yet, still |

Phrases

|μετὰ χρόνον |after a while, after a time |

PRACTICE QUIZ 4: LESSONS 31 AND 32

1. Chart the verb “be silent” below:

|Indicative: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Present |Imperfect |Future |Aorist |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

| | | | |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

| | | | |

|Translation: |Translation: |Translation: |Translation: |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Infinitive: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Form ___________________ |_______________ |_______________ |

|Translation ___________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Participles: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Forms _______________________ |_______________ |_______________ |

|Translation ________________________ |________________ |________________ |

2. Fill in the chart below:

|Meaning |Continuous |Future |Aorist |

| |βοάω | | |

| |τιμάω | | |

| |γελάω | | |

| |ἐρωτάω | | |

| |πεινάω | | |

| |ὁράω | | |

| |ζάω | | |

3. Label the construction for the underlined words and then translate the sentence:

1. The slave did not wake until the master left.

a. _____________________________________________________________________

b.______________________________________________________________________

2. He was groaning before waking.

a. _____________________________________________________________________

b:______________________________________________________________________

3. If they were not laughing, they would be shouting. a.______________________________________________________________________

b.______________________________________________________________________

4. If he had not asked, the guests would have been silent.

a. _____________________________________________________________________ b.______________________________________________________________________

4. Translate the following:

(1) ἡμέρᾳ τινί, ὁ γεραιὸς ἵππος τῆς χελώνης ἀπέθανεν. (2) ἡ δ’ ἀνεβόα, ‘ὅπου ἦλθον, ἐκεῖ καὶ ὁ ἵππος μου ἦλθον. (3) πάντες ἑτίμων με διὰ τοῦτον τὸν ἵππον. (4) οὐδεὶς τιμᾷ χελώνην μὴ ἔχουσαν ἵππόν.’ (5) ἀνήρ τις πλούσιος, ἄκουσας ταῦτα καὶ οἰκτίρων τὴν χελώνην, αὐτῇ δίδωσι καινὸν ἵππον. (6) ἡ δ’εἷλε τὸν ἵππον, ἀλλ’ ἔτι ἀνεβόα καὶ ᾤμωζεν, ‘ὡς μάλιστα ἀθυμῶ. (7) ἡ λύπη μου μεγίστη. (8) εἰ γὰρ μὴ ἀπώλεσα τὸν πρῶτον ἵππον, εἶχον ἂν νῦν δύο.’ (9) καὶ ὁ πλούσιος ὀργιζόμενος ἐκέλευσε τινα τῶν δούλων αἱρεῖν τὸν ἴππον. (10) ‘εἰ μή ἀνεβόησας τὸ δεύτερον,’ ὁ πλούσιος ἔφη, ‘νῦν εἶχες ἂν ἵππον τε καὶ τίμην.’

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

ANSWERS: PRACTICE QUIZ 4: LESSONS 31 AND 32

1. Chart the verb “be silent” below:

|Indicative: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Present |Imperfect |Future |Aorist |

|σιγῶ |ἐσίγων |σιγήσω |ἐσίγησα |

|σιγᾷς |ἐσίγας |σιγήσεις |ἐσίγησας |

|σιγᾷ |ἐσίγα |σιγήσει |ἐσίγησε(ν) |

| | | | |

|σιγῶμεν |ἐσιγῶμεν |σιγήσομεν |ἐσιγήσαμεν |

|σιγᾶτε |ἐσιγᾶτε |σιγήσετε |ἐσιγήσατε |

|σιγῶσι(ν) |ἐσίγων |σιγήσουσι(ν) |ἐσίγησαν |

|they are silent |they were being silent |they will be silent |they were silent |

|Infinitive: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|σιγᾶν: to be keeping silent |σιγήσειν: to be about to be |σιγῆσαι: to be silent (once) |

| |silent | |

|Participles: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|σιγῶν, ῶσα, ῶν: being silent |σιγήσων, ουσα, ον: being about |σιγήσας, ασα, αν: having been |

| |to be silent |silent |

2. Fill in the chart below:

|Meaning |Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|shout |βοάω |βοήσομαι |ἐβόησα |

|honor |τιμάω |τιμήσω |ἐτίμησα |

|laugh |γελάω |γελάσομαι |ἐγέλασα |

|ask |ἐρωτάω |ἐρωτήσω |ἠρώτησα |

|be hungry |πεινάω |πεινήσω |ἐπείνησα |

|see |ὁράω |ὄψομαι |εἶδον |

|live |ζάω |ζήσω |ἔζησα |

3. Label the construction and then translate the sentence:

1. The slave did not wake until the master left.

a. πρίν + Ιndicative after a negative main clause = until

b. ὁ δοῦλος οὐκ ἤγειρε πρὶν ὁ δεσποτὴς ἔλιπεν.

2. He was groaning before waking.

a. πρίν + infinitive = before

b: ἔστενε πρὶν εγείρειν.

3. If they were not laughing, they would be shouting.

a. Present C-F Conditional: εἰ + imperfect, imperfect + ἄν

b. εἰ μὴ ἐγέλων, ἀνεβόων ἄν.

4. If he had not asked, the guests would have been silent.

a. Past C-F Conditional: εἰ + Aorist, Aorist + ἄν

b. εἰ μὴ ἐρώτησεν, οἱ ξένοι ἐσίγησαν ἄν.

4. Translate the following:

(1) ἡμέρᾳ τινί, ὁ γεραιὸς ἵππος τῆς χελώνης ἀπέθανεν. (2) ἡ δ’ ἀνεβόα, ‘ὅπου ἦλθον, ἐκεῖ καὶ ὁ ἵππος μου ἦλθον. (3) πάντες ἑτίμων με διὰ τοῦτον τὸν ἵππον. (4) οὐδεὶς τιμᾷ χελώνην μὴ ἔχουσαν ἵππόν.’ (5) ἀνήρ τις πλούσιος, ἄκουσας ταῦτα καὶ οἰκτίρων τὴν χελώνην, αὐτῇ δίδωσι καινὸν ἵππον. (6) ἡ δ’εἷλε τὸν ἵππον, ἀλλ’ ἔτι ἀνεβόα καὶ ᾤμωζεν, ‘ὡς μάλιστα ἀθυμῶ. (7) ἡ λύπη μου μεγίστη. (8) εἰ γὰρ μὴ ἀπώλεσα τὸν πρῶτον ἵππον, εἶχον ἂν νῦν δύο.’ (9) καὶ ὁ πλούσιος ὀργιζόμενος ἐκέλευσε τινα τῶν δούλων αἱρεῖν τὸν ἴππον. (10) ‘εἰ μή ἀνεβόησας τὸ δεύτερον,’ ὁ πλούσιος ἔφη, ‘νῦν εἶχες ἂν ἵππον τε καὶ τίμην.’

(1) One day, the old horse of the turtle died. (2) And she began to shout, “Wherever I went, there also did my horse go. (3) All used to honor me on account of this horse. (4) No one honors a turtle that doesn’t have a horse’. (5) A certain wealthy man, having heard these things and pitying the turtle, gives her a new horse. (6) And she took the horse, but still she was crying and lamenting aloud, “I am as disheartened as possible. (7) My grief is very great. (8) For if I had not lost the first horse, now I would have two.” (9) And the rich man, becoming angry, ordered one of the slaves to take the horse. (10) “If you had not shouted for the second time,” the wealthy man said, “now you would have both a horse and honor.”

LESSON 33. INDIRECT DISCOURSE IN GREEK AND ENGLISH; GNOMIC AORIST

Chapters 33 and 34 focus on the very important construction of Indirect Discourse, reviewing materials first introduced on pages 52 and 84 in the Textbook as well as adding new materials. This chapter also introduces a construction known as the gnomic aorist which is used in proverbs and maxims.

1. Three Structures of Indirect Discourse

Different Greek verbs introduce different varieties of indirect discourse. In this chapter we will focus on three verbs that introduce indirect discourse (we will learn more verbs that do so in the next chapter) and the various structures of reporting indirect statements. The following list shows the three different ways that Greek handles indirect statements. This material is covered on page 136 of the Textbook.

1. ὅτι or ὡς Clauses Followed by an Indicative Verb. Use this structure whenever the introductory verb is λέγω. Either ὅτι or ὡς may function as the clause marker for this variety of indirect statement.

Direct Statement: The sisters write letters. αἱ ἀδελφαὶ γράφουσιν ἐπιστολάς.

Indirect Statement: I say that the sisters write letters. λέγω ὄτι αἱ ἀδελφαὶ

γράφουσιν ἐπιστολάς.

ΟR

λέγω ὡς αἱ ἀδελφαὶ γράφουσιν ἐπιστολάς.

2. Subject Accusative*, Verb Infinitive. Use this structure whenever the introductory verb is λέγω or νομίζω. Notice that λέγω has two different ways of introducing an indirect statement (either a ὅτι/ὡς clause or a subject accusative/verb infinitive), while νομίζω only takes the subject accusative/verb infinitive. Since there is no clause marker with the subject accusative/verb infinitive, the Greek verb which introduces the indirect discourse is itself the signal that an indirect statement may follow.

Direct Statement: The sisters write letters. αἱ ἀδελφαὶ γράφουσιν ἐπιστολάς.

Indirect Statement: I say that the sisters write letters. λέγω τὰς ἀδελφὰς

γράφειν ἐπιστολάς. (Literally, I say the sisters to be writing letters. However, indirect discourse is so common that you should get used to forgoing the literal translation and just translate all indirect sentences with a “that” clause.)

I think that the sisters write letters. νομίζω τὰς ἀδελφὰς γράφειν ἐπιστολάς.

3. Subject Accusative*, Verb Participle. Use this structure whenever the introductory verb is ἀκούω. In this structure, a participle, agreeing in case, number, and gender with the subject of the indirect discourse, replaces the infinitive. Since there is no clause marker, the Greek introductory verb is the signal that an indirect statement may follow.

Direct Statement: The sisters write letters. αἱ ἀδελφαὶ γράφουσιν ἐπιστολάς.

Indirect Statement: I hear that the sisters write letters. ἀκούω τὰς ἀδελφὰς

γραφούσας ἐπιστολάς.

*The subject of an infinitive or participle in indirect discourse is accusative case unless the subject of the introductory verb and the subject of the subordinate infinitive or participle are the same. The subject of the infinitive or participle is then omitted, and any modifiers are in the nominative case: I think that I am happy, νομίζω εἶναι εὐδαίμων.

(Exercise 1

a. Fill in the chart below for the different structures of Indirect Discourse: [70]

|Introductory Verb |Clause Marker in Greek (If Any) |Case of Subject of Indirect |Form of Verb |

| | |Statement | |

|1.λέγω | | | |

|2.λέγω | | | |

|3.νομίζω | | | |

|4.ἀκούω | | | |

b. Translate the following: [71]

1. They say that she is taking the child (2 ways).

________________________________________________________________________

2. They think that she is taking the child.

________________________________________________________________________

3. They hear that she is taking the child.

________________________________________________________________________

2. Tenses in Indirect Discourse

Although Greek has three varieties of reporting an indirect statement, the verbs (whether indicative, infinitive or participle) always reflect the direct statement and will be formed on the same stem as the direct statement. This material is covered on page 136 of the Textbook.

|Direct Statement |Tense /Stem |1. ὅτι or ὡς Clause |2. Subject Accusative, |3. Subject Accusative, |

| | | |Verb Infinitive |Verb Participle |

|“They write” |Present Continuous |I say that they write. |I think/say that they |I hear that they write. |

| | | |write. | |

| | |λέγω ὅτι (ὡς) γράφουσιν. |νομίζω αὐτοὺς γράφειν. |ἀκούω αὐτοὺς γράφοντας. |

|γράφουσιν. | | | | |

|“They will write” |Future |I say that they will |I think/say that they |I hear that they will |

| | |write. |will write. |write. |

|γράψουσιν. | | |νομίζω αὐτοὺς γράψειν. |ἀκούω αὐτοὺς γράψοντας. |

| | |λέγω ὅτι (ὡς) γράψουσιν. | | |

|“They wrote” |Aorist |I say that they wrote. |I think/say that they |I hear that they wrote. |

| | | |wrote. | |

| | |λέγω ὅτι (ὡς) ἔγράψαν. |νομίζω αὐτοὺς γράψαι. |ἀκούω αὐτοὺς γράψαντας. |

|ἔγραψαν. | | | | |

(Exercise 2

Change each direct statement into three varieties of indirect discourse. (You may need to review personal pronouns on page 96 of the Textbook. [72]

1. Direct Statement: κλέπτομεν.

a. λέγει ὅτι/ὡς ____________________________Translation____________________

b. νομίζει ___________________________

c. ἀκούει ____________________________

2. Direct Statement: κλέψεις (M).[73]

a. λέγω ὅτι/ὡς _________________________Translation_____________________

b. νομίζω ___________________________

c. ἀκούω ____________________________

3. Direct Statement: ἔκλεψαν (F).[74]

a. λέγω ὅτι/ὡς ________________________Translation_______________________

b. νομίζω ___________________________

c. ἀκούω ____________________________

3. Tense in English Indirect Discourse

Although Greek Indirect Discourse is very straightforward, English idiom requires changes after introductory verbs that are in the past tense. Read carefully pages 136-7 of the Textbook which discuss tense in English Indirect Discourse. The chart below outlines this material:

|Verb in Indirect Discourse |Translation after a Present or Future |Translation after a Past Introductory Verb|

| |Introductory Verb | |

|Continuous = Roughly Same Time as Main Verb|is |is, X’d, was, were |

|Future = Time After the Main Verb |will |would |

|Aorist = Time Before the Main Verb |X’d * |had X’d |

* There may be instances when ‘had X’d’ may be used if the verb in the direct statement was an aorist used as a prior past.

( Exercise 3

a. Translate the following:[75]

1. νομίζω τὸν δοῦλον κλέπτειν τὸ σῖτον.

________________________________________________________________________

2. ἐνόμισα τὸν δοῦλον κλέπτειν τὸ σῖτον.

________________________________________________________________________

3. λέγομεν ὄτι ὁ δοῦλος κλέψει τὸ σῖτον.

4. εἴπομεν ὄτι ὁ δοῦλος κλέψει τὸ σῖτον.[76]_________________________________________________________________

5. ἀκούει τὸν δοῦλον κλέψαντα τὸ σῖτον.

________________________________________________________________________

6. ἤκουσε τὸν δοῦλον κλέψαντα τὸ σῖτον

________________________________________________________________________

b. Translate the following into Greek.[77]

1. I thought that the men would leave.

________________________________________________________________________

2. He heard that the men had eaten.

________________________________________________________________________

3. We say that he wrote the story (2 ways).

________________________________________________________________________

4. He thinks that you (plural) will save the thief.

________________________________________________________________________

c. Translate the following, remembering that if the subject of the main verb and the verb in indirect discourse are the same, the subject of the indirect discourse will be omitted and its modifiers will be nominative:[78]

(1) βασιλεύς τις ἦν ποτε, ὅς ἐνόμισε εἶναι ὁ μέγιστος καὶ ὁ κράτιστος. (2) ἡμέρα τινί, οἱ Πέρσαι (Persians) ἦλθον νικήσοντες (νικάω, conquer) τοῦτον τὸν βασιλέα. (3) ἦν μάχη, μακρὰ μάχη. (4) τέλος, ὁ ἄγγελος εἶπε τῷ βασιλεῖ ὅτι οἱ Πέρσαι εἷλον τὴν βασιλικὴν πόλιν. (5) ἡ τοῦ βασιλέως λύπη ἧν μεγάλη,

_______________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________

ἀλλ’ ἤλπιζε ἔτι νικήσειν τοὺς Πέρσας.[79] (6) τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ ἦν ἄλλη μάχη, καὶ οἱ Πέρσαι ἐνίκησαν τὸν βασιλέα. (7) ὁ βασιλεὺς ἤκουσε τοὺς Πέρσας ἀποκτείνοντας πάντας τοὺς ἐν τῇ πόλει ἄνδρας. (8) καὶ ὁ ἄγγελος εἶπε αὐτῷ τοὺς Πέρσας ἀποίσειν τὰς γυναῖκας τε καὶ τοὺς παῖδας ὡς (as) δούλους. (9) ὁ βασιλεὺς ᾤμωξε, λέγων, ‘ἐνόμισα εἶναι μέγιστος, ἀλλ’ αληθῶς εἰμι οὐδέν.

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

4. The Gnomic Aorist

Read about the gnomic aorist on page 137 of the Textbook.[80]

( Exercise 4

Translate number 5, 7, and 22 from Heraclitus on pages 224-5 of the Textbook.

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

LESSON 34: INDIRECT DISCOURSE AGAIN

In the last chapter we focused on three verbs and three ways of reporting an indirect statement in Greek. This chapter introduces a range of verbs that introduce indirect discourse and some additional information about Indirect Discourse.

1. Verbs of the Head

Since two of the three indirect discourse constructions in Greek do not have a clause marker, it is particularly important to learn to recognize those words which will trigger an indirect discourse construction. Generally, most “verbs of the head” (which includes the functions of thinking, learning, hearing, seeing, perceiving and saying) trigger indirect discourse in both English and Greek. Different verbs take different constructions. The following outlines some of these verbs and the constructions they take. This material is covered on page 138 of the Textbook.

|Verbs of Thinking/ Learning |Verbs of Saying |Verbs of Perceiving, Announcing, and |

| | |Finding |

| 1. Infinitive |1. Infinitive |1. Participle or Infinitive |

|νομίζω, think consider |λέγω, say |ὁράω, see |

|δοκέω, think |φημί (ἔφη), say, said |εὑρίσκω, find |

|ἡγέομαι, consider |ὄμνυμι, swear | |

| |ὑπισχνέομαι, promise | |

|1. Participle or ὅτι/ὡς |2. Infinitive or ὅτι/ ὡς |2. All Three |

|μανθάνω, learn |λέγω, say |ἀκούω, hear |

| | |αἰσθάνομαι, perceive |

| |3. ὅτι/ὡς |ἀγγέλλω, announce |

| |εἶπον, said | |

( Exercise 1

Translate the words in bold, being sure to give all possibilities. You will not be expected to memorize the chart above but doing this drill will give you some experience in recognizing the verbs which introduce the three forms of indirect discourse.

1. They see that we are taking the money[81]_________________________________________________________________

2. We said (εἶπον) that he is dying. ________________________________________________________________________

3. I perceive that the soldiers are guarding the king. ________________________________________________________________________

4. We learned that she is stealing the money. ________________________________________________________________________

5. He said (ἔφη) that you (pl) are staying. ________________________________________________________________________

6. We hear that he steals. ________________________________________________________________________

7. They find that the women are listening. ________________________________________________________________________

8. We think (any verb of thinking) that you (sg) are writing these letters. ________________________________________________________________________

9. He promises that they (F) are bringing us the supplies.

________________________________________________________________________

10. You announce that they (M) are leaving. ________________________________________________________________________

2. Same Subject of Infinitive or Participle and Negative in Indirect Discourse

Read carefully the Textbook, page 138, to review how Greek handles indirect discourse when the subject of the indirect discourse is the same as the main verb in infinitive and participle indirect discourse constructions. This is important to master because such constructions are not found in English and may easily be misinterpreted when encountered in the Greek. The key is to recognize the “verbs of the head” which may trigger indirect discourse, so that participles and infinitives in indirect discourse may easily be recognized.

( Exercise 2

Translate the following:[82]

1. πολλοὶ νομίζουσι εἷναι σοφοί, ἀλλὰ ὁ Σωκράτης μόνος ἤγγελλεν οὐ ὤν σοφός.

___________________________________________________________________

2. οἱ Πέρσαι (Persians) ἐδόκουν εἷναι κράτιστοι, ἀλλ’ οἱ Ἕλληνες ηὗρον ὄντες κρεῖττονες τῶν Περσῶν.[83]

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

3. The men see that they (same subject) are dying. (2 ways)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

4. The child (F) finds that she (same subject) is not sick. (2 ways)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

3. Ambiguity of Person in Indirect Discourse

Read carefully pages 138-9 to learn how Greek and English sometimes have ambiguity of person in Indirect Discourse.

( Exercise 3

a. Translate the following, indicating whether the person in each part of the sentence is the same (S), different (D), or ambiguous (A).[84]

1. ἀκουούσιν ὅτι γράψουσι τὰς ἐπιστολάς.

________________________________________________________________________

2. ἀκουούσιν γράψοντες τὰς ἐπιστολάς

________________________________________________________________________

3. ἀκουούσιν αὐτοὺς γράψειν τὰς ἐπιστολάς ________________________________________________________________________

4. ἀκουούσιν γράψειν τὰς ἐπιστολάς ________________________________________________________________________

b. Translate the following:

1. I (Μ) find that I am sick. (2 ways) [85] __________________________________________________________________

2. They think that they (F) (different they) will leave. ________________________________________________________________________

3. He hears that they (M)had written. (3 ways) ________________________________________________________________________

4. Ambiguity of Stem/Tense with Infinitive or Participle in Indirect Discourse

Read carefully page 139 to learn how the Continuous stem used in indirect discourse can sometimes reflect a direct statement in the imperfect (since there is no imperfect infinitive) as well as one in the present.

( Exercise 4

Translate the following sentences, giving all possibilities:[86]

1. ἀκούω ὄτι οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρωπος ἔκλεπτεν.

________________________________________________________________________

2. ἀκούω τοῦτον τὸν ἄνθρωπον κλέπτειν.

________________________________________________________________________

3. ἀκούω τοῦτον τὸν ἄνθρωπον κλέπτοντα.

________________________________________________________________________

5. Ambiguity: Indirect Discourse or Direct Object

Read the note in the middle of page 139 of the Textbook. You can always tell whether ἀκούω introduces introduces indirect discourse rather than a genitive object (analyze the examples in the textbook), but there will be ambiguity after verbs of finding and discovering, since those verbs take an accusative whether it is indirect discourse or object.

( Exercise 5:

Translate the following sentences. If there is an ambiguity, translate the sentence in two ways: [87]

1. ἀκούω τοῦ βασιλέως λέγοντος.

2. ἀκούω τὸν βασιλέα λέγειν.

3. εὑρίσκομεν τὸν βασιλέα εὔδειν.

( Exercise 6: Explication

a. After reading the story on page 140 in the Textbook, explicate the following nouns and pronouns:

|Line |Greek |Part of Speech|Case |Number |Gender |Construction |

|2 |τύχῃ [88] | | | | | |

|4. |ἑνί | | | | | |

|5. |ἡμερῶν | | | | | |

|16. |ἀγγείου | | | | | |

|23. |τί | | | | | |

|26. |με | | | | | |

|28. |μοι | | | | | |

b. After reading the story on page 140 in the Textbook, explicate the following verb forms. [89]

|Line |Greek |Tense/Aspect |Mood |Construction |

|3. |ποιήσειν | | | |

|7. |ποιήσων | | | |

|13. |τεκεῖν | | | |

|23. |δακρύοντα | | | |

|25. |ἀποθανεῖν | | | |

|27. |ἀποθανεῖν | | | |

|27. |ἀπέθανεν | | | |

|29. |ἀγγέλλοντι | | | |

6. Vocabulary for “The Death of the Pot”

Nouns

|τὸ ἀγγεῖον |pot, vessel |

|ἡ τύχη |fortune good or bad, chance, |

Adjectives

|δεινός, ή, όν |awesome, terrible/wonderful |

|κάκιστος, η, ον |worst |

|ποῖος, α, ον |what sort, what sort of |

Verbs

|αἰσθανόμαι, αἰσθανοῦμαι, ἡσθόμην |perceive |

|ἀπο-δίδωμι, ἀπο-δώσω, ἀπ-έδωκα |give back |

|δοκέω, δόξω, ἔδοξα |seem, seem best, think |

|ἡγέομαι |consider |

|ἵστημι, στήσω, ἔστησα |set upright, stand something |

|πιστεύω, πιστεύσω, ἐπίστευσα |trust, trust in + Dative |

|τίκτω, τέξομαι, ἔτεκον |give birth |

|χράομαι, χρήσομαι, ἐχρησάμην |use, make use of + Dative |

|χρῄζω, χρῄσω, ἔχρῃσα |have a lack, want, need + Gen |

PRACTICE QUIZ 5: LESSONS 33 AND 34

1. Translate the following:

a. I hear that she gave birth. (3 ways)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

b. They announce that they (same they) will leave. (3 ways)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

c. Ηe perceives that he (different he) is staying. (3 ways)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

d. They think (δοκέω) that they (same they) are not wise.

________________________________________________________________________

e. I say (λέγω) that we used to write. (2 ways)

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

2. Translate the following and explicate the words in bold.

(1) ὁ φίλος τις ἔδωκε (gave) τῷ Σοφῷ μέγα ἀγγεῖον ὅτε ὁ Σοφὸς ἔμελλε ποιήσειν μέγα δεῖπον καὶ ἔχρῃζε μεγάλου ἀγγείου. (2) καὶ ὁ Σοφὸς ἐχρήσατο τούτῳ τῷ ἀγγείῳ, καὶ απ-έδωκε τριῶν ἡμερῶν, στήσας ἀγγεῖον μάλα μικρὸν ἐν τῷ μεγάλῳ, λέγων τὸ ἀγγεῖον τεκεῖν. (3) ἀλλ’ ὅτε ὁ φίλος ἔδωκε τὸ δεύτερον αὐτῷ τὸ μέγα ἀγγεῖον, ὁ Σοφὸς οὐ κατῆλθεν ἀποδώσων. (4) καὶ τῷ φίλῳ αἰτήσαντι, ‘ποῦ τὸ ἀγγεῖον μου;’, ὁ Σοφὸς εἷπε, ‘χρή με ἀγγεῖλαι τί σοι.’ (6) καὶ ἤγγειλε τύχῃ κακίστῃ τὸ ἀγγεῖον ἀποθανεῖν. (7) ὁ δὲ φίλος, ‘ἡγῇ,’ ἔφη, ‘με μῶρον εἶναι; (8) οὐκ ἔστιν ἀγγεῖον ἀποθανεῖν. (9) ὁ μὴ ζῶν οὐκ ἀπέθανε. (10) ποῖον λόγος εἶπες;’ (11) τῷ Σοφῷ ἀποκριναμένῳ ‘ὁ τεκῶν ἀπέθανε’, ὀ φίλος εἶπε, ‘τέλος νῦν αἰσθάνομαι σε λέγοντα δεινῶς, καὶ αἰσθάνομαι οὐ σοφῶς πιστεῦσαί σοι.’

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

|Line |Greek |Part of Speech|Case |Number |Gender |Construction |

|1. |ἀγγείου | | | | | |

|2. |ἀγγείῷ | | | | | |

|2. |ἡμερῶν | | | | | |

|4. |τί | | | | | |

|6. |τύχῃ | | | | | |

|7. |με | | | | | |

|Line |Greek |Person |Number |Tense/Aspect |Mood |Construction |

|1. |ποιήσειν | | | | | |

|2. |τεκεῖν | | | | | |

|3. |ἀποδώσων | | | | | |

|4. |αἰτήσαντι | | | | | |

|6. |ἀποθανεῖν | | | | | |

|8. |ἀποθανεῖν | | | | | |

|9. |ἀπέθανεν | | | | | |

|10. |λέγοντα | | | | | |

ANSWERS, PRACTICE QUIZ 5: LESSONS 33 AND 34

1. Translate the following:

a. I hear that she gave birth. (3 ways)

ἀκούω αὐτὴν τεκεῖν.

ἀκούω αὐτὴν τεκοῦσαν.

ἀκοὐω ὅτι (ὡς) ἔτεκεν.

b. They announce that they (M) (same they) will leave. (3 ways)

ἀγγέλλουσιν λείψειν.

ἀγγέλλουσιν λείψοντες.

ἀγγέλλουσιν ὅτι (ὡς) λέιψουσιν.

c. Ηe perceives that he (different he) is staying. (3 ways)

αἰσθάνεται αὐτὸν μένειν.

αἰσθάνεται αὐτὸν μένοντα.

αἰσθάνεται ὅτι (ὡς) μένει.

d. They think (δοκέω) that they (M)(same they) are not wise.

δοκοῦσιν οὐκ ὄντες σοφοί.

e. I say that we used to write. (2 ways)

λέγω ὅτι (ὡς) ἐγράφομεν.

λέγω ἡμᾶς γράφειν.

2. Translate the following and explicate the words in bold.

(1) ὁ φίλος τις ἔδωκε (gave) τῷ Σοφῷ μέγα ἀγγεῖον ὅτε ὁ Σοφὸς ἔμελλε ποιήσειν μέγα δεῖπον καὶ ἔχρῃζε μεγάλου ἀγγείου. (2) καὶ ὁ Σοφὸς ἐχρήσατο τούτῳ τῷ ἀγγείῳ, καὶ απ-έδωκε τριῶν ἡμερῶν, στήσας ἀγγεῖον μάλα μικρὸν ἐν τῷ μεγάλῳ, λέγων τὸ ἀγγεῖον τεκεῖν. (3) ἀλλ’ ὅτε ὁ φίλος ἔδωκε τὸ δεύτερον αὐτῷ τὸ μέγα ἀγγεῖον, ὁ Σοφὸς οὐ κατῆλθεν ἀποδώσων. (4) καὶ τῷ φίλῳ αἰτήσαντι, ‘ποῦ τὸ ἀγγεῖον μου;’, ὁ Σοφὸς εἷπε, ‘χρή με ἀγγεῖλαι τί σοι.’ (6) καὶ ἤγγειλε τύχῃ κακίστῃ τὸ ἀγγεῖον ἀποθανεῖν. (7) ὁ δὲ φίλος, ‘ἠγῇ,’ ἔφη, ‘με μῶρον εἶναι; (8) οὐκ ἔστιν ἀγγεῖον ἀποθανεῖν. (9) ὁ μὴ ζῶν οὐκ ἀπέθανε. (10) ποῖον λόγος εἶπες;’ (11) τῷ Σοφῷ ἀποκριναμένῷ ‘ὁ τεκῶν ἀπέθανε’, ὀ φίλος εἶπε, ‘τέλος νῦν αἰσθάνομαι σε λέγοντα δεινῶς, καὶ αἰσθάνομαι οὐ σοφῶς πιστεῦσαί σοι.’

1) A certain friend gave the Wise One a big pot when the Wise One was intending to make a big dinner and was needing a big pot. (2) And the Wise One used this pot and gave it back within three days, having set a very small pot upright in the big one, saying that the pot had given birth. (3) But when the friend gave him the big pot a second time, the Wise One did not return to give back the pot. (4) And when the friend asked (to the friend asking), “Where is my pot?”, the Wise One said, “It is necessary for me to announce something to you.” (6) And he announced that, by the worst luck, the pot had died. (7) And the friend said, “Do you think that I am a fool? (8) It is not possible for a pot to die. (9) ‘The one not living does not die’. (10) What sort of a word have you spoken (did you say)?” (11) Αfter the Wise One answered, “The one giving birth, dies,” the friend said, “Finally, now I perceive that you speak awesomely (cleverly), and I perceive that I trusted you unwisely.”

|Line |Greek |Part of Speech|Case |Number |Gender |Construction |

|1. |ἀγγείου |Noun |G |S |N |Genitive after the verb “need” |

|2. |ἀγγείῷ |Noun |D |S |N |Dative after the verb “use” |

|2. |ἡμερῶν |Noun |G |Pl |F |Time Within Which |

|4. |τί |Indef. |A |S |N |D.O., accented because followed by an |

| | | | | | |enclitic |

|6. |τύχῃ |Νουn |D |S |F |Dative of Means |

|7. |με |Pro. |A |S |M |Subject in Indirect Disc. |

|Line |Greek |Person |Number |Tense/Aspect |Mood |Construction |

|1. |ποιήσειν |X |X |Future |Inf. |Future Complement after “intend” |

|2. |τεκεῖν |X |X |Aorist |Inf. |Indirect Discourse, Time Before |

|3. |ἀποδώσων |X |X |Future |Part. |Fut. Part. of Purpose |

|4. |αἰτήσαντι |X |X |Aorist |Part. |Modifies I. O. φίλῳ |

|6. |ἀποθανεῖν |X |X |Aorist |Inf. |Indirect Discourse |

|8. |ἀποθανεῖν |X |X |Aorist |Inf. |After Verb of Possibility |

|9. |ἀπέθανεν |3rd |S |Aorist |Ind. |Gnomic Aorist |

|10. |λέγοντα |X |X |Present/Cont |Part. |Indirect Discourse |

UNIT TWO REVIEW: PRINCIPAL PARTS AND VOCABULARY

Instead of a practice exam to review all the materials learned in Unit Two, there will be a review lesson. This review lesson allows you to consolidate your knowledge of all the vocabulary you have so far studied in the second part of the course, including principal parts. The lesson, with some extra exercises in the Workbook, also helps you to solidify your grasp of how to use these principal parts, before we learn more about the Greek verb system. The Textbook suggests you spend a few days, memorizing principal parts (page 141) and vocabulary (see the list on page 145). To sweeten these memorization tasks is a four part story (which you will enjoy) with vocabulary to be learned before reading the story.

During this time, it will be important to review the following constructions, mastering them before you will be introduced to a number of new constructions. This is the order in which we learned them:

1. Ingressive Aorist, page 118.

2. Genitive Absolute, page 120.

3. Future Infinitive afer Certain Verbs, page 124

4. Future Participle of Purpose, page 124

5. Aorist as Prior Past, page 124

6. Anticipated Object, page 124

7. Use of πρίν, page 130

8. Contrary to Fact Conditionals, page 133

9. Mixed Conditionals, page 134

10. Omitted If Clause, page 134

11. Three Varieties of Indirect Discourse, page 136,

12. Gnomic Aorist, page 137

13. Same Subject of Infinitive or Participle in Indirect Discourse, page 138

14. Ambiguity of Person with Infinitve or Participle in Indirect Discourse, page 139

15. Ambiguity of Stem with Infinitive or Participle in Indirect Discourse, page 139

16. Ambiguity: Indirect Discourse or Object, page 139.

You should also review the formation of the Continuous, Future, and Aorist of all the varieties of verb forms we have learned, including special aorists (see Textbook 120). Fill in the following 5 charts to make sure you have a firm grasp on all these varieties. If you need additional practice, I have supplied extra blank charts. In future lessons, these charts will be expanded, so it is important to have mastery over what we have already learned.

How you structure the review is up to you. Below, I have suggested one possible way.

Study Session One: 1. Memorize the principal parts in the first box, page 141. 2. Fill out the chart for λείπω (All charts are on the following pages). 3. Review the first four constructions on the previous page. 4. Memorize the vocabulary for the first part of the story and read it. If you wish to check your understanding of the readings, check the answers to textbook exercises:

Study Session Two: 1. Memorize the principal parts in the second box, page 141. 2. Fill out the charts for μισέω and τιμάω (All charts are on the following pages). 3. Review constructions 5-8 on the previous page. 4. Memorize the vocabulary for the second part of the story and read it.

Study Session Three: 1. Memorize the principal parts in the third box, page 141. 2. Fill out the chart for κρίνω (All charts are on the following pages). 3. Review constructions 9-12 on the previous page. 4. Memorize the vocabulary for the third part of the story and read it.

Study Session Four: 1. Memorize the principal parts in the last box, page 141. 2. Fill out the chart for χαίρω (All charts are on the following pages). 3. Review the first four constructions on the previous page. 4. Memorize the vocabulary for the fourth part of the story and read it.

Study Session Five: 1. Review all the vocabulary in the Textbook listing, page 145, plus previous listings on pages 60-61 and 106-7. 2. Reread the story. The Textbook, page 142, asks the question: “How does it feel to read a text without looking up words?” (and forms and constructions)? What is your answer?

Chart I. Fill in the chart below for the verb leave, λείπω, λείψω, ἔλιπον. Check your answers with the chart on page 123 of the Textbook.

|Indicative: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Present |Imperfect |Future |Aorist |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

| |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ | | | |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

| |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Translation: | | | |

|________________ |Translation: |Translation: |Translation: |

| |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Infinitive: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Form ___________________ |_______________ |_______________ |

|Translation ___________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Participles: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Forms _______________________ |_______________ |_______________ |

|Translation ________________________ |________________ |________________ |

Chart 2 a. Fill in the chart below for the verb hate (μισέω, μισήσω, ἐμίσησα). Remember that only the continuous forms contract, because only the continuous stem has an extra vowel. Check your answers with the paradigm on page 126 of the Textbook.

|Indicative: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Present |Imperfect |Future |Aorist |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

| |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ | | | |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

| |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Translation: | | | |

|________________ |Translation: |Translation: |Translation: |

| |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Infinitive: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Form ___________________ |_______________ |_______________ |

|Translation ___________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Participles: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Forms _______________________ |_______________ |_______________ |

|Translation ________________________ |________________ |________________ |

Chart 2 b. Fill in the chart below for the verb τιμάω, τιμήσω, ἐτίμησα). Remember that only the continuous forms contract, because only the continuous stem has an extra vowel. Check your answers with the paradigm on page 129 of the Textbook.

|Indicative: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Present |Imperfect |Future |Aorist |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

| |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ | | | |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

| |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Translation: | | | |

|________________ |Translation: |Translation: |Translation: |

| |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Infinitive: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Form ___________________ |_______________ |_______________ |

|Translation ___________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Participles: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Forms _______________________ |_______________ |_______________ |

|Translation ________________________ |________________ |________________ |

Chart 3. Fill in the chart below for the verb judge, κρίνω, κρινῶ, ἔκρῑνα). This verb has a contract future and a liquid (lemonrow) aorist. Also note that this verb has a long iota in the aorist: ἔκρῑνα. An answer sheet follows this page.

|Indicative: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Present |Imperfect |Future |Aorist |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

| |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ | | | |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

| |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Translation: | | | |

|________________ |Translation: |Translation: |Translation: |

| |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Infinitive: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Form ___________________ |_______________ |_______________ |

|Translation ___________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Participles: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Forms _______________________ |_______________ |_______________ |

|Translation ________________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Indicative: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Present |Imperfect |Future |Aorist |

|κρίνω |ἔκρινον |κρινῶ |ἔκρῑνα |

|κρίνεις |ἔκρινες |κρινεῖς |ἔκρινας |

|κρίνει |ἔκρινε(ν) |κρινεῖ |ἔκρινε(ν) |

|κρίνομεν |ἐκρίνομεν |κρινοῦμεν |ἐκρίναμεν |

|κρίνετε |ἐκρίνετε |κρινεῖτε |ἐκρίνατε |

|κρίνουσι(ν)) |ἔκρινον |κρινοῦσι(ν) |ἔκριναν |

|I judge, am judging |I was judging, used to judge | | |

| | |I will judge |I judged |

|Infinitive: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Form κρίνειν |κρινεῖν |κρῖναι |

|Translation to be judge, to be judging |to be about to judge |to judge (once) |

|Participles: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Forms κρίνων, ουσα, ον |κρινῶν, κρινοῦσα, κρινοῦν |κρίνας, ασα, αν |

|Translation judging |being about to judge | |

| | |having judged |

4. Fill in the chart below for rejoice, χαίρω, χαιρήσω, ἐχαρην. The Continuous and Future should be easy for you now. Check your answers for the aorist on page 120 of the Textbook.

|Indicative: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Present |Imperfect |Future |Aorist |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

| |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ | | | |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

| |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Translation: | | | |

|________________ |Translation: |Translation: |Translation: |

| |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Infinitive: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Form ___________________ |_______________ |_______________ |

|Translation ___________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Participles: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Forms _______________________ |_______________ |_______________ |

|Translation ________________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Indicative: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Present |Imperfect |Future |Aorist |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

| |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ | | | |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

| |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Translation: | | | |

|________________ |Translation: |Translation: |Translation: |

| |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Infinitive: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Form ___________________ |_______________ |_______________ |

|Translation ___________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Participles: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Forms _______________________ |_______________ |_______________ |

|Translation ________________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Indicative: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Present |Imperfect |Future |Aorist |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

| |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ | | | |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

| |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Translation: | | | |

|________________ |Translation: |Translation: |Translation: |

| |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Infinitive: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Form ___________________ |_______________ |_______________ |

|Translation ___________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Participles: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Forms _______________________ |_______________ |_______________ |

|Translation ________________________ |________________ |________________ |

UNIT THREE: LESSONS 35-42

Completion of the Active Voice: Subjunctive, Optative and Imperative Moods; the Perfect System

LESSON 35. THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD

This chapter introduces the subjunctive “mood”. The word “mood” means “mode” and refers to the manner and type of action a verb depicts. The indicative mood expresses facts, while the subjunctive refers to possible action.

1. The Subjunctive Mood

Read carefully page 147 to learn about the formation and translation of the subjunctive mood. Notice the following:

▪ The subjunctive endings are formed by lengthening the ο/ε vowel of the present indicative personal endings to η/ω. Thus, the endings are: -ω, -ῃς, -ῃ, -ωμεν, -ητε, -ωσι(ν). These endings must be memorized, since the subjunctive mood may always be recognized by these lengthened endings.

▪ The subjunctive mood shows only aspect (continuous vs. snapshot), so that there is only a continuous or aorist subjunctive. Because the mood is aspectual only, there is no time-marker, nor is there a future subjunctive.

▪ The –σα aorist subjunctive, because its endings have η/ω vowels with present endings, may “seem” future. It is important to remember that there is no future subjunctive.

▪ Translationese for the subjunctive is “should be X-ing (continuous); should X (aorist)”. We will learn other translations later in this lesson.

▪ The present indicative and the present/ continuous subjunctive of the first person singular look the same: παύω (present indicative, I am stopping) vs. παύω (present/continuous subjunctive, should I be stopping). Context will often help to distinguish between the two.

▪ The future indicative and the aorist subjunctive of the first person subjunctive look the same: παύσω (future indicative, I will stop) vs. παύσω (aorist subjunctive, should I stop). Context will often help to distinguish between the two.

( Exercise 1

a. Form the subjunctives for παύω, παύσω, ἔπαυσα. The accent is recessive:

|Present Subjunctive[90] |Aorist Subjunctive |

| | |

| | |

| | |

| | |

| | |

| | |

b. Form the subjunctives for ἄγω, ἄξω, ἤγαγον: [91]

|Present Subjunctive |Aorist Subjunctive |

| | |

| | |

| | |

| | |

| | |

| | |

c. Give the aorist form that corresponds with the following continuous subjunctives, and then translate the aorist form Make sure that you have the correct stem for forming the aorist subjunctive (a list of principal parts is on page 141 of the Textbook).[92]

1. βλέπῃς ____________________ ________________________

2. νομίζωμεν ____________________ ________________________

3. δακρύῃ ____________________ ________________________

4. λείπητε ____________________ ________________________

5. θάπτω ____________________ ________________________

6. τυγχάνωσι(ν) ____________________ ________________________

7. ἐθέλῃ ____________________ ________________________

2. The Uses of the Subjunctive as the Main Verb of a Sentence.

Read carefully about the three uses of the subjunctive as a main verb on page 148 of the Textbook.

( Exercise 2

a. Fill in the chart below which tabulates the attributes of the three uses of the subjunctive as a main verb.[93]

|Name of Construction |Tenses Used |Negatives Used |Translations Used |Cues of Punctuation, |

| | | | |Person, or Tense |

|1. | | | | |

|2. | | | | |

|3. | | | | |

b. Translate the following being sure to notice differences in aspect, translating every present as a continuous, remembering that punctuation is a clue:[94]

1. βάλλωμεν τάδε. ______________________

2. μὴ βάλωμεν τάδε. ______________________

3. βάλωμεν τάδε; ______________________

4. μὴ γράψητε. ______________________

5. τί κελεύσω; (2 ways) ______________________ ___________________

6. Don’t (sg.) save them. __________________________________________

7. What should we do ? ________________________________________

8. Let’s not be finding. __________________________________________

4. Uses of the Subjunctive as a Subordinate Verb

Read carefully about the uses of the Subjunctive as a subordinate verb on page 148 of the Textbook. Note the following:

▪ The clause markers for purpose clauses (ἵνα, ὡς, ὅπως) may be translated as “so that” or “in order that”. The negative for purpose clauses is μή.

▪ The clause marker for fear clauses (introduced by verbs of fearing or caution) is μή which may be translated as “lest”. Although awkward in English, this translation will often help you to translate correctly. In this construction, μή is a conjunction, not a negative adverb. The negative for fear clauses is οὐ.

▪ Βoth of the subordinate uses of the subjunctive can be translated (albeit sometimes clumsily) by using a “should”. If you find these translations clumsy, use “may/might” for purpose and the English subjunctive for a fear clause.

( Exercise 4

a. Fill in the chart below which tabulates the attributes of the two uses of the subjunctive as a subordinate verb.[95]

|Name of Construction |Clause Markers Used |Negatives Used |Translations Used |Cues If Any |

|1. | | | | |

|2. | | | | |

b. Translate the following sentences, paying attention to aspect: [96]

1. φοβοῦμαι μὴ ὁ βασιλεύς λίπῃ.

________________________________________________________________________

2. μείνωμεν ὅπως μάθωμεν τάδε.

________________________________________________________________________

3. ἐφοβοῦντο μὴ οὐ ἐθελήσητε ἔρχεσθαι.

________________________________________________________________________

4. τοῦτο ποιεῖ ὡς μὴ οἱ παῖδες δακρύωσιν.

________________________________________________________________________

5. Let’s go (once) so that you (sg) should/ might persuade (once) them.

________________________________________________________________________

6. I fear lest they should not send (once) the letter.

________________________________________________________________________

5. Summary of the Subjunctive Forms and Usages

a. Fill in the chart below, which asks you to chart the subjunctive with the verbs forms you know for the verb “steal” , κλέπω, κλέψω, ἔκλέψα. Check your answers with the chart of page 147 of the Textbook.

|Indicative: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Present |Imperfect |Future |Aorist |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

| | | | |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

| | | | |

|Translation: |Translation: |Translation: |Translation: |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Subjunctive: Continuous |XXX |Aorist |

|________________ |XXX |________________ |

|________________ | |________________ |

|________________ | |________________ |

|________________ | |________________ |

|________________ | |________________ |

|________________ | |________________ |

| | |Translation: |

|Translation ______________________ | |_________________ |

|Infinitive: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Form ___________________ |_______________ |_______________ |

|Translation ___________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Participles: Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Forms _______________________ |_______________ |_______________ |

|Translation ________________________ |________________ |________________ |

c. Fill in the chart below which summarizes the usages of the subjunctive that you know so far:

Subjunctive as Main Verb[97]

|Name of Construction |English Example |

|1. | |

|2. | |

|3. | |

Subjunctive as Subordinate Verb [98]

|Name of Construction |English Example and Greek Clause Markers |

|1. | |

|2. | |

6. ( Explication Exercise[99]

After reading the story on page 149 of the Textbook, explicate the following words:

|Line |Greek |Person |Number |Tense/Aspect |Mood |Construction |

|2. |ᾤκουν | | | | | |

|3. |οὔσης |X |X | | | |

|9. |ἀποκτείνωμεν | | | | | |

|10. |ἀποκτείνωμεν | | | | | |

|11. |ἀποθάνωσι | | | | | |

|14. |οἰκῶσιν | | | | | |

|15. |ἠθύμουν | | | | | |

|20. |ἀποκτεῖναι |X |X | | | |

|21. |φέρῃ | | | | | |

|23. |καθευδόντων |X |X | | | |

|25. |παρέχῃ | | | | | |

7. Vocabulary for “An Old Man’s Advice (Part 1)”

Nouns

|ὁ γέρων (γέροντος) |old man |

|ὁ πατήρ (πατρός) |father |

|ὁ σάκκος |sack |

|ὁ τέκων (τέκοντος) |father; plural, parents |

Adjectives

|γέρων |old |

|κάρπιμος, ον |fruitful |

|πλείων, πλεῖον |more |

|τοιοῦτος, τοιαύτη, τοιοῦτο/ τοιοῦτον |of such a sort |

Verbs

|ἀ-πειθέω, ἀ-πειθήσω |disobey |

|δοκέω, δόξω, ἔδοξα |seem (linking verb); think + subj. acc. verb infinitive; seem |

| |best + dative of the person and complementary infinitive |

|εἰσ-οράω (aorist infinitive εἰσ-ιδεῖν) |look into |

|οἴγνυμι, οἴξω, ᾦξα |open |

|ἀν-οίγνυμι, αν-οίξω, αν-ῴξα |open up |

|ἀν-εῴγνυ (imperfect, 3rd Singular) | |

|παρ-έχω, παρ-έξω, παρ-έσχον |provide |

|συλ-λαμβάνω, συλ-λήψομαι, συν-έλαβον |gather |

|τολμάω, τολμήσω, ἐτόλμησα |have the heart, endure, dare |

|χρή (infinitive χρῆναι) |it is necessary |

Conjunctions

|ἵνα |so that, in order that |

|μή |lest |

|ὅπως |so that, in order that |

|ὡς |so that, in order that |

Prepositions

|τῆλε + Genitive |far from |

LESSON 36. MORE USES OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE; FORMS OF εἰμί.

This chapter introduces the final use of the subjunctive as a subordinate verb – its use in generalizing clauses. The Textbook covers this material on page 150. Read it for an overview, although the Workbook handles the material in a slightly different format. This lesson also completes the paradigm for the continuous forms of εἰμί.

1. Present General Conditional

The present general conditional, used extensively in both Classical and Biblical Greek, affirms a generalized truth in the present:

If ever he should be learning/should learn* something, we always rejoice:

ἐὰν (or ἢν) μανθάνῃ (μάθῃ) τι, χαίρομεν.

*A more colloquial English translation for this conditional is: “If (ever) he is learning/learns something, we (always) rejoice.”

If ever they should not be persuading/should persuade him*, we always stay:

ἐὰν (ἢν) μὴ πείθωσι(ν) (πείσωσι(ν)) αὐτόν, μένομεν.

*A more colloquial English translation for this conditional is: “If (ever) they are not persuading/do not persuade him, we (always) stay.”

Notice the following:

▪ The formula for the present general conditional is: “ἐάν (or ἤν) + subjunctive (continuous or aorist), present indicative or equivalent”.

▪ The “if” word is a compound: ἐάν/ ἤν = εἰ + ἄν.

▪ The subjunctive in the “if” clause, since it refers to aspect only, may be either continuous or aorist, according to the context.

▪ The “always” in the “then” clause is implied by the format of the sentence and the continuous nature of the present, rather than expressed in the Greek. Nor is it always expressed in the English.

▪ The negative for all subjunctives in conditional clauses is μή.

( Exercise 1

Translate the following, making sure that the aspect is clear. Always translate the “if” clause first, even if it is not the first clause in the sentence, until you are secure about the format.[100]

1. ἐὰν πέμψωσι δῶρα, λαμβάνομεν.

________________________________________________________________________

2. ἢν γράφῇ, μένουσιν.[101]

________________________________________________________________________

3. ὀργίζεται, ἐὰν μὴ πράξητε ταῦτα.

________________________________________________________________________

4. ἢν κάμνῃς, ἡ μητὴρ σου οἰμώζει.

________________________________________________________________________

5. Someone always comes, if I should be eating.

________________________________________________________________________

6. If we should announce these things (once), they always listen.

________________________________________________________________________

2. Substitutions for “if”

Relative pronouns and temporal clauses may substitute for “if” in conditional sentences. In present general conditionals, there must always be an ἄν along with the relative or temporal conjunction, as well as a continuous or aorist subjunctive. The following charts the clause-markers in present general conditionals:

|Present General Clause-Markers |Examples |

|If ever: ἐάν/ ἤν = εἰ + ἄν |ἢν (ἐὰν) ἔχῃ σῖτον, χαίρει. |

| |If ever he should have food, he always rejoices. |

|Whenever (ὅταν = ὅτε + αν/ ἔπειδαν = ἐπειδή + ἄν) |ὅταν (ἔπειδαν) ἔχῃ σῖτον, χαίρει. |

| |Whenever he should have food, he always rejoices. |

|Whoever (ὅς + ἄν, ἥ + ἄν, ὅ + ἄν (in all cases) |ὅς ἄν ἔχῃ σῖτον, χαίρει. |

| |Whoever should have food always rejoices. |

( Exercise 2

Translate the following, making aspect as clear as possible:[102]

1.οἳ ἄν μὴ κλέψωσιν πράττουσι καλῶς.

________________________________________________________________________

2. ἔπειδαν (ὅταν) λίπῃς , δακρύομεν.

________________________________________________________________________

3. ἣ ἄν φιλήσῃ τὸ ἔργον εὐδαίμων εστίν.[103]

________________________________________________________________________

4. οἳ ἃν ταῦτα λέγωσιν ἀδικοῦσιν.

_______________________________________________________________________

3. Future-More-Vivid Conditional

This conditional uses the same pattern as the present general, except that the verb in the “then” clause is a future indicative or its equivalent, as seen in the examples below. The basic formula is: ἐάν (or substitutes) + the subjunctive, future indicative. This conditional does not posit a general truth, but a supposition (hence the use of the subjunctive) about the future. As with the Present General, the present or aorist subjunctive may be used, and the negative for the subjunctive form is μή.

|Future More Vivid Clause-Markers |Example |

|If ever: ἐάν/ ἤν = εἰ + ἄν |ἢν (ἐὰν) ἔχῃ σῖτον, χαιρήσει. |

| |If ever he should have/has food, he will rejoice. |

|Whenever (ὅταν = ὅτε + αν/ ἔπειδαν = ἐπειδή + ἄν) |ὅταν (ἔπειδαν) ἔχῃ σῖτον, χαιρήσει. |

| |Whenever he should have/has food, he will rejoice. |

|Whoever (ὅς + ἄν, ἥ + ἄν, ὅ + ἄν (in all cases) |ὅς ἄν ἔχῃ σῖτον, χαιρήσει. |

| |Whoever should have/has food, will rejoice. |

( Εxercise 3

Translate the following:[104]

1. ἐὰν κελεύσῃς ταῦτα, ποιήσομεν.

________________________________________________________________________

2. ὃς ἄν τὴν πόλιν σώσωσιν εὑρήσει εὐδαιμονίαν.

________________________________________________________________________

3. ἔπειδαν λίπητε, μενῶ.

________________________________________________________________________

4. πέμψω δῶρα, ἢν γήμῃς.

________________________________________________________________________

4. The Forms of εἰμί

Examine the paradigm for the present/continuous system of εἰμί on page 151 of the Textbook. Notice the following:

▪ All the forms of the present indicative, except the second person singular, are enclitic. When reproducing the paradigm, even though they are enclitic forms, it is traditional to use an accent on the final syllable of all the forms except the second person singular.

▪ All the forms of the imperfect have a smooth breathing and are accented with a circumflex. The first and third person singular of the imperfect can have the same form: ἦν, although there is an alternate first person form, ἦ.

▪ Because of contractions, the subjunctive is nothing more than the subjunctive endings with a smooth breathing and a circumflex.

▪ The infinitive and participle forms, as you have already learned, also have smooth breathings.

These forms are so commonly used that is truly essential to learn them well, by saying them aloud over and over again with pitched accents and by reproducing the paradigm often.

( Exercise 4

Reproduce the paradigm on page 151 by memory for the forms of εἰμί twice in the charts below:

|Indicative |Indicative |

|Present |Imperfect |Present |Imperfect |

|_____________ |_____________ |_____________ |_____________ |

|_____________ |_____________ |_____________ |_____________ |

|_____________ |_____________ |_____________ |_____________ |

|_____________ |_____________ |_____________ |_____________ |

|_____________ |_____________ |_____________ |_____________ |

|_____________ |_____________ |_____________ |_____________ |

|Subjunctive |Subjunctive |

|_____________ |_____________ |

|_____________ |_____________ |

|_____________ |_____________ |

|_____________ |_____________ |

|_____________ |_____________ |

|_____________ |_____________ |

|Infinitive |Infinitive |

|__________________ |__________________ |

|Participle |Participle |

|__________________________________ |__________________________________ |

b) Write the paradigm for the participle of εἰμί. Check your answers with the paradigm on page 98 of the Textbook.

|Case |Masculine |Feminine |Neuter |

|N | | | |

|A | | | |

|G | | | |

|D | | | |

| | | | |

|N | | | |

|A | | | |

|G | | | |

|D | | | |

c) Translate the following forms:[105]

1. ἦν (2 ways) _________________________________

2. ᾖς _________________________________

3. οὔσης _________________________________

4. ἦτε (2 ways) _________________________________

5. ὦ _________________________________

6. ἦσθα _________________________________

7. ᾖ _________________________________

8. ὄν _________________________________

9. οὖσι _________________________________

10. ἦσαν _________________________________

11. they are _________________________________

12. of them (F) being_________________________________

13. we were _________________________________

14. to be _________________________________

15. should they be _________________________________

5. Distinguishing Forms of εἰμί from Words Which Look Similar

There are a number of words which resemble the forms of εἰμί and it is very important to be able to distinguish between the various forms. One essential clue for the forms of the verb “be” is their smooth breathing. This feature distinguishes them from similar forms of the relative pronoun which have rough breathings. For other words, the accentuation is often a distinguishing mark. Examine the following chart which lists the forms of εἰμί and compares them to words which resemble those forms. The features of the look-alike forms printed in bold distinguish these forms from those of εἰμί.

|Forms of εἰμι |Features |Look Alike Forms |Features |

|εἶ (you are) |smooth, circumflex |εἰ (if) |smooth, no accent |

|ἦ (I was) |smooth, circumflex |ἡ (the) |rough, no accent |

|ἦ (I was) |smooth, circumflex |ἥ (who) |rough, acute |

|ἦ (I was) |smooth, circumflex |ἤ (or) |smooth, acute |

|ἦν (I / he, she, it was) |smooth, circumflex |ἥν (whom) |rough, acute |

|ἦν (I / he, she, it was) |smooth, circumflex |ἤν (if ever) |smooth, acute |

|ὦ (should I be) |smooth, circumflex |ὦ (oh) |smooth, circumflex, but used with |

| | | |Voc. |

|ὦ (should I be) |smooth, circumflex |ᾧ (to whom) |rough, circumflex, iota subscript |

|ᾖς (should you be) |smooth, circumflex, iota subscript |ἧς (of whom, whose) |rough, circumflex, no iota |

| | | |subscript |

|ᾖ (should he, she, it be) |smooth, circumflex, iota subscript |ᾗ (to or for whom) |rough, circumflex, iota subscript |

|ὤν (he being) |smooth, acute |ὧν (of whom, whose) |rough, circumflex |

|ὄν (it being) |smooth, acute |ὅν (whom) |rough, acute |

( Εxercise 5

Underline the form of εἰμί contained in each group below, explaining why the form is from εἰμί and then translate each word. Remember that the forms of εἰμί have smooth breathings, are all circumflexed in the imperfect indicative and the continuous subjunctive, and that the look-alike forms of the participle have acute accents.

1. ᾧ/ὦ/ὦ [106] ____________________________________________

2. εἰ/εἶ ______________________________________________________

3. ἡ/ ἦ/ ἥ/ ἤ ______________________________________________________

4. ὧν/ ὤν ______________________________________________________

5. ᾖ/ ᾗ ______________________________________________________

6. ὄν/ ὅν ______________________________________________

7. ᾖς, ἧς ______________________________________________________

8. ἥν, ἦν ______________________________________________

PRACTICE QUIZ 6: LESSONS 35 AND 36

1. Complete the following chart for the verb “stop”, giving the third person plural of indicative forms, all forms of the subjunctive, and the nominative plural of the participle in all genders:

|Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Indicative | | |

|Present |Imperfect |Future |Aorist |

|________________ |_______________ |________________ |_______________ |

|Subjunctive |XXX |Aorist |

|____________________ |XXX |________________ |

|____________________ | |________________ |

|____________________ | |________________ |

|____________________ | |________________ |

|____________________ | |________________ |

|____________________ | |________________ |

|Infinitive |Future |Aorist |

|____________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Participles |Future |Aorist |

|____________________________ |__________________ |________________ |

2. Fill in the chart below for all the uses of the subjunctive including the two subjunctive conditional clauses:

Subjunctive as Main Verb

|Name of Construction |English Example |

|1. | |

|2. | |

|3. | |

Subjunctive as Subordinate Verb

|Name of Construction |English Example and Greek Clause Markers |

|1. | |

|2. | |

|3. | |

|4. | |

3.Underline the subjunctives, then translate the following, labeling each subjunctive usage.

1. μὴ ἀποκτείνωμεν τοὺς γέροντας.

________________________________________________________________________

2. συλλαβόντες τοὺς ἀνθρώπους, πορεύονται ὡς οἰκῶσιν ἐν ἄλλῃ γῇ καρπιμωτέρᾳ.

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

3. ἢν φέρῃς τὰ μῆλα, οἴσω τὸ οἶνον.

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

4. μὴ πέμψητε τὸν ἄγγελον.

_______________________________________________________________________

5. ἔπειδαν λίπῃ, τολμάω μένειν.

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

6. οἱ τεκόντες ἐφοβοῦντο μὴ οἱ παῖδες ἀπειθῶσιν.

________________________________________________________________________

7. παρέχωμεν τοιαῦτα;

________________________________________________________________________

8. ὅς ἄν συλλαβῃ τὸ σῖτον τίθησιν ἐν τῇ οῖκίᾳ.

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

4. Complete the paradigm for the forms of εἰμί:

|Indicative |

|Present |Imperfect |

|_____________ |_____________ |

|_____________ |_____________ |

|_____________ |_____________ |

|_____________ |_____________ |

|_____________ |_____________ |

|_____________ |_____________ |

|Subjunctive |

|_____________ |

|_____________ |

|_____________ |

|_____________ |

|_____________ |

|_____________ |

|Infinitive |

|__________________ |

|Participle |

|__________________________________ |

5. Underline the forms of εἰμί in each group and then translate each word:

1. ᾧ/ὦ/ὦ _______________________________

2. ἥν/ἤν/ἦν _______________________________

3. ἡ/ ἦ/ ἥ _______________________________

6. Translate the following and label the conditional:

1. Whenever we should be happy, you (S) are always happy.

___________________________________________________________________

2. If you (S) were happy, they would be happy.

___________________________________________________________________

3. If they should be happy, you (S) will rejoice.

___________________________________________________________________

ANSWERS, PRACTICE QUIZ 6: LESSONS 35 AND 36

1. Complete the following chart for the verb “stop”, giving the third person plural of indicative forms, all forms of the subjunctive, and the nominative plural of the participle in all genders:

|Continuous |Future |Aorist |

|Indicative | | |

|Present |Imperfect |Future |Aorist |

|παύουσι(ν) |ἔπαυον |παύσουσι(ν) |ἔπαυσαν |

|Subjunctive |XXX |Aorist |

|παύω |XXX |παύσω |

|παύῃς | |παύσῃς |

|παύῃ | |παύσῃ |

|παύωμεν | |παύσωμεν |

|παύητε | |παύσητε |

|παύωσι(ν) | |παύσωσι(ν) |

|Infinitive |Future |Aorist |

|παύειν |παύσειν |παῦσαι |

|Participles |Future |Aorist |

|παύοντες, παύουσαι, παύοντα |παύσοντες, παύσουσαι, παύσοντα |παύσαντες, παύσασαι, παύσαντα |

2. Fill in the chart below for all the uses of the subjunctive including the two subjunctive conditional clauses:

Subjunctive as Main Verb

|Name of Construction |English Example |

|1. Hortatory |Let’s go |

|2. Deliberative |Should we go? |

|3. Prohibitive (Aorist Only) |Don’t go. |

Subjunctive as Subordinate Verb

|Name of Construction |English Example and Greek Clause Markers |

|1. Purpose |I do this so that you should be happy. (ἵνα, ὡς, ὅπως) |

|2. Fear |I fear lest you should not be happy. (μή) |

|3. Present General |If ever (whenever, whoever) you should go, I am always happy. |

| |(ἐάν, ἤν, ὄταν, ἔπειδαν, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ + ἄν) |

|4. Future More Vivid |If ever (whenever, whoever) you should go, I will be happy. (see |

| |above) |

3. Circle the subjunctives, then translate the following, labeling each subjunctive usage.

1. μὴ ἀποκτείνωμεν τοὺς γέροντας.

Let’s not kill the old ones. Hortatory

2. συλλαβόντες τοὺς ἀνθρώπους, πορεύονται ὡς οἰκῶσιν ἐν ἄλλῃ γῇ καρπιμωτέρᾳ.

After gathering the people, they journey so that they should (might) live in another, more fruitful land. Purpose

3. ἢν φέρῃς τὰ μῆλα, οἴσω τὸ οἶνον.

If you should be (are) bringing the apples, I will bring the wine. Future More Vivid.

4. μὴ πέμψητε τὸν ἄγγελον.

Don’t send the messenger. Prohibition.

5. ἔπειδαν λείπῃ, τολμάω μένειν.

Whenever he should be leaving/is leaving, I always dare to remain. Present General.

6. οἱ τεκόντες ἐφοβοῦντο μὴ οἱ παῖδες ἀπειθῶσιν.

The parents were afraid lest the children should be disobeying. Fear.

7. παρέχωμεν τοιαῦτα;

Are we to be providing such things? Deliberative

8. ὅς ἄν συλλαβῃ τὸ σῖτον τίθησιν ἐν τῇ οῖκίᾳ.

Whoever should gather the food puts it in the house. Present General.

4. Complete the paradigms for the forms of εἰμι:

Compare with the paradigm on page 151 of the textbook.

5. Underline the forms of εἰμί in each group and then translate each word:

1. ᾧ/ὦ/ὦ to whom/ should I be/ Oh

2. ἥν/ἤν/ἦν whom/ if ever/ I/he, she, it was

3. ἡ/ ἦ/ ἥ the/ I was/ who

6. Translate the following:

1. Whenever we should be happy, you (S) are always happy.

ὅταν ὦμεν εὐδαίμονες, εἶ εύδαίμων. Present General

2. If you (S) were happy, they would be happy.

εἰ ἧσθα εὐδαίμων, ἦσαν ἄν εὐδαίμονες. Present Contrary to Fact

3. If they should be happy, you (S) will rejoice.

ἐὰν/ ἣν ὦσιν εὐδαίμονες, χαιρήσεις.

LESSON 37. THE PERFECT.

This lesson introduces the final system of the Greek verb: the perfect system. The perfect system depicts completed (hence the name “perfect” which means completed) action with continuing effects in the present. The perfect system contains two indicatives: the perfect (or present perfect), “I have washed and am therefore clean” and the pluperfect (or past perfect),”I had washed and was therefore clean”, just as the continuous system contains a present and an imperfect indicative. This chapter also introduces the perfect infinitive (“to have washed and to therefore be clean”) and the perfect participle (“having washed and therefore being clean”).

1. The Perfect: Meaning and Translation

Read carefully page 154 of the textbook to understand perfect aspect and the difference between aorist as a prior past and the aspect of the perfect system as a past with present effects. Because English uses the helping verb “have” for both situations, it is often difficult to distinguish between the two in English.

( Exercise 1

Explain the difference between the following:[107]

1. (a) “After having drunk too much wine, I left the party.” vs. (b) “Having drunk too much wine, I cannot drive.”

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

2. (a) “I had bathed the children and they stayed clean for several hours.” vs. (b)

“I had bathed the children before I watched the video.” ________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

2. Regular Formation of the Fourth Principal Part

Perfect principal parts are formed by “reduplication” of the present stem. This means that the initial consonant of the continuous stem is “reduplicated” and added as a prefix to the continuous stem with an epsilon as a connector (παύω ( παυ- ( πεπαυ-) and -κα added as a suffix: ( πέπαυκα, I have stopped

κελευ- ( κεκέλευκα, I have ordered

λυ ( λέλυκα, I have released

( Exercise 2

Form the regular fourth principal part for the following verbs:[108]

1. παιδεύω _____________________

2. βουλεύω ________________________

3. Formation of the Regular Fourth Principal Part of Contract Verbs

Contract verbs form the fourth principal just as the verbs above do, but the final vowel of the continuous stem changes to an eta:

σιγα-( σιγη- ( σεσίγηκα, I have been silent

ποιε- ( ποιη- ( πεποίηκα, I have made

( Εxercise 3

Form the fourth principal part for the following verbs:[109]

1. μισέω __________________________

2. τιμάω __________________________

4. The Perfect Active Forms

Examine carefully the paradigm for the perfect forms of παύω on page 155 of the Textbook. Notice the following:

▪ The perfect indicative endings resemble the endings of the aorist indicative except for the third person plural: -α, -ας, -ε(ν), -αμεν, -ατε, -ᾱσι(ν).

▪ The pluperfect indicative is formed by adding a time-marker to the perfect stem (ἐπεπαυκ-) and then adding the following endings: -η, -ης, -ει(ν), -εμεν, -ετε, -εσαν. Some of these endings are the result of contractions and do not “feel” past. The 3rd person singular (ει) resembles a 3rd person present continuous. Notice also the nu movable in the 3rd person singular: the ειν ending resembles a present infinitive. Watch for the presence of a time-marker on a reduplicated stem as one way of identifying the pluperfect.

▪ The infinitive ending is -έναι Τhe accent is on the next-to-last syllable.

▪ The participle has unique endings and a unique stem, all of which must be committed to memory. The nominative endings are: ώς, υῖα, ός. The genitive stem of the masculine and neuter is formed by changing the final sigma of the neuter nominative to a tau, with the accent remaining over the ο/ω in all forms: πεπαυκός ( πεπαυκότ-. The feminine, since its stem ends in an iota, has an alpha in all the singular forms, although the Nominative and Accusative singular irregularly have a short alpha although the Genitive singular, Dative Singular and Accusative Plural have the expected long alpha. The accent (except for the genitive plural, as is regular for all O-A-O words) of the feminine is always on the next-to-last syllable. The full declension of the perfect participle is found in the Textbook on page 240, bottom left hand side. Correct the accentuation of the Genitive Plural feminine on that page. In some editions, there is an extra accent. The correct accentuation is λελυκυιῶν.

( Exercise 4

Write the paradigm for the verb λύω “release”. In reproducing the paradigms, use the standard translations of “I have X’ed” for the perfect; “I had X’ed” for the pluperfect; “to have X’ed” for the infinitive; “having X’ed” for the participle, with the understanding that these translations are just approximations of perfect aspect. Check your answers with the paradigm on page 155 of the Textbook.

|Indicative |

| Perfect |Pluperfect |

|_____________________________ |_____________________________ |

|_____________________________ |_____________________________ |

|_____________________________ |_____________________________ |

|_____________________________ |_____________________________ |

|_____________________________ |_____________________________ |

|_____________________________ |_____________________________ |

|Translation |Translation |

|_____________________________ |_____________________________ |

|Infinitive |

|Form ____________________________ |

|Translation ________________________ |

|Participle |

|__________________________________ |

|Translation ________________________ |

b. Complete the paradigm for the perfect participle of παύω: Check your answers with the paradigm on page 240 of the Textbook. Notice that some editions of the Textbook have two accents for the feminine, genitive plural. The correct form is λελυκυιῶν.

|Case |Masculine |Feminine |Neuter |

|N | | | |

|A | | | |

|G | | | |

|D | | | |

| | | | |

|Ν | | | |

|Α | | | |

|G | | | |

|D | | | |

c. Translate the following (this exercise uses the verbs illustrated above):[110]

1. λελυκυίας (2 ways) _____________________________

2. ἐμεμίσηκειν _____________________________

3. πεπαιδεύκασι _____________________________

4. λελυκόσι(ν) _____________________________

5. ἐπεπαύκης _____________________________

6. τετιμηκώς _____________________________

7. she, having made _____________________________

8. to the ones having ordered___________________________

9. to have educated _____________________________

5. K-less Perfects (“Second Perfects”)

Many verbs form their fourth principal part without a kappa. Such verbs also often show some variations in stem between the continuous and perfect:

γράφω ( γέγραφα λειπω ( λέλοιπα

κλέπτω ( κέκλοφα πλήττω ( πέπληγα

All these verbs, however, have the same endings as verbs with a kappa stem. Examine carefully the paradigm for λέλοιπα and the list of common κ-less perfect verbs on page 155.

( Exercise 5

a. Complete the paradigm for κλέπτω in the chart below. Check your answers with the paradigm on page 155 of the Textbook.

|Indicative |

| Perfect |Pluperfect |

|κέκλοφα |_____________________________ |

|_____________________________ |_____________________________ |

|_____________________________ |_____________________________ |

|_____________________________ |_____________________________ |

|_____________________________ |_____________________________ |

|_____________________________ |_____________________________ |

|Translation |Translation |

|_____________________________ |_____________________________ |

|Infinitive |

|Form ____________________________ |

|Translation ________________________ |

|Participle |

|__________________________________ |

|Translation ________________________ |

b. Complete the paradigm for the perfect participle of κλέπτω. Check your answers with the paradigm on page 240.

|Case |Masculine |Feminine |Neuter |

|N | | | |

|A | | | |

|G | | | |

|D | | | |

| | | | |

|Ν | | | |

|Α | | | |

|G | | | |

|D | | | |

c. Translate the following:[111]

1. ἐγεγράφεσαν ________________________________

2. πεπληγυίαις ________________________________

3. ἐλελοίπει ________________________________

4. κέκλοφας [112] ________________________________

5. γεγραφώς ________________________________

6. πεπληγέναι ________________________________

7. they have written ________________________________

8. it, having left ________________________________

9. we had struck ________________________________

10. of him, having left ________________________________

11. he had stolen ________________________________

6. Additional Reduplication Rules

Read through the various different kinds of reduplication in the Textbook on pages 155-6. The following chart summarizes reduplication rules:

|Initial Letters |Example |Reduplication |Rule |

|Single consonant |παύω |πεπ- |Reduplicate initial consonant, add epsilon as|

| | | |connector |

|Single aspirated consonant (φ, χ, θ) |φιλέω |πεφ- |Reduplicate with unaspirated equivalent (π, |

| | | |κ, τ) |

|Double consonant whose second |γράφω |γεγρ- |Reduplicate with initial consonant |

|consonant is a liquid | | | |

|(“lemonrow”)letter. | | | |

|Other double consonants, including ζ |ζητέω |ἐζ- |Omit reduplication of initial consonant(s), |

|(= σ + δ) |στρατεύω (serve in |ἐστρ- |add epsilon before the stem as reduplication,|

| |the army) | |to avoid too many harsh consonants |

| |φθείρω (destroy) | | |

| | |ἐφθ | |

|Initial rho |ῥίπτω-(throw) |ἐρρ- |Add epsilon as reduplication, double the rho |

| | | |for euphony |

|Initial vowel |ἀγγέλλω |ἠγγ- |Lengthen initial vowel as reduplication |

| |ἑθέλω |ἠθ- | |

|Initial diphthong |εὑρίσκω |ηὑ- |Lengthen initial vowel (use iota subscript |

| |αἱρέω |ᾑρ- |for iota consonants) |

( Exercise 6

a. Show the reduplication prefix for the following verbs as in the first example:[113]

1. θνῄσκω ( τεθ-

2. δακρύω ( ______________________

3. στέλλω (send) ( ______________________

4. φυλάττω ( ______________________

5. κλέπτω ( ______________________

6. ἐρωτάω ( ______________________

7. βλάπτω (harm) ( ______________________

8. αἱρέω ( ______________________

9. ἀδικέω ( ______________________

10. χαίρω ( ______________________

11. ῥίπτω ( ______________________

7. Perfect Forms with Vowel Reduplication

Sometimes it is difficult to recognize perfect forms which do not reduplicate regularly but which add only an epsilon or lengthen the initial vowel as part of the perfect system. These vowels are not time-markers but signal reduplication. As such these vowels are retained for all forms, even in the infinitive and participle: ἤγγελκα, ἠγγελκέναι (infinitive), ἠγγελκώς (masculine participle). When forming the pluperfect for verbs whose perfect principal part forms with vowel reduplication or lengthening, no additional vowel is added as a time marker: ἤγγελκα (I have announced), ἠγγέλκη (I had announced). This sometimes makes such pluperfects difficult to recognize.

( Exercise 7

Translate the following verbs formed from ἀγγέλλω, ἀδικέω, αἱρέω, ἐθέλω, ζάω, ῥίπτω (throw), στρατεύω (serve in the army): [114]

1. ἠθέληκει _______________________________

2. ἐζηκώς _______________________________

3. ἐρριφέναι _______________________________

4. ᾔρηκεσαν _______________________________

5. ἠγγέλκης _______________________________

6. ἠδικηκυῖα _______________________________

7. ἐστρατεύκεμεν _______________________________

8. Using the Dictionary

Since verbs are listed in the dictionary alphabetically by the first principal part, it is important to be able to strip away the reduplication to find dictionary entries for perfect forms which you do not recognize. Once you have done that, since the stem often changes between the continuous and perfect principal parts, you may have to make an educated guess based on the first few letters of the stem without reduplication. You may also consult the list of principal parts on pages 249-250 in the Textbook.

( Exercise 8

Give the first Principal parts for the following perfect forms.[115]

1. ἔγνωκα ____________________________

2. βέβληκα ____________________________

3. ἔζηκα ____________________________

4. ἔφθειρα ____________________________

5. πέπραγα ____________________________

6. ᾕρηκα ____________________________

7. κέκρικα ____________________________

8. πεφύλαχα ____________________________

9. κεχάρηκα ____________________________

9. Fourth Principal Parts of Common Verbs

Read through page 156 and examine the chart which lists the fourth principal part for many common verbs which have a fourth principal part (not all verbs do). Although many fourth principal parts differ somewhat in stems from the first principal part, they are often easy to guess, except for those forms which have completely different stems. Such verbs are underlined in the chart.

( Exercise 9

a. Cover the first principal parts in the perfect principal parts list on page 156. List below the verbs whose first principal parts you could not guess. Write the first and fourth principal parts of these verbs. Memorize them.

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

b. Translate the following forms. All the verbs come from the fourth principal parts list on page 156 of the Textbook. Do not be discouraged if you have to look up some forms, even after you have attempted to memorize them. It is only by encountering these verbs several times that they will easily be recognized.[116]

1. ἐλήλυθας _________________________

2. πεπομφώς _________________________

3. βεβληκέναι _________________________

4. ἐτετυχήκει(ν) _________________________

5. ἔσχηκε(ν) _________________________

6. γεγόνασι(ν) _________________________

7. εἰρήκαμεν _________________________

8. ἑωρακός _________________________

9. ἐγνωκέναι _________________________

10. ἐσεσώκης _________________________

11. ἠγγελκότι _________________________

12. ἐπεπώκεσαν _________________________

13. ἤχαμεν _________________________

14. νενομικόσιν _________________________

15. ἐνηνόχετε _________________________

(10. Explication Exercise

After reading the story on page 157 of the Textbook, explicate the following verbs:

|Line |Greek |Person |Number |Tense/Aspect |Mood |Construction |

|4. |ἑώρακα [117] | | | | | |

|11. |ἀπ-ενέγκῃ | | | | | |

|13. |τέθνηκεν | | | | | |

|17. |εἰσῆλθεν | | | | | |

|17. |ζητήσων |X |X | | | |

|20. |ἔπεμπεν | | | | | |

|21. |ἔπαθον | | | | | |

|23. |λέγῃ | | | | | |

11. Vocabulary for “An Old Man’s Advice (Part 2)”

Nouns

|ἡ θάλαττα |sea, ocean |

|ἡ κύλιξ (κύλικος) |cup |

Adjectives

|ἄξιος, α, ον |worthy, worthy of + G or Inf. |

|τέθνηκα, τέθνηκας, τεθνηκε(ν), τέθναμεν, τέθνατε, τεθνᾶσιν; infinitive |have died, am dead |

|τεθνάναι | |

|τεθνεώς, τεθνεῶσα*, τεθνεός (τεθνεῶτος, τεθνεώσης*, τεθνεῶτος) |having died, being dead |

|τεθνηκώς, υῖα, ός (τεθνηκότος*, τεθνηκυίας, τεθνηκότος*) |having died, being dead |

|χρυσοῦς, ῆ, οῦν (contraction of χρυσεέος, α, ον) |golden |

* Correct the misprints of the underlined words found in some editions.

Verbs

|ἀπο-βλέπω, ἀπο-βλέψω, ἀπ-έβλεψα |look off, look away |

|ἀφικνέομαι, ἀφίξομαι, ἀφικόμην |come to, arrive |

|κτάομαι, |acquire |

|κέτημαι |I have acquired, I possess |

|τέθνηκα |I have died, am dead |

|πάσχω, πείσομαι, ἔπαθον |undergo, suffer, experience |

|λέγω χαίρειν |say goodbye |

Adverbs

|σφόδρα |strongly, vehemently |

Conjunctions

|ἐάν (ἤν)+ subjunctive |if ever |

|ὡς + subjunctive |so that |

LESSON 38. ὅστις, ἥτις, ὅ τι; PERFECT AS PRESENT; οἶδα

1. ὅστις, ἥτις, ὅ τι As Indefinite Relative

Read about the indefinite relative in the Textbook on page 158. Notice the following:

▪ The word is composed of the relative pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ, plus the indefinite τις, τι, both of which decline.

▪ Since the τις part of the word is an enclitic, its presence does not change the regular accents of the ὄς, ἥ, ὅ part of the word.

▪ Generally (but not in all Greek texts) the neuter of the indefinite relative is spelled ὅ τι to distinguish it from ὅτι “that”.

▪ The alternate forms in the masculine and neuter consist merely of a rough, accented vowel (ὅ/ἅ) plus the appropriate ending of the article, except for the doubling of the tau in ἅττα.

▪ The English equivalents for this word include “anyone who” “anything which” “whoever, whatever” and even “who, which”.

( Exercise 3

a. Write the paradigm for ὅστις, ἥτις, ὅ τι below, including alternate forms. Check your answers with the paradigm on page 158 of the Textbook:

|Case |Masculine |Feminine |Neuter |

|N | | | |

|A | | | |

|G | | | |

|D | | | |

| | | | |

|Ν | | | |

|Α | | | |

|G | | | |

|D | | | |

b. Translate the following phrases. [118]

1. ἅττα ποιεῖ ______________________________________

2. ὅτῳ δίδωσι σῖτον ______________________________________

3. ὅ τι τυγχάνει ______________________________________

4. ὧντινων ἐπιθυμεῖς ______________________________________

5. αἷστισιν πιστεύομεν [119] ______________________________________

6. ὅτων ἀκούετε ______________________________________

7. ὅτοις χράομαι ______________________________________

8. ᾗτινι λέγουσιν ______________________________________

9. Whomever (pl M.) they take ______________________________________

10. Whoever (pl F) comes ______________________________________

11. Whatever (sg) you see ______________________________________

2. ὅστις, ἥτις, ὅ τι in Present General and Future More Vivid Conditionals

The indefinite relative may be used in conditional sentences in exactly the same way as the relative pronoun: ὅς ἄν (or ὅστις ἄν) κελεύσῃ ταῦτα, μένει/ μενεῖ: Whoever should order these things always stays/will stay.

( Exercise 4

Translate the following, using the indefinite relative. Include alternative forms when you can: [120]

1. Whoever (S) should be stealing is always acting unjustly.

________________________________________________________________________

2. Whatever (P) should be good will remain.

________________________________________________________________________

5. ὅστις, ἥτις, ὅ τι As Indefinite Interrogative Clause Marker in Indirect Questions

Read about the use of ὅστις, ἥτις, ὅ τι as an indefinite interrogative on page 158 of the Textbook. Indirect questions follow verbs of saying, thinking, perceiving, wondering and knowing, as well as verbs of asking. Remember that the interrogative pronoun (τίς, τί) may also be used

( Exercise 5

Translate the underlined words, giving all possibilities and alternate forms: [121]

1. He asked her whom (sg. M) she loved. ______________________________

2. I wonder whose (pl) houses they built. ______________________________

3. I know what (S) you were doing. ______________________________

4. They know which men we saved. ______________________________

5. They were asking to whom (sg.F) she gave the letter. ______________________

6. Perfect as Present

Read about the perfects which are translated as presents on pages 158-9 of the Textbook. The perfect indicative of these words equals a present indicative οἶδα I have seen and therefore I know (= Ι know); the pluperfect equals an imperfect indicative (= I knew), and the perfect infinitive and participle equal a continuous infinitive and participle. Such perfect indicatives are equivalents for present indicatives in Present General Conditionals.

( Exercise 6

a. Translate the following: [122]

1. ἐπεφύκει σοφός* __________________________________________

2. ἔστηκε __________________________________________

3. ἐγνωκέναι __________________________________________

4. πεποιθὼς αὐτῇ* __________________________________________

5. ἐστήκης __________________________________________

6. κέκτημαι __________________________________________

7. τεθνηκός __________________________________________

8. ἐγνώκασιν __________________________________________

9. μέμνημαι __________________________________________

10.πεφυκόσιν __________________________________________

11. ὅστις ἂν λίπῃ, τέθνηκεν.

________________________________________________________________________

12. οἶστισιν πιστεύῃς, πεφύκασιν ἄριστοι.

________________________________________________________________________

*πέφυκα is a linking verb; πεποιθα takes a dative object (= trust in).

7. Conjugation of οἶδα

Examine carefully the important paradigm for οἶδα on page 159 of the Textbook.

Notice the following:

▪ All the perfect forms of this verb have an iota or an iota subscript. The stem of this word has three forms: οἰδ-, εἰδ-, ἰδ- (although the delta of the ἰδ- and εἰδ- stem drops out before the sigma of the perfect and pluperfect indicative plural endings).

▪ The pluperfect receives a time-marker of ῃ because it is built on the εἰδ- stem.

▪ The pluperfect (= imperfect) has an iota subscript in all forms. The iota subscript distinguishes ᾔδη (Ι knew) from ἤδη (already) and ᾖσαν (they knew) from ἦσαν (they were).

▪ The perfect (= continuous) infinitive and participle are build on the εἰδ- stem.

( Exercise 7

a. Write the paradigm for οἶδα twice in the chart below. Check your answers with the paradigm on page 159 of the Textbook:

|Indicative |Indicative |

|Perfect |Pluperfect |Perfect |Pluperfect |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Infinitive |Infinitive |

|______________________ |_____________________ |

|Participle |Participle |

|_____________________________ |________________________________ |

b. Translate the following:[123]

1. οἶσθα ______________________________

2. ᾖσμεν ______________________________

3. εἰδότες ______________________________

4. ᾖσαν ______________________________

5. εἰδέναι ______________________________

6. ᾖδειν ______________________________

7. ἴσασιν ______________________________

8. ᾔδησθα ______________________________

9. they (F) knowing ______________________________

10. already ______________________________

11. we know ______________________________

12. I knew [124] ______________________________

13. we knew ______________________________

14. they were ______________________________

8. Vocabulary

Indefinite Relative/Interrogative

|ὅστις, ἥτις, ὅ τι |anyone who, anything which; whoever, whatever; who, which. |

Perfects as Presents

|ἔγνωκα |I know |

|ἔστηκα |I stand |

|κέκτημαι |I possess |

|μέμνημαι |I remember |

|οἶδα |I know |

|πέποιθα + Dative |I trust, trust in |

|πέφυκα (Linking Verb) |I am by nature; I am naturally |

|τέθνηκα |I am dead |

PRACTICE QUIZ 7, LESSONS 37 AND 38

1. Complete the paradigm for the verb “stop” in the chart below. Include the genitive of all genders of the participle:

|Indicative |

| Perfect |Pluperfect |

|_____________________________ |_____________________________ |

|_____________________________ |_____________________________ |

|_____________________________ |_____________________________ |

|_____________________________ |_____________________________ |

|_____________________________ |_____________________________ |

|_____________________________ |_____________________________ |

|Translation |Translation |

|_____________________________ |_____________________________ |

|Infinitive |

|Form ____________________________ |

|Translation ________________________ |

|Participle |

|Nominative ___________________________________________________ |

|Genitive ___________________________________________________ |

|Translation ________________________ |

2. Write the paradigm for ὅστις, ἥτις, ὅ τι below, including alternate forms:

|Case |Masculine |Feminine |Neuter |

|N | | | |

|A | | | |

|G | | | |

|D | | | |

| | | | |

|Ν | | | |

|Α | | | |

|G | | | |

|D | | | |

3. Complete the paradigm for the verb οἷδα

|Indicative |

|Perfect |Pluperfect |

|________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |

|Infinitive |

|______________________ |

|Participle |

|_____________________________ |

4. Translate the following and explicate the words in bold:

(1) ἡμέρᾳ τινί, ὁ τῶν Μογγόλων βασιλεὺς εἶπε, ‘ἑώρακα χρυσῆν κύλικα ἐν τοῖς ὕδασιν τῆς θαλάττης. (2) οὐκ οἷδα ὅστις βέβληκεν αὐτὴν ἐν τῇ θαλάττῃ, ἀλλὰ σφόδρα αὐτῆς ἐπιθυμῶ. (3) ὡς (as) ὁ Εὐριπίδης, ὁ σοφὸς ποιητὴς, ᾔδειν, ὅ τι καλὸν φίλον ἀεί. (4) ὅστις ἄν λάβῃ ταύτην τὴν κύλικα μοι, νομιῶ αὐτὸν ἄξιον πολλῶν δώρων.’ (5) πολλοὶ εἰσῆλθον εἰς τὴν θάλατταν ζητήσοντες αὐτήν, ἀλλὰ πάντες ἔπαθον τὸ αὐτό - θάνατον. (6) τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ, ὀ βασιλεύς εἶπε, ‘οἵτινες ἄν ἔλθωσι ζητησόντες τὴν κύλικα, ἀποθνῄσκουσιν. (7) δέκα ἄνδρες, οἳ ἐπεφύκεσαν ἄριστοι, νῦν τεθνᾶσι. (8) λέγωμεν χαίρειν τοῖς τεθνηκόσιν. (9) ἀλλ’ ἔτι βούλομαι κεκτῆσθαι τὴν κύλικα. (10) οὖτος ὁ παῖς, ἐστηκώς ἐνταῦτθα, λέγει ἐγνωκέναι πῶς χρὴ λαβεῖν τὴν κύλικα. (11) πεποιθὼς αὐτῷ, πέμψω αὐτὸν εἰς τὴν θάλατταν’. (12) μετὰ χρόνον, ὁ παῖς κατῆλθε τὴν καλλίστην κύλικα φέρων, ἀλλ’ οὐδείς ποτε μεμάθηκε πῶς ἔλαβε αὐτὴν.

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

|Sent. |Greek |Part of Speech|Case |Number |Gender |Construction |

|2. |ὅστις | | | | | |

|2. |αὐτῆς | | | | | |

|4. |δώρων | | | | | |

|11. |αὐτῷ | | | | | |

|Line |Greek |Person |Number |Tense/Aspect |Mood |Construction |

|3. |ᾔδειν | | | | | |

|4. |νομιῶ | | | | | |

|5. |ζητήσοντες |X |X | | | |

|6. |ἔλθωσι | | | | | |

|7. |ἐπεφύκεσαν | | | | | |

|8. |τεθνηκόσιν |X |X | | | |

|10. |ἐστηκώς |X |X | | | |

|10. |ἐγνωκέναι |X |X | | | |

ANSWERS, PRACTICE QUIZ 7, LESSONS 37 AND 38

1. Complete the paradigm for the verb “stop” in the chart below. Include the genitive of all genders of the participle.

Consult the paradigm, Textbook, page 155.

The genitive of the participle is πεπαυκότος, πεπαυκυίας, πεπαυκότος (Consult paradigm, Textbook, page 240).

2. Write the paradigm for ὅστις, ἥτις, ὅ τι below, including alternate forms.

Consult the paradigm, Textbook, page 158.

3. Complete the paradigm for the verb οἷδα

Consult the paradigm, Textbook, page 159.

4. Translate the following and explicate the words printed in bold:

(1) ἡμέρᾳ τινί, ὁ τῶν Μογγόλων βασιλεὺς εἶπε, ‘ἑώρακα χρυσῆν κύλικα ἐν τοῖς ὕδασιν τῆς θαλάττης. (2) οὐκ οἷδα ὅστις βέβληκεν αὐτὴν ἐν τῇ θαλάττῃ, ἀλλὰ σφόδρα αὐτῆς ἐπιθυμῶ. (3) ὡς (as) ὁ Εὐριπίδης, ὁ σοφὸς ποιητὴς, ᾔδειν, ὅ τι καλὸν φίλον ἀεί. (4) ὅστις ἄν λάβῃ ταύτην τὴν κύλικα μοι, νομιῶ αὐτὸν ἄξιον πολλῶν δώρων.’ (5) πολλοὶ εἰσῆλθον εἰς τὴν θάλατταν ζητήσοντες αὐτήν, ἀλλὰ πάντες ἔπαθον τὸ αὐτό - θάνατον. (6) τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ, ὀ βασιλεύς εἶπε, ‘οἵτινες ἄν ἔλθωσι ζητησόντες τὴν κύλικα, ἀποθνῄσκουσιν. (7) δέκα ἄνδρες, οἳ ἐπεφύκεσαν ἄριστοι, νῦν τεθνᾶσι. (8) λέγωμεν χαίρειν τοῖς τεθνηκόσιν. (9) ἀλλ’ ἔτι βούλομαι κεκτῆσθαι τὴν κύλικα. (10) οὖτος ὁ παῖς, ἐστηκώς ἐνταῦτθα, λέγει ἐγνωκέναι πῶς χρὴ λαβεῖν τὴν κύλικα. (11) πεποιθὼς αὐτῷ, πέμψω αὐτὸν εἰς τὴν θάλατταν’. (12) μετὰ χρόνον, ὁ παῖς κατῆλθε τὴν καλλίστην κύλικα φέρων, ἀλλ’ οὐδείς ποτε μεμάθηκε πῶς ἔλαβε αὐτὴν.

(1) One day, the king of the Mongolians said, “I have seen a golden cup in the waters of the sea. (2) I do not know who has thrown it in the sea, but I strongly desire it. (3) As Euripides, the wise poet, knew, ‘Whatever is beautiful is always dear’. (4) Whoever should get this cup for me, I will think him worthy of many gifts.” (5) Many went into the sea to search for it, but all experienced the same thing – death. (6) On the following day, the king said, “Whichever ones should go to search for the cup, they always die. (7) Ten men, who were by nature very brave, are now dead. (8) Let us say farewell to those who are dead. (9) But I still want to possess the cup. (10) This child, standing here, says that he knows how it is necessary to take the cup. (11) Trusting in him, I will send him to the sea. (12) After a time, the child came back, carrying the very beautiful cup, but no one has ever learned how he got the cup.

|Sent. |Greek |Part of Speech |Case |Number |Gender |Construction |

|2. |ὅστις |Indef. Rel. |N |Sg |M |Clause-marker, indirect question, subject |

|2. |αὐτῆς |Pron. |G |Sg |F |genitive obj. of ἐπιθυμῶ |

|4. |δώρων |Noun |G |Pl |Nt |Genitive with ἄξιον |

|11. |αὐτῷ |Pron. |D |Sg |M |Dative obj. of πέποιθα |

|Line |Greek |Person |Number |Tense/Aspect |Mood |Construction |

|3. |ᾔδειν |3rd |S |Pluperfect as Imperfect |Ind. |MV |

|4. |νομιῶ |1st |S |Future |Ind |“then” clause in Future More Vivid|

| | | | | | |Conditional |

|5. |ζητήσοντες |X |X |Future |Part. |Fut. Part. of Purpose |

|6. |ἔλθωσι |3rd |Pl |Aorist |Subj. |in Present General |

|7. |ἐπεφύκεσαν |3rd |Pl |Pluperfect as Imperfect |Ind |MV of relative clause |

|8. |τεθνηκόσιν |X |X |Perf. as Present |Part. |Dat, modifies implied I.O. “ones” |

|10. |ἑστηκώς |X |X |Perf. as Present |Part |Nom, modifies subject, παῖς |

|10. |ἐγνωκέναι |X |X |Perf. as Present |Inf. |In Indirect Discourse |

LESSON 39. THE OPTATIVE

The optative, like the subjunctive, is a mood of possibility and indefiniteness, rather than of facts. English hardly uses the subjunctive, except in a few instances, and there is no optative mood in English, so that understanding these Greek moods is a stretch for English speakers. Imagine a line of “reality”: the indicative deals with the “real”, the subjunctive with the “less real”, the optative with the “least real”. So for instance, the indicative, “I walk every day” states a fact; the subjunctive, “Let’s walk every day” or “Should I walk every day?”, a possibility; and the optative, “If only I could walk every day” a wish, which is a desire for something that is probably not in the realm of possibility.

Further, the subjunctive is what is called a “primary” mood. This means that it is associated with “primary” tenses – the present, the future, and the present perfect. “Primary” refers to what is more important (more primary) to the speaker, since what is happening in the “now” or “future” time is somewhat within our control. The optative is a “secondary” mood, associated with “secondary” tenses – the imperfect, the aorist, the pluperfect. The past is completely out of our control (indeed the Maori people call the past “dream” time since it is so “unreal” to them), and therefore labeled “secondary”. So compared to the optative, the subjunctive is labeled “More Vivid”, while the Optative is labeled “Less Vivid”, and the Indicative is “Most Vivid”.

Although we have not focused on the difference between primary and secondary personal endings, perhaps you have noticed that the subjunctive endings, even in the aorist system, resemble present and future endings. In a similar fashion, the optative endings resemble imperfect and aorist endings. (These distinctions will become easier to see when we learn the –μαι verbs).

1. Optative Forms

Read through page 160 of the Textbook to learn about the optative and examine carefully the optative endings. Notice the following:

▪ There are three optative tenses: continuous; future (only used in a construction to be taught later); aorist (snapshot).

▪ Since the continuous and aorist optative express aspect, there is no time marker in the optative.

▪ The vowel sign of the optative mood always contains an iota dipththong.

▪ The optative endings for the present, future, and ε/ο aorist all contain the

-οι diphthong,: -οιμι, -οις, -οι, -οιμεν, -οιτε, -οιεν. These endings are placed on the appropriate stem (λείποιμι, λείψοιμι, λίποιμι).

▪ The optative endings for the -σα aorist all contain an –αι or –ει diphthong: -αιμι, -ειας -ειε(ν), -αιμεν, -αιτε, -ειαν. Easier forms exist but are not as common: -αιμι, -αις, -αι, -αιμεν, -αιτε, -αιεν. Always use the more difficult forms in paradigms and exercises.

▪ Τhe accent for the optative is recessive, but final –οι and final –αι in the optative mood count as long diphthongs.*

▪ Use “would be X-ing” “would X” as translationese for the continuous and “would X” (once) for the aorist of the optative mood when doing paradigms and exercises. The translation for the future is “would X”. We will learn other translations later in this lesson.

* Thus, the third person singular of the optatives of λείπω and παύω, for instance, all receive acutes: λείποι, λείψοι, λίποι; παύοι, παύσοι, παύσαι.

( Exercise 1

a. Form the optatives for ἄγω, ἄξω, ἤγαγον, “lead, bring”: Check your answers with the optative section on page 160 for the verb λείπω.

|Present Optative |Future Optative |Aorist Optative |

|ἄγοιμι |ἄξοιμι |ἀγάγοιμι |

|_____________________ |_____________________ |_____________________ |

|_____________________ |_____________________ |_____________________ |

|_____________________ |_____________________ |_____________________ |

|_____________________ |_____________________ |_____________________ |

|____________________ |_____________________ |_____________________ |

b. Form the optatives for λύω, λύσω, ἔλυσα, “release”: Check your answers with the optative section on page 160 for the verb παύω.

|Present Optative |Future Optative |Aorist Optative |

|_____________________ |_____________________ |_____________________ |

|_____________________ |_____________________ |_____________________ |

|_____________________ |_____________________ |_____________________ |

|_____________________ |_____________________ |_____________________ |

|_____________________ |_____________________ |_____________________ |

|_____________________ |_____________________ |_____________________ |

c. Fill in the chart below:

|Form |Person |Number |Tense |

|1. παύσειας[125] | | | |

|2. λείποι | | | |

|3. παύσαιμι | | | |

|4. παύσοι | | | |

|5. λίποιεν | | | |

|6. παύσειαν | | | |

|7. παύσειε | | | |

|8. λείποις | | | |

|9. παύοιεν | | | |

2. Uses of the Optative as a Main Verb

Read page 161 of the Textbook to learn about the two uses of the optative as a main verb. Then examine carefully the following chart which outlines this material, noting that the presence of ἄν distinguishes the potential optative from the optative of wish:

Οptative Contructions: Main Verb

|Name of Construction |Cue Words (if any) |Negatives |Εxamples |Translation |

|Optative of Wish |εἴθε, or εἰ γάρ or no cue|μή |μὴ παύοι (παύσειε) or |For all variants: If only he would |

| |word | |εἴθε μὴ παύοι (παύσειε) or εἰ γάρ μὴ |not be stopping (stop); may he not |

| | | |παύοι (παύσειε) |be stopping (stop); I wish he would |

| | | | |not be stopping (stop). |

|Potential Optative |ἄν (The particle must be|οὐ |οὐ παύοι (παύσειε) ἄν |It is possible he would not be |

| |present in a Potential | | |stopping (stop); he might (may; |

| |Optative.) | | |could; would) not be stopping |

| | | | |(stop). |

(Exercise 2

Translate the following, making the aspect clear. For the purposes of this exercise, choose, “If only x would” for the optative of wish and “might be X-ing, might X” for the potential optative. Then label each sentence with the optative construction used in the sentence: [126]

1. ἀγάγοι ἄν τὸν ἐλέφαντα. __________________________________________

2. εἰ γὰρ λύσειεν αὐτὸν. __________________________________________

3. οὐ λείποι ἄν τὴν πόλιν. __________________________________________

4. μὴ λείποι τὴν πόλιν. __________________________________________

5. παύσειας τὴν μὰχην. __________________________________________

6. εἴθε ἄγοιεν αὐτούς. __________________________________________

7. They might not leave. (once) __________________________________________

8. If only he would not keep crying.________________________________________

3. Optative Constructions as a Subordinate Verb

Read page 161 of the Textbook to learn how the optative is used as a subordinate verb in three contructions. Notice that in these contructions the use of the optative is optional. The original subjunctives or indicatives may be retained rather than replacing them with the “less vivid” optatives. Examine carefully the following chart which outlines these materials.

Optative Constructions: Subordinate Verb

|Name of Construction |Cue Words (if any) |Negatives |Εxamples |Translation |

|Optative in Past Sequence|ἵνα, ὡς, ὅπως Past Main |μή |τοῦτο ἐποίησα ἵνα ἄγοι (ἄγαγοι) φιλούς |Ι did this so that he |

|Purpose |Verb | | |would be leading/ lead |

|(Replaces Subjunctive.) | | | |friends |

|Optative in Past Sequence|μή (Lest) Past Main Verb |οὐ |ἐφοβεῖτο μὴ ἄγοι (ἄγαγοι) φιλούς. |He was afraid lest he |

|Fear (Replaces |of Fear or Caution | | |would be leading/ lead |

|Subjunctive) | | | |friends. |

|Optative in Optative |Main Verb in the Optative|οὐ |ἄγοι φιλοὺς οὓς γιγνώσκοις. |If only he would be |

|Sequence (Replaces | | | |leading/ lead friends |

|Indicative) | | | |whom you (would) know. |

( Exercise 3

Translate the following sentences and label the subjunctive and optative constructions used.[127]

1. ἀγάγοι τοὺς παῖδας οὓς φιλήσειας.

____________________________________________________________________

2. ἐφοβεῖτο μὴ οὐ γράψωσιν.

____________________________________________________________________

3. ἐφοβεῖτο μὴ οὐ γράψειαν.

____________________________________________________________________

4. ἔκρυψαν ταῦτα ὅπως μὴ βλέψῃ.

________________________________________________________________________

5. ἔκρυψαν ταῦτα ὅπως μὴ βλέψειεν.

________________________________________________________________________

6. οὐ κλέπτοιεν ἄν τὸ σῖτον ὃν ὁ πλούσιος ἔχοι.

________________________________________________________________________

7. We sent the money so that we should/would save the soldiers. (2 ways)

________________________________________________________________________

8. He was afraid lest you should/would leave (once). (2 ways)

________________________________________________________________________

9. We might be reading the books which you keep sending. (Both verbs in optative) ________________________________________________________________________

(4. Verb Chart

1. Complete the following chart for the verb “release”, giving the third person singular of indicative and subjunctive forms, all the forms of the optative, the infinitive, and the accusative singular of the participle in all genders. Check your answers with the chart on the next page:

|Continuous |Future |Aorist |Perfect |

|Present Indicative |Future Indicative |Aorist Indicative |Perfect Indicative |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Imperfect Indic. |X |X |Pluperfect Ind. |

|________________ | | |________________ |

|Subjunctive |X |Subjunctive |X |

|________________ | |________________ | |

|Optative: Present |Optative: Future |Optative: Aorist | Perfect X |

|________________ |________________ |________________ | |

|________________ |________________ |________________ | |

|________________ |________________ |________________ | |

|________________ |________________ |________________ | |

|________________ |________________ |________________ | |

|________________ |________________ |________________ | |

|Infintive |Infinitive |Infintive |Infinitive |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Participle |Participle |Participle |Participle |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Continuous |Future |Aorist |Perfect |

|Present Indicative |Future Indicative |Aorist Indicative |Perfect Indicative |

|λύει |λύσει |ἔλυσε(ν) |λέλυκε(ν) |

|Imperfect Indic. |X |X |Pluperfect Ind. |

|ἔλυε(ν) | | |ἐλελύκει(ν) |

|Subjunctive |X |Subjunctive |X |

|λύῃ | |λύσῃ | |

|Optative: Present |Optative: Future |Optative: Aorist | Perfect X |

|λύοιμι |λύσοιμι |λύσαιμι | |

|λύοις |λύσοις |λύσειας | |

|λύοι |λύσοι |λύσειε(ν) | |

|λύοιμεν |λύσοιμεν |λύσαιμεν | |

|λύοιτε |λύσοιτε |λύσαιτε | |

|λύοιεν |λύσοιεν |λύσειαν | |

| | | | |

|Infintive |Infinitive |Infintive |Infinitive |

|λύειν |λύσειν |λῦσαι |λελυκέναι |

|Participle |Participle |Participle |Participle |

|λύων, λύουσα, λῦον/ |λύσων, λύσουσα, λῦσον/ |λύσας, λύσασα, λῦσαν |λελυκώς, λελυκυῖα, λελυκός/ |

|λύοντα, λύσουσαν, λῦον |λύσοντα, λύσουσαν, λῦσον |λύσαντα, λύσασαν, λῦσαν |λελυκότα, λελυκυῖαν, λελυκός |

( 5. Explication Exercise

After reading the story on page 162 of the Textbook, explicate the following verbs:

|Line |Greek |Person |Number |Tense/Aspect |Mood |Construction |

|3. |ἐποίουν[128] | | | | | |

|5. |ἀποκτείνῃ | | | | | |

|7. |ἀποθάνοιεν | | | | | |

|8. |πέμψειεν | | | | | |

|8. |λάβοις | | | | | |

|9. |ἐθέλοις | | | | | |

|17. |λάβοις | | | | | |

|18. |ἀναβῆναι |X |X | | | |

|23. |ἐνέγκοις | | | | | |

|26. |ὡρῶμεν | | | | | |

6. Vocabulary for “An Old Man’s Advice (Part 3)”

Nouns

|ἡ πέτρα |cliff |

|ὁ πέτρος |rock |

|ἡ σοφία |wisdom |

Adjectives

|ἄκρος, α, ον |topmost, inmost, outermost |

|ῥᾴων, ῤᾴον (From ῤᾴδιος, α, ον. Change misprint in textbook) |easier |

|τοσοῦτος, τοσαύτη, τοσοῦτο/τοσοῦτον |so large, so great As |

|τοσοῦτο/τοσοῦτον |Adverbial Accusative, so much, to such an extent |

Verbs

|δείκνυμι, δείξω, ἔδειξα |show |

|ἐπιθυμέω + Genitive |desire |

|ἴσθι |Know! Imperative of οἶδα |

|πάσχω, πείσομαι, ἔπαθον, πέπονθα |suffer, experiece, |

Prepositions

|διά + Genitive |through, by + Person |

Interjections

|εἴθε |if only |

|εἰ γάρ |if only |

LESSON 40. THE SERIES: ASKING, SHRUGGING, RELATING, AND POINTING WORDS. πόλις. βασιλεύς. SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE.

This lesson gives you a break from verb forms to introduce a series of important “little” words. It also introduces two noun declensions that you will not need to reproduce but must be able to recognize.

1. Asking, Shrugging, Relating and Pointing Words.

The chart on page 163 in the Textbook elegantly reveals patterns which are useful for revealing how Greek interrogatives may become indefinites, relatives, and pointing words. You have met many of these words before. It is particularly important that you observe the patterns which are listed beneath the chart. Carefully studying the chart and noticing these patterns will help you translate Greek with much more ease.

( Exercise 1

a. After studying the chart and the patterns, answer the following. [129]

1. With what letter do direct interrogatives begin? ________________

2. How do Greek shrug-words (indefinites) differ from direct interrogatives?

_____________________________________________________________

3. How do the relative words begin? _____________________________

4. How do the indefinite relative and indirect interrogative words begin?

______________________________________________________________

5. How do demonstrative (pointing) words often begin? ____________

b. Translate the following: [130]

1. ποῖ ___________________________________

2. οὗ ___________________________________

3. ἐκεῖ ___________________________________

4. πόθεν ____________________________________

5. τοῖος ____________________________________

6. οἷ _____________________________________

7. ὁπόθεν _____________________________________

8. ὅθεν ______________________________________

2. Distinguishing between Indefinite Relatives and Indirect Interrogatives.

Notice particularly column 4 which indicates two usages, (1) indirect interrogative and (2) indefinite relative. The top of page 164 in the Textbook gives crucial hints on how to distinguish between the two and, how, like Greek, English may use the same word for different functions.

( Exercise 2

Label the following underlined words as indirect interrogatives (I.I. or indefinite relatives (I.R.) Then translate the underlined word.[131]

1. He asked when(ever) you left the house. _________________________________

2. From wherever you come, we will be happy.______________________________

3. Take however many books you like. _____________________________________

4. I wondered how (ever) he got here. _____________________________________

3. Substituting Direct Interrogatives for Indirect Interrogatives.

You may have noticed in the exercise above that in English it is very easy to distinguish an indirect relative from an indirect interrogative because English does not typically use indirect interrogatives, which is why in translationsese we are using (ever) for indirect interrorgatives. An indirect question embedded in a Greek sentence, however, may use a direct interrogative as well as an indirect interrogative, although the indirect interrogative is more common. A direct interrogative makes the sentence more vivid.

Direct Questions: ποῦ μένουσιν; (Where are they staying?)

Ιndirect Question with an Indirect Interrogative: ἐρωτῶ ὅπου μένουσιν. (I ask where (ever) they are staying.)

Ιndirect Question with a Direct Interrogative: ἐρωτῶ ποῦ μένουσιν. (I ask where they are staying.)

( Exercise 3

Τranslate the following sentences in two ways:[132]

1. I ask where she is staying. ________________________________________________________________________

2. I ask what sort of books they read.

________________________________________________________________________

3. I ask how he writes.

________________________________________________________________________

4. Declension of the -ι stem noun πολις.

Τhe textbook on page 164 introduces the declension of πόλις. There are a number of feminine words that follow this pattern (δύναμις, power, ὕβρις, outrage) as well as some masculine words (μάντις, seer). Particularly important are feminine abstract nouns that are formed from verbs by adding σις to the stem (for example, ποίησις, poetry, γένεσις, birth, φύσις, nature, μίμησις, imitation). Thus, although you will not be asked to reproduce this declension, it is important to be able to recognize the forms. The -ιν in the accusative singular is familiar (see page 69 of the Textbook), as is -εις the Nominative and Accusative plural (see page 95 of the Textbook). Νotice the irregular accent on the genitive singular and plural (πόλεως and πόλεων, even though the final syllable is long).

( Exercise 4

1. Write out the declensions of the following words. Check your answers with the paradigm on page 164.

|Case | | |

|N |ἡ πόλις |ἡ ὕβρις |

|A | | |

|G | | |

|D | | |

| | | |

|N | | |

|A | | |

|G | | |

|D | | |

2. Μatch the adjectives to the noun forms:[133]

1. μιμήσεως a. καλήν

2. γενέσεων b. καλαῖς

3. πόλεις c. καλῇ

4. ποίησιν d. καλῶν

5. πόλεσι(ν) e. καλάς

6. φύσει f. καλῆς

5. Declension of the -ευ stem noun, βασιλεύς

This common noun is also important to be able to recognize. You have been seeing forms of this noun in many readings. Other nouns in this pattern include the masculine nouns, ἱερεύς (priest), γονεύς (parent), φονεύς (murderer). Notice that the accent is always on an epsilon or an epsilon diphthong

( Exercise 5

1. Write out the declensions of the following words. Check your answers with the paradigm on page 164 of the Textbook.

|N |ὁ βασιλεύς |ὁ φονεύς |

|A | | |

|G | | |

|D | | |

| | | |

|N | | |

|A | | |

|G | | |

|D | | |

2. Match the nouns and adjectives:[134]

1. κακούς a. γονεύς

2. κακῷ b. βασιλέας

3. κακόν c. γονεῖς

4. κακῶν d. βασιλέως

5. κακοί e. γονέσι(ν)

6. κακός f. φονεῖ

7. κακοῖς g. βασιλέων

8. κακοῦ h. γονέα

6. Supplementary Participle

A supplementary participle completes the idea of a verb. Without a participle the verbal thought is incomplete: χαίρω ἐσθίων (I enjoy eating); τυγχάνουσιν λέγοντες (They happen to be speaking); ἔλαθε ἡμᾶς ἀπερχομένη ( Literally, she leaving escaped our notice = we didn’t notice that she was leaving).

( Exercise 6

Translate the following:[135]

1. οὗτος φεύγων ἔτυχε. ________________________________________

2. ἀπελθὼν ἔλαθε τοὺς στρατιώτας. ____________________________________

___________________________________________________________________

3. χαίρω ταῦτα ὁρῶν. ________________________________________

7. Vocabulary for “An Old Man’s Advice (Part 4)”

Nouns

|τὸ πῦρ, Gen. πυρός |fire |

|τὸ ὄρος |mountain |

Verbs

|λανθάνω, λήσω, ἔλαθον, λέληθα |escape the notice of + supplementary participle |

|ἵημι |let forth, release, let go |

|ἀφίημι |send forth, send away |

|ἕπομαι, ἕψομαι, ἑσπόμην |follow + dative |

Indirect Interrogatives or Indefinite Relatives

|ὅποι |to wherever, to where (ever) (end of motion) |

|ὅπου |where(ever) wherever (place where) |

|ὅπως |how (ever), however |

Demonstrative Adverb

|ἐνταῦθα |here, in this place; to here, to this place |

PRACTICE QUIZ 8: LESSONS 39 AND 40

1. Complete the following chart for the verb “stop”, giving the third person plural of indicative and subjunctive forms, all the forms of the optative, the infinitive, and the nominative plural of the participle in all genders.

|Continuous |Future |Aorist |Perfect |

|Present Indicative |Future Indicative |Aorist Indicative |Perfect Indicative |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Imperfect Indic. |X |X |Pluperfect Ind. |

|________________ | | |________________ |

|Subjunctive |X |Subjunctive |X |

|________________ | |________________ | |

|Optative: Present |Optative: Future |Optative: Aorist | Perfect X |

|________________ |________________ |________________ | |

|________________ |________________ |________________ | |

|________________ |________________ |________________ | |

|________________ |________________ |________________ | |

|________________ |________________ |________________ | |

|________________ |________________ |________________ | |

|Infintive |Infinitive |Infintive |Infinitive |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|Participle |Participle |Participle |Participle |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |________________ |________________ |

| | | | |

2. Translate the following sentences and parse the underlined words.

1. εἰ γὰρ ἡ σοφιά ἡμῖν τὴν ὁδὸν τὴν δικαίον δείξειεν.

__________________________________________________________________

2. ἔλαθε με ἵππον κλέπτων.

__________________________________________________________________

3. λίποι ἄκρον τὸ ὄρος.

__________________________________________________________________

4. λάβοις ἂν τὴν κύλικα καί τῷ βασιλεῖ ἐνέγκοις ἄν.

__________________________________________________________________

5. ἡπόμην τοῖς τοῦ βασιλέως στρατιώταις ἵνα μὴ ἀποθάνοιμι. __________________________________________________________________

6. εἴθε πάθειαν ὅτε ἴδοιεν τὸν τεθωεῶτα βασιλέα.

__________________________________________________________________

|Sent |Greek |Person |Number |Tense/Aspect |Mood |Construction |

|1. |δείξειεν | | | | | |

|2. |κλέπτων | | | | | |

|3. |λίποι | | | | | |

|4. |ἐνέγκοις | | | | | |

|5. |ἀποθάνοιμι | | | | | |

|5 |ἴδοιεν | | | | | |

3. Τranslate the following words:

|1. πάσχω |6. ἐνταύθα |

|2. ὅποι |7. διὰ + Gen. |

|3. τοσοῦτον |8. ὅπως |

|4. ἀφίημι |9. ἴσθι |

|5. ἐπιθύμεω |10. ὀρύττω |

ΑNSWERS: PRACTICE QUIZ 8: LESSONS 39 AND 40

1. Complete the following chart for the verb “stop”, giving the third person plural of indicative and subjunctive forms, all the forms of the optative, the infinitive, and the nominative plural of the participle in all genders.

|Continuous |Future |Aorist |Perfect |

|Present Indicative |Future Indicative |Aorist Indicative |Perfect Indicative |

|παύουσι(ν) |παύσουσι(ν) |ἔπαυσαν |πεπαύκασι(ν) |

|Imperfect Indic. |X |X |Pluperfect Ind. |

|ἔπαυον | | |ἐπεπαύκεσαν |

|Subjunctive |X |Subjunctive |X |

|παύωσι(ν) | |παύσωσι(ν) | |

|Optative: Present |Optative: Future |Optative: Aorist | Perfect X |

|παύοιμι |παύσοιμι |παύσαιμι | |

|παύοις |παύσοις |παύσειας | |

|παύοι |παύσοι |παύσειε(ν) | |

|παύοιμεν |παύσοιμεν |παύσαιμεν | |

|παύοιτε |παύσοιτε |παύσαιτε | |

|παύοιεν |παύσοιεν |παύσειαν | |

| | | | |

|Infintive |Infinitive |Infintive |Infinitive |

|παύειν |παύσειν |παῦσαι |πεπαυκέναι |

|Participle |Participle |Participle |Participle |

|παύοντες, παύουσαι, παύοντα |παύσοντες, παύσουσαι, παύσοντα |παύσαντες, παύσασαι, παύσαντα |πεπαυκότες, πεπαυκυῖαι, |

| | | |πεπαυκότα |

2. Translate the following sentences and parse the underlined words.

1. εἰ γὰρ ἡ σοφιά ἡμῖν τὴν ὁδὸν τὴν δικαίον δείξειεν.

If only wisdom would show to us the just path.

2. ἔλαθε με ἵππον κλέπτων.

He, while stealing the horse, escaped my notice. I didn’t notice that he was stealing the horse.

3. λίποι ἄκρον τὸ ὄρος.

If only he would leave the top of the mountain.

4. λάβοις ἂν τὴν κύλικα καί τῷ βασιλεῖ ἐνέγκοις ἄν.

You could take the cup and could bring it to the king.

5. ἑσπόμην τοῖς τοῦ βασιλέως στρατιώταις ἵνα μὴ ἀποθάνοιμι.

I followed the king’s soldiers so that I wouldn’t die.

6. εἴθε πάθειαν ὅτε ἴδοιεν τὸν τεθωεῶτα βασιλέα.

If only they would suffer when they (would) see the dead king.

|Sent |Greek |Person |Number |Tense/Aspect |Mood |Construction |

|1. |δείξειεν |3nd |S |Aor. |Opt. |Opt. of Wish |

|2. |κλέπτων |X |X |Cont. |Ptple |Supplementary |

|3. |λίποι |3rd |S |Aor. |Opt. |Opt. of Wish |

|4. |ἐνέγκοις |2nd |S |Aor. |Opt. |Pot. Opt |

|5. |ἀποθάνοιμι |1st |S |Aor. |Opt. |Opt in Past Seq. Purpose |

|5 |ἴδοιεν |3rd |P |Aor. |Opt |Opt. in Opt. Seq. |

3. Τranslate the following words:

|1. πάσχω suffer, experience |6. ἐνταύθα here |

|2. ὅποι to where(ever) to wherever |7. διὰ + Gen. through, by +person |

|3. τοσοῦτον Adv. Acc. so much, to such an extent. |8. ὅπως how (ever), however |

|4. ἀφίημι send forth |9. ἴσθι know! |

|5. ἐπιθύμεω desire + Gen |10. ὀρύττω dig |

Lesson 41. Optative of εἰμι; Periphrastic Perfect (Subjunctive and Optative); Optative in Conditions and Indirect Discourse

This lesson introduces the optative for the verb εἰμι and thus completes the full active voice paradigm for this important verb. A number of verb forms use εἰμι as part of their formation so it will be doubly important to memorize the full paradigm thoroughly. Also included in this lesson are perfect subjunctive and optative verb forms. And finally, the lesson discusses how the optative is used in conditions and indirect discourse. The exercises in this workbook lesson will give you a chance to review subjunctive and optative usages before introducing the new optative uses. Give yourself enough time, including breaks, to do these important exercises without fatigue.

1. The Optative of εἰμι

The optative of εἰμι is unique to this verb. Its forms are charted in the Textbook on page 166. Like all optatives, the optative of εἰμι has an iota diphthong (ει) to identify it as an optative.

( Exercise 1a

After memorizing the optative forms of εἰμι on page 166 of the textbook, chart these forms of εἰμι below three times: Check your answers with the Textbook:

|εἴην ________ |εἴην ________ |εἴην ________ |

|________ ________ |________ ________ |________ ________ |

|________ ________ |________ ________ |________ ________ |

( Exercise 1b

Translate the following and label the use of the optative, after reviewing the uses of the optative outlined on page 161 of the Textbook. You may also consult the Appendix Chart 6 which is also found at the end of this lesson of the Workbook. [136]

1. εἴθε εἶεν δίκαιοι. _______________________________________

2. εἴη ἂν νέον. _______________________________________

3. μὴ εἴης μώρα. _______________________________________

4. τοῦτο ἐποίησα ἵνα μὴ εἶμεν γελοῖοι. _________________________________

5. ἐφοβοῦντο μὴ οὐ εἴη σοφή. ____________________________________

6. εἰ γὰρ εἶτε φίλοι πᾶσι τοῖς ἀνθρώποις οὓς γιγνώσκοιτε. ________________________________________________________________________

2. Perfect Subjunctive and Optative Forms

The perfect subjunctive and optative may be formed in the customary way by adding subjunctive and optative endings to the perfect stem:

|Perfect Subjunctive |Perfect Optative |

|Perfect Stem + lengthened thematic vowel and primary endings |Perfect Stem + οι + secondary endings |

|λελύκω λελύκωμεν | |

|λελύκῃς λελύκητε |λελύκοιμι λελύκοιμεν |

|λελύκῃ λελύκωσι(ν) |λελύκοις λελύκοιτε |

|Should I have released |λελύκοι λελύκοιεν |

| |I would have released |

The meaning of the perfect subjunctive and optative is aspectual, indicating that the action is complete with an ongoing result. The perfect subjunctive and optative are also commonly formed periphrastically* by forming compound verbs consisting of the perfect participle combined with the subjunctive or optative of εἰμι. These periphrastic forms, since they are much more common, are the ones we will use in charts. Τhe formation of the perfect subjunctive and optative is discussed on page 166 of the Textbook. After reading the textbook, notice the following:

▪ The perfect participle must agree with the subject in case, gender and number. The examples in the textbook are all masculine nominatives, but the feminine and neuter nominatives are possible too. Thus, the singular forms would be λελυκὼς, λελυκυῖα, λελυκὸς + ὦ, ᾖς, ᾖ and λελυκὼς, λελυκυῖα, λελυκὸς + εἴην, εἴης, εἴη.

▪ Although only the masculine plural participle is illustrated in the textbook, the feminine and neuter plurals are possible too: λελυκότες, λελυκυῖαι, λελυκότα + ὦμεν, ἦτε, ὦσι(ν) and λελυκότες, λελυκυῖαι, λελυκότα + εἶμεν, εἶτε, εἶεν.

▪ There is no difference in meaning between the regular and the periphrastic forms of the perfect subjunctive and optative. When translating the periphrastic forms, join the two forms of the verb together in your mind to make a single idea, rather than trying to translate each part of the compound.

* The term periphrastic refers to a a round about (περί) way of speaking (φράσις), indicating that such forms are made in a roundabout way by using compound verbs rather than a single form of the verb. This is how English forms its verb tenses: for example, I was +walking, I have +been+ worried.

( Exercise 2

a. Form the regular and periphrastic perfect subjunctive and optative for παύω. Include all genders for the periphrastic form:[137]

|a.Perf. Subjunctive |b.Perf. Subjunctive |c.Perf. Optative |d.Perf. Optative |

|πεπαύκω |πεπαυκ-ὼς, -υῖα, -ὸς ὦ |πεπαύκοιμι |πεπαυκ-ὼς, -υῖα, -ὸς εἴην |

|___________ |____________________ |___________ |____________________ |

|___________ |____________________ |___________ |____________________ |

|___________ |____________________ |___________ |____________________ |

|___________ |____________________ |___________ |____________________ |

|___________ |____________________ |___________ |____________________ |

|Tr_________ |Tr___________________ |Tr_________ |Tr___________________ |

2b. The next exercise reviews perfects used as presents (page 158 of the Textbook), the uses of the subjunctive on (pages 148 and 150) and well as the uses of the optative (page 161). Be sure to review these items before attempting the exercise. You may also consult the reference chart titled “Comparison of Subjunctive and Optative Uses” (which is also found at the end of this lesson of the Workbook).

Translate the following and label the uses of the subjunctive and optative:[138]

1. πεποιθότες ὦμεν αὐτῷ . ______________________________________

2. τοῦτα ἐποίησα ἵνα εἰδότες ἦτε/εἶτε πολλά. ___________________________

3. ἐγνωκὼς εἴη ἂν αὐτούς. _______________________________________

4. ἐὰν τεθνεότες ὦσιν, λείψομεν. ______________________________________

5. ἐφοβεῖτο μὴ αἱ γυναῖκες εἰδυῖαι ὦσιν/ εἶεν ταῦτα. _______________________

3. The Optative in Past General Conditional Sentences

Read about the optative in past general and future less vivid conditional sentences on page 167 of the Textbook. The past general is the analogue of the present general conditional and is another indication of the fact that the optative is a secondary mood. Note the following relationships and differences between the present general and the past general conditions, particularly the clause markers (optative conditionals use εἰ in the “if” clause, whereas subjunctive conditionals always include ἄν and never have a simple εἰ in the “if” clause:

|Clause Markers |Example |Translation |

|PRESENT GENERAL | | |

|ἐὰν (ἢν): if ever |ἐὰν γράφῃς/ γράψῃς, μανθάνομέν τι: |If ever you should be writing/write, we |

|ὅταν,ἐπειδὰν: whenever, |ἐὰν (or substitute) + present/aorist subj, |always learn something. |

|ὃς, ἣ, ὃ ἄν: whoever |present indicative | |

|whatever; ὅστις ἄν, ἥτις ἄν, ὅ τι ἄν, | | |

|whoever, whatever | | |

|PAST GENERAL | | |

|εἰ |εἰ γράφοις/γράψειας, ἐμανθάνομέν τι. |If you would be writing/write (or wrote), |

| |εἰ + optative, imperfect indicative |we always used to learn something. |

(Exercise 3

Translate the following and label the conditionals:[139]

1. εἰ ζητήσειε, ηὕρισκεν. ______________________________________________

2. ὅταν ζητήσῃ, εὕρισκει. ____________________________________________

3. ἐὰν πίπτῃς, δακρύει. ____________________________________

4. εἰ πίπτοιεν, ἐδάκρυον. ______________________________________________

4. The Optative in Future Less Vivid Conditional Sentences

The future less vivid conditional is the analogue of the future more vivid conditional and is another indication of the fact that the optative is a secondary and less vivid mood. Note the following relationships and differences between the future more vivid and the future less vivid conditionals, particularly the clause markers.

|Clause Markers |Example |Translation |

|FUTURE MORE VIVID | | |

|ἐὰν (ἢν): if ever |ἐὰν γράφῃς/ γράψῃς, μαθήσομεν: |If ever you should be writing/write, we |

|ὅταν,ἐπειδὰν: whenever, |ἐὰν (or substitute) + present/aorist subj, |will learn something.). |

|ὃς, ἣ, ὃ ἂν: whoever |future indicative | |

|whatever; ὅστις, ἥτις, ὅ τι, whoever, | | |

|whatever | | |

|FUTURE LESS VIVID | | |

|εἰ |εἰ γράφοις/γράψειας, μανθάνοιμέν/ μάθοιμέν |If you should/would be writing/write, we |

| |τι. |would be learning/ learn something. |

| |εἰ + optative, optative + ἄν | |

Memorizing the formula for the future less vivid conditional (εἰ + optative, optative + ἄν) is very useful. You may translate both parts of the conditional sentence with “would” (since that has been our “translationese” for the optative), although “should” is also a common translation for the “if” clause and the conditional is often called a “should/would” conditional.

(Exercise 4

a) Translate the following and label the conditionals:[140]

1. εἰ ζητήσειε, εὕροι ἄν. _______________________________________________

2. ὅταν ζητήσῃ, εὕρησει. _____________________________________________

3. ἐὰν πίπτῃ, δακρύσει. ___________________________________

4. εἰ πίπτοιεν, δάκρυοιεν ἄν. ___________________________________________

b) Translate and label the following sentences. Be careful to use the correct formulas and clause markers.

1. If he should leave, we will cry. _________________________________________

2. If he would leave, we used to cry. _______________________________________

3. If he would leave, we would cry.______________________________________

4. Whenever he should leave, we always cry. _______________________________

5. The Optative in Indirect Discourse

Read about the optative in indirect discourse after ὅτι/ὡς on page 167 in the Textbook. In an indirect discourse in past sequence, the present, future, aorist and perfect optative may replace the original indicative, keeping the tense of the original statement the same OR the original indicative may be used. The use of the optative, for the Greeks, is a less vivid way of reporting an indirect statement. When translating such optatives in English, it is customary to translate them as if they were the equivalent tense of the indicative.

(Exercise 5

Change the direct statements (in bold) into indirect statements, giving all possible variations, including periphrastic forms in the perfect. Give English translations for each. This exercise also reviews the principal parts of the verb λέγω (which are seen in the examples in the Textbook on page 167). Βe sure to digest the Textbook materials on this construction before doing the exercises. [141]

1. δακρύσουσιν.

a. λέγω ὅτι ____________________________________________________.

b. εἶπον ὅτι ____________________________________________________.

2. λέλυκεν.

a. ἔλεγον ὅτι____________________________________________________.

b.ἑρῶ ὄτι_______________________________________________________.

3. ἐβάλομεν.

a. εἴρηκα ὅτι ____________________________________________________.

b. εἰρήκη ὅτι ____________________________________________________.

4. λείπεις.

a. εἰρήκη ὅτι ____________________________________________________.

b. ἔλεγον ὅτι ____________________________________________________.

(Exercise 6: Summary Exercise

a. Translate from the Thesaurus, page 223, number 10. [142]_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

b. Translate a variation of previous quotation from the letter of John.

εἴ τις εἴποι, ‘Ἀγαπῶ τὸν θεόν’, καὶ τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ μισήσειε, ψεύστης εἴη ἄν. εἴ τις εἴποι ὅτι ἑωρακὼς εἴη τὸν θεόν, ἦν ψεύστης.

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

c. Fill in the chart below for the uses of the subjunctive and optative, writing simple Greek and English examples. Use the verb λύω whenever possible for your examples. See a filled in chart on the next page.

|SUBJUNCTIVE |OPTATIVE |

| A. Independent Uses | A. Independent Uses |

|1. Hortatory |1. Wish |

|2. Deliberative |2. Potential |

|3. Negative Prohibition |X |

| B. Conditional Sentences | B. Conditional Sentences (Optative MUST be used in these |

| |Conditionals) |

|1. Present General |1. Past General |

|2. Future More Vivid |2. Future Less Vivid |

| C. Subordinate Clauses | C. Subordinate Clauses (Optative MAY substitute for Subjunctive |

| |and Indicative Verbs) |

|1. Purpose |1. Past Sequence Purpose |

|2. Fear |2. Past Sequence Fear |

| |3. Past Sequence Indirect Discourse |

| |4. Optative in Optative Sequence |

6. COMPARISON OF SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE USES

|SUBJUNCTIVE |OPTATIVE |

| A. Independent Uses | A. Independent Uses |

|1. Hortatory: Let’s release. λύωμεν. |1. Wish: If only he would release. (εἴθε/εἰ γὰρ) λύοι. |

|2. Deliberative: Shall we release. λύωμεν; |2. Potential: He might release |

| |λύοι ἄν. |

|3. Negative Prohibition (aorist): Don’t release, μὴ λύσῃς. |X |

| B. Conditional Sentences | B. Conditional Sentences (Optative MUST be used in these |

| |Conditionals) |

|Present General. If ever he should release/ releases, he always |1. Past General. If he would release/released, he always |

|leaves. ἐὰν λύῃ, λείπει. |left. |

| |εἰ λύοι, ἔλειπεν. |

|2. Future More Vivid: If he should release , he will leave. ἐὰν λύῃ, |2. Future Less Vivid: If he should/would release, he would |

|λείψει. |leave. |

| |εἰ λύοι, λείποι ἄν. |

| C. Subordinate Clauses | C. Subordinate Clauses (Optative MAY substitute for |

| |Subjunctive and Indicative Verbs) |

|1. Purpose: I did these things so that you should/would/may/might |1. Past Sequence Purpose |

|release. ταῦτα ἔποιησα ἵνα λύῃς. |ταῦτα ἔποιησα ἵνα λύοις. I did these things so that you |

| |would/may/might release |

|2. Fear: He was afraid lest you should release. ἐφοβεῖτο μὴ λύῃς. |2. Past Sequence Fear |

| |ἐφοβεῖτο μὴ λύοις. He was afraid lest you would release |

| |3. Past Sequence Indirect Discourse |

| |I said that he will release. |

| |εἶπον ὅτι λύσοι. |

| |4 Optative in Optative Sequence: If only he would release the|

| |men whom you know. |

| |λύοι τοὺς ἀνθρώπους οὓς γιγνώσκοις. |

LESSON 42. THE IMPERATIVE; IMPERATIVE OF εἰμί; ACTIVE VOICE VERB REVIEW

The Imperative

The imperative is the last of the four moods: indicative (facts); subjunctive (possibility and anticipation); optative (a more remote possibility and wish); imperative (commands).

1. The Continuous Imperative

Read through the discussion about the continuous imperative on page 169 of the Textbook. Notice the following:

▪ The imperative is formed in the 2nd and 3rd person only. (The Hortatory Subjunctive is used for the first person).

▪ The accents for regular forms of the imperative mood are recessive.

▪ The second person singular imperative is an order addressed to one person: “(you) be leaving!”

▪ The second personal plural imperative is an order addressed to more than one person: “(you all) be leaving!” The 2nd person plural ending – τε is the same as the 2nd person plural indicative ending: λείπετε ,“you are leaving” or “be leaving, leave!”.

▪ The negative for the imperative is μή and is useful for distinguishing indicative forms and imperatives: οὐ λείπετε, “you aren’t leaving” vs. μὴ λείπετε, “Don’t be leaving!”.

▪ English does not have a 3rd person imperative, which is an order addressed to a third person: him, her, it, them. We can translate by “Let him/her/it/them be leaving”.

▪ The third person plural imperative is the same as the genitive plural, masculine and neuter, of the continuous participle: λειπόντων, “let them be leaving” vs. λειπόντων “of them leaving”.

▪ When forming the imperatives, some students find it easier to form 2nd person imperatives first and then the 3rd. (This will be the order used in the Workbook). The 2nd person plural, since it is exactly like the 2nd plural indicative, is easy to remember. (You will also remember χαίρετε). The 3rd person singular is then easily formed by changing the final epsilon of the second person singular to an omega: λείπετε ( λειπέτω. And since the 2nd plural is the same as the genitive of the masculine participle, that form too can easily be recalled.

( Exercise 1

a. Form the Continuous imperatives for the verb παύω, giving translations for each. [143]

|Person |Singular |Plural |

|Second Person | | |

|Third Person | | |

b. Translate:[144]

1. Let them be releasing. _____________________________

2. Be releasing. (sg) _____________________________

3. Let her be releasing. _____________________________

4. Be releasing. (pl) _____________________________

5. πέμπετε (2 ways) _____________________________

6. πεμπόντων (2 ways) _____________________________

7. μὴ πέμπε _____________________________

8. πεμπέτω _____________________________

2. Τhe Aorist Imperative

Read about the formation of the aorist imperative on page 169 of the Textbook.

Notice the following:

▪ The imperative conveys aspect not tense. Therefore, there is no time marker in the aorist imperative.

▪ The ε/ο Aorist has the same imperative endings as the continuous: -ε,

–ετε, -ετω, -οντων.

▪ The 2nd person singular ending for the –σα Αorist is unique and must be carefully memorized, since it ends in –ον rather than having an alpha vowel. (As the Textbook notes, perhaps memorizing Κύριε ἐλεήσον “Lord, have mercy” as a mnemonic would help).

▪ Τhe 2nd singular imperative for the –σα Αorist has the same spelling but not always the same accent as the future neuter participle: for a two syllable word, the accent will be the same: παῦσον (Imperative, recessive accent) has the same accent as παῦσον (Participle, accent on final syllable of stem) , but a three syllable word will have different accents: κέλευσον (Imperative, recessive accent) vs. κελεῦσον Participle, accent on final syllable of stem) .

▪ Except for the 2nd person singular, –σα imperative forms are exactly the same as the continuous except that alpha substitutes for the ε/ο vowels: -ον, -ατε, -ατω, -αντων.

▪ Although the accent for the imperative mode is recessive, there are five common ε/ο Aorist imperatives which are irregularly accented on the last vowel and which must be learned: εἰπέ (say), ἐλθέ (go), εὑρέ (find), ἰδέ (see), λαβέ (take).

( Exercise 2

a. Form the aorist imperatives for the verb λύω, giving translations for each. [145]

|Person |Singular |Plural |

|Second Person | | |

|Third Person | | |

b. Translate:[146]

1. Let him stop. _____________________________

2. Stop (pl) _____________________________

3. Let them stop. _____________________________

4. Stop (sg) _____________________________

5. μὴ πέμψατε _____________________________

6. πεμψάντων (2 ways) _____________________________

7. πέμψον (2 ways) _____________________________

8. πεμψάτω _____________________________

9. See! _____________________________

10. Take! ______________________________

11. Go! ______________________________

12. Find! ______________________________

13. Say! _____________________________

3. Imperative of εἰμί

Read through the chart for the imperative forms of the verb “to be” on page 169 of the Textbook. Notice the following:

▪ The 2nd person singular is the only form of the imperative that does not follow the regular formation: ἴσθι (be!)

▪ The –θι imperative 2nd person ending has been seen in ἴθι (go!), κατάβηθι (come down), γνῶθι (know). Learn these forms too.

▪ Although the Textbook lists ὄντων as the 3rd Plural, ἔστων is also correct and both will occur in the exercises and Textbook.

( Exercise 3

a. Form the continuous imperatives for the verb εἰμί, giving translations for each[147]

|Person |Singular |Plural |

|Second Person | | |

|Third Person | | |

b. Translate:[148]

1. Βe. (sg) _____________________________

2. Let it be. _____________________________

3. Let them be. _____________________________

4. Be. (pl) _____________________________

5. Know yourself. (sg) _____________________________

6. Go. (sg) _____________________________

7. ἔστε _____________________________

8. ὄντων (2 ways) _____________________________

9. καταβήθι _____________________________

10. ἴσθι _____________________________

4. Summary of Imperatives

a) Fill in this chart:[149]

|Continuous Imperatives (λείπω) |ε/ο Aorist Imperatives (λείπω) |

|1._________ ________ |2.________ ________ |

|_________ ________ |________ ________ |

|-σα Aorist Imperatives |Imperatives of εἰμί |

|(παύω)[150] | |

|3.________ ________ |4._______ _____ |

|________ ________ |_______ _____ |

5.Perfect Periphrastic Imperative

This imperative is formed by using the perfect participle and the imperative of εἰμί to form the perfect imperative. These forms are listed on page 169 of the Textbook. After reading the textbook, translate the following[151]:

1. λελυκυῖα ἔστω ________________________

2. εἰδὼς ἵσθι ________________________

3. πεπαυκότες ὄντων ________________________

4. πεποιθυῖαι ἔστε ________________________

6. The Active Voice

You now know all the forms of the active voice that we ask you to reproduce. These forms constitute the first page of the Greek verb. To keep these forms alive in your memory, you should practice writing out a full charts, as well as synopses (shortened verb charts which ask only for specified forms) until you can do so with great ease. Read page 171 of the Textbook carefully. The chart on that page gives translationese for the full verb paradigm; when you do a chart you may shorten the perfect translations to “I have Xed, X (perfect as present)/ I had Xed, Xed/ to have Xed/ to X/ having Xed/ Xing”. A full paradigm for παύω is found on page 241. The full aorist for λείπω is given on page 244. And the full paradigm for ἐιμί is found on page 244. Practice writing out all the forms for these verbs several times (and checking your answers with the paradigms in the Textbook*) before doing the next exercise. Use the empty verb charts in the appendix for your review of -ω Verbs and εἰμί. This systematic review of verb forms will pay rich dividends for your ease in being able to master Ancient Greek.

*Note the following misprints and correct them in your Textbooks. Page 241: the genitive of the aorist neuter participle is accented incorrectly and should be παύσαντος. Page 244, the genitive of the aorist neuter participle is accented incorrectly and should be λιπόντος.

( Exercise 5

After reviewing the forms of the active voice, fill in the three charts which follow according to the instructions given. Check your answers with the answer sheets which follow each chart.

a) Synopsize the verb “release” in 2nd person masculine, singular only for the indicative, subjunctive, optative and imperative moods, giving translations for each box. Ιnclude the infinitive. Give the nominative and genitive singular of the participle in all genders, translating the nominative only.

Principal Parts λύω, λύσω, ἔλυσα, λέλυκα

|Continuous |Future |Aorist |Perfect |

|Present |Imperfect |Future |Aorist |Perfect |Pluperfect |

|____________ |____________ |____________ |____________ |____________ |____________ |

|____________ |____________ |____________ |____________ |____________ |____________ |

|Subjunctive |X | | |

|______________________ | |____________ | |

|______________________ | |____________ | |

|Optative | | | |

|______________________ |____________ |____________ | |

|______________________ |____________ |____________ | |

|Imperative |X | | |

|______________________ | |____________ | |

|______________________ | |____________ | |

|Infinitive | | | |

|______________________ |____________ |____________ |______________________ |

|______________________ |____________ |____________ |______________________ |

|Participle |Participle |Participle |Participle |

|______________________ |____________ |____________ |______________________ |

|______________________ |____________ |____________ |______________________ |

|______________________ |____________ |____________ |_______________________ |

| | | | |

a) Synopsize the verb “release” in 2nd person, masculine, singular for the indicative, subjunctive, optative and imperative moods. Give the infinitive and the genitive singular of the participle in all genders. Give the form on the first line in each box and the translation in the second.

Principal Parts λύω, λύσω, ἔλυσα, λέλυκα

|Continuous |Future |Aorist |Perfect |

|Present |Imperfect |Future |Aorist |Perfect |Pluperfect |

|λύεις |ἔλυες |λύσεις |ἔλυσας |λέλυκας |ἐλελύκης |

|You release, you are |You were releasing, you |You will release, you |You released |You have released |You had released |

|releasing |used to release |will be releasing | | | |

|Subjunctive |X |λύσῃς |λελυκὼς ᾖς |

|λύῃς | |Should you release |Should you have released |

|Should you release, should you be releasing | |(once) | |

|Optative | | |λελυκὼς εἴης |

|λύοις |λύσοις |λύσειας |You would have released |

|you would release, you would be releasing |you would/ will release |you would release (once)| |

|Imperative |X | |λελυκὼς ἴσθι |

|λῦε | |λῦσον |Be in the state of having released |

|Release, be releasing | |Release (once) | |

|Infinitive | | | |

|λύειν |λύσειν |λῦσαι |λελυκέναι |

|to release, to be release |to be about to release |to release (once) |to have released |

|Participle |Participle |Participle |Participle |

|Ν.λύων, λύουσα, λῦον |Ν. λύσων, λύσουσα, λῦσον|Ν. λύσας, λύσασα, λῦσαν |λελυκώς, λελυκυῖα, λελυκός |

|G. λύοντος, λυούσης, λύοντος |G. λύσοντος, λυσούσης, |G. λύσαντος, λυσάσης, |G. λελυκότος, λελυκυίας, λελυκότος |

|Releasing |λύσοντος |λύσαντος |Having released |

| |About to release |Upon releasing | |

b) Synopsize the verb “leave” in 3rd person plural for the indicative, subjunctive, optative and imperative moods. Give the infinitive and the nominative plural of the participle in all genders.

Principal Parts: ___________, ____________, _____________, _____________,

|Continuous |Future |Aorist |Perfect |

|Ιnd:Present |Imperfect |Future |Aorist |Perfect |Pluperfect |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

|Subjunctive |X | | |

| | | | |

|Optative | | | |

| | | | |

|Imperative |X | | |

|Infinitive | | | |

| | | | |

|Participle | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

b) Synopsize the verb “leave” in 3rd person plural, feminine for the indicative, subjunctive, optative and imperative moods. Give the infinitive and the nominative plural of the participle in all genders.

Principal Parts: λείπω, λείψω, ἔλιπον, λέλοιπα

|Continuous |Future |Aorist |Perfect |

|Ιnd:Present |Imperfect |Future |Aorist |Perfect |Pluperfect |

|λείπουσι(ν) |ἔλειπον |λείψουσι(ν) |ἔλιπον |λελοίπασι(ν) |ἐλελοίπεσαν |

| | | | | | |

|Subjunctive |X | |λελοιπυῖαι ὦσι(ν) |

|λείπωσι(ν) | |λίπωσι(ν) | |

|Optative | | |λελοιπυῖαι εἶεν |

|λείποιεν |λείψοιεν |λίπειαν | |

|Imperative |X | |λελοιπυῖαι ἔστων/ὄντων* |

|λείπόντων | |λιπόντων | |

|Infinitive | | | |

|λείπειν |λείψειν |λιπεῖν |λελοιπέναι |

|Participle | | | |

|λείποντες, λείπουσαι, λείποντα |Χ |λίποντες, λίπουσαι, |λελοιπότες, λελοιπυῖαι, λελοιπότα |

| | |λίποντα | |

| | | | |

• ἔστων will be the preferred form from now on.

c) Complete this chart for all the forms of the verb “be”. Give all genders of the nominative and genitive singular of the participle :

|Indicative |

|Present |Imperfect |

|_____________ |_____________ |

|_____________ |_____________ |

|_____________ |_____________ |

|_____________ |_____________ |

|_____________ |_____________ |

|_____________ |_____________ |

|Subjunctive |

|_____________ |

|_____________ |

|_____________ |

|_____________ |

|_____________ |

|_____________ |

|Imperative |

|_____________ ______________ |

|_____________ ______________ |

|Infinitive |

|__________________ |

|Participle |

|__________________________________ |

|__________________________________ |

c) Complete this chart for all the forms of the verb “be”. Give all genders of the nominative and genitive singular of the participle :

|Indicative |

|Present |Imperfect |

|εἰμι |ἦν (ἦ) |

|εἶ |ἦσθα |

|ἐστι |ἦν |

|ἐσμεν |ἦμεν |

|ἐστε |ἦτε |

|εἰσι(ν) |ἦσαν |

|Subjunctive |

|ὦ |

|ᾖς |

|ᾖ |

|ὦμεν |

|ἦτε |

|ὦσι(ν) |

|Imperative |

|ἴσθι ἔστε |

|ἔστω ἔστων |

|Infinitive |

|εἶναι |

|Participle |

|ὤν, οὖσα, ὄν |

|ὄντος, οὔσης, ὄντος |

6. Vocabulary for “An Old Man’s Advice (Part 5)”

Nouns

|τὸ γῆρας |old age |

|ἡ γνώμη |wisdom |

|ὁ εὑρετής |finder, discoverer |

Verbs

|συγγιγνώσκω |be conscious of; acknowledge, confess |

|συμβουλεύομαι |get advice for oneself, consult with + dative. |

Adverbs

|μᾶλλον |+ verb: rather |

Direct Interrogatives/ Shrug Words/ Indirect Interrogative/ Indefinite Relatives

|ποῖος/ ποιος |what sort of a? some sort of a |

|πότε/ ὅποτε |when? / whenever, when(ever) |

Preposition

|πρὸ +Gen. | before (in time or space) |

Particle

|δῆτα more emphatic version of δή | underline the word before |

Practice Quiz 9: Active Voice, Lessons 41-42

1. Synopsize the verb “παύω” in 3nd person singular, masculine for the indicative, subjunctive, optative and imperative moods. Give the infinitive and the genitive singular of the participle in the Masculine and Feminine. Give the form on the first line in each box and the translation in the second for the imperfect indicative and the entire aorist system.

Principal Parts παύω, παύσω, ἔπαυσα, πέπαυκα

|Continuous |Future |Aorist |Perfect |

|Present |Imperfect |Future |Aorist |Perfect |Pluperfect |

|____________ |____________ |____________ |____________ |____________ |____________ |

| |____________ | |____________ | | |

|Subjunctive |X | | |

|______________________ | |____________ | |

| | |____________ | |

|Optative | | | |

|______________________ |____________ |____________ | |

| | |____________ | |

|Imperative |X | | |

|______________________ | |____________ | |

| | |____________ | |

|Infinitive | | | |

|______________________ |____________ |____________ |______________________ |

| | |____________ | |

|Participle |Participle |Participle |Participle |

|______________________ |____________ |____________ |______________________ |

| | | | |

2. Synopsize the verb “be” in 3rd Plural. Give the nominative plural of the M/F participles and the 3rd Plural of the Imperative:

|Indicative |

|Present |Imperfect |

|_____________ |_____________ |

|Subjunctive |

|Imperative |

|_____________ |

|Infinitive |

|__________________ |

|Participle |

|__________________________________ |

3. Translate the following forms of λείπω, λείψω, ἔλιπον, λέλοιπα making aspect/tense clear.

1. λίποιεν ______________________

2. ἐλελοίπει(ν) ______________________

3. λείπητε ________________________

4. ἔλειπον ________________________

5. λιπεῖν ________________________

4. Translate and Label all the Uses of the Optative

‘εἰ γὰρ εὕροιμι’ ἔφη ὁ Διόγενης ‘δίκαιον ἄνθρωπον’. ἐζήτει γὰρ ἵνα ἡ δίκη οὐ λίποι τὴν γῆν. καὶ ὁ Διόγενης εἶπε ὅτι ζήτησοι πολὺν χρόνον. ἀλλὰ ἐφοβεῖτο μὴ οὐ εὑρίσκοι οὐδένα ἀγαθόν. τέλος, μετὰ μακρὸν χρόνον, ἔφη, ‘ ἄνθρωποι πράζειαν ἂν ἔργα ἃ εἴη ἀγαθά, αλλ’ οὐ εὗρον δίκαιον ἄνθρωπον.’ ἀλλ’ εἰ ἔλθοι εἰς τὴν ἀλλὴν πόλιν, ἐζήτει.

Answers: Practice Quiz 9: Active Voice, Lessons 41-2

1. Synopsize the verb “pause” in 3nd person singular, masculine for the indicative, subjunctive, optative and imperative moods. Give the infinitive and the genitive singular of the participle in the Masculine and Feminine. Give the form on the first line in each box and the translation in the second for the imperfect indicative and the entire aorist system.

Principal Parts παύω, παύσω, ἔπαυσα, πέπαυκα

|Continuous |Future |Aorist |Perfect |

|Present |Imperfect |Future |Aorist |Perfect |Pluperfect |

|παύει |ἔπαυε(ν) |παύσει |ἔπαυσε(ν) |πέπαυκε(ν) |ἐπεπαύκει(ν) |

| |He used to pause | |He paused | | |

|Subjunctive |X | | |

|παύῃ | |παύσῃ |πεπαυκὼς ᾖ |

| | |should he pause (once) | |

|Optative | | | |

|παύοι |παύσοι |παύσειε(ν) |πεπαυκὼς εἴη |

| | |he would pause (once) | |

|Imperative |X | | |

|παυέτω | |παυσάτω |πεπαυκὼς ἔστω |

| | |let him pause (once) | |

|Infinitive | | | |

|παύειν |παύσειν |παῦσαι |πεπαυκέναι |

| | |to pause (once) | |

|Participle |Participle |Participle |Participle |

|παύοντος, παυούσης |παύσοντος, παυσούσης |παύσαντος, παυσάσης |πεπαυκότος, πεπαυκυίας |

| | |of him/her upon pausing | |

2. Synopsize the verb “be” in 3rd Plural. Give the nominative plural of the M/F participles and the 3rd Plural of the Imperative:

|Indicative |

|Present |Imperfect |

|εἰσι(ν) |ἦσαν |

|Subjunctive |

|ὦσι(ν) |

|Imperative |

|ἔστων |

|Infinitive |

|εἶναι |

|Participle |

|ὄντες, οὖσαι |

3. Translate the following forms of λείπω, λείψω, ἔλιπον, λέλοιπα making aspect/tense clear.

1. λίποιεν if only they would leave (once)

2. ἐλελοίπει(ν) he had left

3. λείπητε should you be leaving

4. ἔλειπον I/they were leaving

5. λιπεῖν to leave (once)

4. Translate and Label all the Uses of the Optative

‘εἰ γὰρ εὕροιμι’ ἔφη ὁ Διόγενης ‘δίκαιον ἄνθρωπον’. ἐζήτει ἵνα ἡ δίκη οὐ λίποι τὴν γῆν. καὶ ὁ Διόγενης εἶπε ὅτι ζήτησοι πολὺν χρόνον. ἀλλὰ ἐφοβεῖτο μὴ οὐ εὑρίσκοι οὐδένα ἀγαθόν. τέλος, μετὰ μακρὸν χρόνον, ἔφη, ‘ ἄνθρωποι πράζειαν ἂν ἔργα ἃ εἴη ἀγαθά, αλλ’ οὐ εὗρον δίκαιον ἄνθρωπον.’ ἀλλ’ εἰ ἔλθοι εἰς τὴν ἀλλὴν πόλιν, ἐζήτει.

“If only I would find,” said Diogenes, “a just man.” For he was searching so that justice would not leave the earth. And Diogenes said that he would search for a long time. But he was afraid that he would not find any good (person). Finally, after a long time, he said, “Men might do deeds which are good, but I did not find a just man.” But if he would go to another city, he kept on searching.

REVIEW OF LESSONS 29-42

Congratulation! You have completed the active voice of the Greek verb. You have also learned all the constructions of the Greek verb. This has been a massive undertaking, so it is time to consolidate your knowledge. This review begins with a cumulative vocabulary from these lessons: it will be worth your time to make sure you have memorized this vocabulary at a pace slow enough that you feel confident in your mastery. There is also a review checklist of all the materials in the unit. Here again, make sure you understand each of the constructions. And finally, there is a practice exam.

You will find mastering the rest of the Greek verb in the next unit a much easier task now that you have been introduced to all the moods and constructions of the Greek verb, except for voice. Be heartened. You are almost at the mountain top.

CUMULATIVE VOCABULARY, LESSONS 29 – 42

Nouns

|τὸ ἀγγεῖον |pot, vessel |

|ἡ ἀλήθεια |truth |

|ὁ γέρων (γέροντος) |old man |

|τὸ γῆρας |old age |

|ἡ γνώμη |wisdom |

|ἡ δίκη |justice |

|ὁ δοῦλος |slave |

|ὁ εὑρετής |finder, discoverer |

|ἡ θάλαττα |sea, ocean |

|ἡ κλοπή |theft |

|ἡ κύλιξ (κύλικος) |cup |

|ὁ λύπη |pain, grief |

|ὁ ξένος |guest/host |

|ὁ πατήρ (πατρός) |father |

|ἡ πέτρα |cliff |

|ὁ πέτρος |rock |

|τὸ πῦρ, Gen. πυρός |fire |

|τὸ ὄρος |mountain |

|ὁ σάκκος |sack |

|ἡ σοφία |wisdom |

|ὁ στόνος |groan |

|ὁ τέκων (τέκοντος) |father; plural, parents |

|ἡ τιμή |honor |

|ἡ τύχη |fortune good or bad, chance, |

Adjectives

|ἄκρος, α, ον |topmost, inmost, outermost |

|ἄξιος, α, ον |worthy, worthy of + Gen. or Inf. |

|γεραιός, ά, όν |old |

|γέρων, γέρουσα, γέρον |old |

|δεινός, ή, όν |awesome, terrible/wonderful |

|δίκαιος, α, ον |just |

|ἐναντίος, α, ον |opposite |

|ἱκανός, ή, όν |sufficient, enough |

|καινός, ή, όν |new |

|κάκιστος, η, ον |worst |

|κακίων, κάκιον |worse |

|κάρπιμος, ον |fruitful |

|πλείων, πλεῖον |more |

|ποῖος, α, ον |what sort, what sort of |

|ῥᾴων, ῤᾴον ( From ῤᾴδιος, α, ον) |easier |

|τεθνεώς, τεθνεῶσα, τεθνεός (τεθνεῶτος, τεθνεώσης, τεθνεῶτος) |having died, being dead |

|τεθνηκώς, υῖα, ός (τεθνηκότος, τεθνηκυίας, τεθνηκότος) |having died, being dead |

|τοιοῦτος, τοιαύτη, τοιοῦτο/ τοιοῦτον |of such a sort |

|τοσοῦτος, τοσαύτη, τοσοῦτο/τοσοῦτον |so large, so great |

|τοσοῦτο/τοσοῦτον |(adverbial accusative) so much, to such an extent |

|χρυσοῦς, ῆ, οῦν (contraction of χρυσεέος, α, ον) |golden |

Direct Interrogatives/ Shrug Words/ Indirect Interrogative/ Indefinite Relatives

|ποῖος/ ποιος |what sort of a? some sort of a |

|πότε/ ὅπϙτε |when? / whenever, when(ever) |

Indefinite Relative/Interrogative

|ὅστις, ἥτις, ὅ τι |anyone who, anything which; whoever, whatever; who, which. |

|ὅποι |to wherever, to where (ever) (end of motion) |

|ὅπου |where(ever) wherever (place where) |

|ὅπως |how (ever), however |

See Textbook: page 163 for a chart of all these words

Verbs with Regular –σα Aorists

|ἀκούω, ἀκούσομαι, ἤκουσα, ἀκήκοα |hear |

|βλέπω, βλέψομαι, ἔβλεψα |look |

|ἀπο-βλέπω, ἀπο-βλέψομαι, ἀπ-έβλεψα |look off, look away |

|ἀνα-βλέπω, ἀνα-βλέψομαι, ἀν-έβλεψα |look up |

|κατα-βλέπω, κατα-βλέψομαι, κατ-έβλεψα |look down |

|γράφω, γράψω, ἔγραψα, γέγραφα |write |

|δακρύω, δακρύσω, ἐδάκρυσα, δεδάκρυκα |cry |

|ἐλπίζω, ἐλπιῶ, ἤλπισα |hope + future infinitive |

|θάπτω, θάψω, ἔθαψα |bury |

|κελεύω, κελεύσω, ἐκέλευσα |bid, urge, order |

|κλέπτω, κλέψω, ἔκλεψα, κέκλοφα |steal |

|κρύπτω, κρύψω, ἔκρυψα |hide |

|παύω, παύσω, ἔπαυσα, πέπαυκα |stop (someone or something) |

|νομίζω, νομιῶ, ἐνόμισα, νενόμικα |think, consider |

|οἰμώζω, οἰμώξομαι, ᾤμωξα |wail aloud, lament |

|πείθω, πείσω, ἔπεισα |persuade |

|πέμπω, πέμψω, ἔπεμψα, πέπομφα |send |

|πιστεύω, πιστεύσω, ἐπίστευσα, πέποιθα |trust, trust in + Dative |

|πλήττω, πλήξω, ἔπληξα, πέπληγα |strike |

|πράττω, πράξω, ἔπραξα |do, fare, act |

|στένω (no future or aorist) |groan |

|σῴζω, σώσω, ἔσωσα, σέσωκα |save |

|φυλάττω, φυλάξω, ἐφύλαξα |guard |

|χρῄζω, χρῄσω, ἔχρῃσα |lack, need, + Gen |

Verbs with Irregular –σα Aorists

|ἐθέλω, ἐθελήσω, ἠθέλησα, ἠθέληκα |be willing |

|μέλλω, μελλήσω, ἐμέλλησα |intend, be about to + infinitive (usually future) |

Verbs with –λα Aorists

|ἀγγέλλω, ἀγγελῶ, ἤγγειλα, ἤγγελκα |announce |

|ἐγείρω, ἐγερῶ, ἤγειρα, ἐγρήγορα |wake |

|καθαίρω, καθαρῶ, ἐκάθηρα |cleanse, purify |

|κρίνω, κρινῶ, ἔκρῑνα |judge |

|κτείνω, κτενῶ, ἔκτεινα |kill, slay |

|ἀπο-κτέινω, απο-κτενῶ, ἀπ-έκτεινα, ἀπ-έκτονα | |

|μένω, μενῶ, ἔμεινα, μεμένηκα |wait, stay, remain |

|οἰκτίρω, οἰκτιρῶ, ᾤκτιρα |pity |

|σημαίνω, σημανῶ, ἐσήμηνα |show by a sign, signify, give a sign or bid one to do something|

–εω Contract Verbs

|ἀδικέω, ἀδικήσω, ἠδίκησα |be unjust |

|ἀ-θυμέω, ἀ-θυμήσω, X |be disheartened |

|αἱρέω, αἱρήσω, εἷλον |take, seize |

|αἰτέω, αἰτήσω, ᾔτησα |request, ask |

|ἀ-πειθέω, ἀ-πειθήσω |disobey |

|γαμέω, γαμῶ, ἔγημα |marry |

|γεωργέω, γεωργήσω, ἐγεώργησα |farm |

|δοκέω, δόξω, ἔδοξα |seem (linking verb); think + subj. acc. verb infinitive; seem |

| |best + dative of the person and complementary infinitive |

|ἐπιθυμέω + Genitive |desire |

|ζητέω, ζητήσω, ἐζήτησα, ἐζήτηκα |seek |

|καλέω, καλῶ, ἐκάλεσα, κέκληκα |invite, call |

|κοινωνέω, κοινωήσω, ἐκοινώνησα |share, share something (+ Genitive) with someone (+ Dative) |

|λυπέω, λυπήσω, ἔλυπησα |cause pain of mind or body, vex, distress |

|μισέω, μισήσω, ἐμίσησα |hate |

|νοσέω, νοσήσω, ἐνόσησα |be sick |

|οἰκέω, οἰκήσω, ᾤκησα |dwell, inhabit |

|ὁμολογέω, ὀμολογήσω, ὡμολόγησα |agree, say the same thing, agree with (+ Dative) |

|ποιέω, ποιήσω, ἐποίησα, πεποίηκα |do, make |

|πονέω, πονήσω, ἐπόνησα |toil |

|φιλέω, φιλήσω, ἐφίλησα |love, like |

|φορέω, φορήσω, ἐφόρησα |wear, carry around |

|ὠφελέω, ὠφελήσω, ὠφέλησα |benefit, be of service to + accusative |

–αω Contract Verbs

|βοάω, βοήσομαι, ἐβόησα |shout |

|ἀνα-βοάω |shout up, shout out |

|γελάω, γελάσομαι, ἐγέλασα |laugh |

|ἐρωτάω, ἐρωτήσω, ἠρώτησα |ask |

|ζάω, ζήσω, ἔζησα |live |

|ὁράω, ὄψομαι, εἶδον, ἑώρακα or οἶδα |see |

|εἰσ-οράω |look into |

|πεινάω, πεινήσω, ἐπείνησα |be hungry |

|τιμάω, τιμήσω, ἐτίμησα |honor |

|τολμάω, τολμήσω, ἐτόλμησα, τετόλμηκα |have the heart, endure, dare |

|σιγάω, σιγήσω, ἐσίγησα, σεσίγηκα |be silent |

Verbs with ε/ο Aorists with Similar Stems

|βάλλω, βαλῶ, ἔβαλον, βέβληκα |throw |

|ἐκ-βάλλω, ἐκ-βαλῶ, ἐκ-έβαλον |throw out |

|εὑρίσκω, εὑρήσω, ηὗρον, ηὕρηκα or εὕρηκα |find |

|θνῄσκω, θανοῦμαι, ἔθανον, τέθνηκα |die |

|ἀπο-θνῄσκω, ἀπο-θανοῦμαι, ἀπ-έθανεν | |

|κάμνω, καμοῦμαι, ἔκαμον, κέκμηκα |be weary |

|λαμβάνω, λήψομαι, ἔλαβον, εἴληφα |take |

|ἀνα-λαμβάνω, ἀνα-λήψομαι, ἀν-έλαβον |take up, pick up |

|ἀπο-λαμβάνω, ἀπο-λήψομαι, ἀπ-έλαβον |take back, take away |

|συλ-λαμβάνω, συλ-λήψομαι, συν-έλαβον |gather |

|λανθάνω, λήσω, ἔλαθον, λέληθα |escape the notice of + supplementary participle |

|λείπω, λείψω, ἔλιπον, λέλοιπα |leave |

|μανθάνω, μαθήσομαι, ἔμαθον, μεμάθηκα |learn |

|πάσχω, πείσομαι, ἔπαθον |undergo, suffer, experience |

|πίνω, πίομαι, ἔπιον, πέπωκα |drink |

|πίπτω, πεσοῦμαι, ἔπεσον, πέπτωκα |fall |

|τέμνω, τεμῶ, ἔτεμον, -τέτμηκα |cut |

|τίκτω, τέξομαι, ἔτεκον, τέτοκα |give birth |

|τυγχάνω, τεύξομαι, ἔτυχον, τετύχηκα |happen to be (+ complimentary participle = “happens being”); |

| |meet up with + dative; happen, succeed |

| |meet up with, chance upon + Dative |

|ἐν-τυγχάνω, ἐν-τεύξομαι, ἐν-έτυχον | |

Verbs with ε/ο Aorists with Different Stems

|ἄγω, ἄξω, ἤγαγον, ἦχα |lead |

|εἰσ-άγω, εἰσ-άξω, εἰσ-ήγαγον |lead in |

|ἐσθίω, ἔδομαι, ἔφαγον, ἐδήδοκα |eat |

|ἔχω, (imperfect, εἶχον)ἔξω or σχήσω, ἔσχον, ἔσχηκα |have, hold, possess, (ingressive aorist, acquired, got), be |

| |able to + infinitive |

|ἀν-έχω, ἀν-έξω or ἀνα-σχήσω, ἀν-έσχον (imperfect, ἀν-εῖχον) |hold up |

|παρ-έχω, παρ-έξω, παρ-έσχον | |

| |provide |

|ἔρχομαι, ἐλεύσομαι, ἦλθον, ἐλήλυθα |come, go |

|ἀπ-έρχομαι, ἀπ-ελεύσομαι, απ-ῆλθον |go away |

|δι-έρχομαι, δι-ελεύσομαι, δι-ῆλθον |go through |

|ἐξ-έρχομαι, ἐξ-ελεύσομαι, ἐξ-ῆλθον |come or go out |

|παρ-έρχομαι, παρ-ελεύσομαι, παρ-ἦλθον |go by |

|λέγω, ἐρῶ, εἶπον, εἴρηκα |say |

|λέγω χαίρειν |say goodbye |

|ὁράω, ὄψομαι, εἶδον, ἑώρακα or οἶδα |see |

|φέρω, οἴσω, ἤνεγκον, ἐνήνοχα |carry |

|φεύγω, φεύξομαι, ἔφυγον, πέφευγα |flee |

Verbs with Special Aorists

|βαίνω, βήσομαι, ἔβην, βέβηκα |go |

|ἀνα-βαίνω, ἀνα-βήσομαι, ἀν-έβην |go up |

|εἰσ-βαίνω, εἰσ-βήσομαι, εἰσ-έβην |enter |

|ἐκ-βαίνω, ἐκ-βήσομαι, ἐξ-έβην |go out, step out |

|κατα-βαίνω, κατα-βήσομαι, κατ-έβην |go down |

|γιγνώσκω, γνώσομαι, ἔγνων, ἔγνωκα |know |

|ἵσταμαι, στήσομαι, ἔστην, ἕστηκα |stand |

|ἀν-ίσταμαι, ἀνα-στήσομαι, ἀν-έστην |stand up |

|φήμι, φήσω, ἔφην |say |

-μι Verbs

|οἴγνυμι, οἴξω, ᾦξα |open |

|ἀν-οίγνυμι, αν-οίξω, αν-ῴξα |open up |

|ἀν-εῴγνυ (imperfect, 3rd Singular) | |

|δείκνυμι, δείξω, ἔδειξα |show |

|δίδωμι, δώσω, ἔδωκα |give |

|ἀπο-δίδωμι, ἀπο-δώσω, ἀπ-έδωκα |give back |

|ἵημι |let forth, release, let go |

|ἀφίημι |send forth, send away |

|ἵστημι, στήσω, ἔστησα |set upright, stand something |

|ὄλλυμι, -ωλῶ, -ώλεσα |destroy, ruin, lose destroy utterly, lose |

|ἀπόλλυμι, ἀπ-ωλῶ, ἀπ-ώλεσα | |

-μαι Verbs

|αἰσθανόμαι, αἰσθανοῦμαι, ἡσθόμην |perceive |

|ἀν-έχομαι |endure |

|ἀφικνέομαι, ἀφίξομαι, ἀφικόμην |come to, arrive |

|γίγνομαι, γενήσομαι, ἐγενόμην, γέγονα |come into existence, become, be, arise |

|ἐννοέομαι |reflect on, consider |

|ἕπομαι, ἕψομαι, ἑσπόμην |follow + dative |

|ἡγέομαι |consider |

|κτάομαι, |acquire |

|κέτημαι |I have acquired, I possess |

|ὑπ-ισχνέομαι |promise + future infinitive |

|πορεύομαι |journey |

|χράομαι, χρήσομαι, ἐχρησάμην |use, make use of + Dative |

Irregular Verbs

|χρή (infinitive χρῆναι) |it is necessary |

Perfects as Presents

|ἔγνωκα |I know |

|ἔστηκα |I stand |

|κέκτημαι |I possess |

|μέμνημαι |I remember |

|οἶδα |I know |

|πέποιθα + Dative |I trust, trust in |

|πέφυκα (Linking Verb) |I am by nature; I am naturally |

|τέθνηκα (τέθνηκας, τεθνηκε(ν), τέθναμεν, τέθνατε, τεθνᾶσιν; infinitive |have died, am dead |

|τεθνάναι | |

Adverbs

|ἐκεῖ |there |

|ἐνταῦθα |here, in this place; to here, to this place |

|ἔτι |yet, still |

|μᾶλλον |+ verb: rather |

|σφόδρα |strongly, vehemently |

Conjunctions

|ὅπου |wherever |

|πρίν + infinitive |before |

|πρίν + indicative |until |

|ἐάν + subjunctive |if ever |

|ἵνα + subjunctive or optative |so that, in order that |

|μή + subjunctive or optative |lest |

|ἤν + subjunctive |if ever |

|ὅπως + subjunctive or optative |so that, in order that |

|ὡς + subjunctive or optative |so that, in order that |

Prepositions

|διά + Genitive |through, by + Person |

|πρὸ +Gen. | before (in time or space) |

|τῆλε + Genitive |far from |

Phrases

|μετὰ χρόνον |after a while, after a time |

Interjections

|εἴθε |if only |

|εἰ γάρ |if only |

Particles

|ἄν |used in conditionals and with optatives |

|ἆρα |indicates a question |

|δῆτα more emphatic version of δή | underline the word before |

|τοι |“you know” |

REVIEW CHECKLIST OF NEW MATERIALS: LESSONS 29-42

1. Verb Systems: Future, Perfect, Four Principal Parts

2. Verb Moods: Subjunctive, Optative, Imperative

3. Verb Forms: Contract Verbs; Irregular Verbs: εἰμί, οἶδα, τέθνηκα

4. Verb Syntax

a Indicative

1. πρίν + Ιndicative

2. Contrary to Fact Conditionals: Present and Past

3. Mixed Conditionals or Conditionals with Omitted “if” clause

4. With ὅτι (ὡς) in Indirect Discourse

5. Gnomic Aorist

6. Conative Imperfect

7.Perfects as Presents

b. Subjunctive

1. Hortatory

2. Deliberative

3. Prohibition

4. Subordinate Purpose Clause

5. Subordinate Fear Clause

6. Subordinate Verb in Present General Conditional

7. Subordinate Verb in Future More Vivid Conditional

c. Optative

1. Wish

2. Potential

3. Optative in Past (Secondary) Sequence: Purpose

4. Optative in Past (Secondary) Sequence: Fear

5. Optative in Optative Sequence

6. Past General Conditional

7. Future Less Vivid Conditional

8. In Indirect Discourse ὅτι clauses after secondary MV

d. Infinitive

1. With πρίν

2. In Indirect Discourse

e. Participle

1. In Indirect Discourse

5. Relatives and Temporal Conjunctions with ἄν

a. Substitute for ἐάν (ἤν) in Conditional Sentences

6. Indefinite Relative/ Interrogative

a. Substitute for Relative in Conditional Sentences

b. Substitute for Interrogative in Indirect Question

VERB CONSTRUCTIONS: LESSONS 1-42

|Indicative |Infinitive |Participle |Optative |Subjunctive |

|1. Main Verb of a Sentence |1. Complementary |1. Modifies an implied or|1. Wish “If only he |1. Hortatory: Let’s. Urges as |

| | |expressed noun |would leave”, M.V. |the main verb of a sentence |

|2. Ingressive Aorist, “he fell|2. Articular Infinitive |2. Genitive Absolute, |2. Potential, “He might|2. Deliberative “What should we |

|in love” | |“with the friends staying”|leave” (needs ἄν) |do” as main verb |

|3. Verb of a Subordinate ὅτι,|3. Infinitive in Indirect|3. Participle in Indirect |3. In Indirect |3. Prohibition, |

|ὡς Indirect Disc. Clause |Discourse |Discourse |Discourse ὅτι clauses |”Don’t X”, Aorist only, M.V. |

| | | |after secondary MV | |

|4. Verb in Subordinate Actual|4. Infinitive in Probable|4. Future Part. of Purpose|4.Past Sequence Purpose|4. Subordinate Purpose Clause “so|

|Result ὥστε Clause, “so that |Result ὥστε Clause |with Verbs of Motion |Clause: “He did this so|that he should X” |

|he X’ed” | |“Froggie Went A-Courting” |that they would leave” | |

|5. Verb in Subordinate πρίν |5. With πρίν, “before | |5. Past Sequence Fear |5. Subordinate Fear Clause, “lest|

|clause, “Until he left” |leaving” | |Clause:” He was afraid |he should X” |

| | | |lest they would leave” | |

|6. (Imperfect) Verb in Present|6. Infinitive with verbs | |6. Past General Cond., |6. Present General Cond., “If |

|Contrary to Fact, “If I were |of necessity (χρή) and | |“If ever I would, I |ever I should X, I always…” |

|rich, he would be happy.” |possibility (ἔστι) | |used to… | |

|7. (Aorist) Verb in Past |7. Future Complementary | |7.Future Less Vivid: |Future More Vivid , “If ever I |

|Contrary to Fact, “If I had |Infinitive after “intend, | |“If ever I |should X, I will” |

|been rich, he would have been |promise, hope” | |would/should) X, I | |

|happy”. | | |would | |

|8. Gnomic Aorist: “A fool | | |8. Opt. in Opt | |

|learns (ἔμαθε) by suffering”. | | |Sequence: “He might say| |

| | | |things which you would | |

| | | |not like” | |

|9.Conative Imperfect: “they | | | | |

|were trying to win” | | | | |

Imperative: Gives a command as a Main Verb

ACTIVE VERB EXERCISE

Translate the following forms, making the aspect clear. The forms are all derived from γράφω, γράψω, ἔγραψα, γέγραφα and εὑρίσκω, εὑρήσω, ηὗρον, ηὕρηκα. Review the distinction between the Optative of Wish and Potential Optative (found on page 161 of the Textbook).[152]

1. γέγραφε ______________________________

2. εὑρήσοιμεν ______________________________

3. γράψειαν ἄν ______________________________

4. εὑρίσκῃ ______________________________

5. ηὕρισκον (2 ways) ______________________________

6. γράφωμεν ______________________________

7. ηὗρε ______________________________

8. γεγραφότος ______________________________

9. γράψον (2 ways) ______________________________

10. ἐγεγράφεσαν ______________________________

11. εὑρισκόντων (2 ways) ______________________________

12. γράψασιν ______________________________

13. εὕροις ______________________________

14. γράφουσιν (2 ways) ______________________________

15. εὑρεῖν ______________________________

16. γράφῃς ______________________________

17. εὑρηκέναι ______________________________

18. ηὗρον (2 ways) ______________________________

19. γράψαι ______________________________

20. εὑρήσουσα ______________________________

21. εὑρέτω ______________________________

22. ἔγραψας ______________________________

23. γράψας ______________________________

24. εὕροιεν ______________________________

25. ηὑρίσκες ______________________________

26. γεγραφυίας (2 ways) ______________________________

27. γράψειας ______________________________

UNIT THREE: PRACTICE TEST, LESSONS 29-42

1. Synopsize the verb παύω in 3rd person plural, masculine,giving the dative plural of all participles.

Principal Parts: ____________, __________, _____________, _________________,

|Continuous |Future |Aorist |Perfect |

|Indicative | | | | | |

|Present |Imperfect |Future |Aorist |Perfect |Pluperfect |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

|Subjunctive |X | | |

|Optative | | | |

|Imperative |X | | |

|Infinitive | | | |

|Participle | | | |

2. Give all the forms of οἶδα

|Indicative |

|Perfect |Pluperfect |

|________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |

|________________ |________________ |

|Infinitive |

|______________________ |

|Participle |

|_____________________________ |

3. Give all the forms of εἰμί.

|Indicative |

|Present |Imperfect |

|_____________ |_____________ |

|_____________ |_____________ |

|_____________ |_____________ |

|_____________ |_____________ |

|_____________ |_____________ |

|_____________ |_____________ |

|Subjunctive |

|_____________ |

|_____________ |

|_____________ |

|_____________ |

|_____________ |

|_____________ |

|Imperative |

|_____________ ______________ |

|_____________ ______________ |

|Infinitive |

|__________________ |

|Participle |

|__________________________________ |

4. Write the paradigm for ὅστις, ἥτις, ὅ τι below, including alternate forms:

|Case |Masculine |Feminine |Neuter |

|N | | | |

|A | | | |

|G | | | |

|D | | | |

| | | | |

|Ν | | | |

|Α | | | |

|G | | | |

|D | | | |

5. Give the principal parts of the following verbs; you may omit the perfect principal parts except for the regular formations. (Extra credit for others)

|Pres/Cont |Future |Aorist |Perfect |

|πέμπω | | | |

|μένω | | | |

|λύω | | | |

|ποιέω | | | |

|δοκέω | | |Χ |

|τολμάω | | | |

|βάλω | | | |

|ὁράω | | | |

|βαίνω | | | |

|γιγνώσκω | | | |

6. Translate the following, be sure to differentiate those perfects which are used as presents:

1. κέκτημαι ______________________________

2. ἐστηκέναι ______________________________

3. ἐλελύκης ______________________________

4. πεφυκός ______________________________

5. ἐλελοίπεμεν ______________________________

7. Translate the following, and explicate the forms printed in bold.

Zuren is chosen to go into the sea to search for the golden cup.

(1) ‘ὦ πατέρ’, ἔφη, ‘χρὴ με ἐλθεῖν εἰς τὴν θάλατταν ὥστε εὑρεῖν τὴν χρυσῆν κύλικα. (2) ὅστις ἄν ποιήσῃ τοῦτο ἀποθνῄσκει. (3) οὐκ εἶπόν σοι περὶ τῶν τεθνεώτων ἵνα σε μὴ λυπήσαιμι. (4) ἀλλὰ νῦν, τί πράττωμεν ὅπως μὴ ἀποθνῄσκω; ’ (5) καὶ ὁ πατὴρ εἶπε, ‘νομίζω εἰδέναι ὅ τι χρὴ ποιῆσαι. (6) πρὶν ἔρχεσθαι εἰς τὴν θάλατταν , δεῖ σε πεποιθέναι μοι. (7) μὴ ποιήσῃς ἅττα οἱ ἄλλοι πεποιήκασιν. (8) φοβέομαι μὴ πράττων ὧδε ἀποθνῄσκῃς. (9) ἀλλὰ ποίησον ἅττα κέλευω, καὶ λάβοις ἄν ὅ ἐθέλοις λαβεῖν.’ (10) ὁ δὲ Ζυρὴν πεποιθὼς τῷ πατρί, εὗρε τὴν κύλικα. (11) καὶ τῷ βασιλεῖ ἐρωτήσαντι πῶς εὗρε αὐτήν, ὁ Ζυρήν, καίπερ ἐφοβεῖτο μὴ ὁ βασιλεὺς ἀποκτείνειε τὸν πατέρα, ἤγγειλε τὸν πατέρα δείξαντα ὄ τι χρὴ ποιεῖν. (12) ἀλλ’ ὁ βασιλεὺς εἶπε ‘οὐκ ἔστιν τεθνεῶτα δεῖξαι τοῦτο. (13) οὔποτε τοιαῦτα ἀκήκοα (from ἀκούω)’. (14) ὁ δ’ ἀπεκρίνατο, ‘οὐ τεθνεώς ἐστιν· οὐ τέθνηκεν διότι οὐκ ἀπέκτεινα αὐτόν.’ (15) ὁ βασιλεὺς ἀνέβοησε, ‘εὖ πέπγραγας σῴζων τὸν πατέρα. (16) οἱ σοφοὶ ἀεὶ λέγουσι, ‘παθὼν μῶρος ἔμαθεν’, καὶ νῦν ἐγὼ παθὼν μεμάθηκα μέγα τι. (17) ἴθι, κέλευσον τὸν πατέρα ἐκβαίνειν ἐκ τοῦ σάκκου ἴνα πορεύηται μεθ’ ἡμῶν. (18) ἔλθοι ἐνταῦθα. (19) ὄμνυμι οὐδένα πλήξειν αὐτὸν. (20) μᾶλλον δὲ τιμήσωμεν αὐτὸν, καὶ οἴσομεν μεθ’ ἡμῶν ὄταν ἄν πορευώμεθα. (21) καὶ μετὰ ταῦτα ὁ βασιλεὺς ἀεὶ ἐτίμα τοὺς γέροντας καὶ ἐφίλει αὐτοὺς, λέγων, ‘εἰ ὁ Ζυρὴν ἀπέκτεινε τὸν πατέρα, οὐκ ἦν ἄν μοι ἡ χρυσῆ κύλιξ.

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Explication

|Sent. |Greek |Person |Number |Tense/Aspect |Mood/F |Construction |

|2. |ποίησῃ | | | | | |

|3. |λυπήσαιμι | | | | | |

|4. |πράττωμεν | | | | | |

|4. |ἀποθνῄσκω | | | | | |

|5. |εἰδέναι | | | | | |

|6. |ἔρχεσθαι | | | | | |

|6. |πεποιθέναι | | | | | |

|7. |ποιήσῃς | | | | | |

|8. |ἀποθνῄσκῃς | | | | | |

|9. |ποίησον | | | | | |

|9. |λάβοις ἄν | | | | | |

|9. |ἐθέλοις | | | | | |

|11. |ἀποκτείνειε | | | | | |

|11. |δείξαντα | | | | | |

|12. |δεῖξαι | | | | | |

|16. |ἔμαθεν | | | | | |

|17. |κέλευσον | | | | | |

|17. |πορεύηται | | | | | |

|18. |ἔλθοι | | | | | |

|19. |πλήξειν | | | | | |

|20. |τιμήσωμεν | | | | | |

|20. |πορευώμεθα | | | | | |

|21. |ἐτίμα | | | | | |

|21. |ἀπέκτεινε | | | | | |

|21. |ἦν | | | | | |

ANSWERS, UNIT THREE PRACTICE TEST, LESSONS 29-42

1. Synopsize the verb παύω in 3rd person plural, masculine, giving the dative plural of all participles.

Principal Parts: παύω, παύσω, ἔπαυσα, πέπαυκα

|Continuous |Future |Aorist |Perfect |

|Ιndicative | | | | | |

|Present |Imperfect ἔπαυον |Future παύσουσιν |Aorist |Perfect |Pluperfect ἐπεπαύκεσαν |

|παύουσι(ν) | | |ἔπαυσαν |πεπαύκασι(ν) | |

|Subjunctive | | | |

|παύωσι(ν) |X |παύσωσι(ν) |πεπαυκότες ὦσι(ν) |

|Optative | | | |

|παύοιεν |παύσοιεν |παύσειαν |πεπαυκότες εἶεν |

|Imperative | | | |

|παυόντων |X |παυσάντων |πεπαυκότες ἔστων/ ὄντων |

|Infinitive | | | |

|παύειν |παύσειν |παῦσαι |πεπαυκέναι |

|Participle | | | |

|παύουσι(ν), παυούσαις, παύουσι(ν) |παύσουσι(ν), |παύσασι(ν), παυσάσαις,|πεπαυκόσι(ν) πεπαυκυίαις |

| |παυσούσαις, |παύσασι(ν) |πεπαυκόσι(ν) |

| |παύσουσι(ν) | | |

2. Give all the forms of οἶδα

Compare with paradigm on page 159 of the Textbook.

3. Give all the forms of εἰμί.

Compare with paradigm on page 151 of the Textbook.

4. Write the paradigm for ὅστις, ἥτις, ὅ τι below, including alternate forms:

Compare with paradigm on page 158 of the Textbook.

5. Give the principal parts of the following verbs; you may omit the perfect principal parts except for the regular formations. (Extra credit for others)

|Pres/Cont |Future |Aorist |Perfect |

|πέμπω |πέμψω |ἔπεμψα |πέπομφα |

|μένω |μενῶ |ἔμεινα |μεμένηκα |

|λύω |λύσω |ἔλυσα |λέλυκα (Regular) |

|ποιέω |ποιήσω |ἔποιησα |πεποίηκα (Regular) |

|δοκέω |δόξω |ἔδοξα |Χ |

|τολμάω |τολμήσω |ἐτόλμησα |τετόλμηκα (Regular) |

|βάλω |βαλῶ |ἔβαλον |βέβληκα |

|ὁράω |ὄψομαι |εἶδον |ἑώρακα, οἶδα |

|βαίνω |βήσομαι |ἔβην |βέβηκα |

|γιγνώσκω |γνώσομαι |ἔγνων |ἔγνωκα |

6. Translate the following, be sure to differentiate those perfects which are used as presents:

1. κέκτημαι I possess

2. ἐστηκέναι to stand

3. ἐλελύκης you had released

4. πεφυκός it, being by nature

5. ἐλελοίπεμεν we had left

7. Translate the following, and explicate the forms printed in bold.

Zuren is chosen to go into the sea to search for the golden cup.

(1) ‘ὦ πατέρ’, ἔφη, ‘χρὴ με ἐλθεῖν εἰς τὴν θάλατταν ὥστε εὑρεῖν τὴν χρυσῆν κύλικα. (2) ὅστις ἄν ποιήσῃ τοῦτο ἀποθνῄσκει. (3) οὐκ εἶπόν σοι περὶ τῶν τεθνεώτων ἵνα σε μὴ λυπήσαιμι. (4) ἀλλὰ νῦν, τί πράττωμεν ὅπως μὴ ἀποθνῄσκω; ’ (5) καὶ ὁ πατὴρ εἶπε, ‘νομίζω εἰδέναι ὅ τι χρὴ ποιῆσαι. (6) πρὶν ἔρχεσθαι εἰς τὴν θάλατταν , δεῖ σε πεποιθέναι μοι. (7) μὴ ποιήσῃς ἅττα οἱ ἄλλοι πεποιήκασιν. (8) φοβέομαι μὴ πράττων ὧδε ἀποθνῄσκῃς. (9) ἀλλὰ ποίησον ἅττα κέλευω, καὶ λάβοις ἄν ὅ ἐθέλοις λαβεῖν.’ (10) ὁ δὲ Ζυρὴν πεποιθὼς τῷ πατρί, εὗρε τὴν κύλικα. (11) καὶ τῷ βασιλεῖ ἐρωτήσαντι πῶς εὗρε αὐτήν, ὁ Ζυρήν, καίπερ ἐφοβεῖτο μὴ ὁ βασιλεὺς ἀποκτείνειε τὸν πατέρα, ἤγγειλε τὸν πατέρα δείξαντα ὄ τι χρὴ ποιεῖν. (12) ἀλλ’ ὁ βασιλεὺς εἶπε ‘οὐκ ἔστιν τεθνεῶτα δεῖξαι τοῦτο. (13) οὔποτε τοιαῦτα ἀκήκοα (from ἀκούω)’. (14) ὁ δ’ ἀπεκρίνατο, ‘οὐ τεθνεώς ἐστιν· οὐ τέθνηκεν διότι οὐκ ἀπέκτεινα αὐτόν.’ (15) ὁ βασιλεὺς ἀνέβοησε, ‘εὖ πέπγραγας σῴζων τὸν πατέρα. (16) οἱ σοφοὶ ἀεὶ λέγουσι, ‘παθὼν μῶρος ἔμαθεν’, καὶ νῦν ἐγὼ παθὼν μεμάθηκα μέγα τι. (17) ἴθι, κέλευσον τὸν πατέρα ἐκβαίνειν ἐκ τοῦ σάκκου ἴνα πορεύηται μεθ’ ἡμῶν. (18) ἔλθοι ἐνταῦθα. (19) ὄμνυμι οὐδένα πλήξειν αὐτὸν. (20) μᾶλλον δὲ τιμήσωμεν αὐτὸν, καὶ οἴσομεν μεθ’ ἡμῶν ὄταν ἄν πορευώμεθα. (21) καὶ μετὰ ταῦτα ὁ βασιλεὺς ἀεὶ ἐτίμα τοὺς γέροντας καὶ ἐφίλει αὐτοὺς, λέγων, ‘εἰ ὁ Ζυρὴν ἀπέκτεινε τὸν πατέρα, οὐκ ἦν ἄν μοι ἡ χρυσῆ κύλιξ.

(1) “O, father”, he said, “it is necessary for me to go to the sea so as to find the golden cup. (2) Whoever should do (does) this, always dies. (3) I did not tell you about the dead men so that I would not distress you. (4) But now, what are we to do so that I should (might) not die?” (5) And his father said, “I think that I know what it is necessary to do. (6) Before going to the sea, it is necessary for you to trust me. (7) Don’t do what the others have done. (8) I am afraid lest by acting thusly you should (might) die. (9) But do whatever I order, and you might get what you (would) want to get.” (10) And Zuren, trusting in his father, found the cup. (11) And to the king having asked how he found it, Zuren, although he was afraid lest the king would kill his father, announced that his father had shown what (is) was necessary to do. (12) But the king said, “It is not possible for a dead man to show this. (13) Never have I heard such things.” (14) And he answered, “He is not a dead man. He is not dead because I didn’t kill him.” (15) And the king shouted out, “You have done well saving your father. (16) The Wise Ones always say, “A fool learns by experience (= by suffering, by experiencing)” and now I, by experience, have learned something important. (17) Go, order your father to come out of the sack so that he should (may) journey with us. (18) If only he would come here. (19) I promise that no one will strike him. (20) Rather, let us honor him, and we will bring him with us whenever we (should) journey.” (21) And after these things, the king always used to honor the old ones and love them, saying, “If Zuren had killed his father, now I would not have the golden cup.”

Explication

|Sent. |Greek |Person |Number |Tense/Aspect |Mood/F |Construction |

|2. |ποίησῃ |3rd |Sg |Aorist |Subj. |Present General Conditional |

|3. |λυπήσαιμι |1st |Sg |Aorist |Opt. |Optative, Past Sequence,Purpose|

|4. |πράττωμεν |1st |Pl. |Continuous |Subj. |Deliberative |

|4. |ἀποθνῄσκω |1st |Sg |Continuous |Subj. |Purpose |

|5. |εἰδέναι |X |X |Perfect as Pres. |Inf. |In Indirect Disc. |

|6. |ἔρχεσθαι |X |X |Continuous |Inf. |πρίν Clause |

|6. |πεποιθέναι |X |X |Perfect as Present |Inf. |Complement after Verb of |

| | | | | | |Necessity |

|7. |ποιήσῃς |2nd |Sg |Aorist |Subj. |Prohibition |

|8. |ἀποθνῄσκῃς |2nd |Sg |Continuous |Subj. |Fear Clause |

|9. |ποίησον |2nd |Sg |Aorist |Imptv. |Command |

|9. |λάβοις ἄν |2nd |Sg |Aorist |Opt. |Potential |

|9. |ἐθέλοις |2nd |Sg |Continuous |Opt. |Opt in Opt Sequence |

|11. |ἀποκτείνειε |3rd |Sg |Aorist |Opt. |Opt, Past Sequence, Fear |

|11. |δείξαντα |X |X |Aorist |Partcple. |Indirect Discourse |

|12. |δεῖξαι |X |X |Aorist |Inf. |Complement, Verb of Possibility|

|16. |ἔμαθεν |3rd |Sg |Aorist |Ind. |Gnomic Aorist |

|17. |κέλευσον |2nd |Sg |Aorist |Imptv. |Command |

|17. |πορεύηται |3rd |Sg |Continuous |Subj. |Purpose |

|18. |ἔλθοι |3rd |Sg |Aorist |Opt. |Wish |

|19. |πλήξειν |X |X |Future |Inf. |Indirect Discourse |

|20. |τιμήσωμεν |1st |Pl |Aorist |Subj. |Hortatory |

|20. |πορευώμεθα |1st |Pl |Continuous |Subj. |Fut. More Vivid Conditional |

|21. |ἐτίμα |3rd |Sg |Imperfect |Ind. |M. V. |

|21. |ἀπέκτεινε |3rd |Sg |Aorist |Ind. |Past Contrary to Fact,“If” |

| | | | | | |Clause or Impf. in Pres.C-F. |

|21. |ἦν |3rd |Sg |Imperfect |Ind. |Present Contrary to Fact, |

| | | | | | |“Then” Clause in Mixed |

| | | | | | |Conditional |

UNIT FOUR: LESSONS 43-50

The Middle and Passive Voices; Deponent Verbs; Regular -μι Verbs; U-Stem Nouns and Adjectives; Verbal Adjectives.

LESSON 43. THE MIDDLE VOICE; THE INDICATIVE MIDDLE; PRIMARY AND SECONDARY ENDINGS; DEPONENT VERBS

1. The Middle Voice

English, and most modern languages, have two voices, active and passive. The word voice in this context refers to the relationship of the subject and verb in a particular sentence. The active voice refers to sentences in which the subject does the action. For example: The sisters (subject) sing beautiful songs. In this example the sisters are doing the action “sing”. The passive voice refers to sentences in which the subject is not doing the action (and is therefore “passive”). For example: The man is hit by the ball. In this example, the man does not perform the action of the sentence “is hit” but rather is a receiver of the action. We will learn more about the passive voice later. Until this chapter, we have only used the active voice.

Greek also has a third voice, the middle. In this voice, the subject is still doing the action, but in somehow doing something to or for itself. For example: “She is washing her hair” or “She is having her car washed”. Although the subjects are doing the action in both sentences, Greek actually uses a different form of the verb to indicate that the act of washing is performed on oneself or in one’s own interests or on what belongs to oneself. The middle may also be used for reciprocal action: “They are helping each other”

( Exercise 1

Indicate the voice of the following by labeling A (for Active Voice) or M (for Middle Voice)

1. She had her children hidden during the war.[153] ______________

2. Stop the war. ______________

3. Leave your house. ______________

4. We helped ourselves. ______________

5. Will you take the money? ______________

6. We will have our money put in the bank. ______________

2. Formation of the Middle Voice

Although the active voice has different endings for primary (non-past) and secondary (past) tenses and moods, the endings are not as clear cut as they are in the middle voice. Nor are the endings for the active participle and active infinitive as consistent as they are in the middle voice. In the middle voice, you need only learn a single set of endings for all the tenses and moods, which are then added to the appropriate stems with the appropriate vowel to connect the stem with the ending. In short, if you memorize the chart of primary and secondary endings below, you will have memorized the middle voice. Primary personal endings are used for all non past tenses, (present, future, perfect) as well as the subjunctive mood. Secondary personal endings are used for all past tenses (imperfect, aorist, past perfect) as well as the optative.

Endings of the Middle Voice

|Primary Personal Endings |Secondary Personal Endings |Infinitive |Participle |

|-μαι -μεθα |-μην -μεθα |-σθαι |-μενος, η, ον |

|-σαι * -σθε |-σο * -σθε | |Genitive: -ου, ης, ου |

|-ται -νται |-το -ντο | | |

* These forms contract in the present, imperfect, future and aorist indicatives.

( Exercise 2: The Endings of the Middle Voice

Write out and memorize the middle endings:

|Primary Personal Endings |Secondary Personal Endings |Infinitive |Participle |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

|Primary Personal Endings |Secondary Personal Endings |Infinitive |Participle |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

3. Middle Forms

1) In the present, imperfect, future and ε/ο aorist indicative, infinitive and participle ε/ο vowels connect the middle endings to the stem. -ο is used before any ending beginning with a –μ or a –ν. -ε is used everywhere else.

2) –α is the linking vowel in the –α aorist.

3) The second person singular endings are contracted in the present, imperfect, future and aorist. Memorize these contractions:

εσαι ( ῃ

εσο ( ου

ασo ( ω

4) P.E. refers to primary endings; S.E. refers to secondary endings.

| |Present (primary) |Imperfect (secondary) |Future (primary) |Aorist (secondary) |

|Stems/ |λυ+ο/ε+P. E. |λυ+ο/ε+ S.E. |λυσ+ο/ε+ P.E. |λυσ+α+ S.E. |

|Vowels | | | | |

|Ind. |λύ/ο/μαι |ἐλυ/ό/μην |λύσ/ο/μαι |ἐλυσ/ά/μην |

| |λύ/ε/σαι=λύῃ* |ἐλύ/ε/σο=ἐλύου |λύσ/ε/σαι=λύσῃ* |ἐλύσ/α/σο=ἐλύσω |

| |λύ/ε/ται |ἐλύ/ε/το |λύσ/ε/ται |ἐλύσ/α/το |

| |λύ/ό/μεθα |ἐλυ/ό/μεθα |λύσ/ο/μεθα |ἐλυσ/ά/μεθα |

| |λύ/ε/σθε |ἐλύ/ε/σθε |λύσ/ε/σθε |ἐλύσ/α/σθε |

| |λύ/ο/νται |ἐλύ/ο/ντο |λύσ/ο/νται |ἐλύσ/α/ντο |

| |They are destroying their…|They were destroying their… |They will destroy their…. |They destroyed their… |

|Ιnf. |λύ/ε/σθαι |x |λύσ/ε/σθαι |λύσ/α/σθαι |

| |to be destroying one’s…. | |to be about to destroy one’s…|to destroy one’s… |

|Ptple. |λυ/ό/μενος,η,ον |x |λυσ/ό/μενος,η,ον |λυσ/ά/μενος,η,ον |

| |destroying one’s… | |being about to destroy one’s…|upon destroying one’s… |

• λύῃ is ambiguous because it looks exactly like the Present Active Subjunctive, 3rd person Singular

• λύσῃ is ambiguous because it looks exactly like the Aorist Active Subjunctive, 3rd person singular

( Exercise 3: Formation of the Middle Voice

Chart the middle forms for παύω, παύσω, ἔπαυσα, πέπαυκα, stop, and for λείπω, λείψω, ἔλιπον, λέλοιπα, leave. To help you remember, the chart asks you to identify the stem, the linking vowels, and the personal endings (either primary =P.E.) or secondary (= S.E.) that will be used for each tense of the indicative. The Present Continous in the Stem/Vowels line is filled in for you as a model for the other tenses. Remember that λείπω is an ε/ο aorist and that its linking vowels will be ε/ο not α. Check your answers with the charts on page 175 of the Textbook and with the chart above for the stem/vowels, and for the translations.

| |Present Cont.(primary) |Imperfect (secondary) |Future (primary) |Aorist (secondary) |

|Stems/Vowels |παυ+ο/ε+ P.E. | | | |

|Indicative |___________ |___________ |___________ |___________ |

| |___________ |___________ |___________ |___________ |

| |___________ |___________ |___________ |___________ |

| | | | | |

| |___________ |___________ |___________ |___________ |

| |___________ |___________ |___________ |___________ |

| |___________ |___________ |___________ |___________ |

| | | | | |

| |Τrans._______ |Τrans._______ |Τrans._______ |Τrans._______ |

|Ιnfinitive |____________ |x |____________ |____________ |

| |Trans._______ | |Trans._______ |Trans._______ |

|Participle |_____________ |x |_____________ |_____________ |

| |Trans._______ | |Trans._______ |Trans._______ |

| |_____________ | |______________ |_____________ |

| |Present (primary) |Imperfect (secondary) |Future (primary) |Aorist (secondary) |

|Stems/Vowels |λειπ+ο/ε P.E. | | | |

|Indicative |___________ |___________ |___________ |___________ |

| |___________ |___________ |___________ |___________ |

| |___________ |___________ |___________ |___________ |

| | | | | |

| |___________ |___________ |___________ |___________ |

| |___________ |___________ |___________ |___________ |

| |___________ |___________ |___________ |___________ |

| | | | | |

| |Τrans._______ |Τrans.______ |Τrans.______ |Τrans.______ |

|Ιnfinitive |____________ |x |____________ |____________ |

| |Trans._______ | |Trans._______ |Trans._______ |

|Participle |_____________ |x |_____________ |_____________ |

| |Trans._______ | |Trans._______ |Trans._______ |

4. Declension of Middle Participles

Middle Participles are declined in the first and seond declension, as are all ος, η, ον adjectives. Declining participles is an excellent way to refresh your knowledge of case endings.

(Exercise 4

Decline the aorist participle for παύω [154]

|Case |Masculine |Feminine |Neuter |

|N | | | |

|A | | | |

|G | | | |

|D | | | |

| | | | |

|N | | | |

|A | | | |

|G | | | |

|D | | | |

5. Ambiguous Forms:

1. The contraction of the 2nd person singular present of the indicative middle voice (for example λύῃ (you are leaving your…) is the same as the 3rd person singular of the subjunctive present active voice (λύῃ, should he, she it leave).

2. The contraction of the 2nd person singular aorist of the indicative middle voice (for example λύσῃ (you left your....) is the same as the 3rd person singular of the subjunctive aorist active voice (λύσῃ, should he, she it leave once).

(Exercise 5

a. Translate the following. [155]

1. ἐπαύεσθε ____________________________________________

2. ἐπαυσάμην ____________________________________________

3. ἐπαύσω ____________________________________________

4. παύσονται ____________________________________________

5. παύσῃ (2 ways)[156] ____________________________________________

6. λείπῃ ( 2 ways) ____________________________________________

7. λείψεται ____________________________________________

8. λειψομένην ____________________________________________

9. λείπεσθε (2 ways) ____________________________________________

10. ἐλίπου ____________________________________________

b. Translate the following sentences indicating in your translation the nuance expressed by the middle voice. These possible meanings are found on page 174 of your text book. The following drill gives you practice in translating the varieties of meanings for the middle voice. λούω (wash), λύω (release), παιδεύω (educate), κρύπτω (hide) and σώζω (save) are the verbs used in the drill. You must refer to page 174 (1-4) of the Textbook to complete this exercise. [157]

1. λούεται τὸ ἱμάτιον. ____________________________________________

2. λούομαι. ____________________________________________

3. λούονται. ____________________________________________

4. λουόμεθα. ____________________________________________

5. ἐκρυψάμην ____________________________________________

6. παιδευόμεθα τοὺς παῖδας. ____________________________________________

7. σωζόμεθα τὴν πόλιν. ____________________________________________

8. ἐλύσω τὴν ἀδελφὴν. ____________________________________________

9. ἐσώζοντο. ____________________________________________

10. ἐκρυψάμην αὐτόν. ____________________________________________

6. Special Meanings for Some Middle Verbs

Some middles become so much used that they seem to acquire a unique meaning. They are listed for you on page 174 of the textbook.

(Exercise 6

Translate the following sentences which uses middle verbs that have a special meaning. You must refer to page 174 (5) of the Textbook to complete this exercise.

1. αἱρέομαι παύεσθαι.[158] ___________________________________________

2. παύομαι ἀκούων. [159] ____________________________________________

3. πείθει αὐτόν. ____________________________________________

4. πείθομαι αὐτῷ. ____________________________________________

5. ἄρχονται λεγόντες. ____________________________________________

6. Deponent Verbs

The textbook discusses deponents on page 176 of the Textbook. Read it for an overview. The Workbook will cover the same material in a slightly different format.

You have already met a number of verbs that form their future with a –μαι ending. For example, ἀκούω, ἀκουσοόμαι, ἤκουσα, “hear”; ὁράω, ὄψομαι, εἶδον, “see”. These verbs are called future deponents because although the future principal part looks like a middle and is formed like middle, the verb is translated as an active. Deponent verbs have, as it were, put aside their active forms (depono in Latin means “put down”) and can only be formed in the middle, but are always translated as an active (without any self-reference). Thus, ἀκουσοόμαι means “I will hear” and ὄψομαι means “I will see” and are not true middles, and although the forms look middle they are to be translated as straightforward active voice verbs.

There are a number of verbs that are not just deponent in the future, but are deponent in other systems too. You can recognize them by checking their principal parts. For example, the principal parts of the verb “receive” are: δέχομαι, δέξομαι, ἐδεξάμην. The meaning of the word is an active one, but the forms of the verb are middle. Thus the verb is deponent. It uses the forms of the middle voice, but translates as an active without any reference to self: δέχομαι means “I receive”, δέξομαι means “I will receive”, ἐδεξάμην “I received”.

So far only the principal parts which end in –μαι or –μην for verbs that have an active meaning are deponent. Some verbs are deponent only in the future, others are deponent in some but not all systems, while others are deponent in all systems. For example, ἔρχομαι, ἐλεύσομαι, ἦλθον,ἐλήλυθα is deponent in the present (its principal part ends in –μαι but it has an active meaning ‘I come’), future (its principal part ends in –μαι but it has an active meaning ‘I will come’), the aorist ἦλθον is active both in meaning and in form ‘I came’, as is the perfect ἐλήλυθα ‘I have come’ .

When encountering a middle form, you can decide whether a form is true middle or a deponent by checking the principal part from which the form derives. If the principal part has an active ending (ω, 1st and 2nd ; ν, α (3rd) α, 4th ), then the verb can form both an active and a middle voice. If the principal part uses middle endings (μαι, μην) but the verb translates as an active, the verb is deponent and cannot be translated as a middle.

(Exercise 6a: Identifying deponent principal parts

Circle all the principal parts which are deponent for the following verbs (missing principal parts are indicated by a dash; some verbs do not have all principal parts): [160]

1. βαίνω, βήσομαι, ἔβην, βέβηκα, ‘step’

2. γράφω, γράψω, ἔγραψα, γέγραφα, ‘write’

3. βούλομαι, βουλήσομαι, ____, ____, ‘want’

4. γίγνομαι, γενήσομαι, ἐγενόμην, γέγονα, ‘, be, come to be’

5. ἔρχομαι, ἐλεύσομαι, ἦλθον, ἐλήλυθα, ‘come or go’

6. ἐσθίω, ἔδομαι, ἔφαγον, ἐδήδοκα, ‘eat’

7. λαμβάνω, λήψομαι, ἔλαβον, εἴληφα, ‘take’

8. ἕπομαι, ἕψομαι, ἑσπόμην,_______, ’follow’

(Exercise 6b : Discerning between deponents and true middles.

Translate, indicating which forms are true middles and what are deponents.

To do this exercise you must check the principal part from which the verb form derives. . Only principal parts with active endings may be true middles. Principal parts are listed on pages 249-250 of the Textbook. You will notice that some verbs have six principal parts. So far, you have learned the first four, so do not concern yourself just yet with the last two principal parts. Another useful list of common deponent verbs is found in the Textbook, page 176. Consult it too while doing this exercise. [161]

1. βούλεται _________________________________

2. γράφονται _________________________________

3. ἐβάλλετο _________________________________

4. ἐδεχόμεθα _________________________________

5. αἰσθάνῃ _________________________________

6. γιγνόμενος[162] _________________________________

7. ἀκούσοντο _________________________________

8. διαλέγεσθε _________________________________

9. ἐπεμπόμην _________________________________

10. βλέπεσθε ____________________________________

11. ἀφίκου ____________________________________

12. φιλούμεθα ____________________________________

13. ἔρχεσθαι _________________________________

(Exercise 7. Original Sentences

Translate the following sentences, circling all middle and deponent verbs, and labelling whether they are deponent or true middle:[163]

Jesus after being baptized:

1. καὶ εὐθὺς (immediately) ἀναβαίνων ἐκ τοῦ ὕδατος εἶδεν σχιζομένους (σχιζω, split, separate) τοὺς οὐρανοὺς καὶ τὸ πνεῦμα (spirit, breath) ὡς (like )περιστερὰν (dove) καταβαῖνον εἰς αὐτόν. (Mark 1.10)

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Joseph has to go to Bethlehem to register:

2. καὶ ἐπορεύοντο (πορεύομαι) πάντες ἀπογράφεσθαι (ἀπογράφω, register), ἕκαστος εἰς τὴν ἑαυτοῦ πόλιν. (Luke 2.3)

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

3. ἐγένετο Ἰωαννης ὁ βαπτίζων ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ καὶ κηρύσσων βάπτισμα μετανοίας εἰς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτίων. (Mark, 1.4)[164]

(γίγνομαι, γενήσομαι; ἐγενόμην, be, come to be; ὁ Ἰωαννης, John; βαπτίζω, baptize; ἡ ἐρήμος, wilderness; κηρύσσω proclaim; τὸ βάπτισμα, baptism; ἡ μετανοία, afterthought, repentance; ἡ ἄφεσις, taking away, forgiveness; ἡ ἁμαρτιά, error, sin)

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

4. καὶ ἐξεπορεύετο πρὸς αὐτὸν πᾶσα ἡ Ἰουδαία χώρα καὶ οἱ Ἱεροσολυμῖται πάντες, ἐξομολογούμενοι τὰς ἁμαρτίας αὐτῶν. (Mark 1.5) [165]

(ἐκπορεύομαι, journey out; Ἰουδαίος, α, ον, Jewish; ἡ χώρα, region; οἱ Ἱεροσολυμῖται, Israelites; ἐξομολογέω, agree, consent, confess

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

5. καὶ ἐγένετο ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραῖς....ὄτι φωνὴ ἐγένετο ἐκ τῶν ούρανῶν, λέγων ‘Συ εἶ ὁ υἱός μου.’ (Mark 1.9, 1.11)[166]

(γίγνομαι, γενήσομαι, ἐγενόμην, be, come to be)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

8. Vocabulary for “The Gift of Gold (Part 1)”

Nouns

|τὸ πρόσωπον |face |

Adjectives

|θαυμαστός, ή, όν |wonderful, marvelous |

Verbs

|ᾄδω, ᾄσομαι, ᾖσα |sing |

|ἄρχω, ἄρξω, ἦρξα |(as active) be first, be first over, rule over + Gen. |

|θαυμάζω |wonder, marvel |

|ὀρχέομαι |dance |

|παύομαι |stop oneself from doing something, cease + supplementary |

| |participle |

Adverb

|αὔριον |tomorrow |

LESSON 44. THE PERFECT MIDDLE. ALL FORMS OF εἰμί.

1. The Perfect Middle

The formation of the perfect middle is outlined for you on page 179 of the textbook. Read it for an overview. Notice the following:

• The formation of the perfect middle indicative follows the pattern already introduced: primary endings are used for the perfect indicative, secondary endings are used for the pluperfect indicative.

• However, these endings are added to the fifth principal part, which is regularly formed by reduplicating the continuous stem and then adding the –μαι ending without a linking vowel. Thus λύω will do the following: λε + λυ + μαι ( λέλυμαι, “I have destroyed my….”

• The fifth principal part will always end in –μαι. It is important to note that the perfect system uses two different principal parts, one for the perfect active system and a different one for the perfect middle. For instance the perfect active principal part (the 4th ) for λύω is λέλυκα, but the perfect middle principal part (the 5th) is λέλυμαι. Sometimes it is hard for students to remember that the perfect middle will not have the kappa that is so often found in the perfect active. A number of verbs form their fifth principal parts irregularly, so that it will be important to learn how to recognize these fifth principal parts.

• Because there is no linking vowel, there will not be any contractions in the 2nd person singulars of the perfect and the pluperfect. Thus the middle 2nd person singular of the perfect of λύω is λέλυσαι and pluperfect is ἐλέλυσο. We are so used to contracting the 2nd person that these forms are often not easily recognized. This is particularly true for the perfect 2nd person middle whose ending resembles an alpha-aorist infinitive. But compare the aorist infinitive λῦσαι (to release once) with λέλυσαι (you have released your…). Recognizing reduplication is the key.

• The middle infinitive and participle endings are also added without a linking vowel. The infinitive is accented on the next-to-last syllable (λελύσθαι) and so is the participle (λελυμένος, λελυμένη, λελυμένον). The participle accent is always accented on the μέν-, even if the last syllable is short; this accentuation is often a helpful clue.

(Exercise 1: Formation of the Perfect Middle Forms

a. Form the perfect middle of the verb παύω, παύσω, ἔπαυσα, πέπαυκα, πέπαυμαι, showing all genders of the nominative singular particle, giving a translation for each box. Check your answers with the chart on page 179 of the Textbook.

|Perfect Indicative Μiddle |Pluperfect Indicative Middle (Secondary)|Perfect Middle Infinitive |Perfect Middle Participle |

|(Primary) | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

b. Form the perfect middle of the verb λύω, λύσω, ἔλυσα, λέλυκα, λέλυμαι, giving a translation for each box and showing the accusative plural of the participle in all genders. The –υ of the stem is long in the first three principal parts, but short in the perfect systems. [167]

|Perfect Indicative Μiddle |Pluperfect Indicative Middle (Secondary)|Perfect Middle Infinitive |Perfect Middle Participle |

|(Primary) | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

c. Translate the following (the fifth principal part for βάλλω is βέβλημαι): [168]

1. βεβλῆσαι _________________________________

2. πεποιημένος _________________________________

3. ἐβεβλήμην _________________________________

4. ἐπεποίησο _________________________________

5. βέβλησθε _________________________________

6. ἐλελύμεθα _________________________________

7. ἐπεποίηντο _________________________________

8. λελυμέναις _________________________________

2. Irregularities in Perfect Stems Which End in a Consonant

Because there is no linking vowel, there are a number of changes which may occur when the middle endings are added to a perfect stem which ends in a consonant. These changes for the sake of euphony are charted for you in page 179 of the textbook. You can often guess problematic perfect middle forms by detecting the basic middle ending hidden beneath some changes. And that is what you are being asked to do – to recognize rather than reduplicate these forms. It is easy to recognize those forms whose endings can easily be discerned: -μαι, -ται, -μεθα, -μην, -το. But the second person singular and plural as well as the infinitive are more difficult: , σθε may change to φθε/ χθε; σο may change to ψο/ξο; σθαι may change to φθαι/χθαι. Further, the third plural, instead of just adding the ending to the stem, forms periphrastically by using the perfect participle with the present third person plural of εἰμί for the perfect (for example λελειμμένοι εἰσί(ν) , and the perfect participle with imperfect third person plural for the pluperfect (λελειμμένοι ἦσαν). Just translate such forms as you regularly translate perfects and pluperfects.

( Exercise 2: Formation of the Perfect Middle of Consonant Stems

a. After analyzing the consonant combinations in perfect middle forms in the Textbook, page 179, form the perfect middle of the verb κρύπτω, κρύψω, ἔκρυψα, κέκρυφα, κέκρυμμαι, giving a translation for each box.. Check your answers with the labial box on page 179 of the Textbook.

|Perfect Indicative Μiddle |Pluperfect Indicative Middle (Secondary)|Perfect Middle Infinitive |Perfect Middle Participle |

|(Primary) | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

b. Translate the following:[169]

1. λελεῖφθαι _________________________________

2. λέλειφθε _________________________________

3. λελειμμμένοι εἰσίν _________________________________

4. ἐδέδειξο _________________________________

5. δέδειξαι [170] _________________________________

6. ἐλέλειψο _________________________________

7. δεδειγμένοι ἦσαν _________________________________

8. ἐδέδειχθε _________________________________

c. Guess at the meaning of the following forms. You may check the principal parts on pages 249 – 250 in the Textbook. Remember also that reduplication may occur by vowel lengthening: α/ε ( η, ο ( ω.[171]

1. ἐπέπραχθε _____________________

2. ἤγγελσο ______________________

3. ὤργισμαι ______________________

4. πεφύλαξαι ______________________

5. πεπεμμένοι εἰσίν ______________________

3. The Future of εἰμι

Now that we know about deponent verbs, we can form all the forms of εἰμι, ἔσομαι. This verb has only two principal parts and can only form the present active system, and a future deponent. See page 180 of the Textbook for the forms of this verb. The future is formed regularly except in the 3rd singular of the indicative which is shortened from ἐσεται to ἔσται. Note that the linking vowel for the optative (a secondary mood) is οι. All forms of this important verb must be carefully memorized.

( Exercise 4: The Future Forms of εἰμι

After memorizing the future forms of εἰμι, fill out the chart below. Give all the genders of the participles and include a translation for each box. Check your answers with the chart on page 180 of the Textbook:

|Future |Deponent |

| Ιndicative |_____________ ______________ |

| |_____________ ______________ |

| |_____________ _______________ |

| |Tr. ________________ |

| Optative |_____________ ______________ |

| |_____________ ______________ |

| |_____________ _______________ |

| |Tr. ________________ |

| Infinitive |______________ Tr. _____________ |

| Participle |_____________, ______________, _______________ |

| |Tr. __________________________ |

4. All Forms of εἰμι

a. After reviewing all the forms of εἰμι, found on page 180 of the Textbook, fill in the following chart of this very important verb. Check your answers.

| |Continuous Pres Continuous Impf |Future Deponent |

|Indicative | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

|Subjunctive | |XXX |

| | | |

| | | |

|Optative | | |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

|Imperative | |XXX |

|Infinitive | | |

|Participle | | |

b. Translate: [172]

1. ἔσῃ _________________

2. ᾖ _________________________[173]

3. ἐσόμενος _________________________

4. εἶτε _________________________

5. ἐστε _________________________

6. ἔστε _________________________

7. ἔσται _________________________

8. εἴη _________________________

9. if only we would be _________________________

10 we will be _________________________

11. to be about to be _________________________

5. Vocabulary for “The Gift of Gold (Part 2)”

Verbs

|ἀναπαύομαι |take a rest, rest up |

|ἀφικνέομαι, ἀφίξομαι, ἀφικόμην |come to, arrive |

|δίδωμι, δώσω, δέδωκα (aorist) |give |

|κρούω |knock, knock on, clap (hands) |

|προσέρχομαι |come or go towards |

Adjectives

|εὐδαιμονέστερος, α, ον |more fortunate |

|εὐδαιμονέστατος, η, ον |most fortunate |

PRACTICE QUIZ 10: LESSONS 43-44

1. Complete a verb chart for the verb εἰμί

| |Continuous Pres Continuous Impf |Future Deponent |

|Indicative | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

|Subjunctive | |XXX |

| | | |

| | | |

|Optative | | |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

|Imperative | |XXX |

|Infinitive | | |

|Participle | | |

2. Complete a verb chart for the middle voice of λύω in the Indicative, Infinitive and Participle. Give a translation for each box.

Middle Voice Verb Chart

Principal Parts, λύω, λύσω, ἔλυσα (long upsilon in the aorist), λελυκα ( short upsilon in the perfect)

|Continuous |Future |Aorist |Perfect |

|Present |Imperfect |Future |Aorist |Perfect |Pluperfect |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

|Infinitive | | | |

|Participle |Participle |Participle |Participle |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

3. Translate the following, underlining deponent verbs and making sure to translate middle verbs as middle. Be sure to memorize the vocabulary in these two lessons.

1. οἱ δὲ δύο ἄνδρες πορευόμενοι βούλονται χρόνον μικρὸν ἀναπαύεσθαι.

______________________________________________________________________

2. ἔπειτα δὲ ἡ γυνὴ ᾖδε τοῦ ἀνδρὸς ὀρχουμένου.

______________________________________________________________________

3. τί λέλειφθε τὴν πόλιν; λέλειμμένοι ἦσαν τὴν πόλιν.

______________________________________________________________________

4. ἀλλὰ φιλούμεθα καὶ οὔποτε παυσόμεθα χαιροντες τῷ βίῳ.

______________________________________________________________________

5. ἐλέγομεν ὅτι ἐσοίμεθα εὐδαιμονέστεροι αὐτοῦ τοῦ βασιλέως.

______________________________________________________________________

6. ἀλλ’ εἰ αὔριον κατελθόντες τὸν ἄνδρα κρυπτόμενον αἰσθησόμεθα, τοῦτο ἔσται μοι θαυμαστόν τι.

______________________________________________________________________

ANSWERS: PRACTICE QUIZ 10: LESSONS 43-44

1. Complete a verb chart for the verb εἰμί. Check your answers with the verb chart on page 180 of the Textbook.

2. Complete a verb chart for the middle voice of λύω in the Indicative, Infinitive and Participle.

Middle Voice Verb Chart

Principal Parts, λύω, λύσω, ἔλυσα (long upsilon in the aorist), λελυκα ( short upsilon in the perfect)

|Continuous |Future |Aorist |Perfect |

|Present |Imperfect |Future |Aorist |Perfect |Pluperfect |

|λύομαι |ἐλυόμην |λύσομαι |ἐλύσαμην |λέλυμαι |ἐλελύμην |

|λύῃ |ἐλύου |λύσῃ |ἐλύσω |λέλυσαι |ἐλέλυσο |

|λύεται |ἐλύετο |λύσεται |ἐλύσατο |λέλυται |ἐλέλυτο |

|λυόμεθα |ἐλυόμεθα |λυσόμεθα |ἐλυσάμεθα |λελύμεθα |ἐλελύμεθα |

|λύεσθε |ἐλύεσθε |λυσέσθε |ἐλύσασθε |λέλυσθε |ἐλέλυσθε |

|λύονται |ἐλύοντο |λύσονται |ἐλύσαντο |λέλυνται |ελέλυντο |

|they are releasing |they were releasing |they will release their…|they released their… |they have released their… |they had released their…|

|their… |their.. | | | | |

|Infinitive | | | |

|λύεσθαι to be releasing one’s… |λύσεσθαι to be about to |λύσασθαι |λελύσθαι to have released one’s… |

| |release one’s... |to release one’s… | |

|Participle |Participle |Participle |Participle |

|λυόμενος, η, ον |λυσόμενος, η, ον being |λυσάμενος, η, ον |λελυμένος, η, ον having released his, her, its.. |

|releasing his, her, its… |about to release his her|upon releasing his, her,| |

| |its.. |its | |

3. Translate the following, underlining deponent verbs and making sure to translate middle verbs as middle. Be sure to memorize the vocabulary in these two lessons.

1. οἱ δὲ δύο ἄνδρες πορευόμενοι βούλονται χρόνον μικρὸν ἀναπαύεσθαι.

Τhe two men traveling wish to rest up for a short time. (παύω has an interior aspect in the middle).

2. ἔπειτα δὲ ἡ γυνὴ ᾖδε τοῦ ἀνδρὸς ὀρχουμένου.

Then the wife began to sing while the husband was dancing (genitive absolute).

3. τί λέλειφθε τὴν πόλιν; λελειμμένοι ἦσαν τὴν πόλιν.

Why have you left your city? They had not left their city.

4. ἀλλὰ φιλούμεθα καὶ οὔποτε παυσόμεθα χαιροντες τῷ βίῳ.

Βut we love each other and never will stop rejoicing in life.

5. ἐλέγομεν ὅτι ἐσοίμεθα εὐδαιμονέστεροι αὐτοῦ τοῦ βασιλέως.

We were saying that we would be happier than the king himself.

6. ἀλλ’ εἰ αὔριον κατελθόντες τὸν ἄνδρα κρυπτόμενον αἰσθησόμεθα, τοῦτο ἔσται μοι θαυμαστόν τι.

But if upon coming back tomorrow we will perceive the husband hiding himself, this will be something marvelous to me.

LESSON 45. MIDDLE IMPERATIVES; IMPOSSIBLE WISHES; U-STEM NOUNS; U-A-U ADJECTIVES.

1. The Middle Imperative

The formation of Middle Imperatives is discussed on page 182 of the Textbook. Read this page for an overview and then note the following:

• ου is the ending for the 2nd person singular of verb forms with ε/ο linking vowel and is the contraction of the middle 2nd person ending “σο” with the linking vowel: λαμβάνου (be taking for yourself). For ε/ο Aorists verb, the contraction is also -ου, but the form is always accented on the last syllable (a handy way to differentiate continuous present and aorist forms for these verbs): λαβοῦ (take [once] for yourself). Use ἰδοῦ (see [once] for yourself) as a mnemonic for this form.

• Short -αι is the ending for α-aorists imperatives and is accented recessively: παίδευσαι (educate yourself), γράψαι (write for yourself), λῦσαι (release for yourself). Note the accentuation caused by the short length of the final diphthong. Use ἄκουσαι (listen for yourself) as the mnemonic for this form.

• Short -αι is the same ending as the α- aorist active infinitive, but the α-aorist active infinitive is always accented on the next-to-last syllable. For most verbs these forms look exactly alike, except when the verb stem has more than one syllable: παίδευσαι (educate yourself) vs. παιδεῦσαι (to educate).

• The other forms have predictable endings added onto the stem with the appropriate linking vowel: -σθε for 2nd plural, -σθω for 3rd singular, and

-σθων for 3rd plural.

( Exercise 1

a. Form the Middle Imperatives of the Continuous and the Aorist for

λύω, λύσω, ἔλυσα, λέλυκα, λέλυμαι. Check your answers with the chart of page 182 of the Textbook:

|Continuous Μiddle Imperatives |α- Aorist Middle Imperatives |

|Singular Plural |Singular Plural |

|2nd ___________ ___________ |2nd ___________ ___________ |

|3rd____________ ____________ |3rd____________ ____________ |

b. Form the middle imperatives of the Continuous and the Aorist for λείπω, λείψω, ἔλιπον, λέλοιπα, λέλειμμαι. Check your answers with the chart of page 182 of the Textbook:

|Continuous Middle Imperatives |ε/ο Aorist Middle Imperatives |

|Singular Plural |Singular Plural |

|2nd ___________ ___________ |2nd ___________ ___________ |

|3rd____________ ____________ |3rd____________ ____________ |

c. Translate the following forms. Most (but not all) the forms are imperative, but some of the forms may be interpreted in another way as well. Give both translations for such forms.[174]

1. γράφου ___________________________________

2. γραψάσθων ___________________________________

3. παυσάσθω ___________________________________

4. ἄκουσαι ___________________________________

5. ἀκοῦσαι ___________________________________

6. μανθανέσθων __________________________________

7. μάθεσθε ___________________________________

8. γράψαι (2 ways) _________________________________

9. λῦσαι (2 ways) __________________________________

10. μάθου __________________________________

2. Impossible Wishes

Read about how Greek expresses wishes that are unattainable or impossible in the present or the past on page 182 of the Textbook. Then note the following:

• Wishes referring to the future (attainable or not) are expressed by the present or aorist optative, with or without εἴθε or εἰ γάρ: (εἴθε/ εἰ γάρ) ἔρχοιτο/ἔλθοι, “If only he would come”.

• Wishes referring to the present that are impossible must have εἴθε or εἰ γάρ, plus the imperfect indicative: εἴθε/ εἰ γὰρ ἤρχοντο, “If only they were not coming (but they are).” Notice that the imperfect indicative in this construction translates exactly like the imperfect indicative in the “if” clause of a contrary-to-fact conditional: εἰ ἤρχοντο, ἔλειπες ἄν, "If they were coming, (but they are not), you would leave”.

• Wishes referring to the past that are impossible must have εἴθε or εἰ γάρ, plus the aorist indicative: εἴθε/ εἰ γὰρ ἤλθον, “If only they had not come (but they did).” Notice that the aorist indicative in this construction translates exactly like the aorist indicative in the “if” clause of a contrary-to-fact conditional: εἰ ἦλθον, ἔλιπες ἄν, "If they had come, (but they did not), you would have left”.

( Exercise 2: Wishes

Translate the following being careful to distinguish in your translation the three kinds of wishes.[175]

1. παύσειαν τὴν μάχην. ____________________

2. εἴθε ἦσαν ἀγαθοί. ____________________

3. εἰ γὰρ ἔπαυσαν τὴν μὰχην. ____________________

4. εἴθε λίποιεν τὴν πόλιν. ____________________

5. εἰ γὰρ ἔλειπον τὴν πόλιν. ____________________

3. U-Stem Nouns.

Read page 183 in the Textbook about u-stem nouns, focusing on the four words in the first box. These nouns, like πόλις and βασιλεύς, undergo numerous linguistic changes. You need not memorize these nouns, but you should be able to recognize their endings. It will prove easy to do so. Note the following ways these nouns conform to other third-group nouns:

• The accusative singular of M and F nouns have a nu in the accusative, (like χαρις to χάριν).

• The genitive singular in all genders ends in -ος or -εως

• The dative singular ends in an -ι or -ει. The diaresis (double dots) on νήΐ and βόΐ is a signal that these vowels are not diphthongs but separate syllables.

• Τhe nominative plural for M and F nouns ends in -ες

• The genitive plural in all genders ends in -ων or -εων.

• The dative plural in all genders ends in -σι(ν).

However, the accusative plural for M and F nouns may prove difficult to recognize because of the contractions: ῦς or αῦς or οῦς. These forms are ambiguous since that are the same as the Nominative Singular. (Although the textbook does not note this ἰχθῦς is an alternate form ἰχθύς). Therefore if you memorize the nominative singular, you know the accusative plural. And finally, note that the neuter noun ἄστυ ends in an eta in the Nominative and Accusative Plural: ἄστη. This is a neuter ending you have seen in the neuter plural of the contract noun τὸ γένος (see page 95 of the Textbook).

( Exercise 3

After memorizing the nominative and gender of these words, insert the correct article for each noun. Ιf there is more than one correct article, give both: [176]

1. ___νεων. 2. ___βοῦς. 3. __ναυσί. 4. __βοός. 5 ___νήΐ. 6. ___ναῦς. 7. __ἄστυ. 8. __ἰχθύν. 9. __βόΐ. 10. __νῆες.

4. The U-Stem Noun υἱός.

Τhis noun is -o declension in the singular and in the plural resembles the noun πόλις except for accentuation (see page 164 of the Textbook, and like that noun has the same endings for Nominative and Accusative plural: εῖς.

5. U-A-U Adjectives.

These case endings of these adjectives should also be easy to recognize. Be careful, however, with the Nominative and Accusative Plural of the M and F for like ὑιεῖς/ὑιεῖς they are the same. See also the contract adjective ἀληθής, ἀληθές which also has εῖς in the M and F Nominative and Accusative Plural (page 95 Textbook).

( Exercise 5

After digesting the material in the Textbook, page 183, on U-A-U adjectives, and their comparatives and superlatives, match the following adjective forms to U-Stem nouns.[177]

1. θᾶττων a. βοός

2. ἡδέα b. ὑιεῖς

3. βαρεῖα c. ἄστη

4. ἡδείας d. νεῶν

5. ταχείᾳ e. ἰχθύς

6. βαρειῶν f. νήΐ

7. ἡδίστους g. ναῦς

6. Vocabulary for “The Gift of Gold (Part 3)”

Nouns

|ὄ ἄργυρος |silver |

Adjectives

|βαρύς, εῖα, ύ |heavy |

Verbs

|μεταπέμπομαι |summon, send for |

Adverbs

|ἐξαίφνης |suddenly |

|αὐτίκα |at the very moment, immediately |

Prepositions

|ἐφ =ἐπι + acc. |to |

Interjections

|εἴθε |if only |

LESSON 46. THE MIDDLE: ALL FORMS

1. The Middle Subjunctive: Continuous and Aorist

The formation of the subjunctive follows all the rules of the middle voice. See pages 185 and 186 of the Textbook for the subjunctive forms of the middle voice. Since the subjunctive is a primary mood, the primary endings are used, even in the aorist system. The linking vowels are, as expected, ω/η. The second person singular contracts: Continuous Present: παύησαι = παύῃ; -σα Aorist: παύσησαι = παύσῃ. These contractions are ambiguous forms: παύῃ may be either the 2nd person Continuous middle indicative (you are stopping your…) or the 2nd person continuous middle subjunctive (should you be stopping your…) or the 3rd person singular continuous active subjunctive (should (s)he be stopping). παύσῃ may be either the 2rd person singular future middle indicative (you will stop your…) or the 2nd person aorist middle subjunctive (should you stop your…)

Contractions in the 2nd person singular also occur in ε/ο Aorist Verbs: Continuous Present: λείπησαι = λείπῃ; Aorist:λίπησαι = λίπῃ. For these verbs only the Continuous is ambiguous. Like παύῃ, λείπῃ may be either the 2rd person singular continuous active subjunctive (you are leaving your…) or the 2nd person continuous middle subjunctive (should you be leaving your…) or the 3rd person singular continuous active subjunctive (should (s)he be leaving). However, there is no ambiguity in the aorist since the stems are different: λείψῃ (you will leave your…) vs. λίπῃ (should you leave your…). Correct the chart on page 185 of the Textbook. The asterisk should be after the 2nd Person, Present, Indicative, Μiddle (λείπῃ) not the 2nd Person, Future, Indicative, Middle (λείψῃ).

(Exercise 2: Formation of the Μiddle Subjunctive

a. Form the Continuous and aorist subjunctives for λύω, λύσω, ἔλυσα and λείπω, λείψω, ἔλιπον, circling the forms that are ambiguous:

Middle Subjunctive Forms[178]

|Continuous Middle Subjunctive (λύω) |Aorist Middle Subjunctive |

|_______________ |_______________ |

|_______________ |_______________ |

|_______________ |_______________ |

|_______________ |_______________ |

|_______________ |_______________ |

|_______________ |_______________ |

|Τrans.__________ |Τrans.__________ |

b. Form the Continuous and aorist subjunctives for λείπω, λείψω, ἔλιπον, circling forms that are ambiguous.[179]

|Continuous Middle Subjunctive (λείπω) |Aorist Middle Subjunctive |

|_______________ |_______________ |

|_______________ |_______________ |

|_______________ |_______________ |

|_______________ |_______________ |

|_______________ |_______________ |

|_______________ |_______________ |

| | |

|Τrans.__________ |Τrans.__________ |

c. Translate the following subjunctive forms. Some forms have alternate interpretations.[180]

1. παύῃ (3 ways) _____________________________

2. γράψωνται _____________________________

3. λείπησθε _____________________________

4. λάβωμαι [181] ____________________________

5. παύσηται ____________________________

6. λίπῃ ____________________________

7. λαμβάνωμαι ____________________________

8. παύσῃ (2 ways) ____________________________

9.λείπῃ (3 ways) ____________________________

3. Middle Optative: Continuous and Aorist

The formation of the optative follows all the rules of the middle voice. See page 185 of the Textbook for the optative forms of the middle voice. Since the optative is a secondary mood, the secondary endings are used, even in the present continuous and future systems. The linking vowels are, as expected, the diphthong οι for the present, future, and ε/ο aorist optatives, and the diphthong αι for the α aorist. The second person singular contracts: παύσοισο ( παύοιο, παύσαισο ( παύσαιο.

( Exercise 3: The Μiddle Optative

a. Form the Continuous, future and aorist middle optatives for λύω, λύσω, ἔλυσα. Check your answers with the optatives in the chart on page 186 of the Textbook.

|Continuous Middle Optative |Future Middle Optative |Aorist Middle Optative |

|_______________ |_______________ |_______________ |

|_______________ |_______________ |_______________ |

|_______________ |_______________ |_______________ |

|_______________ |_______________ |_______________ |

|_______________ |_______________ |_______________ |

|_______________ |_______________ |_______________ |

| | | |

|Τrans.__________ |Τrans.__________ |Τrans.__________ |

b. Form the Continuous, future and aorist middle optatives for λείπω, λείψω, ἔλιπον. Check your answers with the optatives on Page 185 of the Textbook.

|Continuous Middle Optative |Future Middle Optative |Aorist Middle Optative |

|_______________ |_______________ |_______________ |

|_______________ |_______________ |_______________ |

|_______________ |_______________ |_______________ |

|_______________ |_______________ |_______________ |

|_______________ |_______________ |_______________ |

|_______________ |_______________ |_______________ |

| | | |

|Τrans.__________ |Τrans.__________ |Τrans.__________ |

c. Translate the following forms. Some forms have alternate interpretations:[182]

1. γραψαίμην ______________________________

2. παύσοιντο ______________________________

3. γράφοιο ἄν _____________________________

4. λείποισθε _____________________________

5. γράψαιο ἄν _____________________________

6. παύσαιντο _____________________________

7. λείψοιτο _____________________________

4. Perfect Middle Subjunctive, Optative and Imperative

The formation of perfect middle subjunctives, optatives and imperatives* is periphrastic. They are formed by a compound consisting of the participle with the appropriate forms of the verb εἰμι. For instance, the perfect subjunctive for παύω is πεπαυμένος ὦ, ῇς, etc; the perfect optative is πεπαυμένος εἴην, εἴης, etc., and the imperative is πεπαυμένος ἴσθι, ἐσθω, etc. You may see all the imperative forms on page 182 of the Textbook, and all the subjunctive and optative forms in the full charts on pages 185 and 186.

*There are non-periphrastic forms of the imperative whose forms are as expected. See them on page 186 of the Textbook. Τhe endings are placed on the stem without a linking vowel. You will be responsible only for recognizing these forms.

5(Summary Exercise

Fill in a verb chart for the middle voice of the verb θύω, θύσω, ἔθυσα (long upsilon in aorist), τέθυκα, τέθυμαι (short upsilon in perfect middle), sacrifice. Make sure to translate one form in each box. A blank chart is on the next page, and a filled in chart on the page after that. Note that the 3rd person plural indicatives, even for non-consonant stems, frequently use periphrastic forms (see the asterisk in the Textbook on page 186), as well as the personal ending on the stem (see the asterisk on these forms with an explanation on the bottom of page 186).

Middle Voice Verb Chart

|Continuous |Future |Aorist |Perfect |

|Present |Imperfect |Future |Aorist |Perfect |Pluperfect |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

|Subjunctive |XXX | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

|Optative | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

|Imperative |XXX | | |

|Infinitive | | | |

|Participle |Participle |Participle |Participle |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

Middle Voice Verb Chart

|Continuous |Future |Aorist |Perfect |

|Present |Imperfect |Future |Aorist |Perfect |Pluperfect |

|θύομαι |ἐθυόμην |θύσομαι |ἐθυσάμην |τέθυμαι |ἐτεθύμην |

|θύῃ |ἐθύου |θύσῃ |ἐθύσω |τέθυσαι |ἐτέθυσο |

|θύεται |ἐθύετο |θύσεται |ἐθύσατο |τέθυται |ἐτέθυτο |

|θυόμεθα |ἐθυόμεθα |θυσόμεθα |ἐθυσάμεθα |τέθύμεθα |ἐτεθύμεθα |

|θύεσθε |ἐθύεσθε |θύσεσθε |ἐθύσασθε |τέθυσθε |ἐτέθυσθε |

|θύονται |ἐθύοντο |θύσονται |ἐθύσαντο |τέθυνται or |ἐτέθυντο or τεθυμένοι, |

|Ι am sacrificing my…. |Ι was sacrificing |Ι will sacrifice my…. |I sacrificed my… |τεθυμένοι, αι, α εἰσι(ν) |αι, α ἦσαν |

| |my…. | | | |I had sacrificed my…. |

| | | | |I have sacrificed my… | |

|Subjunctive |XXX |θύσωμαι | |

|θύωμαι | |θύσῃ |τεθυμένος, η, ον ὦ |

|θύῃ | |θύσηται |ᾖς |

|θύηται | |θυσώμεθα |ᾖ |

|θυώμεθα | |θύσησθε |τεθυμένοι, αι, α ὦμεν |

|θύησθε | |θύσωνται |ἦτε |

|θύωνται | |Should I sacrifice my.. |ὦσι(ν) |

|Should I be sacrificing my… | | |Should I have sacrificed my.. |

|Optative | | | |

|θοίμην |θυσοίμην |θυσαίμην |τεθυμένος, η, ον εἴην |

|θύοιο |θύσοιο |θύσαιο |εἴης |

|θύοιτο |θύσοιτο |θύσαιτο |εἴη |

|θυοίμεθα |θυσοίμεθα |θυσαίμεθα |τεθυμένοι, αι, α εἶμεν |

|θύοισθε |θύσοισθε |θύσαισθε |εἶτε |

|θύοιντο |θύσσοιντο |θύσαιντο |εἶεν |

|If only I would be sacrificing my… |(I said that) I would |If only I would |If only I would have sacrificed my… |

| |sacrifice my.. |sacrifice my.. | |

|Imperative |XXX |θῦσαι θύσασθε |τεθυμένος, η, ον ἴσθι/ ἔστε |

|θύου θύεσθε | | |τεθυμένοι, αι, ον ἔστω/ἔστων |

| | |θυσάσθω* θυσάσθων | |

|θυέσθω θυέσθων | |Sacrifice your…! |Be in the state of having sacrificed your…! |

|Be sacrificing your…! | | | |

|Infinitive | | | |

|θύεσθαι |θύσεσθαι |θύσασθαι |τεθύσθαι |

|to be sacrificing your… |to be about to sacrifice|to sacrifice your…. |to have sacrificed your… |

| |your.. | | |

|Participle |Participle |Participle |Participle |

|θυόμενος |θυσόμενος |θυσάμενος |τεθυμένος |

|θυομένη |θυσομένη |θυσαμένη |τεθυμένη |

|θυόμενος |θυσόμενος |θυσάμενος |τεθυμένον |

|sacrificing your…. |being about to sacrifice|upon sacrificing your… |having sacrificed your… |

| |your…. | | |

*Correct the misprint on page 186 for the third person singular of the aorist imperative: it should be παυσάσθω.

8. Vocabulary for “The Gift of Gold (Part 4)”

Nouns

|ἡ εἰρήνη |peace |

|οἱ ἐχθοί |the enemy |

Adjectives

|ἐχθρός, ή, όν |hateful, hostile |

Verbs

|λυπέω |distress, cause pain; in middle, be distressed |

Adverb

|ἵσως |perhaps |

Phrase

|πρίν χρόνῳ |in former time, in time before |

PRACTICE QUIZ 11, MIDDLE VOICE LESSONS 45-6

I. Fill in the chart for the middle voice of παύω, παύσω, ἔπαυσα, πέπαυκα, πέπαυμαι. Middle Voice Verb Chart

|Continuous |Future |Aorist |Perfect |

|Present |Imperfect |Future |Aorist |Perfect |Pluperfect |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

|Subjunctive |XXX | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

|Optative | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

|Imperative |XXX | | |

|Infinitive | | | |

|Participle |Participle |Participle |Participle |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

2. Translate the following forms of λέιπω, λείψω, ἔλιπον, λέλοιπα, λέλειμμαι making aspect/ tense clear.

1. λελειμμέναι ἦσαν _______________________

2. ἐλείπου ______________________

3. ἐλέλειψο ______________________

4. λείπῃ ______________________

5. λίποιο _______________________

3. Translate the following forms correctly for the following, making sure aspect and voice are clear. Use the principal parts of these verbs to clarify aspect and voice:

κελεύω (see παύω); ἔρχομαι, ἐλεύσομαι; ἦλθον, ἐλήλυθα; βάλλω, βαλῶ, ἔβαλον, βέβληκα, βέβλημαι, δέχομαι, δέξομαι, ἐδεξάμην

1. δέξῃ _______________________

2. κελεῦσαι _______________________

3. ἔρχεσθαι _______________________

4. ἐβάλλετο _______________________

5. κελεύσαι _______________________

6. ἐβέβλησο _______________________

7. ἐδέξω _______________________

8. ἔλεύσονται _______________________

4. Translate the following:

1. εἰ γάρ μη ἐδεξάμεθα τὰ δῶρα τοὺ βασιλέως.

________________________________________________________________________

2. κρούου τὰς χεῖρας καὶ ἄρξαι ᾄδειν, καὶ ἐγὼ ἔσομαι ἑτοίμη ὀρχεῖσθαι.

________________________________________________________________________3. εἰθε μὴ ἐλειπόμεθα τοὺς υἱεῖς.

________________________________________________________________________

4. παῦσαι ὀρχουμένη.

________________________________________________________________________

ANSWERS PRACTICE QUIZ 11, MIDDLE VOICE

1. Check the verb chart in the textbook, page 186 (Correct the misprint on page 186 for the third person singular of the aorist imperative: it should be παυσάσθω) or compare the verb chart for θύω in the workbook, Lesson 46.

2. Translate the following forms of λέιπω, λείψω, ἔλιπον, λέλοιπα, λέλειμμαι making aspect/ tense clear.

1. λελειμμέναι ἦσαν they had left (for themselves)

2. ἐλείπου you were leaving (for yourself)

3. ἐλέλειψο you had left (for yourself)

4. λείπῃ you are leaving (for yourself); should you be leaving (for yourself) should (s)he, it be leaving

5. λίποιο If only you would leave (once) (for yourself)

3. Translate the following forms correctly for the following, making sure aspect and voice are clear. Use the principal parts of these verbs to clarify aspect and voice:

κελεύω (see παύω); ἔρχομαι, ἐλεύσομαι; ἦλθον, ἐλήλυθα (deponent in first two principal parts); βάλλω, βαλῶ, ἔβαλον, βέβληκα, βέβλημαι (active and middle principal parts; δέχομαι, δέξομαι, ἐδεξάμην (deponent in first three principal parts)

1. δέξῃ you will receive; should you receive (once): (deponent)

2. κελεῦσαι to order (once): (active)

3. ἔρχεσθαι to be going: (deponent)

4. ἐβάλλετο (s)he was throwing his/her….: (middle)

5. κέλευσαι order your…!:(middle)

6. ἐβέβλησο you had thrown your….(middle)

7. ἐδέξω you received (deponent)

8. ἐλεύσονται they will come (deponent)

4. Translate the following:

1. εἰ γάρ μη ἐδεξάμεθα τὰ δῶρα τοὺ βασιλέως.

If only we had not received the king’s gifts.

2. κρούου τὰς χεῖρας καὶ ἄρξαι ᾄδειν, καὶ ἐγὼ ἔσομαι ἑτοίμη ὀρχεῖσθαι.

Clap your hands and begin to sing, and I will be ready to dance.

3. εἰθε μὴ ἐλειπόμεθα τοὺς υἱεῖς.

If only we were not leaving our sons.

4. παῦσαι ὀρχουμένη.

Stop dancing!

LESSON 47. THE PASSIVE SYSTEM. ὑπό + GENITIVE. VERBAL ADJECTIVES.

The Passive Voice in English

Besides the active voice, English has a passive voice. Sentences in which the subject does not perform the action contain verbs in the passive voice: “The cloak was washed many times”. In this sentence the cloak does not perform the action of the sentence “was washed” but rather is a receiver of the action.

English forms its passive voice by using forms of the verb “be” with a participle. Such forms are called periphrastic (“round about way of speech”) because these forms combine a number of verbs together. Here are some English passive verbs:

Present: I am left.

Past: I was left.

Future: I will be left.

Perfect: I have been left.

Pluperfect: I had been left.

Notice that in English the participle “left” is unchanged in all tenses and it is the form of the verb “to be” that changes.

(Exercise 1: English Passive Verbs[183]

Change the following to the passive voice

1. I am loving. ______________________________

2. I was loving. ______________________________

3. I will love. ______________________________

4. I loved. ______________________________

5. I have loved ______________________________

6. I had loved. ______________________________

7. Should I love? ______________________________

8. I might love. ______________________________

9. to love ______________________________

10. loving ______________________________

11. having loved ______________________________

2. Transforming Sentences from the Active to the Passive Voice

Notice how this active sentence “The boy hits the ball” is transformed into the passive: “The ball is hit by the boy.” The subject of the active sentence, “the boy”, the doer of the action, is now put into a prepositional phrase “by the boy” while the direct object, “the ball” becomes the subject of the passive verb.

The boy hits the ball ( The ball is hit by the boy.

(Exercise 2

a. Transform the following sentences into the passive voice:[184]

1. The woman sees the child ( _______________________

2. The students wrote papers ( _______________________

3. The mother and the children sent money (______________________________

3. Formation of the Present and Perfect Passive Voice in Greek.

The continuous and perfect passive systems are the same forms as occur in the middle voice, although their translations are different: παύομαι may be translated according to context as either “I stop myself” (middle) or “I am stopped” (passive). The forms of the Continuous and Perfect Passive may be seen on page 189 of the Textbook. Only the these two systems have the same forms as the middle. We will learn the Future and Aorist Passive systems in the next lesson.

( Exercise 3: Forming the Passive Voice

After studying the chart on page 189 of the Textbook, fill in the chart below complete with translations for the passive forms of παύω, παύσω, ἔπαυσα, πέπαυκα, πέπαυμαι. These forms are the same as the middle voice, although the translation is different. The chart is on the next page and the answers are on the page after that.

| |Present Imperfect |Perfect Past Perfect |

|Indicative |__________ |__________ |__________ |__________ |

| |__________ |__________ |__________ |__________ |

| |__________ |__________ |__________ |__________ |

| |__________ |__________ |__________ |__________ |

| |__________ |__________ |__________ |__________ |

| |__________ |__________ |__________ |__________ |

| |Trans. _______ |Trans. _______ |Trans. _______ |Trans. _______ |

| |Present |Perfect |

|Subjunctive |__________ |__________ |

| |__________ |__________ |

| |__________ |__________ |

| |__________ |__________ |

| |__________ |__________ |

| |__________ |__________ |

| |Trans. _______ |Trans. _______ |

| |Continuous |Perfect |

|Optative |__________ |__________ |

| |__________ |__________ |

| |__________ |__________ |

| |__________ |__________ |

| |__________ |__________ |

| |__________ |__________ |

| |Trans. _______ |Trans. _______ |

|Imperative |2nd _________ _________ |2nd _________ _________ |

| |3rd _________ _________ |3rd _________ _________ |

| |Trans.___________ |Trans.___________ |

|Infinitive |____________ |____________ |

| |Trans. ___________ |Trans. ___________ |

|Participle |___________________________ |___________________________ |

| |Trans. _______________ |Trans. _______________ |

| |Present Imperfect |Perfect Past Perfect |

|Indicative |παύομαι |ἐπαυόμην |πέπαυμαι |ἐπεπαύμην |

| |παύῃ |ἐπαύου |πέπαυσαι |ἐπέπαυσο |

| |παύεται |ἐπαύετο |πέπαυται |ἐπέπαυτο |

| |παυόμεθα |ἐπαυόμεθα |πεπαύμεθα |ἐπεπαύμεθα |

| |παύεσθε |ἐπαύεσθε |πέπαυσθε |ἐπέπαυσθε |

| |παύονται |ἐπαύοντο |πέπαυνται |ἐπέπαυντο |

| |Ι am being stopped |I was being stopped |I have been stopped |I had been stopped |

| |Present |Perfect |

|Subjunctive |παύωμαι |πεπαυμένος, η, ον ὦ |

| |παύῃ |ᾖς |

| |παύηται |ᾖ |

| |παυώμεθα |πεπαυμένοι, αι, α ὦμεν |

| |παύησθε |ἦτε |

| |παύωνται |ὦσι(ν) |

| |Should I be stopped |Should I have been stopped |

|Optative |παυοίμην |πεπαυμένος, η, ον εἴην |

| |παύοιο |εἴης |

| |παύοιτο |εἴη |

| |παυοίμεθα |πεπαυμένοι, αι, α εἶμεν |

| |παύοισθε |εἶτε |

| |παύοιντο |εἶεν |

| |If only I would be stopped |If only I have been stopped |

|Imperative |παύου παύεσθε |πεπαυμένος, η, ον ἴσθι; ἔστε |

| |παυέσθω παυέσθων |πεπαυμένοι, αι, α ἔστω; ἔστων |

| |Be stopped! Let him, her it, them be stopped |Be in the state of having stopped; |

| | |Let them be in the state of having stopped |

|Infinitive |παύεσθαι |πεπαῦσθαι |

| |to be stopped |to have been stopped |

|Participle |παυόμενος, η, ον |πεπαυμένος, η, ον |

| |being stopped |having been stopped |

4. ὑπό + Genitive: The Genitive of Personal Agent and the Dative of Means

Read page 190 of the Textbook for an overview of how Greek expresses by whom or by what an action is done when the passive voice is used. Notice the following

□ To translate the doer of the action in a Greek sentence with a passive voice, the preposition ὑπό plus the genitive is used: ὁ ἀνὴρ παύεται ὑπὸ τοῦ φίλου (The man is being stopped by the friend). Note that the genitive of agent is always a person.

□ If an action occurs because of an inanimate object, the dative of means without a preposition is used: ὁ ἀνὴρ βάλλεται τῷ μήλῳ (The man is hit by [means of] the apple).

(Exercise 4: Translating Passive Sentences

Translate into Greek using the passive and the genitive of agent or the dative of means as necessary. Use continuous aspect for these sentences. [185]

1. They were being stopped by the friend. _______________________________

2. Let him be stopped by fire. __________________________

3. He is hidden (κρύπτω) by the gifts. ___________________________

4. He might be stopped by the friend. ________________________________

5. Distinguishing the Middle and Passive Voice

Since the forms for the Present and Perfect Middle Voice are the same, five possible clues will help you to decide whether a particular verb is Passive rather than Middle/Deponent.

1. Active and Middle/ Deponent verbs can take a direct object

Active: παύω τὸν ἴππον (I stop the horse).

Middle: παύομαι τὸν ἴππον (I stop my horse).

Deponent: δέχομαι δῶρα (I receive presents).

2. Passive verbs will never have a direct object: ὁ ἀνήρ βλέπτεται (The man is being seen).

3. Some passive verbs may take a predicate nominative: ὁ ἀνήρ λέγεται εἶναι σοφός (The man is said to be wise).

4. Some passive verbs are accompanied by a genitive of agent: παύομαι ὑπὸ τοῦ φίλου (I am stopped by the friend).

5. Some passive verbs are accompanied by a dative of means: ὁ ἀνὴρ βάλλεται τῷ μήλῳ (The man is hit by [means of] the apple).

(Exercise 5: Distinguishing Voice in Translation

a.Translate the following. Label the voice and the clues that helped you determine the voice.[186]

1. φιλεῖται ὑπὸ τῆς γυναικὸς καὶ τῶν παίδων.

___________________________________________________________________

2. ἡ μάχη ἐνομίζετο εἶναι μικρά.

___________________________________________________________________

3. ὁ ἀνὴρ ἐνομίζετο ταῦτα.

___________________________________________________________________

4. ὁ ἀνὴρ ἐφιλεῖτο τοὺς παῖδας.

___________________________________________________________________

5. ἀπεκτείνετο νόσῳ.

___________________________________________________________________

6. ἐδεχόμην ταῦτα τὰ δῶρα.

____________________________________________________________________

b. Earlier we translated some Biblical sentences as middles. Now that you know the passive which translation of the underlined words do you prefer: active or passive ?

Jesus after being baptized:

1. καὶ εὐθὺς (immediately) ἀναβαίνων ἐκ τοῦ ὕδατος εἶδεν σχιζομένους (σχιζω, split, separate) τοὺς οὐρανοὺς καὶ τὸ πνεῦμα (spirit, breath) ὡς (like )περιστερὰν (dove) καταβαῖνον εἰς αὐτόν. (Mark 1.10) __________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Joseph has to go to Bethlehem to register:[187]

2. καὶ ἐπορεύοντο (πορεύομαι) πάντες ἀπογράφεσθαι (ἀπογράφω, register), ἕκαστος εἰς τὴν ἑαυτοῦ πόλιν. (Luke 2.3)

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

( Exercise 6

a. Translate the following Biblical and classical passages in which the voice should be clear:[188]

1. καθὼς (just as) γέγραπται ἐν τῷ Ἡσαίᾳ (Isaiah) τῷ προφήτῃ (prophet) (Mark 1.2)

________________________________________________________________________

2. καὶ πάντες ἐβαπτίζοντο ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ (Μark 1.5)

________________________________________________________________________

3. καὶ ὁ Ἰωάννης ἦν ἐνδεδυμένος (ἐνδύω, put on) τρίχας (hairs = hide) καμήλου (camel) (Mark 1.6)

________________________________________________________________________

4. καὶ ἦν ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ (desert) τεσσεράκοντα (40) ἡμέρας, πειραζόμενος (πειράζω, put to the test) ὐπὸ τοῦ Σατανᾶ (Mark 1. 13)

_____________________________________________________________________

c. Translate this passage from Plato’s Euthyphro

Socrates in this passage is giving specific examples of the difference between the active and passive voice (although he did not have that terminology) when Euthyphro does not understand a philosophical distinction that Socrates is making.[189]

EΥ οὐκ οἶδ[α] ὅ τι λέγεις, ὦ Σώκρατες.

ΣΩ ἀλλ’ ἐγὼ πειράσομαι (πειράομαι, πειράσομαι, try) σαφέστερον (adverb from σαφής, ές, clear) φράσαι (φράζω, aor. ἔφρασα, point out, explain). λέγομέν τι φερόμενον καὶ φέρον καὶ ἀγόμενον καὶ ἄγον καὶ ὀρώμενον καὶ ὁρῶν (what gender is this contract form?) καὶ πάντα τὰ τοιαῦτα (τοιοῦτος, τοιαύτη, τοιοῦτο, of such a kind) μανθάνεις ὅτι ἕτερα ἀλλήλων ἐστὶ καὶ ᾗ (in what way) ἕτερα.

7. Verbal Adjectives Ending in τός, ή, όν

Adjectives may be formed from a verb, usually from the aorist passive stem, the sixth and last principal part of the Greek verb. Even though you are not responsible for this stem until the next lesson, here is a preview of how to form that stem. For παύω and many other verbs, the aorist passive principal part is formed:Time Marker + Root + θη +ν (personal endings). Thus ἐ-παύ-θη-ν, Ι was stopped. Read the Textbook page 190 to review a list of verbal adjectives and their meanings formed from these stems.

(Exercise 7: Verbal Adjectives[190]

After working with the Textbook, page 190, translate the following sentences.

1. αἱ γυναῖκες κρυπταί. ______________________________________________

2. ταῦτα ἐστί θαυμαστά. ____________________________________________

3. τὰ λεγόμενα αἰνικτά. ______________________________________________

4. ὁ παῖς διδακτός. _______________________________________________

5. ὁ χρυσὸς εὑρητός. ________________________________________________

6. οἱ ἀδελφοὶ φιλητοί. _________________________________________________

8. Vocabulary for “Did the Tailor Have a Nightmare (Part 1)”

Nouns

|ἡ κλίνη |bed |

|ὁ ῥάπτης |tailor |

|ὁ στρατηγός |general |

Adjectives

|κρυπτός, ή, όν |hidden |

Verbs

|ἀπόλωλα |perfect as present: I am destroyed, I have perished |

|νικάω |win a victory |

|οἴομαι, Imperfect ᾤμην, future οιήσομαι, aorist ᾠήθην |think |

|πείθομαι + dative |listen to someone, obey, believe in, trust in |

|φαίνομαι, future φανοῦμαι, aorist ἐφάνην |appear, seem |

LESSON 48. THE AORIST PASSIVE. PASSIVE DEPONENTS. DATIVE OF AGENT WITH PERFECT PASSIVE.

1. Formation of the Regular Aorist Passive Principal Part

This lesson introduces the Aorist Passive forms on page 192 of the Textbook.

The aorist passive system is formed with the last principal part of the verb – the sixth. The regular pattern for forming the sixth principal part is the following:

Time Marker + Continuous Stem + θη + ν = ἐ-λύ-θη-ν (I was released). Ιf the verb is contract, the pattern is: Time Marker + Continuous Stem with Final Vowel Lengthened to –η + θη = ν = ἐ-ποιή-θη-ν. For words beginning with an initial vowel, the usual rules for lengthening that vowel apply: αἰτέω ( ᾐ-τη-θη-ν.

( Exercise 1

Form the sixth Principal Part for the following verbs.[191]

1. παύω _________________

2. τιμάω _________________

3. ὁμολογέω _________________

4. ἀδικέω _________________

2. Formation of the Aorist Passive System

The aorist passive does not use the expected middle/passive endings. Instead it has some unique endings which do not look passive. It is important to learn these endings well, because the aorist passive occurs often in Greek authors. The forms are charted for you on page 192 of the Textbook. A fuller explanation for the formation of the system is found in the chart below.

|Aorist Passive |These endings are the same as the Special or Third Aorist Endings – ν, ς, -,|ἐλύ/θη/ν I was released |

|Indicative |μεν, τε, σαν. The endings do not make the verb passive, but rather it is |ἐλύ/θη/ς |

| |the aorist passive stem which makes the verb passive! |ἐλύ/θη |

| | |ἐλύ/θη/μεν |

| | |ἐλύ/θη/τε |

| | |ἐλύ/θη/σαν |

|Aorist Passive |These endings are merely the present subjunctive of the verb εἰμι added |λυθ/ῶ |

|Subjunctive |directly to the aorist passive stem. The η is absorbed before the long |λυθ/ῇς |

| |vowels of the subjunctive endings. Once again the endings are not passive; |λυθ/ῇ |

| |it is the stem which makes the verb passive. The accents are the same as |λυθ/ῶμεν |

| |the present subjunctive of εἰμι rather than recessive. |λυθ/ῆτε |

| | |λυθ/ῶσι(ν) |

| | |Let me be released. |

|Aorist Passive Optative|These endings are merely the present optative of the verb εἰμί added |λυθ/είην |

| |directly to the aorist passive stem. The η is absorbed before the iota- |λυθ/είης |

| |diphthong of the endings. Once again the endings are not passive; it is the|λυθ/είη |

| |stem which makes the verb passive. The accents are the same as the present |λυθ/εῖμεν |

| |optative of εἰμι rather than recessive. |λυθ/εῖτε |

| | |λυθ/εῖεν |

| | |If only he would be released! |

|Aorist Passive |The second person singular of the imperative was originally -θι (like the |λύθη/τι λύθη/τε |

|Imperative |endings of Third Aorist imperatives as well as the imperative of εἰμι). But |λυθή/τω λυθ/έντων |

| |on aorist passive stems with a –θη, the imperative ending is changed to | |

| |avoid two aspirated (sounds with an ‘h’) in a row. The | |

| |-τε, -τω, -εντων endings for the 2nd person plural and the third person | |

| |endings resemble active imperative endings. Note the absence of an -η in | |

| |the 3rd plural imperative. |Be released! |

| | |Let him, her, it, they be released. |

|Aorist Passive |The infinitive ending –ναι is added directly to the aorist passive stem. |λυθῆναι |

|Infinitive |The -αι diphthong is considered short. This infinitive ending is similar to| |

| |such infinitives as εἶναι and διδόναι. |to be released |

|Aorist Passive |The endings είς, εῖσα, έν are added directly to the Aorist Passive Stem and |λυθείς, λυθεῖσα, λυθέν |

|Participle |the –η is absorbed. |(Genitive): |

| | |-έντος, -είσης, -έντος |

| | |having been released |

( Exercise 2: The Aorist Passive

a. Form the Aorist Passive System of παύω, παύσω, ἔπαυσα, πέπαυκα, πέπαυμαι, ἐπαύθην, giving a translation for each box, and including the genitive of the participle. Check your answers with the Textbook, page 192.

|Aorist Passive Indicative |___________ ______________ |

| |___________ ______________ |

| |___________ ______________ |

| | |

| |Trans. ________________ |

|Aorist Passive Subjunctive |___________ ______________ |

| |___________ ______________ |

| |___________ ______________ |

| | |

| |Trans. ________________ |

|Aorist Passive Optative |___________ ______________ |

| |___________ ______________ |

| |___________ ______________ |

| | |

| |Trans. ________________ |

|Aorist Passive Imperative |___________ ______________ |

| |___________ ______________ |

| | |

| |Trans. ________________ |

|Aorist Passive Infinitive |____________________ |

| |Trans. ______________ |

|Aorist Passive Participle |__________, ____________, __________ |

3. The Aorist Passive Participle

The aorist participle is declined on page 240 of the Textbook. Note the following:

□ The aorist passive participle is a mixed first and third declension: παυθείς, εῖσα, έν. This is the only middle/passive participle that is a mixed first and third 3-Α-3 declension. All the others end in -μενος, η, ον.

□ Τhe feminine has a short alpha in the nominative and accusative singular and declines like γλῶσσα, with an eta in the genitive and dative singular, and a circumflex on the final vowel of the genitive plural.

□ The genitive of the masculine and neuter are from by adding –τος to the genitive singular of the neuter: παυθεν + τος = παυθέντος.

□ The dative plural loses the –εν before the -σι(ν) and lengthens the epsilon to an epsilon-iota diphthong: παυθέντσι(ν) ( παυθεῖσι(ν). Like all third declension words that end in a sigma, the dative plural merely adds an iota to the nominative. But note the accentuation.

□ Τhe -ε and the -ει diphthong of the participle ending is accented throughout the declension: παυθείς, εῖσα, έν, except in the feminine genitive plural: παυθεισῶν.

( Exercise 3:

a. Form the Aorist Passive Participle for λύω. Check your answers with the paradigms at the bottom right of page 240 in the Textbook.

|Case |Masculine |Feminine |Neuter |

|N | | | |

|A | | | |

|G | | | |

|D | | | |

| | | | |

|N | | | |

|A | | | |

|G | | | |

|D | | | |

b. Translate the following forms from the verbs λύω and παύω which include participles as well as other moods.[192]

1. ἐπαύθη _____________________________

2. παυθῇ _____________________________

3. λυθείς _____________________________

4. λυθείη _____________________________

5. παύθητε _____________________________

6. παυθῆτε _____________________________

7. λυθέντων (2 ways) _____________________________

8. ἐλύθησαν _____________________________

9. παυθῆναι _____________________________

10. παυθεῖσαι _____________________________

3. Aorist Passive Verbs Without a –θ in the Aorist Passive Stem

There are a number of verbs that do not have a –θ in the sixth principal part. Although they are harder to recognize than those verbs which do have a –θ, their endings are exactly the same, except in the second person singular imperative where the ending is –θι: πλήγηθι (be struck). However if the stem ends in an aspirated letter like –φ, -τι is used to avoid two aspirated syllables in a row: γράφητι (be written). Some verbs which do not have a theta in the aorist passive stem include πλήττω ( ἐπλήγην, κλέπτω ( ἐκλάπην, γράφω ( ἐγράφην.

( Exercise Three: Formation of Aorist Passive System

After analyzing the chart on page 192 for ἐπλήγην, form the Aorist Passive system for the verb: θάπτω, θάψω, ἔθαψα, --, τέθαμμαι, ἐτάφην (bury). Check your answers with the paradigm on page 192 of the Textbook. (note that this verb will have -τι rather than -θι in the 2nd person singular of the imperative)

|Aorist Passive Indicative |___________ ______________ |

| |___________ ______________ |

| |___________ ______________ |

| | |

| |Trans. ________________ |

|Aorist Passive Subjunctive |___________ ______________ |

| |___________ ______________ |

| |___________ ______________ |

| | |

| |Trans. ________________ |

|Aorist Passive Optative |___________ ______________ |

| |___________ ______________ |

| |___________ ______________ |

| | |

| |Trans. ________________ |

|Aorist Passive Imperative |___________ ______________ |

| |___________ ______________ |

| | |

| |Trans. ________________ |

|Aorist Passive Infinitive |____________________ |

| |Trans. ______________ |

|Aorist Passive Participle |__________, ____________, __________ |

| |Genitive __________, ___________, __________ |

b. Translate the following forms from the verbs θάπτω (bury), γράφω (write) and πλήττω (strike). Their sixth principal parts are ἐτάφην, ἐγράφην, ἐπλήγην.

1. ἐτάφης [193] _____________________________

2. πληγῶσι _____________________________

3. γραφῆναι _____________________________

4. πληγεῖεν _____________________________

5. ταφήτι _____________________________

6. ταφείς _____________________________

7. πληγέντων (2 ways) _____________________________

8. ἐγράφησαν _____________________________

9. ταφέντι _____________________________

10. πληγῶ _____________________________

4. Aorist Passive Stems that End in a Consonant

Some verbs, because their Continuous stems end in a consonant, show a variety of changes when that stem meets the -θη syllable. In these cases, figure out the changed consonants according to this chart:

|Continuous Stem Endings |Changes Before a -θ |

|π, β |φ |

|κ, γ, ττ |χ |

|τ, δ, θ, ζ |σ |

Α list of such verbs is found on page 192 of the Textbook.

( Exercise 4

After analyzing the consonant stem verbs discussed on page 192 of the Textbook, form the aorist passive principal part for the following verbs. Remember that this principal part has a time-marker (augment).[194]

1. ἄγω _________________________

2. πράττω _________________________

3. πέμπω[195] _________________________

4. δοκέω _________________________

5. λέγω _________________________

6. ὀργίζω _________________________

5. Recognizing Aorist Passive Forms and Stems

The Aorist Passive must be memorized very carefully. Remember the following clues for recognition:

□ Aorist Passive forms look active. It is the use of the sixth principal part that makes these forms passive, not the middle/passive endings used elsewhere.

□ Τhe Aorist Passive Endings are distinctive, and if you know them well, you will almost always be able to identify a form even one from a verb which does not form its sixth principal part regularly.

□ The present of –θη almost always signals an aorist passive.

□ For verbs without a –θ, you must rely on your knowledge of the ending and the particular accents of the endings. For example, the present active subjunctive of γράφω is γράφω, γράφῃς, γράφῃ, etc. with a recessive accent. But the aorist passive subjunctive of the same verb is γραφῶ, ῇς, ῇ, etc, because the accents are the same as the present subjunctive of εἰμι rather than recessive.

□ For verbs with a consonant stem which becomes a φ, χ, or ς before a –θη, you can usually figure out the first principal part from by removing the time marker and using the first few letters to look up the word: ἐλείφθην > λείπω.

□ For verbs that lose a vowel, try to insert a vowel between the two consonants of the aorist passive stem: ἐβλήθην ( βάλλω.

□ For verbs that change a vowel, use the first few letters of the stem to look up the word: ἐκλάπην > κλέπτω.

(Exercise 5

Try your hand at translating these aorist passive forms and if necessary consult the principal parts on pages 249-250. Don’t forget to factor out the time marker if you look up the verbs.[196]

1. κλήθητε _____________________

2. γραφεῖσι _____________________

3. ἤχθης[197] _____________________

4. ἐπράχθη _____________________

5. βληθεῖσα _____________________

6. ἐτιμήθησαν _____________________

(Exercise 6. Original Sentences

Be careful to note the articular infinitives. In Greek, the subject of an articular infinitive does not necessarily come before the infinitive as is customary in English, but may come after the articular infinitive.[198]

1. καὶ ἐβαπτίσθη εἰς τὸν Ἰορδάνην (Jordan) ὑπο Ἰωάννου. (Mark 1.9)

________________________________________________________________________

2. μετά δὲ τὸ παραδοθῆναι (παραδίδωμι betray, hand over) τὸν Ἰωάννην (John), ἦλθεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς (Jesus) εἰς τὴν Γαλιλαίαν. (Mark 1.14)

________________________________________________________________________

3. ἐγένετο δὲ ἐν τῷ εἶναι αὐτοὺς ἐκεῖ, ἐπλήσθησαν (πληρόω, fufill, complete) αἱ ἡμέραι τοῦ τεκεῖν (τίτκω,give birth) αὐτήν. (Luke 2.6)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

7. Middle Deponents, Passive Deponents, and Verbs Which May Be Aorist Deponents or True Passives.

The deponent verbs we have so far seen are actually called middle deponents because their principal parts are all middle forms although their meaning is active. For instance, the principal parts of αἰσθάνομαι (I perceive), αἰσθήσομαι (I will perceive), ἠσθόμην (I perceived), ᾔσθημαι (I have perceived) are middle forms with an active meaning. Some deponent verbs, however, do not have a middle aorist principal part, but instead they have an aorist passive deponent principal part. One such verb is βούλομαι (I wish), βουλήσομαι (I will wish), ἐβουλήθην (I wished), βεβούλημαι (I have wished). This book, as seen in the principal parts for βούλομαι, lists aorist passive deponents as the third principal parts just where we have always seen aorist principal parts (but see the footnote).[199] βούλομαι (I will, wish), διαλέγομαι (I converse), δύναμαι ( I am able,) οἴομαι (I think), ἐπίσταμαι (I understand), ἑννοέομαι (I ponder), are aorist passive deponents and their principal parts are listed on page 193 of the Textbook. Most passive deponent verbs are verbs of mental action. There are other verbs which are hard to categorize as to whether they are true passives of passive deponents. They are listed for you on page 193 of the Textbook. Using contextual clues will help you decide.

(Exercise 7. Aorist Passives

Translate the following sentences which incorporate middle aorists, passive aorist deponents, as well as true passives. You will need to check principal parts (pages193, 249, 250) and/or use contextual clues to discern whether a form is deponent or not.[200]

1. ὁ παῖς ἐδυνήθη ἐπιστηθῆναι. ________________________________

2. ὁ παῖς ἐγέρθη. ________________________________

3. βουληθεῖεν ἂν ταῦτα. ________________________________

4. ἐβουλήθημεν διαλεχθῆναι. ________________________________

5. ταῦτα τὰ δῶρα ἐδόθη. _________________________________

6. ταῦτα ἐννοηθώμεν. __________________________________

7. ταῦτα ἐγνώθη. __________________________________

8. ταῦτα ἐφοβήθην. __________________________________

9. ὠργίσθην ὑπὸ τοῦ στρατηγοῦ. ____________________________________

10. ταῦτα ἐκτησάμην. ____________________________________

8. Middle Deponents with an Aorist Middle and an True Aorist Passive,

Some middle deponents may have also have an aorist passive: εισδέχομαι (I admit, receive into a place, εισδέξομαι (I will admit, will receive), εισἐδεξάμην (I admitted, I received), --, εισδέδεγμαι (I have admitted, I have received), εισεδέχθην(I was admitted, I was received). Checking principal parts will clarify whether verbs have a aorist deponent as well as a true aorist passive.

(Exercise 8: Midde Deponents with an Aorist Passive

Translate the following sentences·[201]

1. ὀ βασιλεὺς εἰσεδέχθη. ____________________________

2. ὀ βασιλεὺς ὐμᾶς οὐκ εἰσεδέχετο. ____________________________

9. Dative of Agent with a Perfect Passive and ὑπό + the Genitive as “by (a person)” or “under the influence of”.

We have already noted that the passive voice never takes a direct object and is often accompanied by a genitive of personal agent with ὑπό, or a dative of means. In the perfect passive, however, a dative of agent is used instead of a prepositional phrase with ὑπό: παύομαι ὑπὸ τοῦ στρατιώτου (I am being stopped by the soldier), but πεπαύμαι τῷ στρατιώτῃ (I have been stopped by the soldier).

The preposition ὑπό is not only used with a genitive + a person to mean “by”, but may also be used with inanimate nouns as “under the influence of”. See the examples on page 193 of the Textbook.

(Exercise 9: Dative of Agent and Means and Uses of ὐπό

After reading page 193, translate the following sentences.[202]

1. πέπαυμαι τῷ στρατηγῷ. __________________________

2. ἐπαύθημεν ὐπὸ τοῦ στρατηγοῦ. __________________________

3. ἐπέπαυντο τοῖς λίθοις. ___________________________

4. ἐπαύθησαν ύπὸ τῆς μὰχης. ____________________________

5. ἐπαύθησαν τῇ μάχῃ. ____________________________

6. κέκρυμμαι τῷ ἀγγέλῷ. ____________________________

7. εἴθε ταφεῖεν ὑπὸ τοῦ βασιλέως. ________________________________

8. λελειμμένοι ἦσαν τῷ ἀνδρί. ________________________________

10. Vocabulary

Nouns

|τὸ αἴτημα |request |

|ἡ χάρις |grace, favor, thanks |

|χάριν ἀποδίδωμι |give back thanks, return a favor |

|χάριν εἰδέναι |to be grateful |

Adjectives

|λευκός, ή, όν |white |

Prepositions

|διά + Gen. |through (in spatial sense) |

|ὐπό + Gen. |by, under the influence of, from |

Verbs

|δηλόω |make clear |

|ἐξαιρέω |take out |

|λύω |loosen, release, solve |

|πέποιθα + Dat |perf as present: trust, trust in |

|συνοικέω |dwell together |

|φθείρω aorist passive ἐφθάρην |destroy, ruin, corrupt |

LESSON 49. THE PASSIVE VOICE: ALL FORMS

1. The Future Passive System

Originally, the forms of Future Passive System were, as are the forms of the present and perfect passive systems, the same as the Future Middle. However, the future passive system, formed on the sixth principal part, eventually developed. Although the future passive uses the aorist passive stem, the Middle/ Passive Endings are used, rather than aorist passive endings.

The Future Passive Stem is formed by adding a sigma to the 6th Principal Part Stem: παυθη+σ. To this stem is added a linking vowel (ο/ε) plus the Middle/Passive Endings. Thus, the first person future passive indicative will be:

παυθή/σ/ο/μαι, I will be stopped. The normal Middle/Passive endings are found in the Optative (remember that there is no future subjunctive), Infinitive and Participle, but added to the Future Passive Stem. These forms are charted on page 195 of the Textbook.

(Exercise 1: Forming the Future Passive

a. For the following verbs, whose sixth principal parts are listed, form the future passive stem, and then the future passive indicative, first person.[203]

1. λύω (ἐλύθην) _________ _________________________

2. λείπω (ἐλείφθην) _________ _________________________

3. πλήττω (ἐπλήγην) _________ _________________________

b. After analyzing the Future Passive column on page 195 of the Textbook, form the Future Passive System for παύω (ἐπαύθην). Include a translation for each box. Check your answers with the Future Passive column on page 243 of the Textbook.

|Future Passive Indicative |___________ ______________ |

| |___________ ______________ |

| |___________ ______________ |

| | |

| |Trans. ________________[204] |

|Future Passive Optative |___________ ______________ |

| |___________ ______________ |

| |___________ ______________ |

| | |

| |Trans. ________________[205] |

|Future Passive Infinitive |____________________ |

| |Trans. ______________[206] |

|Future Passive Participle |__________, ____________, __________[207] |

| |Genitive __________, ___________, __________ |

| |Trans. ______________________ |

c. Translate the following forms: λύω (ἐλύθην); λείπω (ἐλείφθην); and πλήττω (ἐπλήγην).[208]

1. λειφθησόμεθα _____________________________

2. λυθήσοιο _____________________________

3. πληγήσῃ _____________________________

4. λυθησομένῃ _____________________________

5. πληγήσεσθαι _____________________________

d. After analyzing the chart of all forms of the Passive Voice, fill out the chart on the next page for the passive voice for the verb παύω (Principal parts are on page 249 of the Textbook). Provide a translation for each box and give the nominative and genitive of all participles. Remember the following:

• the Continuous and Perfect are exactly the same as the Middle.

• The Future is formed on the Aorist Passive stem but uses the Middle/Passive endings.

• The Aorist is formed from the sixth Principal part and uses Active Endings.

Check your answers with the chart for παύω on page 243 of the Textbook. Extra charts for practice are found in the appendix. Keep practicing!

Passive Voice Verb Chart

Principal Parts: ________,________________,____________,_____________,____________,________

|Continuous |Future |Aorist |Perfect |

|Present |Imperfect |Future |Aorist |Perfect |Pluperfect |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

|Subjunctive |XXX | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

|Optative | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

|Imperative |XXX | | |

|Infinitive | | | |

|Participle |Participle |Participle |Participle |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

2. Future Perfect Passive

There does exist a future perfect active, middle, and passive with forms easily recognized and not commonly found. Hence we will not include it in our verb charts. However, you should be able to easily translate the future perfect passive whenever it occurs. The system is formed by adding σ + ο/ε + middle/passive endings onto the perfect middle stem (5th principal part): λέλυμαι =λελυ+σ+ομαι = λελύσομαι, λελύσῃ, etc. (I will have been released). If the verb is a perfect as present, the future perfect functions as a future.

(Exercise 2: Future Perfect

After analyzing the examples provided in the Textbook, page 195, translate the following: [209]

1. τὰ βιβλία γεγράψεται. __________________________

2. κεκλήσεται Παῦλος. __________________________

3. οἰ στρατιῶται πεπαύσονται. __________________________

3. Vocabulary

Nouns

|ἡ ὕλη |forest |

Adjectives

|ἀμείνων, ον |better |

|ἀνεκτός, όν |bearable, endurable |

|ἀποδοτέος, α, ον |to be given back |

Verbs

|ἀπάγω |lead away |

|ἔχω + adverb |to be in a certain condition |

|πῶς ἔχεις; |how are you? |

|τελευτάω |put an end to. |

PRACTICE QUIZ 12: THE PASSIVE VOICE

1. Fill out the Passive verb chart for λύω, listing the principal parts (which are regular) and giving a translation for each box and the genitive of the Aorist Participle.

Passive Voice Verb Chart

Principal Parts: ________,________________,____________,_____________,____________,________

|Continuous |Future |Aorist |Perfect |

|Present |Imperfect |Future |Aorist |Perfect |Pluperfect |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

|Subjunctive |XXX | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

|Optative | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

|Imperative |XXX | | |

|Infinitive | | | |

|Participle |Participle |Participle |Participle |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

2. Translate the following sentences and label the usage of the underlined phrases.

a. καὶ οὕτως ἑφθάρησαν μὲν αἱ χλαῖναι (blankets), ἐσώθην δὲ ό ἀνὴρ ὁ κρυπτός.

__________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

b.Ναπολέων εἶπον ὅτι ὀ τοῦ ῥάπτου βίος τελευτηθήσοιτο.

__________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

c. τὸ μὲν πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ λευκὸν ἑφάνη υπὸ φόβου, αἱ δὲ τρίχες (hair) λευκαὶ ἐφάνησαν διὰ τὰς πτέρυγας.

______________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

d.ἐγὼ ὁ σεσωσμένος σοι Ναπολέων εἰμι . χάριν οῖδα. χάριν ἀποδοτέον. πεμφθείη ἂν ἱμάτιον νέον ὑπὸ ἐμοῦ;

______________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

ANSWERS, PRACTICE QUIZ 12: THE PASSIVE VOICE

1. Fill out the Passive verb chart for λύω, listing the principal parts (which are regular) and giving a translation for each box and the genitive of the Aorist Participle.

Check your answers on page 243 of the Textbook.

2. Translate the following sentences and label the usage of the underlined phrases.[210]

a. καὶ οὕτως ἑφθάρησαν μὲν αἱ χλαῖναι (blankets), ἐσώθην δὲ ό ἀνὴρ ὁ κρυπτός.

__________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

b.Ναπολέων εἶπον ὅτι ὀ τοῦ ῥάπτου βίος τελευτηθήσοιτο.

__________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

c. τὸ μὲν πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ λευκὸν ἐφάνη υπὸ φόβου, αἱ δὲ τρίχες (hair) λευκαὶ ἐφάνησαν διὰ τὰς πτέρυγας.

______________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

d.ἐγὼ ὁ σεσωσμένος σοι Ναπολέων εἰμι . χάριν οῖδα. χάριν ἀποδοτέον. πεμφθείη ἂν ἱμάτιον νέον σοι ὑπὸ ἐμοῦ;

______________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

LESSON 50. REGULAR -μι VERBS. δείκνυμι.

1. The Continuous Active of regular -μι verbs.

There are two classes of verbs: the -ω verbs which you have just completed and the -μι verbs. You have already met and used some forms of -μι verbs since the very beginning of the course in the scripts. This chapter discusses -μι verbs whose stem ends in -νυ: δείκνυμι show; οἴγνυμι, open, ὄμνυμι, swear, ὄλλυμι (originally ὄλνυμι) destroy (middle ὄλλυμαι, perish). -μι verbs are called athematic (without a thematic or linking vowel), and the continuous indicative, imperative, infinitive and participle have distinctive endings. These endings must be memorized. Do not despair, however, for -μι verbs are different only in the continuous system and the endings are easily learned!

a.The present continuous endings are added directly to the stem without a linking vowel (the forms in bold are particularly important to note) are:

-μι δείκνῡ-μι

-ς δείκνῡ-ς

-σι(ν) δείκνῡ-σι(ν)

______

-μεν- δείκνυ-μεν

-τε δείκνυ-τε

-ασι(ν) δεεκνύ-ασι(ν)

Note that the stem is long in the singular, and short in the plural. You will see this change in stem in other -μι verbs.

b. The imperfect endings are:

-ν ἐδείκνῡν the stem has a long upsilon in the singular, short in the plural; hence this accentuation.

-ς ἐδείκνῡ-ς

--- (nothing) ἐδείκνῡ

-μεν ἐδείκνυ-μεν

-τε ἐδείκνυ-τε

-σαν ἐδείκνυ-σαν

These secondary endings are familiar to you: they are the secondary endings used in the aorist passive indicative as well as the special aorist active indicative.

c. The infinitive ending is:

-ναι δεικνύναι (accent is always second back: short upsilon in the infinitive).

d. The participle ending are:

-ύς, -ῦσα, -ύν δεικνύς, δεικνῦσα, δεικνύν (the upisilon is long in the masculine and feminine nominative, short in the neuter; the accent is always on the upsilon.

e. The endings for the subjunctive and optative are just what you would expect, added directly to the stem. So are the imperative endings, except the 2nd person singular which is δείκνυ.

(Exercise 1: Continuous Active.

After memorizing the distinctive endings for -μι verbs, and reading the Textbook, page 198, analyze the Continuous active chart for δείκνυμι. Then fill out the chart below. Check your answers on page 198.

|Continuous |

|Present |Imperfect |

| | |

| | |

| | |

| | |

|Subjunctive |

| |

| |

| |

|Optative |

| |

| |

| |

|Imperative |

|Infinitive |

|Participle |

2. The Declension of the -μι Present Participle

This participle is a regular third group participle: the masculine and neuter stem is the nominative neuter and the dative plural δεικνύντσι(ν) contracts to δεικνῦσι(ν). Τhe feminine is a short alpha first group.

(Exercise 2: Continuous Active Participle

Decline the present active participle for δείνυμι:[211]

|Case |Masculine |Feminine |Neuter |

|N | | | |

|A | | | |

|G | | | |

|D | | | |

|Case |Masculine |Feminine |Neuter |

|N | | | |

|A | | | |

|G | | | |

|D | | | |

3. The Continuous Present Middle/Passive for -μι Verbs

For -μι verbs, the middle/passive endings you have already learned are placed directly on the stem. Since there is no linking thematic vowel, there will be no contraction in the second person singular form of the present and imperfect indicative, or the imperative. The subjunctive and optative forms have the normal contractions.

(Exercise 3: Continuous Middle/Passive

After analyzing the middle/passive chart on page 198, fill out a chart below. Check your answers on page 198 of the Textbook.

|Continuous |

|Present |Imperfect |

|δείκνυμαι | |

| | |

| | |

| | |

|Subjunctive |

| |

| |

| |

|Optative |

| |

| |

| |

|Imperative |

|Infinitive |

|Participle |

(Exercise 4: Recognizing Continuous Active and Middle/Passive of

– μι Verbs.

Translate the following -νυμι Verb Forms:[212]

1. δείκνυ ______________________________________

2. ἔδεικνυ ______________________________________

3. δείκνυσο [213] ______________________________________

4. ἐδείκνυσο ______________________________________

5. δεικνῦσι(ν) ______________________________________

6. δείκνυσι(ν) ______________________________________

7. οἴγνυς ______________________________________

8. οἰγνύς ______________________________________

9. ὀλλύν ______________________________________

10. ὤλλυν ______________________________________

11. ὀμνύναι ______________________________________

12. ὄμνυσαι ______________________________________

13. ὀλλύασι ______________________________________

14. ὀλλύσαις ______________________________________

15. οἰγνῦσαν ______________________________________

16. ᾤγνυσαν ______________________________________

5. Vocabulary

Verbs

|ἐλευθερόω |set free |

|ἐστάθη from ἵστημι |cause someone or something to stand |

Prepositions

|ἐπί + Dative |over |

Phrases

|ταὐτά = Crasis for τὰ αὐτά |the same things |

REVIEW OF VERB FORMS

You have now completed your journey through all the forms of the regular Greek –ω and –μι verbs and it is time to consolidate what you have learned. So far you have seen the verb as three separate pages: it is now time to make the Greek verb a single page as it is on the chart on page 200 of the Textbook.

One way to maintain control over the patterns of the Greek verb is to do verb charts. Some students do not need a form when they are writing out all the forms of the Greek verb. But most students (and this was and still is true for me) find it very useful to have pre-made chart.

You will be able to download such a chart on my website which can be printed, preferably on legal size paper of paper 11 by 17:

Notice some features of the chart. The principal parts are numbered. The four systems of the Greek verb are labeled with their name and their aspect. Every box is labeled but also has the number of the principal part used and whether secondary or primary endings are employed. In the indicative row, forms which have a time marker (augment) are darker than the other boxes. Only these dark boxes have forms with a time marker! Using this chart should make the task of writing out the Greek verb more approachable. Take your time doing the following exercises, over days if you wish. But do them. I promise you will find after working with these exercises that the Greek verb makes sense and that you will enjoy their patterns. A full verb chart takes time so you might like to intermingle verb charts with refreshing your knowledge of verb syntax. I give some suggestions in the exercises below, but pace yourself according to your own rhythms. You might wish to go faster or slower than I suggest.

(Exercise 1: Full Verb Charts

a.First Study Session:

1. After reviewing fully and carefully the information on the formation of the verb on pages 201, 202 and the top of page 203 in the Textbook, do a full verb chart for λύω or παύω. Give a translation for each box. Check your answers with the charts on pages 241 – 243, circling all the forms you had to look up and needed to correct as a reminder to practice those forms.

2. Study the top of page 203, making sure you know where all the ambiguities occur in the forms of the -σα Verbs.

b. Second Study Session:

1. Do a full verb chart for λείπω. The endings for this verb are identical with παύω in the present and future, all voices, and the aorist passive, as found on pages 241 -243, but the aorist active and middle system is different and is on page 244. Since the perfect middle and passive of this verb ends in a consonant, refer to page 185 for the perfect middle and passive. Check your answers with the charts, circling all the forms you had to look up and needed to correct as a reminder to practice those forms.

2. Study the middle of Page 203, making sure you understand each of the concepts under verb syntax up to and including Genitive absolutes. The index will refer you to the pages where these concepts were first introduced if you need to refresh your understanding of these constructions.

c. Third Study Session

1. Do the continuous system for δείκνυμι. Check your answers with the chart on page 246.

2. Do a chart for εἰμί. Forms exist only in the continuous active system, and in the deponent future. Check your answers with the chart on page 180. If you are using a pre-made verb chart, make sure you put the future forms in the middle/deponent section of the chart.

3. Study the Uses of the Subjunctive on page 203.

2. Synopses

Doing a full verb chart is time-consuming. Once you feel confident about knowing how to write out the full verb chart, turn to doing synopses of verb forms. A synopsis asks you to just write just one particular form in each box, for instance, 2nd person singular. Synopses help you to maintain control of the forms in an efficient manner, without too much repetition.

(Exercise 2: Synopses

a. Fourth Study Session

1. Synopsize παύω in the 2nd person singular for all indicatives, subjunctives, optatives and imperatives in all systems. Give the infinitive and the nominative and genitive of all genders of the participle. Check your answers on page 241-243. For participles, check the paradigms page 240.

2. Study the Uses of the Optative, the Conditions, and Impossible Wishes on pages 203-204.

b. Fifth Study Session

1. Synopsize λείπω in the 3rd person plural for all indicatives, subjunctives, optatives, and imperatives in all systems. Give the infinitive and the dative plural of all genders of the participle. Check your answers on pages 241-3, except for the aorist active and middle on page 244, the perfects on page 185, and the participles on page 240.

2. Study Indirect Discourse and Nouns and Other Parts of Speech, page 204.

c. Sixth Study Session

1. Synopsize δείκνυμι in the present system in the 3rd singular for all indicatives, subjunctives, optatives, and imperatives. Give the infinitive and the genitive plural of all genders of the participle. Check your answers on page 246.

2. Begin memorizing the Vocabulary page 205.

(Exercise 3. Finger Pointing

a. Seventh Study Session

1. Finger pointing is another way to maintain control over the various forms of the Greek verb. It is explained to you on page 200 of the Textbook. Do the practice exercise and check your answers in the Textbook Answers.

2. Go back to the top of page 203 and be sure you can locate the ambiguous forms.

3. Do the review sentences on page 204. Check your answers in the Textbook Answers.

7. Looking Ahead

After all these study sessions, you should be prepared for the practice exam which follows. This is the last practice exam for the course. And note: there are only four more chapters left in the book. In those chapters, you will be learning the forms described at the bottom of page 204. But, more importantly, now that you will have reviewed all the forms of the regular verbs and verb syntax, you will be equipped to read original Greek: the Hippocratic Oath in Lessons 51 and 52, and in Lessons 53 and 54, passages from the Greek tragedians, Euripides and Sophocles.

UNIT FOUR: PRACTICE EXAM

READ THE DIRECTIONS CAREFULLY

1. Do a full verb chart on λύω, λύσω, ἔλυσα, λέλυκα, λέλυμαι, ἐλύθην.

• In the present, future and perfect systems, give the second and third person singular of the indicative, subjunctive, and optative. Give the 2nd person singular and plural of the imperative, and the dative plural of the masculine and feminine of the participle.

• In the aorist system, do every form for the indicative, subjunctive and optative. Give all forms of the imperative, and the dative plural of masculine and feminine of the participle.

• Do the infinitives in all the systems

• Translate each box in the present system

2. Translate the following verb forms. If a form is ambiguous, give both translations. All forms are derived from the following verbs:

ἄγω, ἄξω, ἤγαγον, ἦχα, ἦγμαι, ἦχθην, lead

βούλομαι, βουλήσομαι, ἐβουλήθην, βεβούλημαι, wish (passive deponent)

δείκνυμι, δείξω, ἔδειξα, δέδεγμαι, ἐδείχθην, show

γίγνομαι, γενήσομαι, ἐγενόμην, γέγονα, γεγένημαι, ἐγενήθην, be, become, happen

εἰμι, ἔσομαι, be

λέιπω, λείψω, ἔλιπον, λέλοιπα, λέλειμμαι, ἐλείφθην, leave

1. ἔσται ________________________________

2. ἀχθεῖσαι ________________________________

3. βουληθεῖεν ________________________________

4. γεγονώς ________________________________

5. δεδεγμένοι ἦσαν ________________________________

6. ἄξοιεν ________________________________

7. δείξῃ ________________________________

8. λειφθήσῃ ________________________________

9. ἐλέλειξο τὴν πόλιν_______________________________

10. λελοιπός ________________________________

11. γεγενῆσθαι ________________________________

12. οὔσῃ _________________________________

13. δείκνυσιν _________________________________

14. ἦχε _________________________________

15. λιποῦσα _________________________________

16. δείκνυσο __________________________________

3. Translate the following words:

|1. πόσος, ποσος, ὅσος, ὁπόσος, | |11. ἐχθρός | |

|2. ἀπόλλυμι | |12. ποῖος, ποιος, οἷος, ὁποῖος | |

|ἀπόλλυμαι (middle) | | | |

|3. ἐλευθερόω | |13. τὸ ὄρος | |

|4. τὸ αἵτημα | |14.παύω vs παύομαι | |

|5.ἀποδοτέον | |15. βαρύς, | |

|6.ἄρχω vs ἄρχομαι | |16.σφόδρα | |

|7. λανθάνω | |17. πείθω vs πείθομαι | |

|8. ἡ ὕλη | |18.χάριν εἰδέναι | |

|9. ποῖ, ποι, οἷ, ὅποι | |19. φθείρω | |

|10. ἐξαίφνης | |20. ἵστημι vs ἴσταμαι | |

4. Label the underlined constructions used in the following sentences.

1. λέγωμεν χαίρειν τῷ ἀξίῳ ῥάπτῃ.

______________________________________________________________________

2. εἰ τὸν ἄργυρον παρέχοιμι, ἔχοιντο ἂν καλῶς.

______________________________________________________________________

3. ἡ θὰλαττα ἐφάνη λευκή.

______________________________________________________________________

4. ὁ στατηγος ἀγγέλει ἐσόμενος κρυπτός.

______________________________________________________________________

5. οἰ τέκόντες πεμφθεῖεν τῆλε τοῦ κινδίνου.

_______________________________________________________________________

6. ταῦτα γεγραμμένα ἐστὶ τοῖς παισίν.

______________________________________________________________________

7. ἡ εὑρετὴς εἷπον ὅτι λυθήσοιτο ὐπὸ τοῦ βασιλέως.

_______________________________________________________________________

8. ἐβουλήθημεν τὸν βασιλέα μεταπέμπεσθαι/

_______________________________________________________________________

ANSWERS: UNIT FOUR PRACTICE TEST

READ THE DIRECTIONS CAREFULLY

1. Check your answers in the textbook, 240-3.

2. Translate the following verb forms. All forms are derived from the following verbs:

ἄγω, ἄξω, ἤγαγον, ἦχα, ἦγμαι, ἦχθην, lead

βούλομαι, βουλήσομαι, ἐβουλήθην, βεβούλημαι, wish (passive deponent)

δείκνυμι, δείξω, ἔδειξα, δέδεγμαι, ἐδείχθην, show

γίγνομαι, γενήσομαι, ἐγενόμην, γέγονα, γεγένημαι, ἐγενήθην, be, become, happen

εἰμι, ἔσομαι, be

λέιπω, λείψω, ἔλιπον, λέλοιπα, λέλειμμαι, ἐλείφθην, leave

1. ἔσται (s)he, it will be

2. ἀχθεῖσαι they (F) having been led

3. βουληθεῖεν if only they would wish

4. γεγονώς he having become

5. δεδεγμένοι ἦσαν they had shown their….they had been shown

6. ἄξοιεν (they said that) they would lead

7. δείξῃ you will show your…/ should you show your…

8. λειφθήσῃ you will be left

9. ἐλέλειξο τὴν πόλιν you had left your city

10. λελοιπός it having left

11. γεγενῆσθαι to have become

12. οὔσῃ to her being

13. δείκνυσιν (s)he, it is showing

14. ἦχε (s)he, it led

15. λιποῦσα she upon leaving

16. δείκνυσο show your…!

3. Translate the following words:

|1. πόσος, ποσος, ὅσος, ὁπόσος, |how much, how many?; of some |11. ἐχθρός |hateful, hostile; hated, as |

| |quantity; as much as, as many | |noun enemy |

| |as; how(ever)/ however much or | | |

| |many | | |

|2. ἀπόλλυμι. ἀπόλλυμαι (middle) |destroy, lose |12. ποῖος, ποιος, οἷος, ὁποῖος |of what sort?; of some sort; |

| |perish | |of such a sort as; of |

| | | |what(ever)/ whatever sort |

|3. ἐλευθερόω |set free |13. τὸ ὄρος |mountain |

|4. τὸ αἵτημα |request |14.παύω vs παύομαι |stop someone or something vs.|

| | | |cease |

|5.ἀποδοτέον |one must give back |15. βαρύς, |deep |

|6.ἄρχω vs ἄρχομαι |rule over vs. begin |16.σφόδρα |intensely, strongly |

|7. λανθάνω |escape notice |17. πείθω vs πείθομαι |persuade vs. obey, trust |

|8. ἡ ὕλη |forest |18.χάριν εἰδέναι |to be thankful |

|9. ποῖ, ποι, οἷ, ὅποι |to where?;to somewhere; whither;|19. φθείρω |ruin, spoil |

| |to where(ever) wherever | | |

|10. ἐξαίφνης |suddenly, instantly |20. ἵστημι vs ἴσταμαι |set up, stand up vs. stand |

4. Label the underlined constructions used in the following sentences.

1. λέγωμεν χαίρειν τῷ ἀξίῳ ῥάπτῃ.

Let’s say goodbye to the worthy tailor. Hortatory subjunctive

2. εἰ τὸν ἄργυρον παρέχοιμι, ἔχοιντο ἂν καλῶς.

If I would/should furnish the money, they would be well. Future less vivid conditional

3. ἡ θὰλαττα ἐφάνη λευκή.

The see seemed/appeared white. Predicate nominative.

4. ὁ στατηγος ἀγγέλει ἐσόμενος κρυπτός.

The general is announcing that he (the general) will be hidden. Subject of the indirect discourse is the same as the sentence subject.

5. οἰ τέκόντες πεμφθεῖεν τῆλε τοῦ κινδίνου. Optative of Wish

If only the parents would be sent far from the danger.

6. ταῦτα γεγραμμένα ἐστὶ τοῖς παισίν.

These things have been written by the children. Dative of Agent with a perfect verb.

7. ἡ εὑρετὴς εἷπον ὅτι λυθήσοιτο ὐπὸ τοῦ βασιλέως.

The inventor said that he would be released by the king. Future Optative in indirect discourse, genitive of agent with a passive verb.

8. ἐβουλήθημεν τὸν βασιλέα μεταπέμπεσθαι.

We wanted to summon the king. Aorist Passive Deponent

UNIT FIVE: LESSONS 51-54

Contract Verbs; Irregular Verbs; Big Four -μι Verbs

LESSON 51. CONTRACT VERBS: -έω -άω – όω

The next four lessons round out your knowledge of the Greek verb by introducing you to verbs with problematic forms. Many forms of these verbs have been reserved to the end of the course so that you could concentrate your efforts at mastering the regular -ω and -μι verbs. The endings of these regular -ω and -μι verbs are the forms that will anchor your ability to translate with ease and pleasure, and they should be reviewed often. But the verbs in these last lessons are often difficult for students to master until they meet them often while translating original texts. However, after completing these last four lessons, you will have a basic knowledge of these verbs, and if you forget some of the forms, you will be able guess their meaning or to look them up easily when reading original Greek passages. And be heartened. Many of the exercises in the closing chapters ask you to write out charts and to translate verb forms without contexts. These drills will help you begin to master these problematic forms, but once you graduate to reading texts you will find these forms easier to recognize within their contexts than you do in drills. And perhaps to encourage you throughout a parade of these verb charts and drills, remember that from now on all the passages you will be reading are original texts. If the drills sap your joy in reading these original passages, which include the full text of the Hippocratic Oath, as well as passages from the tragedians Sophocles and Euripides, then put them aside for now and concentrate on the textbook exercises and the readings. You can always return to these chapters later or do them at a slower pace. For suggestions about what to do when you have completed this course, I have a few suggestions after Lesson 54.

Now let us turn to this lesson which reviews the contract rules which you have already learned in Lessons 30 and 31 for -έω and -άω verbs, and then illustrates how these contract verbs forms their entire continuous system. In addition, the chapter introduces the final, and least used contract verb, the -όω verb.

If your memory is hazy about the contractions and forms you have already learned, consult the Textbook, pages 126-7 for -έω verbs, page 129 for -άω verbs, and the Workbook, Lessons 30 and 31.

1. The conjugation of the Continuous System for -έω verbs

The full conjugation of the -έω verbs forms is charted on page 206 of the Textbook. You will note that only the forms you have already learned must be memorized with the addition of the imperative, because the other forms are easy to recognize, once you notice how the active optative for all contract verbs has distinctive singular endings· οίην, οίης, οίη. The plural is as expected: -οῖμεν,

-οῖτε, -οῖεν.

(Exercise 1: Continuous System Forms for -έω verbs

a. After analyzing the contractions and the chart on page 206 of the Textbook, chart the Continuous of φιλέω, attempting to figure out the new verb forms by your knowledge of the contraction rules. (If you need to write out the uncontracted forms first to do so, go ahead. It’s the best way to practice contract verbs.) Even though you need not memorize all the forms, it is a helpful exercise to write them out. Check your answers on age 206 of the Textbook. After you have checked the accuracy of your chart, circle all the forms that are ambiguous.

|Continuous Active | |Continuous Middle |

|Present |Imperfect | |Present |Imperfect |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

|Subjunctive | |Subjunctive |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

|Optative | |Optative |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

|Imperative | |Imperative |

| | | |

| | | |

|Participle | |Participle |

| | | |

b. Translate the following verbs in as many ways as possible: [214]

1. φίλῃ __________________________________________________

2. ἐφίλουν __________________________________________________

3. φιλοίη ___________________________________________________

4. ἐφίλει ______________________________________________________

5. ἐφιλοῦ ______________________________________________________

6. ἡδικούμεθα ______________________________________________________

7. μισοῦ ______________________________________________________

8. καλοῦσιν ______________________________________________________

9. ζητοῖο ______________________________________________________

10. ποιεῖτε ______________________________________________________

2. The conjugation of the Continuous System for -άω verbs

The full conjugation of the -άω verbs forms is charted on page 207 of the Textbook. You will note that only the forms you have already learned must be memorized with the addition of the imperative, because the other forms are easy to recognize, once you notice how the active optative for all contract verbs has distinctive singular endings· οίην, οίης, οίη which contract for -άω verbs to

-ῴην, -ῴης , -ῴη. The plural is as expected: -ῷμεν, ῷτε, ῷεν.

(Exercise 2: Continuous System Forms for -άω verbs.

After analyzing the contractions and the chart on page 207 of the Textbook, chart the present continuous of τιμάω, attempting to figure out the new verb forms by your knowledge of the contraction rules. Even though you need not memorize all the forms, it is a helpful exercise to write them out. Check your answers on age 207 of the Textbook. After you have checked the accuracy of your chart, circle all the forms that are ambiguous. There are many ambiguous forms for -άω verbs.

|Continuous Active | |Continuous Middle |

|Present |Imperfect | |Present |Imperfect |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

|Subjunctive | |Subjunctive |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

|Optative | |Optative |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

|Imperative | |Imperative |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

|Participle | |Participle |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

b. Translate the following in as many ways as possible:[215]

1. τιμᾷ ___________________________________________________________

2. τίμα ___________________________________________________________

3. τιμῷο ____________________________________________________________

4. τιμῶ ____________________________________________________________

5. τιμᾶται[216] ___________________________________________________________

6. τιμώμεθα ___________________________________________________________

7. τιμῴμεθα___________________________________________________________

8. ἐγέλων ________________________________________________________________________________

9. ἐβοῶμεν ________________________________________________________________________________

10. ὥρας ____________________________________________________________

11. σιγᾶν ____________________________________________________________

12. ἐρωτῶν ____________________________________________________________

3. The conjugation of the Continuous System for -όω verbs

The full conjugation of the -όω verbs forms is charted on page 208 of the Textbook. Note that there are only three contractions possible for these verbs,

-ου, -ω or -οι:

ο + short vowel ε/ο or ου = ου

ο + long vowel η/ω = ω

ο + iota diphthong = οι

Note the misprint in the chart on page 208: Correct the singular optative active to: δηλοίην, δηλοίης, δηλοίη. The plural forms are correct. The chart on page 245 of the textbook has the correct forms for the singular and plural of the optative active.

(Exercise 3: Continuous System Forms for - όω verbs

a. After analyzing the contractions and the chart on page 208 of the Textbook, chart the Continuous of δηλόω, attempting to figure out the new verb forms by your knowledge of the contraction rules. Even though you are not responsible for memorizing the forms, it is a helpful exercise to write them out. Check your answers on age 208 of the Textbook. After you have checked the accuracy of your chart, circle all the forms that are ambiguous.

|Continuous Active | |Continuous Middle |

|Present |Imperfect | |Present |Imperfect |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

|Subjunctive | |Subjunctive |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

|Optative | |Optative |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

|Imperative | |Imperative |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

|Participle | |Participle |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

b. Translate the following in as many ways as possible: [217]

1. δηλοῖ ___________________________________________________________

2. δήλου ___________________________________________________________

3. δηλοῦ ____________________________________________________________

4. δηλοῖς[218] _______________________________________________

5. δηλούτω _______________________________________________

6. ἐλευθεροῦσθε _______________________________________________

7. ὠρθοῦ _______________________________________________

8. ὀρθοῦσι(ν) _______________________________________________

9. ἐλευθεροῦν _______________________________________________

10. δηλοῖο _______________________________________________

11. δηλῴη _______________________________________________

LESSON 52. CONTINUOUS FORMS OF εἶμι, εἰμί AND φημί. AORIST SYSTEMS OF ἔβην, ἔστην, ἔγνων . VERBALS ENDING IN -τέος, -α, -ον.

1. Continuous Forms of εἶμι and εἰμί.

Read page 210 in the Textbook about the forms of εἶμι and εἰμί and their stems. If you practice the forms of εἰμί periodically, the distinction between the two verbs will be quite clear. Notice the following:

• the Continuous indicative forms of εἰμί are enclitic, except for the second person singular εἶ. This is the only form of εἰμί identicial to εἶμι. Thus, εἶ = you are or you go, you will go.

• the circumflex on the first syllable of the other singular present continuous indicative forms (εἶμι, εἶ, εἶσι(ν) is a big clue that these are not from the enclitic εἰμί.

• the third singular of the present continuous form for εἶμι except for accentuation is spelled the same as the third plural for εἰμί. Once again, remembering that εἶμι is accented on the first syllable is a help: εἶσι(ν), (s)he it goes, (s)he, it will go vs. εἰσί(ν), they are.

• The imperfect of both verbs have forms that can be confused. Notice, that εἶμι, except for the alternative imperfect first person singular (ἦα) has an iota dipthong or an iota subscript. εἰμί in the imperfect has no forms with an iota subscript or an iota diphthong. Therefore is is easy to identify the difference, for example, between ᾔεισθα (you were going) vs. ἦσθα (you were) or ᾔμεν (we were going) vs. ἦμεν (we were).

• The subjunctive, optative, imperative, infinitive and participle of εἶμι all begin with an iota. εἰμί has only one form that begins with an iota, the imperative ἴσθι which contains the sigma of the stem which often drops

( compare to ἴθι, go!). Thus, almost all the other forms are easy to recognize and distinguish. However, be careful with the subjunctive forms of εἰμί in the second and third person (ᾖς, ᾖ). The iota subscript might confuse you. Just remember that these are the only forms of εἰμί with an iota subscript.

(Exercise 1. The Forms of εἶμι

a. After analyzing the Textbook and Workbook remarks on εἶμι , chart the forms of εἶμι twice. Check your answers after the first full chart with the chart and page 210, and then cover over your answers and fill out the second chart .

|Continuous Active εἶμι | |Continuous Active εἶμι |

|Present |Imperfect | |Present |Imperfect |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

|Subjunctive | |Subjunctive |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

|Optative | |Optative |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

|Imperative | |Imperative |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

|Participle | |Participle |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

b. Translate the following verb form pairs. Some forms may have more than one answer, so be thorough. [219]

1. ἦα / ἦ _______________________________________________

2. ἴσθι / ἵθι ________________________________________________

3. ἦμεν / ᾖμεν [220] ________________________________________________

4. ἴοιεν/ εἶεν ________________________________________________

5. ᾖς / ᾔει _________________________________________________

6. ᾖτε/ ἦτε __________________________________________________

7. εἶναι / ἰέναι __________________________________________________

8. ἔστε/ ἴτε __________________________________________________

9. ᾔειν/ ἦν __________________________________________________

10. ᾔεσαν/ ἦσαν __________________________________________________

2. Continuous Forms of φημί.

You have already met this verb in many of the stories you have read. It is enclitic in the present continuous indicative and its stem is φη-/φα-. Except for the ambiguous form φῄς (either second person indicative or second person subjunctive), and the alternate form for the participle, φάσκων, φάσκουσα, φάσκον, the forms are easy to recognize.

(Exercise 2. Recognizing the Forms of φημί.

a. After reading and analyzing the Textbook, page 210, about the forms φημί chart the forms of φημί twice. Check your answers after the first full chart with the chart and page 210, and then cover over your answers and fill out the second chart .

|Continuous Active φημί | |Continuous Active φημί |

|Present |Imperfect | |Present |Imperfect |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

|Subjunctive | |Subjunctive |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

|Optative | |Optative |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

|Imperative | |Imperative |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

|Participle | |Participle |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

b. Translate the following verb forms in as many ways as possible:[221]

1. φάν τα _______________________________________

2. ἔφῃς _______________________________________

3. ἔφη _______________________________________

4. φῄς ________________________________________

5. φάιη ________________________________________

6. φᾶσι(ν) _________________________________________

7. φασί(ν) _________________________________________

8. φάτε _________________________________________

9. φάναι _________________________________________

10. φῶ __________________________________________

3. Aorist Systems of Athematic Verbs

You have already learned about the indicative, infinitive and participle of these special aorists on page 120 of the Textbook and Lesson 28 of the Workbook. Review those pages as well as page 211 of the Textbook. All the endings of these verbs are familiar to you. However, correct the Textbook listing for the special optative endings. They should be: -ιην, -ιης, -ιη, -ιμεν, -ιτε, -ιεν.

(Exercise 3. Recognizing the Forms of ἔβην, ἔστην, ἔγνων

a. Chart the forms of ἔστην and ἔγνων . Correct your answers with the Textbook, page 211.

|Aorist Active ἔστην | |Aorist Active ἔγνων |

|Present |Imperfect | |Present |Imperfect |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

|Subjunctive | |Subjunctive |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

|Optative | |Optative |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

|Imperative | |Imperative |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

|Participle | |Participle |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

b. Translate the following verb forms in as many ways as possible. This exercises includes the three verbs listed under the charts on page 211 of the Textbook. [222]

1. βάντων ________________________________________________

2. ἔφυς ________________________________________________

3. σταῖμεν ________________________________________________

4. ἐχάρησαν _________________________________________________

5. γνῶτε _________________________________________________

6. βᾶσαι __________________________________________________

7. γνῶναι __________________________________________________

8. χαρῆτε __________________________________________________

9. στῇ __________________________________________________

10. βᾶσι(ν) __________________________________________________

11. ἔδυ __________________________________________________

12. γνοῦσαι __________________________________________________

13. ἔγνω __________________________________________________

14. ἔστησαν __________________________________________________

15. βαίη __________________________________________________

4. Verbal Adjectives Ending in -τεος,-α, -ον.

Read the explanation of verbal adjectives ending in -τεος,-α, -ον and analyze the examples given on page 211 of the Textbook.

(Exercise 4.Translating Verbal Adjectives of Necessity[223]

1. οἱ παῖδες ὑμῖν ἐισι σωτέοι. ________________________________________

2. ἡ πόλις τοῖς στρατιώταις διαβατέα (διαβαινω, cross).

____________________________________________________________________

3. τοὺς ποταμοὺς διαβατέον. ____________________________________________

4. τὴν κύλικα δοτέον ________________________________________________

LESSON 53. τίθημι, ἵημι.

The last two chapters of the course focus on four important -μι verbs; τίθημι, ἵημι, ἵστημι, δίδωμι. Τhese verbs are athematic in the continuous system and have certain peculiarities in their aorists. You will see the verbs often when you are reading original texts and need to be able to recognize their forms. However, many students find themselves overwhelmed when meeting these four verbs. Do your best to keep in mind the conjugations of the verbs and realize that you will have ample time to master them fully after meeting them often when reading original texts.

1. The Continuous Active of τίθημι.

Read the Textbook, page 214 and analyze the Active Continuous chart. Notice the following:

• You have already learned the present indicative personal endings for

–μι verbs when you learned δείκνυμι: -μι, -ς, -σι, -μεν, -τε, -ασι(ν). Αnd although it didn’t change the spelling for δείκνυμι (δεικνῡ vs. δεικνῠ), the stem vowel for –μι verbs is long in the singular and short in the plural. Hence the continuous stem for τίθημι is τιθη- for the singular, τιθε- for the plural:

τίθημι τίθεμεν

τίθης τίθετε

τίθησι(ν) τιθέασι(ν)

• The normal imperfect indicative endings for -μι verbs, as you have learned for δείκνυμι, are -ν, -ς, -, -μεν, -τε, -σαν, and here too the singular normally has a long stem and the plural a short one. However, τίθημι and some other related verbs, borrow endings from –ω verbs in the second and third person singular and use the short stem:

ἐτίθην -μι verb ending on the long stem

ἐτίθεις -ω verb ending –ες which contracts with the short stem. You have seen this contraction in the imperfect of -εω verbs.

ἐτίθει ω verb ending –ε which contracts with the short stem. You have seen this contraction in the imperfect of -εω verbs.

ἐτίθεμεν the rest of the plural uses -μι verb endings on the short stem.

ἐτίθετε

ἐτίθεσαν

• The subjunctive endings are the same as -ω verbs, placed upon the short stem and therefore the endings contract:

τιθῶ τιθῶμεν

τιθῇς τιθῆτε

τιθῇ τιθῶσι(ν)

• Τhe optative endings use the special endings that you have seen for εἰμί, φημί, and athematic aorists: -ιην, -ιης, -ιη, -ιμεν, -ιτε, -ιεν:

τιθείην τιθεῖμεν

τιθείης τιθεῖτε

τιθείη τιθεῖεν

Be careful not to confuse these forms with aorist passive optatives: (e.g.τιθείης, continuous active optative, vs. παυθείης, aorist passive optative.

• Except for the second person singular, which borrows an –ω stem ending οn the short stem resulting in a contraction, the imperative is as expected:

τίθει τίθετε

τιθέτω τιθέντων

• Τhe infinitive ending is –ναι (as you have seen with other -μι verbs), with the accent on the next to last syllable:

τιθέναι

• The participle ends in είς, εῖσα, έν, with the accent on the episilon or epsilon diphthong. Here too be careful, since the resulting participle, τιθείς, τιθεῖσα, τιθέν, resembles an aorist passive participle.

• The bold entries of ambiguous forms on these charts are not readily visible. To make them more visible, underline the forms in bold in both charts.

(Exercise 1. Charting τίθημι

Chart the continuous Active forms for the verb τίθημι. Check your answers on page 214 of the Textbook. Leave the aorist section blank for now.

|Continuous Active τίθημι | |Aorist Active τίθημι |

|Present |Imperfect | |Present |Imperfect |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

|Subjunctive | |Subjunctive |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

|Optative | |Optative |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

|Imperative | |Imperative |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

|Participle | |Participle |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

2. The Aorist Active of τίθημι

Analyze the chart on page 214 for the Active Aorist of τίθημι. Νotice the following:

• there are two stems in the aorist active. The singular has a stem θηκ- and uses the -σα endings of the -ω verb. The plural reverts to θε- as its stem and uses -μι verbs secondary endings. The disappearing kappa in the singular will be encountered in other -μι verbs:

ἔθηκα ἔθεμεν

ἔθηκας ἔθετε

ἔθηκε(ν) ἔθεσαν

• The subjunctive, optative, infinitive and participle are all based on the θε- stem and follow the formations seen in the active continuous system.

• Similarly, the imperative also follows the formations seen in the active continuous system, except for the 2nd singular imperative: θές.

• The bold entries of ambiguous forms on these charts are not readily visible. To make them more visible, underline the forms in bold.

(Exercise 2. τίθημι

a. Chart the Active Aorist forms for the verb τίθημι on the chart you began on the previous page of the Workbook. Check your answers on page 214 of the Textbook.

b. Translate the following verb form in as many ways as possible, making aspect clear:

1. τίθετε [224] ___________________________________________

2. θεῖμεν ___________________________________________

3. τιθῆτε ____________________________________________

4. θῶσιν ____________________________________________

5. θές ____________________________________________

6. τιθεῖσι(ν) ____________________________________________

7. θέντωv ____________________________________________

8. τίθει ____________________________________________

9. ἔθηκε(ν) ______________________________________________

10. τιθέασι ______________________________________________

11. ἐτίθει ______________________________________________

3. The Middle/Passive Continuous of τίθημι

Analyze the chart on page 214 for the Μiddle/Passive Continuous of τίθημι. Νotice the following:

• The primary and secondary verb endings you learned for –ω verbs are the same for –μι verbs in the continuous middle/ passive.

• the present and imperfect continuous is formed on the stem τιθε- with NO contractions.

• the subjunctive is formed on the stem τιθε- and contracts with the epsilon of the stem.

• the optative endings are -ειμην, -ειο, -ειτο, -ειμεθα, -εισθε, -ειντο.

• the second person imperative does NOT contract. In short, only the subjunctive and optative 2nd person singular forms contract.

(Exercise 3. The Continuous Middle/Passive of τίθημι

a. Chart the Continuous Middle/Passive forms for the verb τίθημι. Check your answers on page 214 of the Textbook. Leave the aorist section blank for now.

|Continuous Middle/Passive τίθημι | |Aorist Middle τίθημι |

|Present |Imperfect | |Present |Imperfect |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

|Subjunctive | |Subjunctive |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

|Optative | |Optative |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

|Imperative | |Imperative |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

|Participle | |Participle |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

4. The Principal Parts of τίθημι.

Read the top of page 214 of the Textbook, and you will find the six principal parts of τίθημι. Notice the following:

• As you have seen above the aorist active has three forms with a kappa: ἔθηκα, ἔθηκας, ἔθηκε(ν). Do not confuse them with the perfect and pluperfect active: τέθηκα and ἐτεθήκη You will see other verbs that have a kappa in the aorist, but all such aorists are never reduplicated.

• There is an aorist passive principal part. Do not translate aorist middles as passives.

5. The Aorist Middle of τίθημι.

The aorist middle follows the same formulation as the aorist active, EXCEPT that all second person singulars contract, unlike the continuous middle/passive where only the subjunctive and optative second person singulars contract.

(Exercise 5. τίθημι.

a. Chart the Aorist Middle forms for the verb τίθημι on the chart you began on the previous page of the Workbook. Check your answers on page 214 of the Textbook.

b. Translate the following verb forms in as many ways as possible, making aspect clear. There will be some perfect system forms as well as aorist passive forms included in this exercise. And some ambiguous forms may be active as well as middle / passive:

1. θῇ [225] ___________________________________________________

2. τίθεσο ___________________________________________________

3. ἔθου ___________________________________________________

4. τέθηκας ___________________________________________________

5. θέσθε ___________________________________________________

6. ἐτίθεντο ___________________________________________________

7. θέμενοι ___________________________________________________

8. ἐτέθη ___________________________________________________

9. τιθῇ ___________________________________________________

10. ἐτεθήκει ___________________________________________________

6. Compounds of τίθημι and Aorist Passive Forms.

As the bottom of page 214 of the Textbook notes, there are a number of compounds of τίθημι and their forms may be easily confused with aorist passives of other verbs.

(Exercise 6. Compounds of τίθημι.

Translate the following verb forms:[226]

1. συνθεῖσαι _______________________________________

2. πραχθέν _______________________________________

3. σωθείη _______________________________________

4. μεταθῶ _______________________________________

5. κριθέντος _______________________________________

6. προσθείς _______________________________________

7. καταθείην _______________________________________

7. The Active Continuous and Aorist of ἵημι

After reading page 215 and analyzing the active continuous chart for ἵημι, notice the following:

• The endings for ἵημι in the active continuous are exactly the same as they are for τίθημι built on -ιη/ιε. Note, however, that the imperfect does not seem to have a time marker, although the long iota is the time marker. However, the iota is long throughout the conjugation, so some forms, even if the long vowels are marked are ambiguous The stem is ιη/ιε, and has the same contractions in the second person and third person as τίθημι. For some people, taking a verb chart and changing every τίθ-/ ἐτίθ-/ with a single iota with rough breathing makes clear all the forms of the continuous active. Because the stem for ἵημι is so short and sometimes disappears, this may be a helpful way to cement these forms in your memory.

• The endings for ἵημι in the Active Aorist Indicative are exactly the same as they are for τίθημι, built on the stem –ἑ which results in the singular aorist (with time marker) as ἧκα, ἧκας, ἧκε(ν). These forms sometimes appear on their own, but much more commonly appear only in compounds. In the plural, the forms are found only in compounds. Notice that, as usual the kappa disappears, and the stem contracts: -εἶμεν, -εἶτε, -εἶεν. The first and second person plural are therefore ambiguous, for they are the same as the optative first and second person plural. This ambiguity does not occur in the paradigm for τίθημι.

• In the remainder of the active aorist, this verb appears only in compounds. Further the stem seems to disappear, so that only the endings seem to be used. Here again, the endings are exactly the same as for the verb τίθημι. So in the aorist subjunctive, optative, imperative, infinitive and participle, if you replace every θ- in the paradigm for τίθημι with an iota with a rough breathing, you will have all these forms correct.

• The accent in compounds remains in the same place it would have appeared in an uncompounded form, except for the second person singular and plural imperative where the accent is recessive. (This is true for the aorist imperative also.) The rough breathing often, but not always, is seen in the compound by aspiration of the prefix (ἀφίημι (ἀπό) throw away, μεθίημι (μετά) relax, permit, ἐφίημι (ἐπί), send on, yield, but παρίημι (παρά) let pass, allow, forgive.

• Compound forms may lose their initial iota and be discerned merely by the aspirated consonant of the prefix.

• The bold entries of ambiguous forms on these charts are not readily visible. To make them more visible, underline the forms in bold.

(Exercise 7. The Active Forms of ἵημι

a. Chart the Active Continuous and Active Aorist forms for the verb ἵημι. Check your answers on page 215 of the Textbook.

|Continuous Active ἵημι | |Aorist Active ἵημι |

|Present |Imperfect | |Present |Imperfect |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

|Subjunctive | |Subjunctive |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

|Optative | |Optative |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

|Imperative | |Imperative |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

|Participle | |Participle |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

b. Translate the following forms, some of which are the compound forms listed above:[227]

1. ἵεις ____________________________________________

2. ἧκας ____________________________________________

3. ἵην ____________________________________________

4. ἵεμεν ____________________________________________

5. ἱείην ____________________________________________

6. ἱέναι ____________________________________________

7. ἀφεῖναι ____________________________________________

8. μεθείς ____________________________________________

9. ἵησι ____________________________________________

10. ἔφες ____________________________________________

11. παρεῖσαν ____________________________________________

12. ἵεσαν ____________________________________________

13. ἄφες ____________________________________________

14. μεθεῖμεν ____________________________________________

8. The Middle/Passive Continuous and the Aorist Middle Forms of ἵημι.

Analyze the chart on page 215 of the Textbook for the Middle/Passive Continuous and the Aorist forms of ἵημι and notice the following:

• The Middle/Passive Continuous forms follow the same format we have seen in the Active Continuous: if you replace every τιθ- or ἐτιθ- with an iota with rough breathing, you will have all the forms correct.

• The Middle Aorist is not found except in compound verbs.

• In the Middle Aorist, εἱ- occurs before every ending. Thus, every form of the indicative resembles the optative except the second person singular. The indicative does not contract although the optative does. The indicative is the only mood in this paradigm which does not look like τίθημι.

• Ιn the rest of the paradigm, replace every θ- with an iota with rough breathing and you will have all the forms correct.

(Exercise 8. The Middle/Passive Forms of ἵημι

a. Chart the Middle/Passive Continuous and Middile Aorist forms for the verb ἵημι. Check your answers on page 215 of the Textbook.

|Continuous Middle/Passive of ἵημι | |Aorist Μiddle of ἵημι |

|Present |Imperfect | |Present |Imperfect |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

|Subjunctive | |Subjunctive |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

|Optative | |Optative |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

|Imperative | |Imperative |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

|Participle | |Participle |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

b. Translate the following forms in as many ways as possible:[228]

1. ἱέμεθα ________________________________________

2. ἱῇ ________________________________________

3. ἵεσο ________________________________________

4. ἄφου ________________________________________

5. ἱέμενοι ________________________________________

6. ἱεῖο ________________________________________

LESSON 54. ἵστημι, δίδωμι.

This lesson introduces a verb (ἵστημι) that has different principal parts for different meanings and which will require careful examination, as well as as a verb (δίδωμι) whose principal parts are straightforward and some of whose forms you have been using since the opening days of the course.

1. Principal parts of ἵστημι.

Τhe principal parts for ἵστημι are listed for you at the top of page 217 of the Textbook. Ιt is important to memorize all these principal parts with their meanings because knowing them well will save you lots of frustration when you are reading original texts. Write them over and over until you can easily recall them and their meanings.

2. Τhe conjugation of ἵστημι in the continuous.

Analyze the first two columns of the conjugation of this verb on page 217, and notice the following:

• the active continuous follows all the formations we have seen for -μι verbs, built on the stems -ἱστη/-ἱστα-. Be aware that the the imperative second person singular ἵστη is the same as the 3rd singular of the imperfect.

• Αltough it appears that the imperfect has no time marker, the long iota, as the Textbook notes, functions as a time marker. If Greek texts had long marks, it would be easy to tell the difference between the first and second person plural active and middle/passive present and imperfect forms. But without the long mark, those forms are ambiguous.

• The middle/passive continuous also follows all the formulations we have so far encountered, with 2nd person contractions occurring only in the subjunctive and optative. Be aware that the second person singular subjunctive is the same form as the active third person singular subjunctive.

(Exercise 2. The Continuous Forms of ἵστημι.

Chart the Active and Middle/Passive Continuous Check your answers on page 217 of the Textbook. Be sure to include all possible meanings as part of the chart.

|Continuous Active | |Continuous Middle/Passive |

|Meanings: | |Meanings: |

| | | |

|Present |Imperfect | |Present |Imperfect |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

|Subjunctive | |Subjunctive |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

|Optative | |Optative |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

|Imperative | |Imperative |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

|Participle | |Participle |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

3. The Intransitive Aorist Active and the Intransitive Perfect Active of ἵστημι.

Analyze the second two columns of the conjugation of this verb on page 217, and notice the following:

• The intransitive aorist follows all the formulations we have seen so far for special athematic aorists, like ἔβην.

• The intransitive perfect is also somewhat consistent with the formulations we have seen for -ω verb perfects, but there are a number of variations.

1. Verbs beginning with στ- (as you have learned) reduplicate by adding an episilon so that the perfect stem for ἵστημι is ἑστηκ- in the indicative singular and the augmented pluperfect indicative stem is εἱστηκ-. in the pluperfect singular.

2. Except for the perfect indicative and the singular of the pluperfect, the rest of the paradigm is formed on a stem without a kappa (ἑστα-) which makes the forms more difficult to recognize.

2. The 3rd person indicative has an unusual accent, ἑστᾶσι(ν) and is not recessive as is the norm: πεπαύκασι(ν).

3. The pluperfect first and second person plural do not have an epsilon as is the norm (ἐπεπαύκεμεν/ ἐπεπαύκετε), but an alpha: ἕσταμεν, ἕστατε. These forms are exactly the same as the perfect first and second person plural.

4. Νon-periphrastic forms are found in the subjunctive, optative and imperative. (Such forms do exist for other verbs, but are rarely used.)

5. The nominative of the feminine participle is -ῶσα (genitive: ώσης) rather than the normal -υῖα (genitive: -υίας)

(Exercise 3. The Active Intransitive Aorist and Perfect of ἵστημι.

a. Chart the Active Intransitive and Perfect. Check your answers with the charts on page 211 and 217 of the Textbook. Be sure to include all possible meanings as part of the chart.

|Intransitive Aorist Active | |Intransitive Perfect Active |

|Meanings: | |Meanings: |

| | | |

|Present |Imperfect | |Present |Imperfect |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

|Subjunctive | |Subjunctive |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

|Optative | |Optative |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

|Imperative | |Imperative |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

|Participle | |Participle |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

b. Translate the following verb forms in as many ways as possible.[229] Remember that the continuous stem is ἱστη-/ἱστα-. The intransitive aorist stem -στη-/στα-. The perfect stems without a kappa are ἑστ-/εἱστ-.

1. ἑσταίη __________________________________________

2. σταίη __________________________________________

3. ἱσταίη __________________________________________

4. ἵστασθε __________________________________________

5. εἱστηκη[230] __________________________________________

6. στάντων __________________________________________

7. ἕσταθι __________________________________________

8. στῆθι __________________________________________

9. ἵστασο __________________________________________

10. ἑστᾶσι __________________________________________

11. ἵστη __________________________________________

12. ἔστη __________________________________________

13. ἱστῇ __________________________________________

14. ἑστῶσαι ___________________________________________

15. ἱστάντι ____________________________________________

16. στάντι ____________________________________________

17. ἑστάναι ____________________________________________

4. The Active Continuous and Aorist Forms of δίδωμι.

Analyze the active chart for δίδωμι on page 218 of the Textbook and notice the following:

• This verb has the same endings we have seen in other -μι verbs, but because the stem ends in -ω, -ου, -ο, the forms have a few peculiarities.

• like other -μι verbs, the singular of the indicative forms in both the continuous and aorist have a long stem in the singular and a short in the plural: διδω-/διδου-/δω- in the singular, but διδο-/δο- in the plural.

• the disappearing kappa, as seen elsewhere, appears in the aorist singular.

• the subjunctive has only one vowel, -ω or -ῳ.

(Exercise 4. The Active Forms of δίδωμι

Chart the Active Continuous and Active Aorist forms for the verb ἵημι. Check your answers on page 218 of the Textbook.

|Continuous Active δίδωμι | |Aorist Active δίδωμι |

|Present |Imperfect | |Present |Imperfect |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

|Subjunctive | |Subjunctive |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

|Optative | |Optative |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

|Imperative | |Imperative |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

|Participle | |Participle |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

5. The Middle/Passive Continuous and the Middle Aorist

After analyzing the second chart on page 218, notice the following:

• the root for the middle is διδο-or δο- for all forms, except the characteristic -ω in the subjunctive

• as in other such verbs, there is no contraction in second person singulars except in the subjunctive and optative.

• two forms are ambiguous. The second person subjunctive continuous middle/passive is the same form as the third person subjunctive active. and the 2nd person middle aorist subjunctive is the same form and the third person aorist active.

(Exercise 5 . The Middle Passive Continuous and Middle Aorist Forms of δίδωμι

a. Chart the Middle/Passive Continuous and Middle Aorist forms for the verb δίδωμι. Check your answers on page 218 of the Textbook.

|Continuous Middle/Passive δίδωμι | |Aorist Middle δίδωμι |

|Present |Imperfect | |Present |Imperfect |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

| | | | | |

|Subjunctive | |Subjunctive |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

|Optative | |Optative |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

|Imperative | |Imperative |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

|Participle | |Participle |

| | | |

| | | |

| | | |

b. Translate the following forms in as many ways as possible:[231]

1. δίδου ________________________________________

2. δῷ ________________________________________

3. δόσθαι ________________________________________

4. διδόντες _________________________________________

5. δοίμην _________________________________________

6. δός _________________________________________

7. ἔδοσαν _________________________________________

FINAL WORDS

Congratulations. You have worked your way through the entire course and are ready to read original texts. You should periodically review your verbs and do verb chart synopses, particularly of the -ω verbs, and different cases and genders of the participles (which will keep your noun forms fresh). In the appendix is a chart of all the constructions you have learned, and these too should be periodically reviewed. Reviewing regular verbs, εἰμι, and case and verb contructions will anchor you as you navigate through original texts.

If you are an auto-didact, and are wondering about texts that you might read on your own, Geoffrey Steadman offers many texts with Facing Vocabulary and Commentary; all of his texts are suitable for students who have completed this course. Just enter his name into a search engine and you will find the Greek authors and works he has edited for intermediate students. Most students find his editions particularly helpful.

You might also consider Eros at the Banquet by Louise Pratt. It reviews Greek syntax (tied to her Essentials of Greek Grammar: a Reference for Intermediate Readers of Attic Greek) by reading Plato’s Symposium and has extensive notes and vocabulary. Its format, however, is not as clear and straightforward as Steadman’s, but you might find the review material helpful.

You should realize that some terminology in editions of Greek authors will differ from the terms used in Ancient Greek Alive. Take particular note that what we have called the Continuous System is usually called the Present System, and that the paradigm for declensions ordinarily lists the forms as Nominative, Genitive., Dative , and Accusative. The A- Group declension is ordinarily called the First Declension, the O-Group the Second. What we have been calling the time marker is usually called an Augment, -σα Aorists are usually called first Aorists, ε/ο Aorists are Second or Strong Aorists.

With any edition that provides extensive notes and vocabulary on the same or facing pages, it is important to cover over the notes and reread the plain Greek text with no penciled annotations as much as you can. Eventually you will want to move on to other editions without such helps, such as the Cambridge series.

New Testament Greek is also well within your capabilities ( the syntax is much easier than any of the previous recommendations). The Nestle Aland 28th Revised Edition of the Greek New Testament with Revised Greek-English Dictionary is a useful edition with a dictionary in the back of the book.

Whatever you choose to read, you should install a Greek font on your phone and your computer. You may already be familiar with the Perseus Greek Word Study Tool:

This tool identifies forms and allows you to look up words in several dictionaries: the full Liddell and Scott; the intermediate Liddell and Scott, Autenreith, a Homeric dictionary, and Slater, a Pindar lexicon. Originally, you had to use transliterations to enter the word you wish to identify in Perseus, but now you are able to just type in the Greek without breathing or accents. Be aware that sometimes the word study tool inexplicably doesn’t always have the form you are looking for, or may have too many variations, listing all the dialectal forms when you only want the Attic form.

Although looking up words online is always possible, it is helpful to have a dictionary. Liddell and Scott’s Intermediate Greek-English Lexicon would be a good choice if you choose to read Classical authors. And for New Testament Greek, I like A Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament and Other Early Christian Literaure, by Bauer, Arndt and Gingrich.

χαίρετε, ὦ φίλοι

APPENDIX

1. Relative Pronouns

2. Third Group Case Endings: Lessons 13-22

3. Case Constructions

4. Forms of “Be” “Go” and Look-alikes

5. Verb Constructions

6. Comparison of Subjunctive and Optative Uses

7. Verb Charts: Active

8. Verbs Charts: Middle

9. Verb Charts: Passive

For a full verb chart with all voices on a single page, see

1. THE RELATIVE PRONOUN: LESSON 12

|Case |Masculine |Feminine |Neuter |

|N |ὅς |ἥ |ὅ |

|A |ὅν |ἥν |ὅ |

|G |οὗ |ἧς |οὗ |

|D |ᾧ |ᾗ |ᾧ |

| | | | |

|N |οἵ |αἵ |ἅ |

|A |οὕς |ἅς |ἅ |

|G |ὧν |ὧν |ὧν |

|D |οἷς |αἷς |οἷς |

2. THIRD GROUP CASE ENDINGS

|Case |Masculine/Feminine |Neuter |M/F Contracts * |Neuter Contracts* |

|N |Variable (-ων, -ας, -ς) |(ον, α) |-ης |-ος, -ες |

|A |-α, -ν |(ον, α) |-η (-εσα) |-ος, -ες |

|G |-ος |-ος |-ους (-εσος) |-ους (-εσος) |

|D |-ι |-ι |-ει (-εσι) |-ει (-εσι) |

| | | | | |

|N |-ες |-α |-εις (-εσες) |-η (-εσα) |

|A |-ας |-α |-εις (-εσας, but imitates |-η (-εσα) |

| | | |the nominative) | |

|G |-ων |-ων |-ων (-εσων) |-ων (-εσων) |

|D |-σι |-σι |-εσι (-εσσι) |-εσι (-εσσι) |

* The sigma in the stem drops out and the vowels contract.

3. CASE CONSTRUCTIONS

|Nominative |Accusative |Genitive |Dative |

|1. Subject |1. Direct Object |1. Possession |1. Indirect Object |

|2. Predicate |2. Part Affected |2. Partitive |2. Means or Instrument |

|Nominative | | | |

| |3. Extent of Space |3. Partitive with |3. Manner |

| | |ἀκούω, αἰσθάνομαι | |

| |4. Extent of Time or Duration |4. Genitive of Time |4. Time When |

| | |Within Which | |

| |5. End of Motion = Place to |5. Place From Which |5. Place Where (often with ἐν, ἐπί, παρά, περί) |

| |Which (often with εἰς, ἐπί, ἐς,|(often with ἀπό, ἐκ, | |

| |παρά, πρός) |ἐξ) | |

| |6. Object of Prepositions: |6. Object of |6. Object of prepositions: σύν |

| |διά, κατά, μετά, περί |Prepositions: ἄνευ, | |

| | |ἀντί, ἐπί, περί, πλήν, | |

| | |τῆλε | |

| |7. Subject of Infinitives in |7. Separation |7..Dative with Verbs of Emotion |

| |Indirect Discourse | | |

|3. Predicate To |8. Predicate Accusative of |8. Comparison |8. Dative of Possessor |

|Agree with Subject |Linking Verbs in Indirect | | |

|of Main Verb in |Discourse | | |

|Indirect Discourse | | | |

| |9. Subject of Infinitives in |9. Genitive with |9. Dative of Advantage/Disadvantage |

| |Probable Result, Complementary |verbs: λανθάνομαι, | |

| |and Articular Infinitives |κοινωνέω, χρῄζω | |

| |10. Subject of Infinitives |10. Genitive with |10. Dative of Degree of Difference: He was much |

| |with verbs of necessity (χρή) |adjectives:ἄξιος |(= by much) bigger. |

| |and possibility (ἔστι) | | |

| |11. Adverbial Accusative, |11. Genitive Absolute |11. Dative with Verbs: χράομαι, διαλέγομαι, |

| |“Finally” | |ὁμολογέω, ἐντυγχάνω, πείθομαι, πιστεύω, δοκέω |

| |12. Double Accusative, “He made|12. Genitive of |12, After certain adjectives like ἴσος, φίλος |

| |him rich” |Personal Agent with ὑπό| |

| |13. Cognate: He wept many | |13. Dative of Agent with Perf.Passives and with |

| |tears” | |Verbal Adjectives ending in τέος, α, ον |

4. FORMS OF “BE” AND ITS LOOK-ALIKES

|Forms of εἰμι |Features |Look Alike Forms |Features |

|εἶ (you are) |smooth, circumflex |εἰ (if) |smooth, no accent |

|ἦ (I was) |smooth, circumflex |ἡ (the) |rough, no accent |

|ἦ (I was) |smooth, circumflex |ἥ (who) |rough, acute |

|ἦ (I was) |smooth, circumflex |ἤ (or) |smooth, acute |

|ἦν (I / he, she, it was) |smooth, circumflex |ἥν (whom) |rough, acute |

|ἦν (I / he, she, it was) |smooth, circumflex |ἤν (if ever) |smooth, acute |

|ὦ (should I be) |smooth, circumflex |ὦ (oh) |smooth, circumflex, but used with |

| | | |Voc. |

|ὦ (should I be) |smooth, circumflex |ᾧ (to whom) |rough, circumflex, iota subscript |

|ᾖς (should you be) |smooth, circumflex, iota subscript |ἧς (of whom, whose) |rough, circumflex, no iota |

| | | |subscript |

|ᾖ (should he, she, it be) |smooth, circumflex, iota subscript |ᾗ (to or for whom) |rough, circumflex, iota subscript |

|ὤν (he being) |smooth, acute |ὧν (of whom, whose) |rough, circumflex |

|ὄν (it being) |smooth, acute |ὅν (whom) |rough, acute |

FORMS OF “BE” AND “GO” LOOK-ALIKES

|Forms of εἰμι |Features |Forms of εἶμι |Features |

|εἰμί (I am) |enclitic |εἶμι (I go, will go) |circumflex on first syllable |

|εἶ (you are) |circumflex on first syllable |εἶ (you go, will go) |circumflex on first syllable; same |

| | | |form |

|εἰσι(ν) (they are) |enclitic |εἶσι(ν) (s)he, it goes, will go |circumflex on first syllable |

|ἦμεν (we were) |no iota subscript on first |ᾖμεν (we were going) |subscript on first syllable |

| |syllable | | |

|ἦτε (you were) |no iota subscript on first |ᾖτε (you were going) |subscript on first syllable |

| |syllable | | |

|ἦσαν (they were) |no iota subscript on first |ᾖσαν (they were going) |subscript on first syllable |

| |syllable | | |

5. VERB CONSTRUCTIONS

|Indicative |Infinitive |Participle |Optative |Subjunctive |

|1. Main Verb of a Sentence |1. Complementary |1. Modifies an implied or|1. Wish “If only he would |1. Hortatory: Let’s. Urges |

| | |expressed noun |leave”, M.V. |as the main verb of a sentence|

|2. Ingressive Aorist, “he fell|2. Articular Infinitive |2. Genitive Absolute, |2. Potential, “He might |2. Deliberative “What should |

|in love” | |“with the friends staying”|leave” (needs ἄν) |we do” as main verb |

|3. Verb of a Subordinate ὅτι,|3. Infinitive in Indirect|3. Participle in Indirect |3. In Indirect Discourse |3. Prohibition, |

|ὡς Indirect Disc. Clause |Discourse |Discourse |ὅτι clauses after |”Don’t X”, Aorist only, M.V. |

| | | |secondary MV | |

|4. Verb in Subordinate Actual|4. Infinitive in Probable|4. Future Part. of Purpose|4.Past Sequence Purpose |4. Subordinate Purpose Clause |

|Result ὥστε Clause, “so that |Result ὥστε Clause |with Verbs of Motion |Clause: “He did this so |“so that he should X” |

|he X’ed” | |“Froggie Went A-Courting” |that they would leave” | |

|5. Verb in Subordinate πρίν |5. With πρίν, “before | |5. Past Sequence Fear |5. Subordinate Fear Clause, |

|clause, “Until he left” |leaving” | |Clause:” He was afraid |“lest he should X” |

| | | |lest they would leave” | |

|6. (Imperfect) Verb in Present|6. Infinitive with verbs | |6. Past General Cond., “If|6. Present General Cond., “If |

|Contrary to Fact, “If I were |of necessity (χρή) and | |I would, I used to… |ever I should X, I always…” |

|rich, he would be happy.” |possibility (ἔστι) | | | |

|7. (Aorist) Verb in Past |7. Future Complementary | |7.Future Less Vivid: “If I|Future More Vivid , “If ever I|

|Contrary to Fact, “If I had |Infinitive after “intend, | |would/should) X, I would |should X, I will” |

|been rich, he would have been |promise, hope” | | | |

|happy”. | | | | |

|8. Gnomic Aorist: “A fool | | |8. Opt. in Opt Sequence: | |

|learns (ἔμαθε) by suffering”. | | |“He might say things which| |

| | | |you would not like” | |

|9.Conative Imperfect: “they | | | | |

|were trying to win” | | | | |

|10. Impossible Wish: | | | | |

|Imperfect/Aorist | | | | |

Imperative: Gives a command as a Main Verb

6. COMPARISON OF SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE USES

|SUBJUNCTIVE |OPTATIVE |

| A. Independent Uses | A. Independent Uses |

|1. Hortatory: Let’s release. λύωμεν. |1. Wish: If only he would release. (εἴθε/εἰ γὰρ) λύοι. |

|2. Deliberative: Shall we release. λύωμεν; |2. Potential: He might release |

| |λύοι ἄν. |

|3. Negative Prohibition (aorist): Don’t release, μὴ λύσῃς. |X |

| B. Conditional Sentences | B. Conditional Sentences (Optative MUST be used in these |

| |Conditionals) |

|Present General. If ever he should release/ releases, he always |1. Past General. If he would release/released, he always |

|leaves. ἐὰν λύῃ, λείπει. |left. |

| |εἰ λύοι, ἔλειπεν. |

|2. Future More Vivid: If he should release , he will leave. ἐὰν λύῃ, |2. Future Less Vivid: If he should/would release, he would |

|λείψει. |leave. |

| |εἰ λύοι, λείποι ἄν. |

| C. Subordinate Clauses | C. Subordinate Clauses (Optative MAY substitute for |

| |Subjunctive and Indicative Verbs) |

|1. Purpose: I did these things so that you should/would/may/might |1. Past Sequence Purpose |

|release. ταῦτα ἔποιησα ἵνα λύῃς. |ταῦτα ἔποιησα ἵνα λύοις. I did these things so that you |

| |would/may/might release |

|2. Fear: He was afraid lest you should release. ἐφοβεῖτο μὴ λύῃς. |2. Past Sequence Fear |

| |ἐφοβεῖτο μὴ λύοις. He was afraid lest you would release |

| |3. Past Sequence Indirect Discourse |

| |I said that he will release. |

| |εἶπον ὅτι λύσοι. |

| |4 Optative in Optative Sequence: If only he would release the|

| |men whom you know. |

| |λύοι τοὺς ἀνθρώπους οὓς γιγνώσκοις. |

NOTE: for any “if” clause, there may be substitutes: whoever, whenever, etc.

7. Active Voice Verb Chart

Principal Parts ____________, ________________, ______________, __________

|Continuous |Future |Aorist |Perfect |

|Present |Imperfect |Future |Aorist |Perfect |Pluperfect |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

|Subjunctive |XXX | |XXX |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

|Optative | | |X XX |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

|Imperative |XXX | |XXX |

|Infinitive | | | |

|Participle |Participle |Participle |Participle |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

7. Active Voice Verb Chart

Principal Parts ____________, ________________, ______________, __________

|Continuous |Future |Aorist |Perfect |

|Present |Imperfect |Future |Aorist |Perfect |Pluperfect |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

|Subjunctive |XXX | |XXX |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

|Optative | | |X XX |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

|Imperative |XXX | |XXX |

|Infinitive | | | |

|Participle |Participle |Participle |Participle |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

7. Active Voice Verb Chart

Principal Parts ____________, ________________, ______________, __________

|Continuous |Future |Aorist |Perfect |

|Present |Imperfect |Future |Aorist |Perfect |Pluperfect |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

|Subjunctive |XXX | |XXX |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

|Optative | | |X XX |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

|Imperative |XXX | |XXX |

|Infinitive | | | |

|Participle |Participle |Participle |Participle |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

7. Active Voice Verb Chart

Principal Parts ____________, ________________, ______________, __________

|Continuous |Future |Aorist |Perfect |

|Present |Imperfect |Future |Aorist |Perfect |Pluperfect |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

|Subjunctive |XXX | |XXX |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

|Optative | | |X XX |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

|Imperative |XXX | |XXX |

|Infinitive | | | |

|Participle |Participle |Participle |Participle |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

8. Middle Voice Verb Chart

Principal Parts

____________, ________________, ______________, __________,____________

|Continuous |Future |Aorist |Perfect |

|Present |Imperfect |Future |Aorist |Perfect |Pluperfect |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

|Subjunctive |XXX | |XXX |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

|Optative | | |X XX |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

|Imperative |XXX | |XXX |

|Infinitive | | | |

|Participle |Participle |Participle |Participle |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

8. Middle Voice Verb Chart

Principal Parts

____________, ________________, ______________, __________,____________

|Continuous |Future |Aorist |Perfect |

|Present |Imperfect |Future |Aorist |Perfect |Pluperfect |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

|Subjunctive |XXX | |XXX |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

|Optative | | |X XX |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

|Imperative |XXX | |XXX |

|Infinitive | | | |

|Participle |Participle |Participle |Participle |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

8. Middle Voice Verb Chart

Principal Parts

____________, ________________, ______________, __________,____________

|Continuous |Future |Aorist |Perfect |

|Present |Imperfect |Future |Aorist |Perfect |Pluperfect |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

|Subjunctive |XXX | |XXX |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

|Optative | | |X XX |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

|Imperative |XXX | |XXX |

|Infinitive | | | |

|Participle |Participle |Participle |Participle |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

9. Passive Voice Verb Chart

Principal Parts

____________, __________, __________, __________,_____________,___________

|Continuous |Future |Aorist |Perfect |

|Present |Imperfect |Future |Aorist |Perfect |Pluperfect |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

|Subjunctive |XXX | |XXX |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

|Optative | | |X XX |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

|Imperative |XXX | |XXX |

|Infinitive | | | |

|Participle |Participle |Participle |Participle |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

9. Passive Voice Verb Chart

Principal Parts

____________, __________, __________, __________,_____________,___________

|Continuous |Future |Aorist |Perfect |

|Present |Imperfect |Future |Aorist |Perfect |Pluperfect |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

|Subjunctive |XXX | |XXX |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

|Optative | | |X XX |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

|Imperative |XXX | |XXX |

|Infinitive | | | |

|Participle |Participle |Participle |Participle |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

9. Passive Voice Verb Chart

Principal Parts

____________, __________, __________, __________,_____________,___________

|Continuous |Future |Aorist |Perfect |

|Present |Imperfect |Future |Aorist |Perfect |Pluperfect |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |

|Subjunctive |XXX | |XXX |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

|Optative | | |X XX |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

|Imperative |XXX | |XXX |

|Infinitive | | | |

|Participle |Participle |Participle |Participle |

| | | | |

| | | | |

| | | | |

FULL VERB CHART

For a full verb chart with the three voices on a single page, go to

-----------------------

[1] She is running; she often runs; she keeps on running; she tries to run; she begins to run, etc.

[2] You were studying; you used to study; you were trying to study; you were beginning to study, etc.

[3] 1. ἀποθνῄσκομεν. 2. κλέπτετε. 3. γιγνώσκει. 4. εὑρίσκει. 5. πίπτουσι(ν). 6. φυλάττω.

[4] 1. ἐγράφομεν. 2. ἐκλέπτετε. 3. ἐπέμπες.

[5] 4. ἔπιπτον. 5. ἐφύλαττον. 6. ἔπεμπε(ν).

[6] 2. ἔφερον, they used to carry. 3. ἔμελλον, I was intending. 4. ἔθνῃσκον, I was dying. 5. ἔτεμνε(ν), (S)he was trying to cut. 6. ἐλαμβάνομεν, We were beginning to take. 7. ἐκλέπτετε, You were stealing.

[7] 1. γιγνώσκομεν, ἐγιγνώσκομεν. 2. πέμπω, ἔπεμπον. 3. πίνεις, ἔπινες. 4. δακρύουσι(ν), ἐδάκρυον. 5. νόμιζω, ἐνόμιζον. 6. χαίρετε, ἐχαίρετε. 7. βάλλομεν, ἐβάλλομεν.

[8] 1. She leaving. 2. We were leaving. 3. We are leaving. 4. To be leaving. 5. (S)he, it is leaving. 6. It leaving. 7. I was leaving/ They were leaving. 8. You were leaving. 9. They are leaving/ For them leaving. 10. You are leaving/ Leave!

[9] 1. ἤγγελλον, They were announcing. 2. ἤκουε(ν), (S)he was hearing. 3. ἠθέλομεν, We were wanting. 4. ἠσθίετε, You were eating. 5. εἶχον, I was having.

[10] 1. ᾤκτιρε(ν). 2. ᾤμωζες. 3. ηὖδον.

[11] 1. ἀνεγίγνωσκον. 2. ἐξεμάνθανον. 3. κατεγίγνωσκον. 4. ἀνέβαινον. 5. ἀπέτεμνον. 6. συνέβαλλον.

[12] 1. εὔδω; you were sleeping. 2. ἐκβάλλω; I/they were throwing out. 3. ἀνέχω; (s)he was holding up. 4. ἄρχω; you were ruling. 5. ἀποθνῄσκω; Ι/they were dying. 6. προσέχω; you were applying. 7. ἄπειμι; I/he, she it was away. 8. εἰσάγω; (s)he was leading in. 9. οἰκτίρω, you were pitying.

[13] Line 1) ἦν, ἦν. Line 2) ἤθελε. Line 3) ἔβαινον. Line 4) ἔμενεν. Line 5) ἐδάκρυε, ἐκέλευεν. Line 6) ἔλεγε. Line 11) ᾤτιρεν. Line 14) ἀνεῖχεν. Line 16) ἐνόμιζεν. Line 19) ἐφοβεῖτο.

[14] Line 10, Noun, Acc., S, F, Dir. Obj.. Line 11, Pron., Dat., Pl, M/F, Dat. of Poss. Line 17. Rel. Pron., Acc, Pl., N, Dir. Obj. Line 18, Part., Dat., S. M. Dat of Poss, modifies ἐμοί.

[15] Line 3, Cont. Inf., Articular. Line 4, Cont. Inf., Purpose. Line 11, 3rd S, Imperfect, Indicative, MV. Line 16, Cont.Inf., Articular.

[16] 1. (s)he left, (s)he was leaving. 2. to be leaving, to leave (once). 3. you were leaving, you left, you are leaving, leave! 4. she upon/after/leaving or having left, she leaving. 5. it leaving, it upon/after leaving or having left.

[17] 2. ἔθανον, θαν-. 3. ηὗρον, εὑρ-. 4. ἔπιον, πι-. 5. ἔτυχον, τυχ-. 6. ἔλιπον, λιπ-. 7. ἔπεσον, πεσ-. 8. ἔλαβον, λαβ-. 9. ἔβαλον, βαλ-. 10. ἔμαθον, μαθ-.

[18] 2. you learned; ἐμανθάνες. 3. it happened; ἐτυγχάνε(ν). 4. we found; ηὑρίσκομεν. 5. he, she, it died, ἔθνῃσκε(ν).

[19] 6. you took, ἐλάμβανες. 7. I drank, ἔπινον. 8. we were weary, ἐκάμνομεν. 9. (s)he threw, ἔβαλλε(ν). 10. you happened/succeeded, ἐτυγχάνετε.

[20] 2. βάλλειν, βαλεῖν. 3. πίνειν, πιεῖν. 4. λαμβάνειν, λαβεῖν. 5. μανθάνειν, μαθεῖν. 6. λείπειν, λιπεῖν. 7. θνῄσκειν, θανεῖν. 8. εὑρίσκειν, εὑρεῖν. 9. πίπτειν, πεσεῖν. 10. κάμνειν, καμεῖν.

[21] 1, e. 2, d. 3, b. 4, a. 5, c.

[22] 1. to eat; ἐσθίειν. 2. to go/come; ἔρχεσθαι. 3. to carry; φέρειν. 4. to see; ὁρᾶν. 5. to say; λέγειν.

[23] 1. λέγουσι(ν), εἶπον. 2. φέρομεν, ἠνέγκομεν. 3. ὁράω, εἶδον. 4. ἐσθίεις, ἔφαγες. 5. ἔρχονται, ἦλθον.

[24] 1. καμοῦσα. 2. εὑρών. 3. λαβόντας. 4. ἐνεγκοῦσι. 5. φαγόντι. 6. εἰπόν. 7. τυχούσης

[25] Imperfects: 2. ἔμελλον. 3. ἐνόμιζεν. 13. ἔχαιρεν. 18. ἐνομίζομεν. 20. ἐνόμιζον. Aorists· 1. ἤνεγκον. 4. εἰσῆλθεν. 5. εἶπε. 15. κατῆλθεν. 16. κατελθοῦσα. 20 ἔμαθον. 22. κατελθεῖν.

[26] 1. They sent. 2. It having sent. 3. To send (once). 4. They (F) having sent. 5. He having sent. 6. You sent. 7. I sent. 8. Of them (F) having sent. 9. (S)he, it sent. 10. Of them having sent.

[27] 1. ἔβλεψα. 2. ἐβασίλευσα. 3. ἔπληξα. 4. ἔσωσα. 5. ἔβλαψα. 6. ἔπλεψα.

[28] 1. he having written. 2. to them having thought. 3. they (F) having hidden. 4. they buried. 5. of them (F) having wept. 6. (s)he, it guarded. 7. to order. 8. we sent. 9. her, having stopped. 10. you heard.

[29] 1.ἐνίκησα. 2. ἐτόλμησα.

[30] 1. you agreed. 2. he having worn. 3. to be hungry (once). 4. (s)he, it dwelt. 5. they (F) having lived. 6. they asked. 7. it, having sought. 8. I asked. 9. to them (M/N) having hated. 10. to be sick (once). 11. they (M) having shared. 12. they made. 13. of them (F) having loved.

[31] 1. we asked. ἐρωτῆσαι. 2. he dwelt. οἰκῆσαι. 3. I seemed. δόξαι. 4. you heard. ἀκοῦσαι. 5. they asked. αἰτῆσαι. 6. you intended. μελλῆσαι. 7. (s)he wanted. ἐθελῆσαι.

[32] 1. you married. 2. he, having judged. 3. they pitied.

[33] 4. to announce. 5. to them having judged. 6. (s)he, it cleaned. 7. they killed. 8. they (F) having pitied. 9. it, having remained.

[34] 1. ἀναβλέπω; you looked up. 2. πλήττω; he, having struck. 3. πείθω; to persuade. 4. πράττω; (s)he, it acted. 5. βοάω; she having shouted 6. ὠφελέω; they helped.

[35] 1. On the second day, I got sick. 2. The mother burst into tears when she saw her child.

[36] 6. They took hold of. 9. They began. 17. He having taken hold of. 24. He answered.

[37] 1. 3rd S, Aor, Ind, MV. 1. 3rd S., Impf., Ind, MV. 2. 3rd S. Aor. Ind. MV. 4. 3rd S. Aor. Ind. MV, 12.Pres Cont, Ptple, Modifies PN subject of MV. 14. 3rd S., Aor. Ind. MV. 19. 3rd P, Impf, Ind. MV. 20. Aor. Ptple, Modifies PN subject of MV. 22. 3rd P, Aor. Ind. MV

[38] 1a. 1. with the poet having died. 2. with the mother crying. 3. with the brothers having sent the gifts. 4. with the soldier having announced the victory. 5. with the men being evil. 6. with the king ordering the men to go. 7. with the very clever turtle having stolen all the grain, the farmer was angry.

[39] 2b. 1. With the Wise one having lost his young son, his friends were wanting to do something nice. 2. Some sent gifts, others grain and fruit, and others brought money. 3. With the friends having seen that the Wise One was still crying after many days, a certain man began to get angry. 4. With this one having said that the crying Wise One was not truly wise, the Wise One answered, “I am the wisest of all because I know that mourning is a good thing for human beings.”

[40] 1. I knew. 2. they stepped. 3. it, having known. 4. to stand (once). 5. know! 6. to them having stood. 7. you stood. 8. (s)he, it knew. 9. they (F) having known 10. it having stepped.

[41] 1. you will leave. 2. (s)he, it stopped. 3. to be about to strike. 4. we will stop. 5. they having left. 6. he being about to stop. 7. they will leave/ to them being about to leave. 8. to stop (once). 9. she being about to strike. 10. to them having stopped.

[42] 1. γράψω (1). 2. ποιήσω (2). 3. βαλῶ (3). 4. ακούσομαι (6). 5. ἐρῶ (5, 3). 6. οἴσω (5). 7. λήψομαι (6). 8. θανοῦμαι (6). 9. ὄψομαι (6).

[43] 10. μενῶ (3). 11. ἐθελήσω (4).

[44] 1. μέλλει ἄξειν. 2. ἐλπίζουσιν εὑρήσειν. 3. ὑπισχνέομαι γράψειν.

[45] 1. ἔρχεται τὴν παῖδα πείσουσα. 2. ἔρχεται παύσων τὸν ἀδελφόν. 3. ἔρχεται ἄξουσα τοὺς στρατιώτας.

[46] 2. 3rd S, Aor., Ind., MV. 3. 3rd S, Fut., Ind., MV. 4. 1st, S, Fut., Ind., MV. 5. 3rd P, Impf, Ind., MV, 7. Cont., Ptple, modifies subject. 7. Future Participle of Purpose.

[47] Fut. Inf., complementary inf. with certain verbs. 10. Fut. Inf., complementary inf. with certain verbs. 15. 2nd S, Aor., Ind., MV. 17. Aor. Ptple., in genitive absolute.

[48] 1. κρίνω, κρινῶ, ἔκρινα. 2. ἐθέλω, ἐθελήσω, ἠθέλησα. 3. ἀκούω, ἀκούσομαι, ἤκουσα. 4. νομίζω, νομιῶ, ἐνόμισα. 5. θάπτω, θάψω, ἔθαψα. 6. οἰκτίρω, οἰκτιρῶ, ᾤτιρα. 7. ἀγγέλλω, ἀγγελῶ, ἤγγειλα. 8. γράφω, γράψω, ἔγραψα. 9. κτείνω, κτενῶ, ἔκτεινα. 9. μένω, μενῶ, ἔμεινα.

[49] 1. κτενεῖς. 2. πέμψειν.

[50] [51] 3. νομιῶ 4. δακρύσοντες. 5. μενεῖς. 6. πείσουσι(ν). 7. καθαρεῖ. 8. ἀκούσομαι 9. θάψοντες. 10. φυλάξουσα.

[52] 1. βαίνω, βήσομαι, ἔβην. 2. ἔρχομαι, ἐλεύσομαι, ἦλθον. 3. ἄγω, ἄξω, ἤγαγον. 4. γιγνώσκω, γνώσομαι, ἔγνων. 5. λέγω, ἐρῶ, εἶπον. 6. ἐσθίω, ἔδομαι, ἔφαγον. 7. μανθάνω, μαθήσομαι, ἔμαθον. 8. πίνω, πίομαι, ἔπιον. 9. πίπτω, πεσοῦμαι, ἔπεσον. 10. ἵσταμαι, στήσομαι, ἔστην.

[53] 1. I will say. 2. (s)he, it will see. 3. to be about to come. 4. (s)he, it will know. 5. they will succeed. 6. (s)he, it will stand up. 7. I will have. 8. they will carry. 9. to be about to lead. 10. they (F) being about to leave.

[54] 1. ει. 2. ου. 3. long vowel or diphthong. 4. contraction is accented with a circumflex. 5. there is no change in accentuation.

[55] 1. ἐκάλει. 2. καλοῦμεν. 3. ἐκάλουν. 4. καλεῖ. 5. καλεῖν. 6. ἐκάλουν. 7. ἐκαλεῖτε. 8. καλοῦν. 9. ἐκάλεις. 10. καλεῖτε.

[56] 1. φιλούντων. 2. φιλουσῶν. 3. φιλοῦντες. 4. φιλοῦσι(ν). 5. φιλούσαις. 6. φιλοῦν.

[57] 2. Cont., Ptple, Gen. Abs. 3. 3rd S, Impf., Ind., MV. 5. 2nd S, Cont., Imptv, MV. 8. 3rd P, Impf., Ind., MV. 11. 1st S, Aor., Ind. MV. 12. 2nd S., Aor., Ind., MV. 23. Cont. Inf, complementary.

[58] 1. ἐσίγα. 2. σιγῶμεν. 3. ἐσίγων. 4. σιγᾷ. 5. σιγᾶν. 6. ἐσίγων. 7. ἐσιγᾶτε. 8. σιγῶν. 9. ἐσίγας. 10. σιγᾶτε.

[59] 1. shout, βοήσομαι, ἐβόησα. 2. honor, τιμήσω, ἐτίμησα. 3. laugh, γελάσομαι, ἐγέλασα. 4. be silent, σιγήσω, ἐσίγησα. 5. ask, ἐρωτήσω, ἠρώτησα. 6. be hungry, πεινήσω, ἐπείνησα. 7. see, ὄψομαι, εἶδον. 8. live, ζήσω, ἔζησα.

[60] 1. I/they were asking. 2. (s)he, it is hungry. 3. (s)he, it was seeing. 4. to shout. 5. (s)he, it shouting. 6. to them being silent, they are silent. 7. we were laughing. 8. you were asking. 9. they (F) seeing. 10. (s)he, it was shouting.

[61] 1. ἐτίμας αὐτὸν πρὶν μαθεῖν τὴν ἀλήθειαν. 2. οὐκ ἐτίμησας αὐτὸν πρὶν ἦλθεν. 3. ἐτίμησας αὐτὸν πρὶν ἡμᾶς λιπεῖν.

[62] 5. 3rd P,Impf., Ind., MV. 7. 3rd S, Impf., Ind., MV. 17. 3rd P, Impf., Ind., MV. 18. Aor., Inf., infinitive with πρίν. 23. 3rd S, Impf., Ind., MV. 29. 3rd. S, Impf., Ind., MV. 30. 3rd S, Fut., Ind., MV.

[63] Present C-F: εἰ + imperfect (indicative), imperfect + ἄν: were/would, μή, οὐ. Past C-F: εἰ + aorist (indicative), aorist + ἄν: had/would have, μή, οὐ.

[64] 1. Present C-F: εἰ + imperfect (indicative), imperfect + ἄν: were/would. εἰ ἐζήτουν, ηὕρισκον ἄν. 2. Past C-F: εἰ + aorist (indicative), aorist + ἄν: had/would have. εἰ ἐζήτησαν, οὐκ ηὗρον ἄν. 3. See # 2. εἰ μὴ ἐτιμήσαμεν αὐτὸν, ἐσιγήσαμεν ἄν. 4. See # 1. εἰ αὐτὸν ἐτιμοῦμεν, ἐσιγῶμεν ἄν. 5. If you were staying, I/they would not be leaving. 6. If he had lamented, we would have heard.

[65] (1) In the play, “Fiddler on the Roof”, the father says, “If I were a rich man, I would not be working. (2) And if I were a rich man, I would read the holy books and my wife would be happy. (3) This father honored God, but suffered many evils. (4) Many people said, “If God had truly loved him, the Russians would not have destroyed his city.”

[66] 1. If you had persuaded them, we would not be distressed. 2. If he were not leaving, they would have stayed.

[67] We saved him; we would have saved him. 2. You would leave; you were leaving.

[68] (1) Xenophanes, the philosopher, wrote poems in which he used to say, “If horses were able to write/ paint/ draw, they would have made the bodies of the gods like their own bodies, just as humans make

[69] the gods resemble themselves. (2) Homer would not have written these things. (3) But if Zenophanes were not honoring the gods, he would not have written these poems.

[70] 7. 3rd S, Impf., Ind., MV. 7. 3rd S, Impf., Ind., MV. 12. Cont., Inf., probable result. 16. 3rd P, Impf., Ind., MV. 18. Aor., Ptple., dative modifying the indirect object. 21. Cont. Inf. Ind. Disc. 29. 3rd S, Aor., Ind., MV.

[71] 1. ὅτι, ὡς, Nom., Ind., 2. None, subject accusative, verb infinitive. 3. None, subject accusative, verb infinitive. 4 None, subject accusative, verb participle.

[72] 1. λέγουσιν ὅτι/ὡς λαμβάνει τὴν/τὸν παῖδα. λέγουσιν αὐτὴν λαμβάνειν τὴν/τὸν παῖδα. 2. νομίζουσιν αὐτὴν λαμβάνειν τὴν/τὸν παῖδα. 3. ακούουσιν αὐτὴν λαμβάνουσαν τὴν/τὸν παῖδα.

[73] κλέπτομεν. He says that we steal. b. ἡμᾶς κλέπτειν. c. ἡμᾶς κλέπτονας.

[74] a. κλέψεις. I say that you will steal. b.σὲ κλέψειν c. σὲ κλέψοντα.

[75] a. ἔκλεψαν. I say that they stole. b. αὐτὰς κλέψαι. c. αὐτὰς κλεψάσας.

[76] 1. I think that the slave is stealing the grain. 2. I thought that the slave was stealing the grain. 3. We say that the slave will steal the grain.

[77] 4. We said that the slave will/would steal the grain. 5. He hears that the slave stole the grain. 6. He heard that the slave had stolen the grain.

[78] 1. ἔνομισα τοὺς ἀνθρώπους λείψειν. 2. ἤκουσε τοὺς ἀνθρώπους φαγόντας. 3. λέγομεν ὅτι τὸν μῦθον ἔγραψεν/ αὐτὸν γράψαι τὸν μῦθον. 4. νομίζει ὑμᾶς σώσειν τὸν κλέπτην.

[79] (1). There once was a certain king who thought that he was the greatest and the most powerful. (2). One day, the Persians came intending to conquer (Fut.Ptpl of Purpose) this king. (3). There was a battle, a long battle. (4). Finally, the messenger told the king that the Persians had taken the royal city. (5). The king’s grief was great,

[80] but he was still hoping to conquer (fut. inf. with certain verbs) the Persians. (6). On the following day, there was another battle and the Persians conquered the king. (7). The king heard that the Persians were killing all the men in the city. (8) And the messenger said to him that the Persians would carry off both the women and children as slaves. (9). The king lamented, saying, “I thought I was very great, but truly I am nothing.”

[81] 5) War shows (ἔδειξε) some as gods others as humans. War makes (ἐποίησε) some people slaves, others free. 7) Illness makes (ἐποίησε) health sweet and good. 22) Wisdom is one thing: to know the true judgement (wise opinions/wisdom) which steers (ἐκυβέρνησε) all things through all things. (See essay on pages 58-59)

[82] 1. ἡμᾶς λαμβάνειν/ λαμβάνοντας. 2. ὅτι/ ὡς ἀποθνῄσκει. 3. ὅτι/ ὡς οἱ στρατιῶται φυλάττουσι/ τοὺς στρατιώτας φυλάττειν/ φυλάττοντας. 4. ὅτι/ ὡς κλέπτει. 5. ὑμᾶς μένειν. 6. ὅτι/ ὡς κλέπτει/ αὐτὸν κλέπτειν/κλέπτοντα. 7. τὰς γυναῖκας ἀκούειν/ ἀκουούσας. 8. σὲ γράφειν. 9. αὐτὰς φέφειν. 10. ὅτι/ ὡς λείπουσι/ αὐτοὺς λείπειν/ λείποντας.

[83] 1. Many think that they are wise, but only Socrates used to announce that he was not wise.

[84]2. The Persians used to think that they were best, but the Greeks found that they were better than the Persians. 3. οἱ ἄνθρωποι ὁρῶσιν ἀποθνῄσκειν/ ἀποθνῄσκοντες. 4. ἡ παῖς εὑρίσκει οὐ νοσεῖν/νοσοῦσα.

[85] 3a. 1. They hear that they (A) will write the letters. 2. They hear that they (S) will write the letters. 3. They hear that they (D) will write the letters. 4. They hear that they will write (S) the latters.

[86] 3b. 1. εὑρίσκω νοσεῖν/ νοσῶν. 2. νομίζουσιν αὐτὰς λείψειν. 3. ἀκόυει ὅτι/ ὡς ἔγραψαν/ αὐτοὺς γράψαι, αὐτοὺς γράψαντας.

[87] 1. I hear that this man was stealing. 2. I hear that this man is/was stealing. I hear that this man is/was stealing.

[88] 1. Ι hear the king speaking. 2. I hear that the king is speaking. 3. We find that the king is sleeping OR we find the king sleeping .

[89] 2. Noun, Dat., S, F, means. 4. Adj. used as noun, Dat, S, N, Dative with χράομαι. 5. Noun, Gen., Pl., F, Time within which. 16. Noun, Gen., S, N, Gen. with χρῄζω. 23. Ιndefinite PN, Acc., S., N, DO. 26. Pronoun, Acc., S, M, Subj.Αcc. in Ind. Disc. 28,. Pronoun, Dat., S, M, Dat. with πιστέυω.

[90] 3. Fut. Inf., Fut. Inf. with certain verbs. 7. Fut. Pple of Purpose. 13. Aor., Inf., Ind. Disc. 23. Cont., Pple, Ind. Disc. 25. Aor., Inf., Ind. Disc. 27. Aor., Inf., After verb of Possibility. 27. Aor.,Ind., Gnomic Aorist. 29. Cont., Pple, Dative with πιστεύω.

[91] Present: παύω, παύῃς , παύῃ, παύωμεν, παύητε, παύωσι(ν). Aorist: παύσω, παύσῃς, παύσῃ, παύσωμεν, παύσητε, παύσωσι(ν).

[92] Present: ἄγω, ἄγῃς, ἄγῃ, ἄγωμεν, ἄγητε, ἄγωσι(ν). Aorist: αγάγω, αγάγῃς, αγάγῃ αγάγωμεν, αγάγητε, αγάγωσι(ν).

[93] 1. βλέψῃς, should you see. 2. νομίσωμεν, should we think. 3. δακρύσῃ, should (s)he cry. 4. λίπητε, should you leave. 5. θάψω, should I bury. 6. τύχωσι(ν), should they succeed. 7. ἐθελήσω, should they wish.

[94] 1. Hortatory, Cont.,Aor., μή, Let’s, I/we. 2. Deliberative, Cont Aor., μή, should, I/we, question mark. 3. Prohibition, only Aor., μή, Don’t, usually 2nd person.

[95] 1. Let’s be throwing these things. 2. Let’s not throw these things. 3. Should we throw these things. 4. Don’t write. 5. What will/should I order. 6.μὴ αὐτοὺς σώσῃς 7. τί ποιήσωμεν; 8.μὴ εὑρίσκωμεν.

[96] Purpose, ἵνα, ὡς, ὅπως, μή, should, may/might, clause marker. 2. Fear, μή, οὐ, should/Eng.subj., Introductory Fear verb.

[97] 1. I am afraid lest the king should/may/ might leave. 2. Let’s remain so that we should/may/might learn these things. 3. He was afraid lest you should/may/might not want to go. 4. (S)he does this so that the children should/may/might not cry. 5. ἔλθωμεν ἵνα/ ὡς/ ὅπως πείσῃς αὐτούς. 6. φοβοῦμαι μὴ τὴν ἐπιστολὴν οὐ πέμψωσιν.

[98] 1. Hortatory, Let’s go. 2. Deliberative, Should I go? 3. Prohibition, Don’t go.

[99] 1. Purpose, “We study in order that (ἵνα, ὡς, ὅπως) we should/may not (μή) fail. 2. Fear, “I fear lest (μή) you should/may not (οὐ) learn.

[100] 2. 3rd , P, Impf, Ind., MV. 2. Pres., Pple., Gen. Abs. 9. 1st P, Pres.,/Aor., Subj., Hortatory. 10. 1st P, Cont.,/Aor., Subj., Deliberative. 11. 3rd, P, Aor., Subj., Purpose. 14. 3rd P, Cont., Subj., Purpose. 15. 3rd P, Impf., Ind., MV. 20. Aor., Inf., Articular. 21. 3rd S, Cont., Subj., Purpose. 23. Cont., Pple, Gen. Abs. 25. 3rd S, Cont, Subj., Purpose.

[101] If (ever) they (should) send gifts, we (always) take them.

[102] 2. If (ever) (s)he should be writing/is writing, they (always) remain. 3. If (ever) you (should) do these things, (s)he is (always) angry. 3. If (ever) you should be/are feeling weary, your mother (always) cries alas. 4. ἐὰν/ἢν ἐσθίω, ἔρχεταί τις. 5. ἐὰν/ἢν ἀγγείλαμεν ταῦτα, ἀκούουσιν.

[103] 1. The ones who should/do not steal, (always) fare well. 2. Whenever you (should) leave, we (always) cry.

[104] 5. Whoever should love/loves work is lucky. 6. The ones who are saying these things are being unjust.

[105] If you (should) order these things, we will do them. 2.Whoever should save/saves the city will find happiness. 3. Whenever you leave, I will remain. 4. If you (should) marry, I will send gifts.

[106] 1. I was/ (s)he, it was. 2. should you be. 3. of her being. 4. you were/should you be. 5. should I be. 6. you were. 7. should (s)he, it be. 8. it being. 9. to them being. 10. they were. 11. εἰσί(ν). 12. οὐσῶν. 13. ἦμεν. 14. εἶναι. 15. ὦσι(ν).

[107] 1. ὦ because it has a smooth breathing (unlike the relative forms which always have a rough breathing) and is circumflexed in the subjunctive. However it is identical to the word “oh”. To whom, oh, should I be. 2. εἶ because it is circumflexed and has a smooth breathing. If, you are. 3. ἦ because in the subjunctive it has a circumflex and a smooth breathing. The, should I be, who, or. 4, ὤν because the participle has a smooth breathing and an acute accent. Of whom, he being 5. ᾖ because it has a smooth breathing and a circumflex in the subjunctive. Should (s)he, it be, to whom 6. ὄν because it has a smooth breathing and an acute accent. It being, whom. 7. ᾖς because it has a smooth breathing and a circumflex in the subjunctive. Should you be, of whom. 8. ἦν because it has a smooth breathing and a circumflex. Whom, I was or (s)he, it was.

[108] a. Since the drinking occurred before the leaving, in Greek the “having drunk” would be an aorist participle as prior past. b. Since the effects of the drinking continue into the present, in Greek, the “having drunk” would be a perfect participle. 2. a. Since the effects of “I had bathed” continue into the present this would be a pluperfect indicative in Greek. b. “I had bathed” in this sentence is a prior past and would be aorist in Greek.

[109] 1. πεπαίδευκα. 2. βεβούλευκα.

[110] 1. μεμίσηκα. 2. τετίμηκα.

[111] 1. of the woman having released/ the women (acc.) having released. 2. (s)he, it had hated. 3. they have educated. 4. to the ones having released. 5. you had stopped. 6. he having honored. 7. πεποιηκυῖα. 8. κεκελευκόσι(ν). 9. πεπαιδευκέναι.

[112] 1. they had written. 2. to the women who have struck. 3. (s)he, it had left

[113] 4. you have stolen. 5. he having written. 6. to have struck. 7. γεγράφαμεν. 8. λελοιπός. 9. ἐπεπλήγεμεν. 10. λελοιπότος. 11. ἐκεκλόφει(ν).

[114] 2. δεδ-. 3 ἐστ-. 4.πεφ-. 5. κεκλ-. 6. ἠρ-. 7. βεβλ-. 8. ῄρ-. 9. ἠδ-. 10. κεχ-. 11. ἐρρ-.

[115] 1. (s)he, it had wanted. 2. he having lived. 3. to have thrown. 4. they had taken. 5. you had announced. 6.she having been unjust. 8. we had served in the army.

[116] 1. γιγνώσκω. 2. βάλλω. 3. ζάω. 4. φθείρω. 5. πράττω. 6. αἱρέω. 7. κρίνω. 8. φυλάττω. 9. χαίρω.

[117] 1. you have come. 2. he having sent. 3. to have thrown. 4. (s)he, it had succeeded. 5. (s)he, it has held. 6. they have become. 7. we have spoken. 8. it having seen. 9. to have known. 10. you had saved. 11. to the one having announced. 12. they had fallen. 13. we have led. 14. to the ones having thought. 15. you had carried.

[118] 4. 1st S, Perf., Ind., MV. 11. 3rd S, Aor., Subj., Purpose. 13. 3rd S, Perf., Ind., MV. 17. 3rd S., Aor., Ind., MV. 17. Fut. Pple of Purpose. 20. 3rd. S, Impf., Ind., MV. 21. 3rd P, Aor., Ind., MV. 23. 3rd S, Cont.., Subj, Purpose.

[119] 1. whatever things (s)he, it does. 2. to whomever (s)he gives food. 3. whatever happens. 4. whomever, whatever things you desire.

[120] 5. whomever (F) we trust. 6. whomever you hear. 7. whomever, whatever (things) I make use of. 8. to whomever (F) they speak. 9. οὕστινας λαμβάνουσι(ν). 10. αἵτινες ἔρχονται. 11. ὅ τι ὁρᾷς.

[121] 1. ὃς/ὅστις ἂν κλέπτῃ, ἀδικεῖ. 2.ἅτινα, ἅττα ἄν ᾖ καλά μενεῖ.

[122] 1. ὅντινα, τίνα. 2. ὧντινων, ὅτων, τίνων. 3. ὅ τι/τί 4. οὕστινας, τίνας. 5. ᾗτινι/τίνι

[123] 1. he was by nature wise. 2. (s)he, it stands. 3. to know. 4. he trusting in her. 5. you stood. 6. I own. 7. it being dead. 8. they know. 9. I remember. 10. to those who are by nature. 11. Whoever should leave/leaves is dead. 12. Whomever you (should) trust are by nature the bravest..

[124] 1. you know. 2. we knew. 3. they knowing. 4. they knew. 5. to know. 6. (s)he, it knew. 7. they know. 8. you knew. 9. εἰδότες. 10. ἤδη. 11. ἴσμεν.

[125] ᾔδη. 13. ᾖσμεν. 14.ἦσαν

[126] 1. 2nd S, Aorist. 2. 3rd S, cont. 3. 1st S, Aorist. 4. 3rd S, Future. 5. 3rd P, Aorist. 6. 3rd P, Aorist. 7. 3rd S, Aorist. 8. 2nd S, cont. 9. 3rd P. cont.

[127] 1. (S)he might lead the elephant (Potential). 2. If only (s)he would release him (Wish). 3. (S)he might not be leaving the city (Potential). 4. If only (s)he would not be leaving the city (Wish). 5. If only you would stop the battle (Potential). 5. If only they would lead them. (Wish). 6. οὐ λίποιεν ἄν (Potential). 7. (εἴθε, οr εἰ γάρ or no introductory word) μὴ δακρύοι (Wish).

[128] 1. If only he would lead the children whom you love (Wish; Opt in Opt Sequence). 2. He was afraid lest they should not write. ( Fear: Past Sequence Subjunctive Kept). 3. He was afraid lest they would not write (Fear: Past Sequence Subjunctive Replaced by Optative. 4. They hid these things so that (s)he should not see them (Purpose: Past Sequence Subjunctive Kept). 5. They hid these things so that (s)he would not see them (Purpose: Past Sequence Subjunctive Replaced by Optative). 6. They might not be stealing the food which the rich man has. (Potential; Opt in Opt Sequence). 7. τὸ ἀργύριον ἐπέμψαμεν ὅπως (ἵνα, ὡς) τοὺς στρατιώτας σώσωμεν/ σώσαιμεν Purpose: Past Sequence with Subjunctive and Optative. 8. ἐφοβεῖτο μὴ λίπῃς/ λίποις. Fear: Past Sequence with Subjunctive and Optative. 9. ἀναγιγνώσκοιμεν ἄν τὰ βιβλία ἃ πέμποις. (Potential, Οpt in Opt Sequence.

[129] 3. 3rd P, Impf, Ind, MV, Conative Impf. 5. 3rd S, Cont or Aor, Subj, Fear. 7. 3rd P, Aor, Opt, Wish. 8. 3rd S, Aor, Opt, Wish. 8. 2nd S, Aor, Opt, Wish. 9. 2nd S, Cont, Opt, Opt in Opt Sequence. 17. 2nd P, Aor, Opt, Potential. 18. Aor, Inf, articular. 23. 2nd S, Aor, Opt, Potential. 26. 1st P, Impf, Ind, MV Relative clause.

[130] 1. π. 2. no accent. 3. ὁ. 4. ὁ + π. 5. τ.

[131] 1. to where? 2. where. 3. there. 4. from where? 6. of such a sort. 7. whither, to what place. 8. from where (ever)? from wherever. 8. from where.

[132] I.I. ὁπότε. 2. I.R. ὁπόθεν. 3. I.R. ὁπόσα. 4.I.I. ὁπῶς.

[133] 1. ἐρωτῶ ποῦ/ὄπου μένει. 2. ἐρωτῶ ποῖα/ ὁποῖα βιβλία ἀναγιγνώκουσιν. 3. ἐρωτῶ πῶς (ὄπως) γράφει.

[134] 1f. καλῆς μιμήσεως. 2d.καλῶν γενέσεων. 3e.καλὰς πόλεις. 4a. καλὴν ποίησιν. 5b. καλαῖς πόλεσι(ν). 6c. καλῇ φύσει.

[135] 1b. κακοὺς βασιλέας. 2f.κακῷ φονεῖ. 3h. κακὸν γονέα. 4g. κακῶν βασιλέων. 5c. κακοὶ γονεῖς. 6a. κακὸς γονεύς. 7e. κακοῖς γονέσιν. 8d.κακοῦ βασιλέως.

[136] 1. That man happened to be fleeing. 2. Having left, he escaped the notice of the soldiers/ the soldiers didn’t notice that he left . 2. I enjoy seeing these things.

[137] 1. If only they were just (Wish). 2. It might be new (Pot.). 3. If only you (F) were not foolish (Wish). 4. I did this so that we might not be ridiculous (Opt., Past Seq., Purpose). 5. They were afraid lest she would not be wise (Opt., Past Seq., Fear) 6. If only you would be friendly to all the people whom you know (Wish/ Opt. in Opt. Seq.).

[138] a. πεπαὺκ-ω, -ῃς, -ῃ, -ωμεν,-ητε, -ωσι(ν). b. πεπαύκ-ὼς, υῖα, -ὸς + ὦ, ῇς, ῇ, πεπαυκότες, πεπαυκυῖαι, πεπαυκότα + ὦμεν, ἧτε, ὦσι(ν). Should I have stopped/ should I have been in the state of stopping c. πεπαύκ-οιμι, -οις, -οι, -οιμεν, -οιτε, -οιεν d. πεπαύκ-ὼς, υῖα, -ὸς εἴην, εἴης, εἴη, πεπαυκότες, πεπαυκυῖαι, πεπαυκότα +εἶμεν, εἶτε, εἶεν. If only I would have stopped/ if only I would be in the state of having stopped.

[139] 1. Let’s trust him. (Hortatory Subj). 2. I did these things so that you should/would know many things (Purpose Subj. Primary and Opt. Secondary Sequence). 3. He might know them (Pot. Opt.) 4. If they should be/are dead, we will leave (FMV). 5. He was afraid lest the women should /would know these things (Fear Subj.Primary and Opt Secondary).

[140] 1. If (s)he would search (searched), (s)he always found (Past Gen.). 2. Whenever (s)he should search (searches), (s)he always finds (Pres. Gen). 3. If you should fall (falls), (s)he always cries (Pres. Gen.). 4. If they should/would fall (fell), they always cried.

[141] a. 1. If (s)he (should) would search, he would find (FLV). 2. Whenever (s)he should search (searches), he will find (FMV). 3. If (s)he should fall (falls), he will cry (FMV). 4. If they should/would fall, they would cry (FLV). b. 1. ἐὰν λίπῃ, δακρύσομεν (FMV). 2. εἰ λίποι, ἐδακρύομεν (Past Gen.). 3. εἰ λίποι, δακρύοιμεν ἂν (FLV). 4. ὅταν λίπῃ, δακρύομεν (Pres.Gen.).

[142] 1a. δακρύσουσιν. Ι say that they will cry. b. δακρύσουσιν/ δακρύσοιεν. I said that they will or would cry. 2a. λέλυκεν/ λελυκὼς εἴη. I was saying that he has released. b λέλυκεν. I will say that he has released. 3a. ἐβάλομεν.I have said that we threw. b ἐβάλομεν/ βάλοιμεν. I had said that we threw. 4a.λείπεις/λείποις. I had said that you are/were leaving. b.λείπεις/λείποις. I was saying that you are or were leaving.

[143] a. If ever someone says/should say, “I love God,” and should hate/hates his brother, he is a liar. (Pres. Gen) The one who doesn’t love his brother whom he has seen is not able to love God whom he has not seen. b. If someone should/would say, “I love God,” and should/would hate his brother, he would be a liar. (FLV) If someone would say that he has seen God, he was ever a liar. (Past Gen).

[144] a. παῦε, be stopping / παύετε (you all) be stopping/ παυέτω, let him,her, it be stopping παυόντων, let them be stopping.

[145] b. 1. λυόντων. 2. λῦε. 3. λυέτω. 4. λύετε. 5. you are sending; / be sending! 6. Let them be sending/ of them sending. 7. Don’t be sending. 8. Let him/her be sending.

[146] a. λῦσον, release/λύσατε, (you all) release/ λυσάτω , let him, her, it release/ λυσάντων, let them release.

[147] b. 1. παυσάτω. 2. παύσατε. 3. παυσάντων. 4. παῦσον. 5. Don’t send. 6. of them having sent/ let them send. 7. Send/ it being about to send. 8.Let him /her send. 9. ἰδέ. 10. λαβέ. 11. ἐλθέ. 12. εὑρέ. 13.εἰπέ.

[148] ἴσθι, be/ ἔστε (you all) be/ ἔστω, let him, her, it be/ ὄντων, let them be (ἔστων is also correct and will be used in succeeding chapters).

[149] 1. ἴσθι. 2. ἔστω. 3. ὄντων/ἔστων. 4. ἔστε. 5. γνῶθι σαυτόν. 6. ἴθι. 7. Be (Note: “you are” ἐστε is spelled the same as the imperative (ἔστε) in Greek, but the indicative is enclitic. 8. Of them being/ let them be. 9. Come down. 10. Be.

[150] 1. λεῖπε, λείπετε, λειπέτω, λειπόντων. 2. λίπε, λίπετε, λιπέτω, λιπόνων.

[151] 3. παῦσον, παύσατε, παυσάτω, παυσάντων. 4. ἴσθι, ἔστε, ἔστω, ὄντων/ἔστων.

[152] 1. Let her have released! 2. Know! 3. Let them have stopped! 4. Τrust!

[153] 1. (s)he has written. 2. if only we would find. 3. they might write. 4. should (s)he find. 5. I was finding/they were finding. 6. Let’s be writing! 7. (s)he found. 8. of him, it having found. 9. Write! / it being about to write. 10. they had written. 11. of them finding/let them find! 12. to the ones writing. 13. If only you would find. 14. they write/to them writing. 15. to find. 16. should you be writing. 17. to have found. 18. I/they found. 19. to write. 20. she about to find. 21. let him, her, it find! 22. you wrote. 23. he upon writing. 24. if only they would find. 25. you were finding. 26. of her having written, them (F) having written. 27. If only you would write.

[154] 1. M. 2. A. 3. M. 4. M. 5. A. 6. M.

[155]

|Case |Masculine |Feminine |Neuter |

|N |παυσάμενος |παυσαμένη |παυσάμενον |

|A |παυσάμενον |παυσαμένην |παυσάμενον |

|G |παυσαμένου |παυσαμένης |παυσαμένου |

|D |παυσαμένῳ |παυσαμένῃ |παυσαμένῳ |

| | | | |

|N |παυσάμενοι |παυσάμεναι |παυσάμενα |

|A |παυσαμένους |παυσαμένας |παυσάμενα |

|G |παυσαμένων |παυσαμένων |παυσαμένων |

|D |παυσαμένοις |παυσαμέναις |παυσαμένοις |

[156] 1. you are stopping your... 2. I stopped my… 3. you(s) stopped your. 4. they will stop their...

[157] 5. you will stop your…/ should (s)he, it stop. 6. you are leaving your…/ should (s)he, it be leaving. 7.(s)he will leave his/her…. 8. she about to leave her... 9. you are leaving your… /be leaving your…10. you left your...

[158] 1. (s)he is washing his/her cloak. 2. I am washing myself. 3. We will wash ourselves/each other. 4. We are washing ourselves/each other. 5. I hid myself. 6. We are having the children educated. 7. We are saving our city/ we are having our city saved. 8. You released your brother/you are having your brother released. 9. They were saving themselves. 10. I hid him for myself/I had him hidden.

[159] 1. I choose to stop (myself).

[160] 2. I cease listening. 3. He persuades him. 4. I obey him. 5. They begin speaking.

[161] 1. βήσομαι 3. βούλομαι, βουλήσομαι. 4, γίγνομαι, γενήσομαι, ἐγενόμην. 5. ἔρχομαι, ἐλεύσομαι. 6. ἔδομαι. 7. λήψομαι. 8. ἕπομαι, ἕψομαι, ἑσπόμην.

[162] 1. (s)he wishes. 2. they will write their…3. (s)he was throwing his/her….4. we were receiving. 5. you perceive.

[163] 6. becoming. 7. they will hear. 8. you converse. 9. I was sending my…10. you see your…..11. you came. 12. we love our…13. to go.

[164] 1. σχιζομένους (middle). And immediately upon rising from the water, he saw the heavens splitting themselves apart and the spirit coming down on him like a dove.

2. ἐπορεύοντο (deponent), ἀπογράφεσθαι (middle). And all were traveling each to his own city to register themselves.

[165] ἐγένετο (deponent). John the baptizer was in the wilderness and proclaiming a baptism of repentance and forgiveness of sin.

[166] ἐξεπορεύετο (deponent), ἐξομολογούμενοι (middle). And the entire Jewish region and all the Israelites journed out confessing their sins.

[167] ἐγένετο, ἐγένετο (deponent). And there came to be in those days….(that) there was a voice from the heavens saying, “You are my son.”

[168] Check your responses for the indicative with the chart on page 179 of the Textbook. Infinitive is λελύσθαι and the participle is λελυμένους, λελυμένας, λελυμένα.

[169] 1. you have thrown your…2. he having made his….3. I had thrown my…4. you had made your…5. you have thrown your…6. we had released our…7. they had made their….8. to them having released their….

[170] 1. to have left my….2. you have left your…3. they have left their….4. you had shown your….

[171] 5. you have shown your….6. you had left your….7. they had shown their….8. you had shown your…

[172] 1. you had done your…2. you had announced your….3. I have angered my….4. you have guarded your…5. they have sent their….

[173] 1. you will be.

[174] 2. should (s)he, it be. 3. he being about to be. 4. If only you would be. 5. you are. 6. be! 7. (s)he, it will be. 8. If only (s)he, it would be. 9. εἶμεν. 10. ἐσόμεθα. 11. ἔσεσθαι.

[175] 1. be writing for yourself! 2. Let them write for themselves! 3. Let him, her, it stop him/her/it self! 4. listen to yourself! 5. to hear .6. Let them be learning for themselves! 7. learn for yourself! 8. to write/ write for yourself ! 9. to release/release for yourself ! 10. learn for yourself!

[176] 1. If only they would stop the battle. 2. If only they were good. (But they are not). 3. If only they had stopped the battle. (But they didn’t). 4. If only they would leave the city. 5. If only they were leaving the city. (But they are not).

[177] 1. τῶν. 2. ὁ/ἡ, τούς, τάς. 3. ταῖς. 4. τοῦ, τῆς. 5. τῇ. 6. ἡ/ τάς. 7. τὸ. 8. τὸν. 9. τῷ/τῇ. 10. αἱ.

[178] 1e, θᾶττων ἰχθύς. 2c, ἠδέα ἄστη. 3g, βαρεῖα ναῦς. 4a, ἡδεῖας βοός. 5f, ταχείᾳ νήΐ. 6d.βαρειῶν νεῶν. 6b, ἡδίστους υἱεῖς.

[179] a.λύωμαι, λύῃ, λύηται, λυώμεθα, λύησθε, λύωνται· should I be loosing my…; λύσωμαι, λύσῃ, λύσηται, λυσώμεθα, λύσησθε, λύσωνται: should I loose my….

[180] b.λείπωμαι, λείπῃ, λείπηται, λειπώμεθα, λείπησθε, λείπωνται; λίπωμαι, λίπῃ, λίπηται, λιπώμεθα, λίπησθε, λίπωνται.

[181] 1. you are stopping your..; should you be stopping your... ; should (s)he it be stopping. 2. should they write their….3. should you be leaving your…

[182] 4. should I take my….5. should (s)he, it stop his, her…6. should you leave your….7. should I be taking my…8. you will stop your…. ; should you stop your…9. you are leaving your…; should you be leaving your…; should (s)he, it be leaving.

[183] 1. if only I would write my…2. (I said that) they would stop their…3. if only you would be writing your… 4. If only you would be leaving your…5. You might write your….6. If only they would stop their….7. I said that (s)he, it would leave his/her, its….

[184] 1. I am loved. 2. I was being loved. 3. I will be loved. 4. I was loved. 5. I have been loved. 6. I had been loved. 7. Should I be loved? 8. I might be loved. 9. to be loved. 10. being loved. 11. having been loved.

[185] 1. The child is seen by the woman. 2. The papers were written by the students. 3. The money was sent by the mother and the children.

[186] 1. ἐπαύοντο ὑπὸ τοῦ φίλου. 2. παυέσθω πυρί. 3. κρύπτεται τοῖς δώροις. 4. παύοιτο ἂν ὐπὸ τοῦ φίλου.

[187] a. 1. He is being loved by (his) wife and children: Passive, genitive of agent. 2. The battle was being thought to be short: Passive, predicate nominative. 3. The man was pondering these things to himself: Middle, direct object. 4. The man used to love his children: Middle, direct object. 5. He was being killed by a disease: Passive, dative of means. 6. I used to receive these gifts: Deponent, direct object.

b. (Published translations of these two bible passages are divided. Some translators see the underlined forms as middle and some see them as passive because there are no contextual clues to make a definitive choice.) And immediately rising up from the water, he saw the heavens split apart (or splitting themselves apart) and the spirit descending like a dove on him.

[188] 2. And all were journeying to be registered (or to register themselves), each to his own city.

[189] 1. Just as it has been written in the prophet Isiah. 2. And all were being baptized by him. 3. And John had put on himself the hide of a camel. 4. And he was in the desert for forty days being put to the test by Satan.

[190] - I do not know what you mean, Socrates. – Well I will try to explain (it) more clearly. We say something is “being carried” and “carrying” and “being led” and leading” and being seen and seeing (neuter) and you understand all things of such a sort are different from each other in what way they are different. (Remember neuter plurals take a singular verb).

[191] 1. Τhe women are hidden. 2. These things are wonderful/ able to be marveled at. 3. The things said are enigmatic/ expressed in riddles. 4. The child is taught/able to be taught. 5. The gold is able to be found/findable. 6.The brothers are loved/lovable.

[192] 1. ἐπαύθην. 2. ἐτιμήθην. 3. ὡμολογήθην. 4. ἠδικήθην.

[193] 1. (s)he, it was stopped. 2. should (s)he, it be stopped. 3. he, having been released. 4. if only (s)he, it would be released. 5.be stopped! 6. should you be stopped. 7. of them having been released/let them be released. 8. they were released. 9. to be stopped. 10. they (F) having been stopped.

[194] 1. you were buried. 2. should they be struck. 3. to be written. 4. if only they would be struck. 5. be buried! 6. he having been buried. 7. let them be buried!/ of them having been buried. 8.they were written. 9. to the one having been buried. 10. should I be struck.

[195] 1. ἤρχθην. 2. ἐπράχθην.

[196] 3. ἐπέμφην. 4. ἐδόχθην. 5. ἐλέχθην. 6. ὠργίσθην.

[197] 1. be called! 2. to them having been written.

[198] 3. you were led. 4. it was done. 5. she having been thrown. 6. they were honored.

[199] And he was baptized into the Jordan by John. 2. After John was betrayed, Jesus went into Galilee. 3. It happened in the time they were there (that) the days of her giving birth were fulfilled.

[200] In other books, aorist passive deponent principal parts are usually listed in the sixth space, without a notation, although dictionaries indicate when a verb is a passive deponent: βούλομαι, βουλήσομαι, ______, _______, βεβούλημαι, ἐβουλήθην. The spaces indicate that the verb does not form the third and fourth principal parts, which is expected for a deponent verb, since those principal parts form active systems.

[201] 1. The child was able to understand. 2. The child was awakened. 3. They might want these things. 4. We wanted to converse. 5. These gifts were given. 6. Let’s ponder these things. 7. These things were known. 8. I was afraid of these things. 9. I was angered by the general. 10. Ι acquired these things.

[202] 1. The king was received. 2. The king did not admit you.

[203] 1. I have been stopped by the general (dat. of agent with Perfect). 2. We were stopped by the general (gen. of agent). 3. They had been stopped by the rocks (dat. of means). 4. They were stopped by (under the influence of ) the battle. 5. They were stopped by the battle (dat. of means). 6. I have been hidden by the messenger (dat. of agent with Perfect) 7. If only they would be buried by the king. 8. They had been left by the man.

[204] 1. λυθη+σ, λυθήσομαι. 2.λειφθη+σ, λειφθήσομαι. 3. πληγη+σ, πληγήσομαι.

[205] Indicative: I will be stopped.

[206] Optative: (I said that) I would be stopped.

[207] Infinitive: to be about to be stopped.

[208] Participle: being about to be stopped. Genitive: παυθησομένου, παυθσομένης, παυθησομένου

[209] 1. we will be left. 2. (they said that) you would be released. 3. you will be struck. 4. to the woman who will be released (being about to be released). 5. to be about to be struck.

[210] 1. The books will have been written. 2. He will be called Paul (perfect as present: future perfect = future). 3. The soldiers will have been stopped.

[211] a.And while in this way the blankets were ruined, the hidden man was saved. b. Napoleon said that the tailor’s life would come to an end (Future Passive Optative in Secondary Indirect Discourse). c. While his face appeared (aorist passive deponent) white from (under the influence of) fear, his hair appeared white because of the the feathers. d. I, the person having been saved by you (dat. of agent with perfect passive verbs), am Napoleon. I am grateful. One must return a favor. Might a new cloak be sent to you by me (genitive of agent)?

[212]

|Case |Masculine |Feminine |Neuter |

|N |δεικνύς |δεικνῦσα |δεικνύν |

|A |δεικνύντα |δεικνῦσαν |δεικνύν |

|G |δεικνύντος |δεικνύσης |δεικνύντος |

|D |δεικνύντι |δεικνύσῃ |δεικνύντι |

|Case |Masculine |Feminine |Neuter |

|N |δεικνύντες |δεικνῦσαι |δεικνύντα |

|A |δεικνύντας |δεικνύσας |δεικνύντα |

|G |δεικνύντων |δεικνυσῶν |δεικνύντων |

|D |δεικνῦσι(ν) |δεικνύσαις |δεικνῦσι(ν) |

[213] 1. show! 2. (s)he, it was showing.

[214] 3. show your….! 4. you were showing your….5. to them showing. 6. (s)he, it is showing.

7. you are opening. 8. he opening. 9. it destroying. 10. I was destroying. 11. to swear. 12. you are swearing your….. 13. they are destroying. 14. to them (F) destroying. 15. her opening. 16. they were opening.

[215] . 5 ways: should (s)he, it love; you love your…./you are loved; should you love your…./should you be loved. 2. 2 ways: I was loving; they were loving. 3. If only (s)he, it would love. 4. (s)he used to love. 5. 2 ways: you were loving your…/you were loved. 6. 2 ways: we were acting unjustly for our own purposes, we were being wronged. 7. 2 ways: hate your…/be hated! 8. 2 ways: they are calling, to the ones calling. 9. 2 ways: if only you would search your…/ if only you would be searched. 10. 2 ways: you are making/ make!

[216] 1. 6 ways: (s)he, it honors; should (s)he, it honor; you honor your…/you are honored; should you honor your…/should you be honored. 2. honor! 3. 2 ways: if only you would honor your…/ if only you would be honored. 4. 4. ways: I honor; should I honor; honor your…/ be honored!.

[217] 5. 4 ways: (s)he, it honors her, his, its…./(s)he, it is honored; should (s)he, it honor her, his, its…./should (s)he, it be honored. 6. 4 ways: we honor our…./we are honored; should we honor our…/should we be honored. 7. 2 ways: if only we would honor our…/if only we would be honored. 8. 2 ways: I was laughing; they were laughing. 9. we were shouting. 10. you were seeing. 11. to be silent. 12. he, it asking.

[218] 1 6 ways: (s)he, it makes clear; should (s)he, it make clear; you make clear your…./you are made clear; should you make clear your…should you be made clear. 2. make clear! 3. make clear your…/be made clear!

[219] 4. you make clear; should you make clear. 5. Let him, her, it make clear! 6. you free your…./you are freed; free your…/ be freed. 7. set straight your…be set straight. 8. they set straight/ to them setting straight. 9. to set free, it setting free. 10. if only you would make clear your…/if only you would be made clear. 11. if only (s)he, it would make clear.

[220] 1. I was going/ I was. 2. be!/ go!

[221] 3. we were/ we were going. 4. if only they would go/ if only they would be. 5. should you be/ (s)he, it was going. 6. you were going/ you were. 7. to be/to go/ to be about to go. 8. be!, you are/ go!, you are going, you will go. 9. (s)he, it was going/I was, (s)he, it was.10. they were going/they were.

[222] 1. him speaking. 2. you were speaking. 3. (s)he, it was speaking, ALSO (s)he, it spoke. 4. you speak, should you speak. 5. if only (s)he, it would speak. 6. to them speaking. 7. they speak. 8. speak! (the indicative is enclitic). 9. to speak. 10 should I speak.

[223] 1. let them step!/ of them having stepped. 2. you were by nature. 3. if only we would stand. 4. they rejoiced. 5. know!/ should you know. 6. they (F) having stepped. 7. to know. 8. rejoice! / should you rejoice. 9. should (s)he, it stand. 10. to them having stepped. 11. (s)he, it sank. 12. they (F) knowing. 13. (s)he, it knew. 14. they stood. 15. If only (s)he, it would step.

[224] 1. The children must be saved by you = you must save the children. 2. The city must be crossed by the soldiers = the soldiers have to/ must cross the city. 3. One must cross the rivers/ There must be a crossing of the rivers. 4. One must give the cup.

[225] 1. you are putting, put! 2. if only we would put (once). 3. should you be putting. 4. should they put (once). 5. put! 6. to them putting. 7. let them put! of them having put. 8. put! (continuous). 9. (s)he, it put. 10. they are putting. 11. (s)he, it was putting.

[226] 1. should (s)he, it put / should you put your… 2. put your….! 3. you were putting your….4. you have put. 5. put your…! 6. they were putting their…/they were being put. 7. having put your…8. (s)he, it was put (aorist passive). 9. should (s)he, it put/should you put your…/should you be put. 10. (s)he, it had put.

[227] 1. they (F) having put together. 2. it having been done. 3. if only (s)he, it would be saved. 4. should I put differently/ change. 5. of him, it having been judged. 6. he having put forth/ proposed. 7. if only I would put down.

[228] 1. you were releasing. 2. you released. 3. I was releasing. 4. we are releasing/ we were releasing. 5. if only I would be releasing. 6. to be releasing. 7. to throw away (once). 8. he having relaxed. 9. (s)he, it releases. 10. send on! yield! (once). 11. they allowed/forgave. 12. they were releasing. 13. send forth! 14. we allowed/ permitted AND if only we would allow/permit.

[229] 1. we are releasing our…we are being released; we were releasing our…we were being released. 2. should (s)he, it release; should you release your….should you be released. 3. you were releasing your…you were being released/ release your…! be released!. 4. throw away your…5. releasing your…, being released. 6. if only you would release your…if only you would be released.

[230] 1. if only (s)he, it would have stood = if only (s)he, it would be standing. 2. if only (s)he, it would stand (once). 3. if only (s)he, it would be setting up. 4. Pres: you are setting up your…/you are being set up/ you are standing/ Imperfect: you were setting up your…/you were being set up/ you were standing/ Imperative: set up your…!/ be set up!/ stand.

[231] 5. you had stood= you were standing. 6. of them having stood/ let them stand. 7. Stand (be in the state of having stood = standing). 8. Stand (once). 9. you were setting up your…you were being set up/ you were standing/ set up your!/ be set up! stand!. 10. they have stood = they are standing. 11. (s)he, it was setting up, set up! 12. (s)he, it stood (once). 13. should (s)he, it set up; should you set up your…/ should you be set up/ should you stand. 14. they (F) having stood = they standing. 15. to him, it setting up. 16. to him, it having stood. 17. to have stood = to be standing.

[232] 1. be giving! 2. should (s)he, it give, should you give your …(once). 3. to give your…(once). 4. they (M) giving. 5. if only I would give my….(once). 6. give! (once). 7. they gave.

................
................

In order to avoid copyright disputes, this page is only a partial summary.

To fulfill the demand for quickly locating and searching documents.

It is intelligent file search solution for home and business.

Literature Lottery

To fulfill the demand for quickly locating and searching documents.

Related download

Related searches